(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Bulletin, General Catalog"

i&S 



Mi 



i 



Appalachian State University 




'<■:■■■<: 



APPALACHIAN STATE UNIVERSITY 
IS AN ACCREDITED MEMBER OF 

The Southern Association of Colleges and 
Secondary Schools 

The National Council for Accreditation of 
Teacher Education 

The American Association of Colleges for 
Teacher Education 

The American Council on Education 

The Council of Graduate Schools in the United States 

The North Carolina Association of Colleges and 
Universities 

The National Association of Schools of Music 

The American Association of University Women 

The National Association of Business 

Teacher Education 

The American Association of State Colleges and 
Universities 



BULLETIN OF 



APPALACHIAN STATE UNIVERSITY 



Announcements for 

1971-1972 




.> %& %# <d/ 



Boone, North Carolina 
28607 



Volume LXIX Number 3 September, 1970 

December, 1970 

March, 1971 

June, 1971 

Published quarterly by Appalachian State University. Entered as second-class 
matter at the Post Office at Boone, North Carolina, under the Act of 
Congress, August 24, 1912. Postage has been paid at Boone, North Carolina. 
Address corrections to the Office of Academic Affairs, Appalachian State 
University, Boone, North Carolina 28607. 



Sept. 


6 


Sept. 


6 


Sept. 


6 


Sept. 


7 


Sept. 


8-9 


Sept. 


10 


Sept. 


11 


Sept. 


15 


Sept. 


18 


Sept. 


21 


Oct. 


11-15 


Oct. 


23 


Nov. 


2 



UNIVERSITY CALENDAR FOR 1971-1972 

FALL QUARTER 1971 

Monday, 6:00 p.m. — Official opening, first faculty meeting. 
Monday, 8:00 a.m. — Dormitories open. 
Monday, 12:00 Noon — First meal in cafeteria. 
Tuesday, 8:00 a.m. — Orientation of new faculty and depart- 
mental meetings. 

Wednesday and Thursday — Registration. 
Friday, 8:00 a.m. — Classes begin. 
Saturday — Attend Thursday classes. 
Wednesday — Last day to add a class. 

Saturday — Registration and first class meeting of Saturday 
classes. 

Tuesday, 7:30 p.m. — Meeting of students expecting to do stu- 
dent teaching winter quarter, Chapell Wilson Auditorium. 
Mid-term week. 
Saturday — Homecoming. 

Tuesday, 7:30 p.m. — Meeting of students (last name begin- 
ning with letters "A" through "H") expecting to do student 
teaching 1972-73, Chapell Wilson Hall. 

Nov. 3 Wednesday, 7:30 p.m. — Meeting of students (last name be- 

ginning with letters "I" through "Q") expecting to do student 
teaching 1972-73, Chapell Wilson Hall. 

Nov. 4 Thursday, 7:30 p.m. — Meeting of students (last name begin- 

ning with letters "R" though "Z") expecting to do student 
teaching 1972-73, Chapell Wilson Hall. 
Wednesday — Classes end. 

Thursday-Wednesday noon — Final Examinations. 
Thanksgiving Holiday and Quarter break. 

WINTER QUARTER 1971-1972 

Monday-Tuesday — Registration. 

Wednesday — Classes begin. 

Saturday — Registration and first class meeting for Saturday 

classes. 

Tuesday — Last day to add a class. 

Tuesday, 7:30 p.m. — Meeting of students expecting to do student 

teaching spring quarter, Chapell Wilson Auditorium. 

Saturday, 12:00 Noon — Christmas Holiday begins. 

Monday, 8:00 a.m. — Classes resume. 

Mid-term week. 

Tuesday — Classes end. 

Wednesday-Tuesday, noon — Final examinations. 

Wednesday-Sunday — Quarter Break. 

SPRING QUARTER 1972 

Monday-Tuesday — Registration. 

Wednesday — Classes begin. 

Saturday — Registration and first class meeting for Saturday 

classes. 

Tuesday — Last day to add a class. 

Tuesday, 7:30 p.m. — Meeting of students expecting to do student 

teaching fall quarter, Chapell Wilson Auditorium. 

Thursday, 6:00 p.m. — Easter Holiday begins. 

Tuesday, 8:00 a.m. — Classes resume. 

Mid-term week. 

Friday — Classes end. 

Monday-Thursday — Final examinations. 

Tuesday, 10:00 a.m. — Commencement. 

SUMMER QUARTER 1972 

June 7 June 7-August 15 — Summer school. 

ii 



Nov. 


17 


Nov. 


18-24 


Nov. 


24-28 


Nov. 


29-30 


Dec. 


1 


Dec. 


4 


Dec. 


7 


Dec. 


14 


Dec. 


18 


Jan. 


3 


Jan. 


17-21 


Feb. 


22 


Feb. 


23-29 


Mar. 


1-5 


Mar. 


6-7 


Mar. 


8 


Mar. 


11 


Mar. 


14 


Mar. 


21 


Mar. 


30 


Apr. 


4 


Apr. 


10-14 


May 


19 


May 


22-25 


May 


30 





CALEN DAR 


FOR 1971 




JANUARY 

S M T W T F S 
1 2 

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 
31 


APRIL 

S M T W T F S 
1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 910 
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 
25 26 27 28 29 30 


JULY 

S M T W T F S 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 910 

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 


OCTOBER 

S M T W T F S 

1 2 
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 
31 


FEBRUARY 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 

28 


MAY 

S M T W T F S 

1 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 

30 31 


AUGUST 

S Nl T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 6 7 

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 

29 30 31 


NOVEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 

28 29 30 


MARCH 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 

28 29 30 31 


JUNE 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

27 28 29 30 


SEPTEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 

5 6 7 8 91011 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

26 27 28 29 30 


DECEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 

5 6 7 8 91011 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

26 27 28 29 30 31 






CALEN DAR 


FOR 1972 




JANUARY 

S M T W T F S 
1 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 

30 31 


APRIL 

S M T W T F S 

1 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 

30 


JULY 

S M T W T F S 

1 

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 

30 31 


OCTOBER 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 6 7 

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 

22 23 24 25 26 27 28 

29 30 31 


FEBRUARY 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

27 28 29 


MAY 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 

28 29 30 31 


AUGUST 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 5 

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

20 21 22 23 24 25 26 

27 28 29 30 31 


NOVEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 

5 6 7 8 91011 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

26 27 28 29 30 


MARCH 

S M T W T F S 

12 3 4 

5 6 7 8 91011 

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 

26 27 28 29 30 31 


JUNE 

S M T W T F S 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 7 8 910 

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

25 26 27 28 29 30 


SEPTEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

1 2 

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 


DECEMBER 

S M T W T F S 

1 2 
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 
31 



III 



APPALACHIAN STATE UNIVERSITY 
CORRESPONDENCE DIRECTORY 

To facilitate prompt attention, inquiries should be directed to the following: 

ADMISSIONS 

Clarence H. Gilstrap, Director of Admissions 

ALUMNI AFFAIRS 

Robert E. Snead, Director of Alumni Affairs 

ANNUITIES AND GIFTS, PUBLIC RELATIONS 
Robert T. Allen, Jr., Director of Public Affairs 

EMPLOYMENT OF STUDENTS, STUDENT LOANS, SCHOLARSHIPS, 
VETERANS AFFAIRS 

Steve R. Gabriel, Director of Financial Aid 

FACULTY APPOINTMENTS AND INSTRUCTION 

Paul Sanders, Vice President for Academic Affairs 

GRADUATE ADMISSIONS, CURRICULUM, AND REQUIREMENTS 

Cratis D. Williams, Dean of Graduate School 

HOUSING 

Richard Tickle, Director of Housing 

INSTITUTIONAL RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT 

Robert E. Reiman, Director of Institutional Research and Development 

LIBRARY 

Al Corum, Dean of Learning Resources 

PLACEMENT 

Robert L. Randall, Director of Placement 

RECORDS, CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS, CURRICULUM RE- 
QUIREMENTS, AND ALL TRANSCRIPTS 
W. Dean Meredith, Registrar 

STUDENT WELFARE 

Braxton Harris, Dean of Student Affairs 

UNIVERSITY POLICY 
Herbert Wey, President 



The University telephone number is 264-8871, area code 704. 



IV 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 

THE UNIVERSITY 1 

ADMISSIONS 7 

EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 13 

STUDENT LIFE 30 

THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 44 

THE GENERAL COLLEGE 58 

HONORS PROGRAM 65 

THE COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES 67 

THE COLLEGE OF BUSINESS 149 

THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 163 

THE COLLEGE OF FINE AND APPLIED ARTS 197 

THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 258 

PERSONNEL 

BOARD OF TRUSTEES 297 

BOARD OF VISITORS 297 

ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS 298 

THE FACULTY 299 

FACULTY EMERITI 317 



The University 



LOCATION 



Appalachian State University is a part of the system of public 
higher education of the State of North Carolina. It is located at 
Boone, county seat of Watauga County, North Carolina, on the 
crest of the Blue Ridge Mountains at an elevation of 3,333 feet, 
the highest elevation of any four-year college east of the Mississippi 
River. Situated in an area of great natural beauty, near the Blue 
Ridge Parkway which connects the Shenandoah and the Smoky 
Mountain National Parks, Boone is easily accessible over United 
States Highways 221, 321, and 421, which intersect in and lead out 
from the town. 

PURPOSE 

Within the framework established by the North Carolina State 
Board of Higher Education, Appalachian State University is dedi- 
cated to the total development of its constituency through instruc- 
tion, research, and service. 

In pursuit of this purpose, Appalachian pledges itself: 

To nurture an intellectual climate in which truth is sought and 
respected. 

To provide a liberal education for all its students. 

To offer, within the scope of its programs, pre-professional and 
professional education to those students who desire it. 

To maintain a faculty dedicated to teaching and scholarship. 

To advance the frontiers of knowledge through research. 

To be cognizant of new knowledge and prepared to meet the 
challenge of new ideas. 

To expand cultural horizons and develop appreciation of ethical 
and aesthetic values. 

To make its resources available to the people within its sphere 
of influence. 

To serve as a force for social improvement. 

To cooperate with all institutions and agencies which are dedicated 
to the betterment of mankind. 



£a the university 
HISTORY 

Appalachian's antecedent, Watauga Academy, was created by 
its founders, B. B. and D. D. Dougherty, to bring educational 
opportunity to the people of North Carolina. Appalachian Training 
School, created by the General Assembly of 1903, was conceived 
and founded to prepare teachers for an expanding public school 
system, and especially to prepare better teachers for the public 
schools of the isolated section of the northwestern part of the state. 
Within a little more than twenty years Appalachian Training School 
became Appalachian State Normal School and began its involve- 
ment in the total complex program of public education. 

As the functions of the public schools changed, with the emer- 
gence of new technologies, and with the rising predominance of 
industry over agriculture, public school education became more 
diversified in North Carolina. To help meet the demand for new 
and different kinds of teachers for the region, Appalachian evolved 
from Normal School to Teachers College. The change took place 
officially in 1929, and the institution began to expand its sphere of 
influence into the more populous Piedmont section of the state. 
During the early 1940's, graduate education for teachers was 
added to the program, and in 1965, Appalachian was authorized 
to begin the development of the Sixth-year Program for school 
administrators. At the same time the institution abandoned its 
long-held single-purpose concept and developed programs leading 
to degrees for those not wishing to prepare for teaching. 

The 1967 General Assembly of North Carolina designated Appala- 
chian a regional university and changed its name to Appalachian 
State University. This change brought with it additional responsi- 
bilities. The 1969 General Assembly enunciated these responsibilities 
as follows: 

"The regional universities shall provide undergraduate and gradu- 
ate instruction in the liberal arts, fine arts, and sciences, and in the 
learned professions, including teaching, these being defined as those 
professions which rest upon advanced knowledge in the liberal arts 
and sciences; and said regional universities shall provide for research 
in the liberal arts and sciences, pure and applied. The regional 
universities shall provide other undergraduate and graduate pro- 
grams of instruction as are deemed necessary to meet the needs of 
their constituencies and of the State. Regional universities insofar 



THE UNIVERSITY O 

as possible shall extend their educational activities to all persons of 
the State who are unable to avail themselves of their advantages as 
resident students by means of extension courses, by lectures, and by 
such other means and methods as may seem to the boards of trustees 
and administrative officers as most effective." 

CAMPUS 

The central campus of Appalachian State University covers 
60 acres of the Blue Ridge Mountains. In addition, the University 
owns 330 acres of land, not immediately adjacent to the central 
campus, which is being considered for expansion of its services. 
Almost all of the buildings on the central campus are new or have 
been recently renovated. These modern facilities set against the 
backdrop of Rich Mountain and Howard's Knob give Appalachian 
a physical plant of superior utility and beauty. 

Organization 

The functional organization of the University comprises four 
administrative divisions under the general direction of the President 
and the faculty. The divisions of Business Affairs and Public Affairs 
support and facilitate operations of the other divisions. The division 
of Student Affairs includes the Office of the Dean of Student Affairs, 
the Offices of the Deans of Men and Women, the Office of Student 
Financial Aid, the Student Housing Office, the Office of Placement 
Services, and the University Health Services. 

For purposes of instruction, the division of Academic Affairs is 
made up of the General College, the College of Arts and Sciences, 
the College of Business, the College of Education, the College of 
Fine and Applied Arts, and the Graduate School. It also includes 
the Summer Session, the Library, the Extension Division, the Office 
of the Registrar, the Office of Admissions, and certain auxiliary 
agencies such as the Computer Center and the Audiovisual Center 
which contribute to the instructional and research programs adminis- 
tered by the division of Academic Affairs. 

THE GENERAL COLLEGE provides, during the freshman and 
sophomore years, guidance and instruction in the general education 
areas required of all students. In addition, the student in the 
General College may take courses required by the particular college 
from which he plans to graduate. All transfer students below the 



t: the university 

junior level are admitted to the General College. A transfer student 
who does not satisfy the conditions for admission to the upper 
level college from which he plans to graduate may be admitted to 
the General College. 

THE COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES provides instruc- 
tion through the Departments of Biology, Chemistry, English, 
Foreign Languages, Geography and Geology, History, Mathematics, 
Philosophy and Religion, Physics, Political Science, Psychology, 
and Sociology and Anthropology. Each of these departments offers 
a major leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree. The Departments of 
Biology, Chemistry, English, Foreign Languages, History, Mathe- 
matics, and Physics offer majors leading to the Bachelor of Science 
degree with teacher certification in cooperation with the College 
of Education. It is also possible for a student to earn the Bachelor 
of Science degree with teacher certification in science with con- 
centration in biology, chemistry, earth science, or physics. A 
student may earn the Bachelor of Science degree with teacher 
certification in social science with concentration in geography, 
political science, or sociology and anthropology. 

THE COLLEGE OF BUSINESS was established July 1, 1970. 
During the 1970-71 academic year the faculty of this college is en- 
gaged in a study to determine the appropriate organizational struc- 
ture for the college. Opportunity is provided to earn the degree of 
Bachelor of Science in Business Administration with concentration 
in accounting, economics, finance, management, and marketing. The 
Bachelor of Arts degree with a major in economics is available. In 
cooperation with the College of Education majors are offered leading 
to the Bachelor of Science degree with teacher certification in com- 
prehensive or basic business. It is also possible to concentrate in 
economics in the social science major for the Bachelor of Science 
degree with teacher certification. 

THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION offers instruction through 
the Departments of Teacher Education; Special Programs; Library 
Science; and Administration, Supervision and Higher Education. 
The college has primary responsibility for the preparation of 
young men and women as teachers, librarians, supervisors, and 
administrators for the public schools of North Carolina. The College 
of Education offers the Bachelor of Science degree with teacher 
certification in the fields of elementary education, library science, 



THE UNIVERSITY fj 

and special education in the area of mental retardation. The Bachelor 
of Science degree with teacher certification may be earned in each of 
the following fields: art; biology; chemistry; economics and business; 
English; French; health and physical education; history; home 
economics education; industrial arts; mathematics; music; physics; 
science with concentration in biology, chemistry, earth science, or 
physics; social science with concentration in geography, political 
science, sociology and anthropology, or economics; Spanish; speech; 
and special education in the area of speech and hearing by taking a 
major in the College of Arts and Sciences or the College of Fine 
and Applied Arts. The College of Education has the responsibility 
for administering the program leading to the Bachelor of Technology 
degree. This program is for selected graduates of technical institutes 
and community colleges in business and engineering technology. It 
does not lead to teacher certification. 

THE COLLEGE OF FINE AND APPLIED ARTS offers instruc- 
tion through the Departments of Art, Health and Physical Education, 
Home Economics, Industrial Arts, Military Science, Music, and 
Speech. The College of Fine and Applied Arts offers the Bachelor 
of Arts degree with majors in art, music, and speech. It offers the 
Bachelor of Science degree without teacher certification with majors 
in health and physical education, home economics in business, in- 
dustrial arts, and music: piano pedagogy. In cooperation with the 
College of Education, the degree of Bachelor of Science with teacher 
certification in art, health and physical education, home economics 
education, industrial arts, music, social science with concentration 
in speech, and special education in the area of speech and hearing is 
offered. 

THE GRADUATE SCHOOL is organized to provide facilities 
for advanced study leading to the Master of Arts degree, the 
Master of Science degree, the advanced certificate for the sixth-year 
program for school administrators, the Specialist in Education degree, 
and the Specialist in Science degree. The Master of Arts degree 
may be earned with majors in audiovisual education, biology, chem- 
istry, counseling, economics and business, English, elementary edu- 
cation, foreign languages, industrial arts, library science, mathe- 
matics, music, physical education, reading, educational administra- 
tion and supervision, social science, special education, education of 



6 



THE UNIVERSITY 



the deaf, history, geography, general psychology, clinical psychology, 
and political science. The Master of Science degree may be earned 
in chemistry and biology. The Specialist in Education degree is 
offered in educational leadership, elementary education, and higher 
education. The Specialist in Science degree may be earned in biology. 

ENROLLMENT, FALL QUARTER, 1970 

Freshmen 1,847 

Sophomores 1,416 

Juniors 1,403 

Seniors 1,313 

Special 74 

Graduates 612 

Extension 423 

Total Number Enrolled 7,088 

DEGREES CONFERRED, 1970 

June 1970 August 1970 

Bachelor of Arts 62 20 

Bachelor of Science 720 241 

Bachelor of Science in 

Business Administration 75 18 

Master of Arts 88 302 

Total Number of Degrees Conferred 945 581 



Admissions 

Applicants are admitted whose preparation, ability, interest, char- 
acter, and general fitness indicate that they can do successful work. 
Applicants must submit their social security number and, if appli- 
cable, their selective service number and number and address of their 
local draft board. Appalachian admits students at the beginning of 
the fall, winter, spring, summer quarter, or either session of summer 
school. Early application is advisable for any student since these 
applications are considered first. 

Out-of-state applicants must meet the same admissions criteria as 
required of North Carolina residents. 

All unmarried freshmen, except for bona fide residents of Boone 
and vicinity, are required to live in university residence halls. Since 
space is limited, this is a factor which must be considered in fresh- 
man admissions. 

All correspondence concerning admissions to the University should 
be addressed to the Director of Admissions, Appalachian State Uni- 
versity, Boone, North Carolina, 28607. 

FRESHMAN STUDENTS 

Applicants will be considered for admission to the freshman class 
upon meeting the requirements specified below. Those students who 
have demonstrated the greatest probability of success will be given 
priority in the selection of the freshman class. (Please consult a 
secondary school Guidance Counselor concerning acceptance dates.) 
Requirements are as follows: 

1. Graduation from an accredited high school and rank in the upper 
seventy-five percent of their graduating class. If the applicant is 
not a high school graduate, a high school equivalency certificate 
is required. 

2. Satisfactory recommendation by the high school principal and/or 
guidance counselor. 

3. Presentation of at least two units of high school mathematics 
(2 units of algebra or 1 unit each of algebra and geometry). 



8 



ADMISSIONS 



4. Satisfactory scores on the College Entrance Examination Board 
Scholastic Aptitude Test. 

This test is required of every applicant for freshman admission 
and is given in November, December, January, March, May, and 
July. End-of- junior year (in high school) scores are used to de- 
termine eligibility for freshman admission when reported with 
early applications. It is recommended that the test be taken at 
the end of the junior year of high school and repeated early in 
the senior year of high school. 

A student wishing to take this test should procure an application 
form from his secondary school or should write directly to the 
College Entrance Examination Board, Box 592, Princeton, New 
Jersey, for the Bulletin of Information, which includes an appli- 
cation form and is available without charge. The Bulletin lists 
test centers, and gives complete information concerning tests. 

The student must make his own arrangements well in advance of 
a selected testing date so that his application is received in Prince- 
ton before the deadline for filing applications. 

5. A satisfactory health record. The complete medical history of 
each applicant must be submitted on the medical form supplied 
by the Admissions Office after approval has been given. 

NOTE: Prospective students who have attended an accredited col- 
lege but who have earned less than 45 quarter hours of 
credit, must meet both freshman and transfer admission re- 
quirements. This means that in addition to following proce- 
dures for freshmen they must present a transcript showing 
an overall C average on all college course work. In addition, 
such applicants must be eligible to return to the institution 
last attended. 

TRANSFER STUDENTS 

1. Students seeking to transfer from other colleges or universities 
must furnish official transcripts of records from all institutions 
attended. These transcripts must show eligibility to return to the 
institution last attended and an overall 2.0 or C average on all 
course work. Courses satisfactorily completed in other accredited 
institutions are evaluated in terms of the curriculum selected at 
Appalachian. 



ADMISSIONS 



9 



2. Junior college graduates must meet the scholastic requirement as 
listed above. 

3. Transfer applicants must meet the same proficiency tests in 
reading, speech, and written English as required of regular stu- 
dents at Appalachian. 

4. Transfer applicants must submit a satisfactory health record. 
The complete medical history of each applicant must be sub- 
mitted on the medical form supplied by the Admissions Office 
after approval has been given. 

NOTE: Prospective transfer students with less than sophomore 
standing (45 quarter hours of earned credit), must meet 
all entrance requirements for freshmen, including satis- 
factory scores on the Scholastic Aptitude Test. This is in 
addition to meeting all transfer admission requirements. 

SPECIAL STUDENTS 

1. Applicants who are mature and who may not meet admission 
requirements, but who have a satisfactory record of experience 
and education, may be admitted to courses which they may be 
able to pursue with profit. 

2. Such applicants may be required to present evidence of having 
earned a college degree or evidence of the need for specific 
courses. Applicants who are regularly enrolled students at other 
institutions may be admitted as "visiting" students provided the 
appropriate official at their institution authorizes their attendance 
at Appalachian, approves the course work selected, indicates the 
individual is in good standing at that institution, and otherwise 
approves the transfer of credits taken at Appalachian back to 
that institution for degree purposes. At the end of one quarter's 
work, visiting students must transfer to Appalachian or withdraw 
from the University. 

3. Special students who desire to become candidates for a degree 
from Appalachian must satisfy appropriate admission require- 
ments. 

GRADUATE STUDENTS 

For admission and graduation requirements, see the section in this 
catalog on Graduate School. 



10 



ADMISSIONS 
ADMISSION OF AUDITORS 

1. Students enrolled at the University or students admitted with 
satisfactory records of experience and education may enroll 
for specific courses as auditors. 

2. Students who audit courses must register in the Registrar's Office, 
pay regular fees, be regular in attendance, but will not receive 
grades or credit. 

PROCEDURE 

Students who wish to be considered for admission to the University 
as freshmen will obtain from the office of the Director of Admissions 
an application packet, consisting of an application form, high school 
transcript and principal's recommendation form, and instructions for 
completing and submitting these forms. 

All application forms are to be accompanied by an application fee 
of $10.00 which is not refundable. 

Applicants should request the Educational Testing Service to send 
results of the Scholastic Aptitude Test to the Director of Admissions. 

Students who desire to transfer to Appalachian from another 
college or university will obtain from the office of the Director of 
Admissions an application packet consisting of an application form, 
dean of men or dean of women recommendation form, and instruc- 
tions for completing and submitting these forms. 

After all papers have been filed and evaluated, a statement of 
eligibility for admission or a statement of shortages to be removed 
before admission can be approved will be sent to the applicant. 

Instructions for reserving residence hall space will be included in 
the letter of approval sent to each qualified applicant. Room assign- 
ments are made by the Housing Office. 

ADVANCED PLACEMENT PROGRAM 

Appalachian participates in the Advanced Placement Program of 
the College Entrance Examination Board. Freshmen who have 
demonstrated their achievement on specific College Entrance Exami- 
nation Board Advanced Placement Tests may have the results sub- 
mitted to the University for consideration with regard to placement 



ADMISSIONS 



11 



in advanced courses and for college credit. Freshman applicants are 
encouraged to take these tests. Freshmen may also qualify for ad- 
vanced placement and credit by being invited (selection is by the 
Director of Admissions) to take departmental tests in their areas 
of extensive specialization during freshman orientation. Based upon 
these test results, the amount and nature of the credit granted is 
determined by the Committee on Academic Policies and Procedures 
and the pertinent department of instruction. 

READMISSION 

Students who have withdrawn in good standing from the Univer- 
sity or who have been suspended for academic deficiencies, or for 
other reasons should submit their requests for readmission to the 
dean of the college in which they are to be enrolled. Consideration 
of requests for readmission of students who have been suspended 
for any reason will be made in light of the applicant's ability, evi- 
dence of growth and maturity, good citizenship record, credits earned 
at another institution, and time elapsed since leaving Appalachian. 

INFORMATION FOR VETERANS 

The University is approved for providing training under Public 
Law 358, G. I. Bill effective June 1966; Public Law 634, the chil- 
dren of deceased or disabled veterans; and Public Law 894, for dis- 
abled veterans. APPROVAL FROM THE VETERANS ADMIN- 
ISTRATION SHOULD BE RECEIVED BY THE STUDENT BE- 
FORE ENTERING SCHOOL. 

Students may contact the Veterans Administration Regional Office, 
301 North Main Street, Winston-Salem, North Carolina for informa- 
tion and necessary forms. 

Children of disabled or deceased veterans may receive assistance 
in payment of tuition, room, meals and other university fees. For 
information regarding eligibility and application forms students 
should write to the North Carolina Veterans Commission, Raleigh, 
North Carolina. 

FOREIGN STUDENT ADMISSION 

A student wishing to apply for undergraduate admission as a 
foreign student should first make arrangements through the American 



12 



ADMISSIONS 



Consulate in his own country to take the Test of English as a Foreign 
Language (TOEFL Test). No student can be approved (even if he 
meets other requirements) until a satisfactory score is received. 

Funds for financial assistance to foreign students are limited. 
Therefore, arrangements for all expenses should be made before a 
student leaves his own country. All foreign students must have health 
insurance before they can be admitted. 




Expenses and Financial Aid 



EXPENSES 



Fees are charged by the quarter and are due and payable in 
advance at the beginning of each quarter. Any special arrangement 
for the payment of expenses must be made at the time of registration 
with the Controller's Office. 

Because of continued increases in costs, it is not possible to state 
accurately what the fees for the 1971-72 academic year will be. It is 
estimated that the student who is a North Carolina resident will incur 
necessary minimum expenses of approximately $1,200.00 for room, 
meals, tuition and fees during the academic year. For reference, the 
fees payable each quarter for undergraduates during the 1970-71 
academic year are given below. 

FEES PAYABLE EACH QUARTER FOR UNDERGRADUATES 





Dormitory 
Students 


Day 
Students 


Tuition and fees for residents of 
North Carolina 


$144.71 


$144.71 


Tuition and fees for non-residents of 
North Carolina 


$394.71 


$394.71 


Board, room, and laundry 
Men 
Women 


$244.00 
$239.00 


-0- 
-0- 



Dormitory breakage and key deposit (subject to refund) $30.00. 

The University reserves the right to make changes in these charges 
when circumstances require. 

For expenses of graduate students, see page 293. 

The application for admission must be accompanied by an 
application fee of $10.00, which is not deductible or refundable. 

A fee of $116.00 for students entering Appalachian for the first 
time or $50.00 for a student already enrolled must accompany the 



14 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



application for a room reservation. The room reservation fee is 
deductible from the room rent charge at the opening of the first 
quarter of residence. 

All students living in university dormitories are required to 
purchase the minimum number of meal tickets at the time of 
registration. Mealbooks are redeemable only during the academic 
year in which they are issued. The cost of meals may vary con- 
siderably according to individual needs and desires. The cafeteria 
is on the main campus and meals are available at moderate prices, 
for cash payment or mealbook tickets. 

With the approval of its governing bodies, the University reserves 
the right to change these fees any time that it becomes necessary. 

Day Students 

Regular day students pay all regular expenses except room rent, 
cafeteria meals, laundry and dry cleaning. 

Foreign Students 

Foreign students are considered out-of-state students and, there- 
fore, have to pay the out-of-state rate unless they have a graduate 
assistantship. 

Part-time Students 

Students who register for less than full load pay the following 
charges: 

One through three hours, $30.00; four through six hours, $43.00; 
more than six hours, full charges. 

Out-of-State Students 

The following statement governs a student's classification as a 
resident or nonresident of North Carolina with respect to tuition 
payment. 

1. General: The tuition charge for legal residents of North Carolina 
is less than for nonresidents. To qualify for in-state tuition, a 
legal resident must have maintained his domicile in North 
Carolina for at least the six months preceding the date of 
first enrollment or re-enrollment in an institution of higher 
education in this state. 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



15 



2. Minors: The legal residence of a person under twenty-one 
years of age at the time of his first enrollment in an institution 
of higher education in this state is that of his parents, surviving 
parent, or legal guardian. In cases where parents are divorced 
or legally separated, the legal residence of the father will 
control unless custody of the minor has been awarded by court 
order to the mother or to a legal guardian other than a parent. 
No claim of residence in North Carolina based upon residence 
of a guardian in North Carolina will be considered if either 
parent is living unless the action of the court appointing the 
guardian antedates the student's first enrollment in a North 
Carolina institution of higher education by at least twelve 
months. 

A minor student whose parents move their legal residence 
from North Carolina to a location outside of the state shall be 
considered to be a nonresident after six months from the date of 
removal from the state. 

For the purpose of determining residence requirements under 
these rules, a person will be considered a minor until he has 
reached his twenty-first birthday. Married minors, however, are 
entitled to establish and maintain their residence in the same 
manner as adults. Attendance at an institution of higher edu- 
cation as a student cannot be counted as fulfilling the six-month 
domicile requirement. 

3. Adults: A person twenty-one years of age or older is eligible 
for in-state tuition if he has maintained continuous domicile in 
North Carolina for the six months next preceding the date of 
enrollment or re-enrollment, exclusive of any time spent in 
attendance at any institution of higher education. An in-state 
student reaching the age of twenty-one is not required to 
reestablish residence provided that he maintains his domicile 
in North Carolina. 

4. Married Students: The legal residence of a wife follows that of 
her husband, except that a woman currently enrolled as an 
in-state student in an institution of higher education may 
continue as a resident even though she marries a nonresident. 
If the husband is a nonresident and separation or divorce occurs, 
the woman may qualify for in-state tuition after establishing 



16 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



her domicile in North Carolina for at least six months under 
the same conditions as she could if she were single. 

5. Military Personnel: No person shall be presumed to have gained 
or lost in-state residence status in North Carolina while serving 
in the Armed Forces. However, a member of the Armed Forces 
may obtain in-state residence status for himself, his spouse, or 
his children after maintaining his domicile in North Carolina 
for at least six months next preceding his or their enrollment 
or re-enrollment in an institution of higher education in this 
state. 

6. Aliens: Aliens lawfully admitted to the United States for 
permanent residence may establish North Carolina residence 
in the same manner as any other nonresident. 

7. Property and Taxes: Ownership of property in or payment of 
taxes to the State of North Carolina apart from legal residence 
will not qualify one for the in-state tuition rate. 

8. Change of Status: The residence status of any student is 
determined as of the time of his first enrollment in an institution 
of higher education in North Carolina and may not thereafter 
be changed except; (a) in the case of a nonresident student 
at the time of his first enrollment who, or if a minor his parents, 
has subsequently maintained a legal residence in North Carolina 
for at least six months, and (b) in the case of a resident who 
has abandoned his legal residence in North Carolina for a 
minimum period of six months. In either case, the appropriate 
tuition rate will become effective at the beginning of the term 
following the six-month period. 

9. Responsibility of Student: Any student or prospective student 
in doubt concerning his residence status must bear the responsi- 
bility for securing a ruling by stating his case in writing to the 
admissions officer. The student who, due to subsequent events, 
becomes eligible for a change in classification, whether from 
out-of-state to in-state or the reverse, has the responsibility of 
immediately informing the Director of Business Affairs and 
Registrar of his circumstances in writing. Failure to give com- 
plete and correct information regarding residence constitutes 
grounds for disciplinary action. 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 1/ 

Student Welfare and Activities 

This fee supports such services and activities as health care, 
student government, concerts and lectures, class dues, popular 
programs, forensics, dramatics, intramurals, student publications, 
attendance at all athletic events on campus, and transcript fee. 

Rental of Textbooks 

A textbook rental fee entitles a student to receive textbooks used 
in each course for which he registers. Notebooks, workbooks, manu- 
als, and the like are not included. These and other supplementary 
materials will be purchased by the student. At the end of each 
quarter textbooks that are not needed further are returned. A 
student who desires to own his textbooks may purchase them by 
paying the difference between the rental fee and the purchase 
price. 

Laundry and Dry Cleaning 

Laundry of linens and personal clothing, pressing, and dry 
cleaning are provided at the university laundry. Students whose 
laundry service is in excess of the minimum charge will settle the 
account with the Cashier's Office. All students should have per- 
manent name markings in every article to be laundered or dry 
cleaned. 

Auditing 

A person, except one on university appointment or a student 
registered for a full schedule, who audits a class pays the regular 
registration and tuition fees. Auditors do not take tests, examina- 
tions, or receive grades or credit. 

Hospitalization and Accident Insurance 

A hospital and accident insurance coverage is available on a 
voluntary basis to all students at a low cost. For married or widowed 
students a family plan is also offered. This insurance will pay a 
substantial part of charges for hospitalization, surgical procedures, 
treatment for accidental injuries, diagnostic tests, and medical 
emergencies. The insurance policy is effective for twelve months 
between September first and August thirty-first and provides coverage 



18 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



both on campus and off. Each student is urged to purchase this 
protection. In addition, the University Health Services will pay the 
first $25.00 toward the hospital bill of any student admitted to 
Watauga County Hospital in Boone. 

Change of Course 1.00 

For each course change initiated by the student after registration 
day he must pay a fee of $1.00. 

Change of Room 2.00 

For change of dormitory room initiated by the student after 
registration day. 

Diploma 

Bachelor's degree 6.00 

Master's degree . 10.00 

Graduate Record Examinations 

Aptitude Test 8.00 

Advanced Test 9.00 

or 

Aptitude Test and one Advanced Test 15.00 

Home Management House 226.00 

A major in home economics education is required in the senior 
year to spend one quarter in residence in the home management 
house. Home management house fee: Equivalent to room and mini- 
mum meals in residence hall. Married student in home, fee $25.00. 

Late Registration 10.00 

A student who does not complete his registration during the 
announced registration date is charged a $10.00 fee. 

Late Test 2.00 

A student who does not take the required orientation tests at 
the time provided by the University will be required to pay a $2.00 
fee for each test. 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID ±\) 

Music Per Quarter 

One thirty-minute individual lesson a week, any 

instrument or voice 15.00 

Two thirty-minute individual lessons a week, 

any instrument or voice 30.00 

One class lesson a week, any instrument 

or voice 9.00 

Practice rooms, voice, piano, organ, first 

quarter hour 5.00 

Each additional quarter hour 2.50 

Practice rooms, strings, wind, percussion, 

first quarter hour 2.50 

Each additional quarter hour 1.25 

National Teacher Examinations and Miller Analogies Test 

National Teacher Examinations (common 

and a teaching area) 13.00 

Common Examinations only 10.00 

One Teaching Area 9.00 

Late registration fee 3.00 

Miller Analogies Test (individual 

administration) 7.50 

Physical Education Activity 

Per Quarter 

Bowling 8.00 

Skiing 50.00 

Golf 14.00 

Student Teaching 15.00 

This fee is charged the student who spends one quarter during 
the senior year doing student teaching in the laboratory schools 
of the University or in approved off-campus schools. 

Special Examination 20.00 

This fee is charged the student who takes an examination over 
the material of a course to earn credit in that course. 



2Xj expenses and financial aid 

SPECIAL NOTE 

Before taking final examinations at the close of each quarter, 
a student is expected to settle all accounts. A student may not 
register for a new quarter until all charges have been paid or 
arranged for and until all textbooks are returned to the University 
Bookstore. A student cannot receive a degree, certificate, or tran- 
script of credits until all accounts, except current, and loans have 
been paid. 

REFUND OF FEES 

Room reservation fees from new students for the fall quarter are 
refundable upon notification on or prior to May 10 and from 
returning students on or prior to June 15. Requests for refunds 
should be made to the Director of Housing. 

If a student withdraws from the University before the close of the 
registration period, one-half of the room rent and tuition and a 
proportionate part of the amount paid for meals will be refunded. 
If a student withdraws after the close of the registration period, a 
proportionate part of the amount paid for meals will be refunded. 
Refunds will be calculated from the date of the official withdrawal 
from the University. Students who are suspended for disciplinary 
reasons or who do not formally withdraw are not eligible for a 
refund. 

STUDENT FINANCIAL AID 

Opportunities for financial aid, though not unlimited, are within 
the reach of almost every student who can show both superior 
academic achievement and definite financial need. The student 
who realizes that he will be unable to meet university expenses 
without assistance should determine the approximate amount of 
assistance needed per quarter and take early initiative in seeking 
information from the Director of Student Aid and should file 
applications for at least one of the principal types of financial aid 
indicated below. 

Aid applications for the following academic year must be sub- 
mitted by April 15. In addition, applicants interested in receiving 
a National Defense Loan, Work-Study, or an Education Opportunity 
Grant administered through the University should also have their 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



21 



parents submit a Parents' Confidential Statement. Forms may be 
obtained from one's high school and should be submitted to the 
College Scholarship Service, Box 176, Princeton, New Jersey. 

Information to Veterans 

The University is approved for providing training under pro- 
visions of Chapter 34, Title 38, U. S. Code, G. I. Bill effective June 
1966; Chapter 35, Title 38, U. S. Code, the children of deceased or 
disabled veterans; and Public Law 894, for disabled veterans. 

Students enrolling under provisions of Chapter 34 and 35 will 
pay fees at the time of registration but receive a monthly education 
and training allowance from the Veterans Administration. Since 
the first check is usually delayed, a veteran should make his 
arrangements early. 

Students may contact the Veterans Administration Regional 
Office, 301 North Main Street, Winston-Salem, North Carolina, for 
information and necessary forms. Approval from The Veterans 
Administration regarding eligibility should be received by the 
student before entering school. The approval form (certificate of 
eligibility) should be submitted to the Financial Aid Office for 
completion after the veteran enrolls. 

Children of disabled or deceased veterans may receive assistance 
in payment of tuition, room, meals, and other university fees. For 
information regarding eligibility and application forms, students 
should write to the North Carolina Veterans Commission, Raleigh, 
North Carolina. 

Student Employment Programs 

The student employment programs enable eligible students to 
help pay college expenses while attending classes full time. Students 
participating in the programs are employed in the cafeterias, 
library, administrative offices, and in the various colleges and 
departments of the University. 

The student employment programs consist of The Appalachian 
State University Self-Help Program and The University Work- 
Study Program; the latter is of federal assistance under Title I of 
The Economic Opportunity Act. A student returning to school for 
the summer session only is not eligible to work under this program. 



22 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



Generally, a student may work up to 15 hours per week. A 
student's work schedule will depend upon class schedules and will 
be arranged by the student and his work supervisor. The amount of 
compensation the student receives depends upon the program for 
which he qualifies. Many students earn as much as one third of the 
total necessary expenses of the year. 

Jobs off campus are not assigned by any committee or division 
of the University, but such jobs do exist. Whenever possible, the 
Director of Student Aid will help the student find one of these 
jobs. 

Student Loan Programs 

College Foundation, Inc. 

Applicant must be a bona fide resident of North Carolina to be 
eligible for a loan from this source. 

A student may borrow up to $1,500 per year at a rate of 7 percent 
on the unpaid principal balance. The federal government will 
pay the 7 percent interest during the in-school period for students 
from families with adjusted incomes less than $15,000 per year. 
The borrower will assume the full 7 percent interest rate upon 
termination of his education in addition to Vi of 1 percent insurance 
premium, which he pays during both in-school and repayment 
periods. 

Information and applications may be obtained by writing the 
Director of Student Financial Aid. 

National Defense Student Loan Program 

Appalachian participates in the National Defense Student Loan 
Program, which is a part of the National Defense Education Act 
of 1958. An undergraduate student may borrow up to $1,000 per 
year to a total of $5,000. The amount of the loan committed to a 
student is based on the financial need of the student. Graduate 
students may borrow as much as $2,500 per year to a maximum of 
$10,000. The repayment period and the interest do not begin until 
nine months after the student ends his studies. The loans bear interest 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



23 



at the rate of 3 percent per year and repayment of principal may 
be extended over a ten-year period, as long as a minimum repay- 
ment of $45 per quarter is met. 

If a borrower becomes a full-time teacher in an elementary or 
secondary school or in an institution of higher education, as much 
as half of the loan may be forgiven at the rate of 10 percent for 
each year of teaching service. Borrowers who elect to teach in certain 
eligible schools located in areas of primarily low-income families may 
qualify for cancellation of their entire obligation at the rate of 15 
percent per year. 

A graduate or undergraduate student returning to school for the 
summer session only is not .eligible for a loan under this program. 

North Carolina Scholarship Loan Fund for 
Prospective Teachers 

Established by act of the Legislature of North Carolina in 1957, 
and amended in 1967, for capable students who are preparing to 
teach in the public schools of North Carolina, this fund makes avail- 
able a loan up to $600 a year. Students with good high school or 
college records may be eligible for a loan for each of four years. 
One annual loan is automatically canceled for each year that the 
student teaches in the public schools of North Carolina. If the student 
does not teach, the loan must be repaid at four percent interest. For 
application forms, interested students should write directly to the 
Division of Staff Development, State Department of Public Instruc- 
tion, Raleigh, North Carolina 27602. Applications should be sub- 
mitted before March 1, preceding the fall enrollment at an institution 
of higher learning. 

Scholarship Loan Fund for Prospective 
Teachers of the Mentally Retarded 

This loan fund was established by an act of the Legislature of 
North Carolina in 1963 and revised in 1967, for capable students 
who are preparing to teach the mentally retarded, makes available 
a loan up to $900 per academic year. A student may also qualify for 
$300 during the summer term or $150 per six-week term. Students 
with good high school or college records may be eligible for a loan 
for each of four years. One annual loan is automatically canceled 
for each year the student teaches the mentally retarded in North 



24 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



Carolina. If the student does not meet these requirements, the 
loan must be repaid at four percent interest. For application forms, 
interested students should write directly to the Division of Staff 
Development, State Department of Public Instruction, Raleigh, North 
Carolina 27602. 

University Consolidated Loan Fund 

When a student borrows money from any of the loan funds, he 
signs a promissory note and makes arrangements for repayment 
satisfactory to the Office of the Controller. Arrangements may be 
made to repay the loan and interest in installments over a reasonable 
period of time after graduation or discontinuance of study. A 
student who receives a loan should understand that loan funds are 
revolving funds and that the University has the same interest in 
protecting them as it had in securing them. 

The following loan funds have been established for the benefit 
of worthy students who need financial aid: 

Nora E. Edmondson Loan Fund of $500 was donated in 1956 
by Mrs. Bertie E. Perkins in memory of her sister, Miss Nora E. 
Edmondson, who at the time of her death was the oldest graduate 
of the University, and who from her first visit in 1942 until her 
death, was one of its most loyal and devoted friends. This fund is 
available to graduate students only. 

Frances L. Goodrich Loan Fund was contributed by the Trustees 
of Asheville College. Loans are restricted to $300 per year and are 
available only to juniors and seniors. 

The B. H. Harman Loan Fund, amounting to $2,500, was estab- 
lished by Mr. Harman and members of his family in 1968. Now living 
in Phoenix, Arizona, Mr. Harman is a native of Watauga County and 
many of his relatives have attended Appalachian. He established the 
Loan Fund "in gratitude for what the University has done for my 
people" in the county and the area. A maximum of $250 a year 
may be borrowed, with a student being eligible for a maximum of 
$750 for his four years at the University. 

Library Science Loan Fund was donated in 1953 by Miss Eunice 
Query and Miss Mabel Brister of the Appalachian faculty. The 
loan is available only to majors in library science. 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID ^J 

Mark Davis Loan Fund was donated in 1967 by Mark Davis. 

Student Loan Fund of approximately $5,000 was donated over 
a period of years by graduating classes. 

W. J. Waters Graduate Loan Fund of $500 was donated in 
1958 by S. J. Waters, alumnus of Appalachian, for graduate 
students only. 

Tau Beta Emergency Loan Fund was established during the winter 
quarter of 1969, to aid students with short term emergency financial 
needs. This fund is intended to be a revolving fund to aid as many 
students as possible during their stay at Appalachian. 

Dr. W. Amos Abrams Loan Fund. Established in 1970 by mem- 
bers of the North Carolina Education Association in honor of Dr. 
Abrams, the first chairman of Appalachian's Department of English. 
Loans available to graduate students preparing to teach English in 
North Carolina public schools. 

GRANTS-IN-AID AND SPECIAL TALENT AWARDS 

It is believed that special recognition should be given to those 
with demonstrated special talents, and it is also believed that the 
University should continue to strive for improvement of representa- 
tive groups in the performing arts. 

Students who feel they might qualify for these awards are 
encouraged to make application. 

Several fields of student activity, including dramatics, art, foren- 
sics, industrial arts, music, baseball, basketball, football, and other 
activities, have been approved for grants-in-aid and talent awards. 

Students who are interested in a special talent award should write 
to the appropriate department chairman for information. Athletes 
should write to the coach of the sport in which they are interested in 
participating while attending the University. 

Educational Opportunity Grants 

This program is part of the Higher Education Act of 1965, with 
the purpose being to assist in making available the benefits of 
higher education to qualified high school graduates of exceptional 
financial need. Students who qualify may be eligible for a grant of 



26 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



up to $1,000 per year for a period of four academic years. The 
recipient must maintain satisfactory progress in his course of study 
and be a full-time student during the academic year. 

SCHOLARSHIPS 

Army ROTC Scholarship Program is designed to offer financial 
assistance to outstanding young men in the four-year ROTC pro- 
gram who are interested in the Army as a career. Each scholarship 
provides free tuition, textbooks, and laboratory fees. Scholarships 
are awarded for a period of two years to students who have com- 
pleted the first two years of ROTC and are selected for the Advanced 
Course. Application must be made through the Department of 
Military Science prior to the completion of MS II. 

Four-year scholarships are available to qualified high school seniors 
Applications should be initiated through guidance counselors in the 
first month of the applicant's senior year in high school. 

Alpha Gamma Chapter of Delta Kappa Gamma awards a scholar- 
ship of approximately $100 or more to a worthy student from 
Avery or Watauga Counties. 

James G. K. McClure Scholarships, established in 1958 by the 
James G. K. McClure Education Foundation, provides four scholar- 
ships of $600 each to freshmen from designated western counties 
who give promise of high intellectual attainment, who show 
evidence of Christian character, and who are in need of financial 
aid. 

Legislative Scholarships are awarded by an act of the General 
Assembly of North Carolina. A number of tuition scholarships are 
awarded each year in the amount of $200 each and are awarded 
on the basis of need and merit. 

Endowment Scholarships were made available in 1957 by the 
Board of Trustees from the income of Endowment Funds. Approxi- 
mately 200 scholarships valued at $125 upward are available to 
men and women who excel in scholarship, who are needy, and who 
give promise of leadership at the University. 

Living Endowment Fund for Scholarships, initiated by the class 
of 1956 and continued by succeeding classes, provides 15 to 20 
scholarships annually with an average value of $200. These 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



27 



scholarships are available to men and women who are scholastically 
in the upper quarter of their class and who need financial aid. 

Vocational Rehabilitation Scholarships are available to students 
who have physical disabilities which constitute vocational handicaps. 
These students are eligible for scholarships from the North Carolina 
Vocational Rehabilitation Department. These scholarships are avail- 
able for four years provided the student maintains a satisfactory rec- 
ord. For information, qualified students should write to the State 
Department of Public Instruction, Division of Vocational Rehabilita- 
tion, Raleigh, North Carolina 27602. 

The John Hilary Workman Memorial Scholarships, were estab- 
lished in 1960 in memory of Dr. John Hilary Workman, Professor 
of Economics from 1946 until his death in 1960. The scholarships 
were established by his sister, Miss Sarah Workman, of Cherryville, 
North Carolina, from funds willed by Dr. Workman to the Endow- 
ment Fund of the University, to be used in assisting needy and 
capable students. 

Kenneth B. Linney Memorial Scholarship was established in 1961 
in memory of Kenneth B. Linney by contributions from friends 
and immediate family. The scholarship of $150 is made available 
by annual auditions to high school seniors who wish to major in 
voice, who have excellence of scholarship, seriousness of purpose, 
financial need, and who show professional promise. The scholarship 
is renewable by application. 

The Collegiate Civic Club Scholarship, established in 1961 by a 
student organization, provides $100 annually to a student of need 
and outstanding academic ability. The recipient of the award is 
selected by the club from recommendations made by the Faculty 
Committee on Student Financial Aid. 

Presser Foundation Scholarship, established in 1965, provides 
$400 annually for a music major who shows the greatest promise as 
a prospective teacher, who exhibits music talent, and who has 
financial need. 

The J. D. Rankin Memorial Scholarship was established in 1966 
in memory of the late Dr. Rankin, who was Dean of Appalachian 
for more than thirty years, and was Dean Emeritus at the time of his 
death. He also served as interim President. The scholarship is un- 
restricted. 



28 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



Watauga Savings and Loan Scholarships, established in 1967, 
provides two $250 scholarships each year for a young man and 
young woman graduate of Watauga High School. Each scholarship 
will be awarded on an annual basis, subject to renewal for each of 
three additional years if the recipient continues to meet the require- 
ments established for scholarship holders. Applicants will be chosen 
with consideration being given to their high school record for both 
scholarship and leadership, evidence of Christian character, in- 
tellectual promise and demonstrated ambition. 

The G. P. Eggers Scholarship was established in 1969 by the faculty 
of the Department of English to honor Dr. Eggers upon his retire- 
ment as chairman of the department. Dr. Eggers began his tenure at 
the University in 1927. The scholarship is restricted to seniors and 
graduate students in English who earned the undergraduate degree 
at Appalachian. 

The Dr. J. B. Hagaman, Jr., Memorial Scholarship was established 
in 1969 by the Trustees of the University in honor of Dr. Hagaman 
with whom they had served for several years. It is for students 
majoring in science, and preferably preparing for careers in medicine. 

The Broyhill Industrial Arts Scholarship Loan Program. In their 
desire to assist the young men of North Carolina and its surrounding 
states, the officials of the Broyhill Industries established this scholar- 
ship loan program, which provides five scholarships each year to an 
Industrial Arts major in the amount of $600 per year. To be eligible, 
a student must have completed one successful year of work at 
Appalachian State University. 

The Clara Sullivan Crawford Memorial Scholarship Fund was es- 
tablished in 1970 in honor of Mrs. Crawford who, for over a half 
century gave her love, encouragement, and financial resources to 
assist others. This scholarship, maintained by her relatives and 
friends, provides $1,800 annually to assist undergraduate music 
majors who have financial need and who have evidenced genuine 
academic and musical abilities. 

Graduate Alumni Scholarship. Established in 1970 from contribu- 
tions of Appalachian Graduate Alumni. $450 scholarships are avail- 
able to well qualified full-time graduate students in financial need. 
Not available for summer study. 



EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 



29 



The Captain E. F. Lovill Fund. A number of graduate fellowships 
and scholarships are available from the income on funds left to 
Appalachian State University from the estate of Captain E. F. Lovill's 
daughter, Mrs. Margaret Lovill Brawley, who formerly resided in 
Greensboro. 




Student Life 

The University seeks to be aware of the problems and needs of 
students as they adjust to the university community and become a 
part of it. To create an environment conducive to happiness and 
good work and to provide opportunities for the maximum develop- 
ment of each student, the University supports a variety of activities 
and services to supplement the academic program. 

STUDENT GOVERNMENT 

The Student Government Association is the governing agency of 
the student body, acting within the framework of university policies 
and regulations. The association is the representative voice of the 
student body and is divided into three distinct branches: the Execu- 
tive, the Legislative and the Judicial. 

As the voice of the students, the organization serves as the founda- 
tion of self-government and acts as a clearinghouse for student 
opinion. It has the responsibility of communicating with students, 
faculty, administration, staff and community leaders. In effect, all 
undergraduate students of the University are members of the Student 
Government Association and may serve on senate committees to 
make their wishes known. More than any other co-curricular group, 
the student government must accept the responsibility which comes 
from the entire student body, a responsibility encompassing concern 
for student opinions, grievances, accomplishments and discipline. 

STANDARD OF CONDUCT 

The foundation of self-government at Appalachian State University 
rests on the honor of its students. As a condition of acceptance and 
attendance at Appalachian, students are required at all times to 
maintain a high standard of private and public conduct both on and 
off campus. To lie, cheat, steal, or break one's word of honor under 
any circumstances is recognized as intolerable conduct. Violation 
of other commonly accepted rules of behavior, whether or not covered 
by specific regulations, will be subject to disciplinary action. Specific 
regulations are contained in other official publications of the Univer- 
sity. 



STUDENT LIFE 



31 



University officials reserve the right, with due process observed, 
to require any student whose conduct is considered unsatisfactory 
to withdraw. Claims of ignorance of such high standards and com- 
monly accepted rules or of specific regulations will not be accepted 
as an excuse for their violation. 

STUDENT OFFICERS AND UNIVERSITY REPRESENTATION 

Members of the student council, class and club officers, nominees 
for class or campus honors, athletic managers, members of the 
publications staffs, participants in public programs, cheerleaders, 
debaters, and any persons other than athletic teams representing 
the University off campus, must be selected from those students who 
have at the time of their election and who maintain through their 
terms of office a grade-point average of 2.0 or higher and freedom 
from general probation. 

SOCIAL AND CULTURAL ACTIVITIES 

Recognizing the importance of first hand acquaintance with man's 
cultural heritage, the University sponsors a wide variety of social 
and cultural activities throughout the year. 

As a complement to its instructional program, the University 
brings to the campus each year a variety of outstanding concerts, 
art exhibits, plays, lectures, recitals and films which involve students 
and faculty in both classical and contemporary expression of the 
fine arts. All of these activities are open to students, faculty and 
visitors in order to extend cultural opportunities to the university 
community. 

The John Hiliary Workman Memorial Lectures, established in 
1960, by Dr. John Hiliary Workman and his sister, Miss Sarah 
Workman of Cherryville, North Carolina, brings a nationally known 
speaker in the field of economics to the campus each year for lectures. 
In addition to special programs, a student-faculty committee presents 
outstanding programs of convocations, lectures, and concerts. 

The Popular Programs Committee of the Student Government As- 
sociation sponsors a series of pop concerts during the academic 
year, which brings to campus nationally known popular entertainment 
groups. 



32 



STUDENT LIFE 



During the academic year, the Art Department presents a series 
of outstanding art exhibits of prints, paintings and sculpture by dis- 
tinguished contemporary artists. The artists' works are exhibited 
for public enjoyment, and since the gallery is located in the Art 
Department, the works are available for the student body. Students and 
faculty are encouraged to exhibit their work throughout the year. The 
department sponsors special art programs such as the Senior and 
Faculty Art Exhibits. 

Frequent recitals are given by the students and faculty of the 
Music Department and by the various musical organizations; on 
occasions the department features outstanding professional musi- 
cians as guest soloists in choral, band, and symphony concerts. 

The social calendar also includes formal and informal dances, 
parties, receptions, dinners, teas, fashion shows, and interclass parties. 

STUDENT PUBLICATIONS 

The Appalachian, the University newspaper, is published twice 
weekly by the students. The Rhododendron, the University yearbook, 
is compiled during the academic year and is distributed to the students 
in the spring quarter. A student staff prepares and edits the Student 
Handbook, which contains information on student life and organiza- 
tions. Qualified students are elected by students to the editorial and 
business staffs of the publications, which offer opportunities for stu- 
dents to develop their literary and journalistic interests and abilities. 

CLUBS AND PROFESSIONAL SOCIETIES 

The University supports a diversified program of club activities 
and interest groups. There are over ninety different student organi- 
zations representing professional and honorary societies as well as 
social, service, and interest clubs. Please consult the official student 
handbook for a complete listing of these organizations. 

All student organizations on campus are chartered and supervised 
by the Student Government Association and the Student Life 
Committee. 

W. H. PLEMMONS STUDENT CENTER 

The Student Center is the focal point of campus student activities. 
Facilities and activities are provided for bringing together persons 
in the University for social, cultural, and recreational activities. 



STUDENT LIFE 



33 



The program of the Student Center is the responsibility of the 
Student Center Board, which includes students, faculty and admin- 
istration. 

Located in the Student Center are the Gold Room dining area, 
student government offices, Appalachian newspaper offices, Rhodo- 
dendron yearbook offices, Appskeller, T.V. lounge, meeting rooms, 
post office, table tennis room, bowling and billiards area, music 
listening rooms, Student Center staff offices and student activities 
office. 

The main desk is the information center for the campus. Many 
services are made available to the students ranging from room 
reservations to outings equipment rental. 

RELIGIOUS LIFE 

Many and various opportunities of a religious nature are available 
to students. There are eight churches in Boone within easy walking 
distance from campus — Advent Christian, Baptist, Church of Christ, 
Episcopal, Lutheran, United Methodist, Presbyterian and Catholic. 

Through campus organizations, local churches and church affili- 
ated groups, such as the Baptist Student Union, Canterbury Club, 
Lutheran Student Association, Newman Club, Wesley Foundation, 
and Westminster Fellowship, students have opportunities for worship, 
fellowship, study groups, and campus and community service. 

ATHLETICS AND INTRAMURAL SPORTS 

Amateur athletics are encouraged as an outgrowth of the physical 
education program of the University. Athletic teams are not devel- 
oped solely to win games, but to create and develop a great 
interest in true sportsmanship and keen competition. 

Appalachian maintains athletic teams that compete in the follow- 
ing intercollegiate sports: baseball, basketball, football, golf, soccer, 
cross country, fencing, field hockey, swimming, tennis, track, and 
wrestling. A faculty Council on Athletics regulates the intercollegiate 
athletic program. A member of an athletic team may not represent 
the University if he is on general probation. 

The University maintains an extensive program of intramural 
sports. All students are encouraged to participate in the program 



34 



STUDENT LIFE 



to benefit from physical exercise and to develop good sportsman- 
ship, self-reliance, and to gain experience in group participation and 
competition. Schedules of games are arranged from season to season 
in many sports, such as archery, badminton, basketball, horseshoes, 
soccer, softball, speedball, swimming, flag football, tennis, track and 
volleyball. 

SPEECH ACTIVITIES 

The Department of Speech provides opportunities for students 
to gain valuable experiences and recreation through participation 
in a variety of activities. 

Dramatics. A program of dramatic activities offers the student 
opportunities to gain experience in all phases of theatre production. 
All regularly enrolled students are eligible to participate in a program 
that includes major productions, student-directed plays, and readers 
theatre. Childrens Theatre productions and musicals are produced. 
Students are invited to join the Playcrafters, a continuing social and 
service organization for those interested in theatre activities. Con- 
sistent participation may lead to membership in Alpha Psi Omega 
National Honorary Dramatic Fraternity. 

Forensics. A full program of forensics provides opportunities for 
students to develop their abilities in public speaking and debate. 
The student has a chance to learn both from academic work and 
from travel. Scholarships are available for those interested and 
qualified. Membership in Pi Kappa Delta National Forensic Recog- 
nition Society is available to interested students. 

Broadcasting: Students interested in the various aspects of radio 
broadcasting may join the Broadcasting Club. Members assist the 
director of the campus station in such activities as taking surveys, 
planning special programs, and presenting workshops in announcing 
and newscasting. 

For further information concerning any of the speech activities, 
inquire at the Department of Speech. 

MUSICAL ACTIVITIES 

The Department of Music provides many organizations and 
activities in which students may gain valuable instruction, experi- 
ence, and recreation. 



STUDENT LIFE 



35 



The Marching Band, an all-university organization, functions in 
close cooperation with the Athletic Association during the football 
and basketball seasons. 

The Concert Band, an all-university organization open to any 
student with experience in playing band instruments, gives several 
campus concerts each year, including a "pop" concert. 

The University Symphony Orchestra, open to all students who 
have ability and experience in playing any orchestral instrument, 
appears in several concerts during the year. 

The University Singers accepts students who read music and 
sing well. Auditions are open to all students. Emphasis is placed on 
fine choral literature of all periods, with particular emphasis given 
to the works of outstanding composers. A major oratorio or opera is 
presented each year, and concerts are given locally and periodically 
throughout the state. 

The Wind Ensemble is open to all students by audition. Emphasis 
is placed on a high degree of musical performance. Concerts are 
given on campus during the year, and tours are planned periodically. 

The Women's Glee Club is open to all women students who 
desire to sing. 

The Men's Glee Club is open to all male students who are 
interested in singing. 

The Madrigal Singers is composed of eight selected voices, four 
women and four men. 

The Stage Band is open to all students by audition. Emphasis 
is placed on developing a variety of popular music styles. This group 
performs for several university-sponsored concerts and occasional 
off-campus school dances. 

UNIVERSITY HEALTH SERVICES 

The responsibility for assuring healthful conditions for study, 
work, and personal life must be shared by all members of the aca- 
demic community. Appalachian recognizes its responsibility to pro- 
vide students access to means of assuring their optimum physical, 
emotional, intellectual, and social well being. 



36 



STUDENT LIFE 



The Medical Center provides physicians, nurses, and laboratory 
facilities aimed toward prevention of illness, and the treatment of 
disease. The Medical Center is open 24 hours daily while the Uni- 
versity is in session. Students may be admitted to the Medical 
Center Infirmary for brief treatment of minor illness. Persons re- 
quiring general hospital care are admitted to Watauga County 
Hospital. 

The Psychological Services Center aims to stimulate a climate 
which nourishes essential human relationships and which reduces 
intrapersonal and interpersonal conflicts among all members of the 
community. Clinical psychologists, guidance counselors, a psychia- 
trist, and others provide personal counseling and psychotherapy for 
students. 

The Testing Division of Psychological Services has the responsi- 
bility for organizing and administering individual and group tests 
for the university community. Tests available range from individual 
psychological tests to large group tests such as the Graduate Record 
Examination. 

A hospital and accident insurance coverage is available on a volun- 
tary basis to all students at a low cost. For married or widowed stu- 
dents a family plan is also offered. This insurance will pay a sub- 
stantial part of charges for hospitalization, surgical procedures, treat- 
ment for accidental injuries, diagnostic tests, and medical emergencies. 
The insurance policy is effective for 12 months between September 
first and August thirty-first and provides coverage both on campus 
and off. Each student is urged to purchase this protection. In ad- 
dition, the University Health Services will pay the first twenty-five 
dollars toward the hospital bill of any student admitted to Watauga 
County Hospital in Boone. 

All contacts with the University Health Services are considered 
confidential. Records are maintained separately for use of health 
personnel only and are not available to the administration, faculty, 
or anyone else. In case of serious illness or injury in minors, the 
parents or guardians will be notified. The Health Services do not 
issue "excuses" for class absences. 

Students who withdraw from the University for reasons of health 
must receive medical clearance through the University Health Services 
before being readmitted. Before clearance is granted the student 



STUDENT LIFE 



37 



must present evidence that the condition which necessitated with- 
drawal has improved and that there is reasonable expectation of his 
ability to participate in university life. The Health Services will offer 
assistance aimed toward helping students with a health impairment 
successfully attend the University. 

STUDENT HOUSING 
Residence Halls 

The University has 14 residence halls housing approximately 3,700 
single undergraduate students, with a limited number of spaces re- 
served for graduate students. 

The residence halls are staffed and supervised by professional per- 
sonnel. These staff members are responsible for the interpretation 
and implementation of university policies and regulations established 
to insure the best interest and welfare of the total group. 

Each room is equipped with the basic furniture, but the student 
is expected to supply linens, blankets, rugs, pillow, curtains, and 
other personal furnishings according to individual tastes. 

The residence halls are closed during vacation periods indicated 
in the university calendar, and no occupancy of rooms will be per- 
mitted during this time. If a student finds it necessary to remain 
in Boone during a vacation period, the Deans of Men and Women 
will assist in securing a room. 

Appliances in Residence Hall Rooms 

The following is a list of appliances students may have in their 
rooms : lamps, radio, record player, vacuum cleaner, razor, clock, fan, 
hair dryer, sewing machine, television set (portable or table model — 
21" screen maximum), popcorn popper (to be used in designated 
areas only), refrigerator (not to exceed the size of the model dis- 
tributed by SG A). 

The following is a list of appliances students may not have in 
their rooms: hot plates, toasters, heat lamps, percolators, heaters. 

The use of extension cords, multiple sockets, television antennae, 
and other attachments to the walls or plumbing fixtures is prohibited. 



38 



STUDENT LIFE 

Housing Requirements 

All freshmen are required to live in university-owned housing with 
the exception of those students living with parents or guardian, or 
those who are married and maintaining their residence in the univer- 
sity vicinity. 

Upperclass students are permitted to live off-campus, but those 
upperclass students who are under 21 years of age must have their 
parent's permission in writing on file in the Office of the Dean of 
Men or Dean of Women. 

A student must be registered for at least 12 quarter hours to be 
eligible for a room. 

Housing Contract 

All students reserving rooms are subject to an academic year 
housing contract (three quarters). 

Regulations concerning this contract are as follows: 

A student who reserves a room for the fall or winter quarter is 
obligated to pay room rent for the subsequent quarter (s) of that 
academic year as long as he is enrolled, unless another student from 
a waiting list occupies the space. 

If a residence hall student plans not to enroll for a subsequent 
quarter, he must notify the housing office at least one week prior to 
examination week at the end of the current quarter. If he does not 
give such notification, he will be billed for a quarter's room rent 
even though he is not enrolled, and his accounts with the University 
will not be clear until the bill is paid. 

Unless a student notifies the housing office that he will be late, 
the residence hall space must be occupied by the night of the first 
day's classes in each quarter. Otherwise, the reservation for that 
space will be canceled, and he will be billed for a quarter's rent. 

Exceptions: (1) a residence hall student in the fall quarter who 
student teaches in the winter or spring quarters is not obligated to 
pay room rent for that quarter, but he is obligated to notify the 
housing office of his intention not to occupy the room in a coming 
quarter at least one week prior to examination week at the end of the 
current quarter. Otherwise, he will be billed for the rent. 



STUDENT LIFE 



39 



(2) A residence hall student who gets married during the year 
will not be obligated to pay for a space in the quarter subsequent 
to the marriage if the student wishes to move off campus. However, 
he is obligated to give notice to the housing office of his intention 
not to occupy his room one week prior to examination week at the 
end of the current quarter. Otherwise, he will be billed for the rent. 

(3) A student who is suspended by action of university authorities 
will not be obligated to pay room rent for a subsequent quarter in 
which he is not enrolled. 

(4) Other exceptions may be made upon recommendations of the 
Deans of Men or Women in case of extreme emergency. 

The University reserves the right to require an occupant to vacate 
his space in the residence hall if this is deemed to be in the best 
interest of the University. 

Room Reservations 

Room reservation forms should be requested from the Office of 
Student Housing, and the completed form should be mailed directly 
to the university cashier with a check or money order for reserva- 
tion deposit payable to Appalachian State University. The reservation 
deposit is deducted from the room rent charge for the first quarter in 
residence. 

All students living in university residence halls are required to 
purchase a minimum number of meal books at the time of registra- 
tion. The cost of meals may vary considerably according to individual 
needs and desires. The cafeteria is on the main campus, and meals 
are available at moderate prices, for cash payment or meal book 
tickets. 

All students living in university residence halls are charged 
a minimum amount for laundry and dry cleaning service. Students 
whose service is in excess of the minimum charge will settle the 
amount at the cashier's office. 

Residence Hall Refunds 

Reservation fees from new students for fall quarter are refundable 
upon notification on or prior to May 10, and from returning students 
on or prior to June 15. Requests for refunds are made to the Director 
of Student Housing. 



40 



STUDENT LIFE 



If a student withdraws from the University before the close of 
registration period, one-half of the room rent and tuition and a 
proportionate part of the amount paid for meals will be refunded. 
If a student withdraws after the close of the registration period, room 
rent will not be refunded, but a proportionate part of the amount 
paid for meals will be refunded. 

Off-Campus Housing 

Because of limited residence hall space, some students may find 
it necessary to secure privately owned housing in the university area. 
A listing of available privately owned housing may be obtained from 
the Office of Student Housing. Men and women who plan to live in 
privately owned housing and who are not 21 years of age must receive 
permission from the Dean of Men or the Dean of Women to do so. 
All students enrolled in the University, whether living on campus or 
off campus, are subject to the rules of good citizenship and exemplary 
conduct as administered and supervised by the university administra- 
tion and the Student Government Association. 

MOTOR VEHICLES 

All faculty, staff, students, and employees of the University who 
operate or park or drive a motor vehicle on the university campus or 
its environs must register his or her motor vehicle with the University 
before he is allowed to park or drive on the campus. This includes 
commuting students. 

All members of the freshman and sophomore classes not residing 
with immediate relatives, and all students on academic or disciplinary 
probation, and all students who have an academic average below C, 
are prohibited from registering, maintaining, or operating any type 
of motor vehicle on the campus or its environs. 

Application for parking privileges may be made at Registration on 
Registration Day. THIS IS DONE AS A PART OF ACADEMIC 
REGISTRATION. The parking decal should be affixed to the motor 
vehicle by the first day of classes at which time any out-of-date park- 
ing decals must be removed. 

Any student requiring the use of a motor vehicle after Registration 
Day for any period, however short, must immediately register his or 
her motor vehicle before he is allowed to drive or park on the 



STUDENT LIFE 



41 



campus. All vehicles not registered on Registration Day must be 
registered at the University Traffic & Security Office. 

A student may not register a vehicle that was or is owned or used 
by another student, unless ownership of the vehicle has been trans- 
ferred and proof to that effect can be shown. A junior, senior, gradu- 
ate student, staff member, or faculty member may not register a 
vehicle for a freshman or sophomore student. 

POSTAL SERVICE 

Appalachian's Post Office is located on the first floor of the W. H. 
Plemmons Student Center. All students living in a residence hall on 
campus are pre-assigned a post office box. No additional charge is 
required for this service. Boxes are not available for off-campus 
students. 

When a student moves off campus or leaves Appalachian, it is 
very important that he check by the Post Office window and leave 
his correct forwarding address. 

The hours for the mail room are 8:00-5:00 Monday-Friday and 
8:00-12:00 Saturday. 

As part of the Post Office a United States Contract Station offers 
to the students any services available at the main U. S. Post Office. 
The hours for the Contract Station are as follows: 8:30-4:00 
Monday-Friday, 8:30-11:30 Saturday. 

PLACEMENT AND CAREER PLANNING SERVICES 

Appalachian maintains a central Office of Placement with a Direc- 
tor and staff whose function is to assist students and alumni in 
choosing and securing a suitable position. The total placement func- 
tion of the University is the responsibility of this office. All commer- 
cial, industrial, governmental, and educational placement is handled 
by this one office. All qualified students and alumni who have com- 
pleted or expect to complete any one of the degree programs register 
for permanent placement and career planning services. Referrals are 
made to the University Health Services Psychological Center for test- 
ing and counseling. 

Although the Office of Placement cannot guarantee professional 
appointments, every effort is made to study the professional qualifi- 
cations and interests of the student and to assist him in obtaining 



42 



STUDENT LIFE 



satisfactory employment. Relationships have been established with 
outstanding school systems, colleges, industries, and local, state, and 
federal governmental agencies throughout the country. The office 
maintains accurate and up-to-date information regarding vacancies, 
certification and license requirements, and qualifying examinations, 
and arranges for interviews with prospective employers. 

The office maintains membership in the Southern College Place- 
ment Association, the College Placement Council, and the State and 
National Association for School, College and University Staffing. 
Students and alumni of member institutions are entitled to reciprocal 
placement services and nationwide computerized service. 

NEWS BUREAU 

The University's news bureau gathers, compiles and distributes 
all newsworthy facets of campus life to appropriate news media 
organizations. Some 400 newspapers, radio stations and television 
stations, most of which are located in Virginia, Tennessee, North 
Carolina, and South Carolina are kept continually aware of the 
Appalachian activities which are of interest to the general public. 

The news bureau is responsible for preparing releases to keep 
the public informed about all phases of the University, including 
coverage of the institution's athletic teams. The department also 
handles the publication and distribution of various brochures. 
Complete photographic service, including a full-time photographer 
and darkroom facilities, functions as a major asset to the overall 
news bureau operation. 

ALUMNI ASSOCIATION 

All graduates, former students who have attended for one year or 
earned 12 hours of credit, and personnel officially associated with 
the University are members of the Alumni Association. The purpose 
of the Association is to promote and encourage fellowship and 
friendship among its members; to foster good will on the part of its 
members and others toward the University; and in general to aid 
and assist the University through carrying out such projects and 
undertakings as the Association shall from time to time adopt. 

There are no membership dues in the Association; however, 
many alumni express their active interest in the University by 



STUDENT LIFE 4tj 

contributing voluntarily to the "Heartline Fund," which stimulates 
the growth of every school activity. Donations to the Fund are 
solicited annually by means of a direct mail campaign to all 
alumni of the University. 

OFFICERS OF THE ASSOCIATION ARE: 

Harold La wing, Lenoir, N. C President 

S. G. Gabriel, Burlington, N. C President-Elect 

Gerald Adams, Danville, Va Vice President 

Carolyn Harmon, Gastonia, N. C Secretary 

Mark Davis, Hickory, N. C Past President 

Robert E. Snead, Boone, N. C Director of Alumni Affairs 




The Instructional Program 

Appalachian State University issues a catalog annually and thus 
intends to give a description of the work of the University and a 
digest of its regulations for students and other interested persons. 
The course descriptions and regulations stated are fairly continuous 
from year to year, but neither is valid beyond the succeeding year 
when a new catalog will have been issued which supercedes all 
previous ones. 

A student may ordinarily expect to be allowed to secure a diploma 
or a degree in accordance with the requirements of the curriculum 
laid down in the catalog in force when he first entered the Univer- 
sity provided he graduates within a period of six years from the 
date of entry. He may elect to earn the degree in accordance with 
the requirements specified in any subsequent catalog in use 
while he is a student. The faculty, however, reserves the right to 
make changes in curricula and in regulations at any time when in 
its judgment such changes are for the best interests of the students 
and of the University. If a student elects to meet the requirements 
of a catalog other than the one in force at the time of his original 
entrance, he must meet all requirements of the catalog he elects. 
A student who changes his degree program or his major will be 
expected to meet all of the requirements of the new program of the 
catalog in force at the time of the change, except for students who 
do not declare a major upon entrance and who may meet the 
requirements of the catalog in force at the time of their entrance to 
Appalachian State University. 

The Board of Trustees is the governing body of Appalachian 
State University. The powers of the President and the Faculty are 
delegated by the Board in accord with its policies. 

Appalachian reserves the right, in the interest of all its students, 
to decline admission, to suspend, or to require the withdrawal of a 
student when for any reason it is deemed to be in the interest of the 
University. 

Registration at the University involves not only the student's 
acceptance of the published academic regulations, but also all 
other rules found in any official announcement. 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 40 
DEGREE REQUIREMENTS 

Students should refer to the requirements of their respective 
colleges for information about their courses of study and confer 
with their advisers whenever problems arise. 

Students should pursue required courses in the suggested se- 
quence. Failure to do so may lead to scheduling difficulties and 
the student may find that the subject for which he wishes to 
enroll is either not available or closed to students with advanced 
standing. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 

Students should refer to the various departments of the respective 
colleges for lists and descriptions of courses of instruction. 

STANDARDS OF SCHOLARSHIP 

In all work done for a degree, scholarly performance is expected. 
The student is expected to demonstrate academic competence, 
intellectual honesty and responsibility, a willingess to do more 
than the minimum required, and the ability to think critically and 
constructively. 

CREDITS 

Appalachian State University operates on the quarter system with 
the year divided into four quarters. The unit of credit is the 
quarter hour. Students receive course credit on the basis of quarter 
hours. A quarter hour of credit is earned by one hour of class 
attendance per week for one quarter or the equivalent. Equivalence 
usually involves laboratory sessions. One is required to attend 
laboratory sessions for two or three hours per week for a quarter to 
earn a credit of one quarter hour. 

REGISTRATION 

Students are expected to register at the time specified by the 
Registrar's Office. Registration schedules are announced, and regis- 
tration materials are available in the Office of the Registrar. A fee 
is charged for late registration. 



4t) THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 

GRADES AND GRADE POINTS 

At the end of each quarter grades are given in each course by 
letters which indicate the quality of work done by the student. 

A — Excellent — 4 grade points per quarter hour. 

B — Above Average — 3 grade points per quarter hour. 

C — Average — 2 grade points per quarter hour. 

D — Below Average but Passing — 1 grade point per quarter hour. 

F — Failure — grade points (May not be made up except by 
repeating the course) 

/ — Incomplete — Because of sickness or some other unavoidable 
cause. An / becomes an F if not removed within the time 
designated by the instructor and not to exceed one year. 

W — Withdrawal — Withdrawal from a course or from the Univer- 
sity. 

WF — Withdrew Failing — Course dropped with failing grades more 
than two weeks after registration closes. Hours are counted. 

Y — Auditing. 

S-U — The grades for student teaching and screening proficiences 
are reported as "satisfactory" or "unsatisfactory." 

All official "Drops" and "Withdrawals" are recorded on change 
cards, which when completed and approved, must be filed in the 
Registrar's Office. 

The grade-point average is a general measure of the quality of a 
student's work. Unless a course is repeated, the grade-point average 
is determined by dividing the total number of grade points earned 
by the total number of quarter hours attempted. A student may 
repeat a course provided he has not already taken and passed a 
course for which the course to be repeated is a prerequisite. If, 
however, the course to be repeated is not offered the following 
quarter, then the student may obtain permission from the dean of 
the college in which he is enrolled to take the course the next time 
it is offered. Other exceptions must also be approved by the dean 
of the college in which the student is enrolled. When a course is 
repeated, only the grade points and the quarter hours earned the 
last time the course is taken will be used in computing the grade-point 
average. The student's record will show all courses taken, however. 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



47 



Prior to the spring quarter of the 1969-70 academic year, grade- 
point averages were computed in a different way. Students who were 
in school prior to that quarter have the choice of remaining under 
the regulations in effect at that time or of choosing to have their 
grade-point averages computed as outlined in the previous paragraph. 
Those who choose to have their grade-point averages computed as 
outlined in the previous paragraph may not elect to go back to the 
other method for grade-point computation. Associated with this 
change in the method of grade-point computation were certain 
changes in retention requirements. The student who elects to change 
the method of grade-point computation must also accept the associ- 
ated retention standards. Only work taken at Appalachian is used 
in computing grade-point averages. 

ACADEMIC LOAD 

A student normally takes from 15 to 17 hours a quarter. In 
special situations, a student may take more than 17 hours a quarter. 
To do this one must have prior approval of the dean of the college 
in which he is enrolled. Registration for less than 12 hours places 
the student on part-time status. 

RESIDENCE 

A student must complete at least 45 quarter hours at Appalachian, 
including 12 hours in his major and 6 hours in his minor, and make 
at least a C average over-all and in the major or area of specialization 
on work taken at Appalachian. The senior year (three quarters) must 
be spent in residence at the University. 

Requirements for a bachelor's degree must be completed within 
16 quarters of residence or the equivalent. 

CREDIT LIMITATIONS 

1. A maximum of 30 quarter hours of extension and/or corre- 
spondence work from recognized institutions may be credited toward 
meeting the requirements for graduation. Correspondence courses 
are not offered by the University. Before registering for a course by 
correspondence from another institution, a student must have the 



48 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



written permission of the registrar and the chairman of the depart- 
ment in which the course is listed. The combined load of residence 
courses and correspondence courses may not exceed the maximum 
load allowed. 

2. Except for physical education majors, not more than nine 
hours in physical education activity courses may be included within 
the required 183 hours. 

3. A candidate for a Bachelor of Arts degree may count not 
more than a total of 60 hours above General Education in any one 
department. 

4. Credits that have been earned more than 10 years prior to 
the date of graduation must be validated if and when they are 
submitted to fulfill degree requirements. 

5. No student may be a candidate for more than one bachelor's 
degree at a time. However, a graduate who holds one bachelor's 
degree may earn a second bachelor's degree by taking additional 
work of at least 45 quarter hours and by completing all requirements 
for the degree. 

6. All baccalaureate degrees granted by Appalachian require the 
completion of a minimum of 90 quarter hours at a senior college or 
university. 

7. A student who has registered at Appalachian may take work 
at another accredited institution to be transferred to Appalachian 
only with the approval of the dean of his college and the chairman 
of the department in which the course is to be credited. 

CLASS ATTENDANCE 

A student is expected to attend every meeting of his classes. The 
student who must be absent should explain why he must be 
absent or why he has been absent. The instructor may or may not 
excuse the absence according to his own judgment. However, stu- 
dents who are absent for reason of officially representing the Univer- 
sity in some activity will be excused. Medical excuses will not be 
written by the University Health Services Medical Center. 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 4t7 

CHANGE OF COURSE 

With the approval of his faculty adviser and of the registrar a 
student may drop or add courses or change sections until the close 
of registration. To add a course, a student must secure permission 
and the drop-add form from his adviser. The drop-add form is taken 
to the Registrar's Office where a new course card and class ad- 
mission card are obtained. The class admission card must be taken 
to the instructor of the class added before the student will be 
admitted to class. 

To drop a course, the student must get the approval of his 
adviser. (A drop-add form is obtained from the student's adviser.) 
The student must secure the class admission card from the instructor 
involved and take it and the drop-add form to the Office of the 
Registrar. 

Any student who has official permission may drop a course 
within two weeks after the close of registration and receive a 
grade of W. No grade points or hours are counted for a grade of W. 

Any course officially dropped more than two weeks after regis- 
tration closes for the quarter is assigned a grade of W or WF 
depending on whether the student was passing or failing. The 
student must bring the drop form, class admission card, and a 
note from the instructor indicating passing or failing to the registrar 
to drop a course after the official drop period ends. If the grade 
is W, the hours are not counted; if the grade is WF the hours are 
counted. Courses dropped at any time without permission are 
recorded as F, and the hours are counted. 

Within 30 days days prior to the beginning of the examination 
period, a student may not drop a course passing. 

A student pays a fee of $ 1 .00 for each change not initiated by the 
University. 

WITHDRAWAL FROM THE UNIVERSITY 

A student who wishes to withdraw from the University for any 
reason must make arrangements with the dean of student affairs 
prior to withdrawal. Permission from the parents or guardians of a 
minor student to withdraw is required. 



50 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



Students who withdraw officially from the University receive 
grades of W, and hours are not counted. Students who withdraw 
unofficially from the University receive grades of F, and hours are 
counted. 

Within 30 days prior to the beginning of the examination period, 
a student may not withdraw in good standing except for reason of 
illness or extreme emergency. 

COURSE EXAMINATIONS 

Final examinations are held during the final week of the quarter. 
After the schedule for examinations has been made, an instructor 
may not change the date or time of an examination without per- 
mission of department chairman or dean. The instructor determines 
how he will utilize the assigned period, but all scheduled periods 
will be met at the assigned time. A student may take an examination 
outside of the scheduled time only by permission of the instructor 
of the course. Permission is granted only in the case of emergency. 

SPECIAL EXAMINATION 

A student who is absent from a final examination because of 
an emergency takes the make-up examination at the convenience of 
the instructor. 

REPORTS 

Final quarter grades are reported to the Computer Center not 
later than 48 hours after the examination in the course is given, but 
not later than noon of the day following the last day of the exami- 
nation period. Each instructor posts the grades of his students. At 
the end of each quarter a report of the student's grades is sent to 
his parents or guardian. 

CLASSIFICATION 

At the end of each quarter students are classified on the basis of 
quarter hours. All students who are admitted as regular first-year 
students or who have completed less than 45 quarter hours are 
classified as freshmen. 

Students who have completed at least 45 quarter hours are 
classified as sophomores. 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



51 



.60 


— 


.90 


— 


1.50 


35 


1.90 


80 


2.00 


90 



Students who have completed at least 90 quarter hours are 
classified as juniors. 

Students who have completed 135 quarter hours are classified as 
seniors. 

ACADEMIC SUSPENSION 

To continue at Appalachian a student must have the following 
grade-point averages and the following hours passed at the beginning 
of the quarters indicated: 

G.P.A. Hours 

Quarter 2 
Quarter 3 
Quarters 4, 5, 6 
Quarter 7 
Quarter 8 
(And Following) 

No student will be allowed to remain in the General College after 
completing seven quarters at the University. If he is not eligible 
to be admitted to one of the degree granting colleges by the beginning 
of the eighth quarter, then he will be dropped from the University. 

Eligibility for continued enrollment or for readmission may be 
restored only by completion of sufficient work in the summer session 
at Appalachian. 

The summer session will not count as a quarter in residence for 
the purpose of computing eligibility for continued enrollment or 
readmission. 

Grade-point averages may not be raised by correspondence or 
credit from another school. 

Students who entered Appalachian prior to the spring quarter, 
1970 may choose to abide by academic retention regulations in effect 
at the time they entered. However, if they choose to do this, then 
they must also abide by the regulations concerning the repeat rule 
in force at that time, which requires all grades to be counted in deter- 
mining the student's grade-point average, whenever a course is 
repeated. Once students transfer to the new regulations, they must 
continue under these regulations until completion of their program. 



52 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



Requests for readmission following suspension for academic reasons 
should be sent to the dean of the college involved. Approval of 
requests is not automatic and will depend not only on academic 
records but also on evidence of growth and maturity. 

INDEPENDENT STUDY 

Independent study is the term applied to the study of a subject not 
listed in the regular curricular offerings. The vehicles for this are 
course numbers 248, 348, and 548 depending on the level of the 
student. For information on independent study, the student should 
consult the dean of his college. 

INDIVIDUAL STUDY 

Individual study is the pursuit of a regularly listed course by a 
student without his attending classes on a regular basis. The student 
who wishes to pursue a course by individual study will secure the 
permission of the chairman of the department in which the course is 
offered. 

CREDIT BY EXAMINATION 

A student who wishes to take an examination for credit on a 
regularly listed course without registering for and taking the course 
will present his request to the chairman of the department in which 
the course is offered. A fee of $20.00 is charged for such examina- 
tions and a receipt from the Cashier's Office must be shown to the 
department chairman before his final approval can be given. If the 
examination is passed, credit without grade will be noted on the 
student's transcript. If the examination is not passed, no notation 
is made on the transcript. In the case of freshmen who take advanced 
placement examinations during the freshman orientation period, the 
fee is waived. 

HONORS 

To encourage scholarship the University officially recognizes 
students who distinguish themselves in scholarship. Honors Day 
is observed in a convocation of students and faculty during the 
spring quarter with an address by a distinguished speaker. The 
printed program contains the names of all students qualifying for 
scholastic honors, and each honor student is awarded a certificate. 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



53 



Alpha Chi, a national scholastic fraternity, is open to not more 
than the top ten percent of the junior and senior classes who have a 
grade-point average of not less than 3.25. 

DEAN'S LIST 

At the end of each quarter a student who has taken at least 
fifteen hours and has achieved a grade-point average of at least 
3.00 on all work attempted with no grade below C and with no 
"Incomplete" or "Condition" is placed on the Dean's list. 

HONOR TEACHING 

A student who shows exceptional initiative, scholarship, and 
excellence in student teaching may be designated and recognized 
as an Honor Teacher. The honor will be entered on his official 
record. 

GRADUATION WITH HONORS 

To be eligible for graduation with honors a student must com- 
plete a minimum of six quarters in residence at Appalachian. A 
grade-point average of 3.25 is required for graduating cum laude; 
a grade-point average of 3.65 is required for graduating magna cum 
laude; and a grade-point average of 3.85 is required for graduating 
summa cum laude. 

GRADUATION 

Degrees are conferred at the close of the spring and summer 
quarters. Candidates for degrees and/or teaching certificates must 
file application for degrees and North Carolina certificates on blanks 
provided by the registrar on registration day of the quarter in which 
graduating requirements will be completed. At the time of filing 
the application all requirements except current work should be 
completed. 

All candidates for degrees at any commencement are expected 
to be present to receive their degrees in person unless excused by 
the Dean of Student Affairs. 

TRANSCRIPTS 

Transcripts should be requested from the Office of the Registrar. 
At each registration period a student pays fifty cents (included in 



54 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



Student Welfare and Activities fee) to cover the cost of transcripts 
for life. Each student will receive a transcript upon request free of 
charge. No more than three transcripts will be issued at any one 
time. Transcripts will not be issued if the student has an unsettled 
account with the University. 

EXTENSION 

As a service to the people of Piedmont and Western North 
Carolina, Appalachian conducts off -campus classes. As far as pos- 
sible, these classes are planned around extension centers so that 
adequate equipment, supplies, and materials for collateral reading 
may be provided. These classes usually meet for a period of three 
hours per week for a quarter. They are taught by members of the 
regular faculty or by persons appointed especially for this service. 

The cost of extension classes, including tuition and fees is $33.00 
for each three-quarter hour course. A student registering at Ap- 
palachian for the first time must pay an additional fee of $10.00. 

For graduate students who register for extension work, up to 
nine quarter hours of graduate credit may be counted toward the 
master's degree. Extension work applied toward the master's degree 
will not reduce the minimum residence requirements of thirty-six 
weeks, but it can be used to replace the six weeks of additional 
residence required of students who do not write a thesis. 

Not more than 30 quarter hours of extension and/ or correspon- 
dence credit from recognized institutions may be applied toward 
meeting the requirements for the baccalaureate degrees. 

Information on the extension program may be obtained by 
writing to Director of Extension, Appalachian State University, 
Boone, North Carolina, 28607. 

SUMMER SESSIONS 

Since the beginning, summer sessions have been an integral part 
of Appalachian's programs. During the summer of 1970, there were 
over 5,000 registrations in the summer sessions. Courses are offered 
on a full quarter basis, in two consecutive five-week terms, and in 
four two-week terms. 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



55 



The primary purpose of the summer session is to provide op- 
portunities for students to accelerate their progress toward degrees 
by attending college year-round. The schedule of classes is designed 
for recent high school graduates who desire an early start with 
their college programs, for undergraduate students from Appa- 
lachian and other colleges and universities who desire to accelerate 
their programs, and for teachers and school administrators who 
desire to advance professionally. 

The schedule of courses to be offered during the summer quarter 
is published as a part of the summer sessions bulletin in March of 
each year. Copies of the bulletin, or information about the summer 
sessions, may be had by communicating with the Registrar, Ap- 
palachian State University, Boone, North Carolina, 28607. 

LIBRARY 

The library is the center of academic life at Appalachian State 
University. The Carol Grotnes Belk Library building is designed to 
accommodate approximately 400,000 volumes and contains 86,000 
square feet of floor space. The building is modern in design and 
equipment, offering space for maximum use to faculty and students. 

In addition to the book collection, the library has an extensive 
collection of non-book materials. These include microfilms, periodi- 
cals and newspapers, slides and filmstrips, maps, recordings, and 
sheet music. The library is well equipped for graduate study in a 
number of fields. It has a well-rounded collection in art, biology, 
business, chemistry, economics, education, English and American 
literature, French, geography, geology, health and physical educa- 
tion, history, home economics, industrial arts, library science, mathe- 
matics, music, philosophy, physics, political science, psychology, 
religion, sociology, Spanish and speech. The library maintains four 
special collections: the Juvenile Collection, the Curriculum Labora- 
tory, the Library Science Professional Collection, and the Music 
Library. Each of these libraries is supervised by a professional 
librarian. The library is administered by a staff of 13 professionally 
trained librarians. A reference librarian is available at all times to 
aid students in locating materials that are needed. 

The past few years at Appalachian's library can best be classified 
as a period of gratifying growth and use. With increased financial 
support from the state and grants from other sources, the holdings 



56 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



of the library have increased considerably. The increasing demands 
placed on the library by students and faculty have resulted in its 
maximum use. 

AUDIOVISUAL CENTER 

The Audiovisual Center provides: films and other instructional 
materials and equipment which are checked out by departments; 
a central clearing office for requesting and renting materials avail- 
able from off-campus sources; facilities permitting faculty members 
to preview, audition and evaluate new materials; local production 
laboratories for producing classroom teaching materials not com- 
mercially available; and the repair and maintenance of all equip- 
ment on campus. 

Audiovisual materials and supplies are stored in and issued by 
the central audiovisual office, which is located on the first floor of 
Edwin Duncan Hall. Audiovisual equipment is assigned as needed 
to the departments, and the chairman is responsible for its care 
and safety. Faculty members are encouraged to acquaint them- 
selves with available media. The staff of the Audiovisual Center is 
available to give instruction in the use and care of audiovisual 
equipment and to assist in renting off-campus films to be used in 
classes. Equipment or materials in need of repairs should be re- 
ported promptly to the Audiovisual Center. 

The materials center includes 8 and 16 mm films, filmstrips, slides, 
phonograph records, and pre-recorded tapes for use on campus. 
A central catalog and file of all materials available are maintained. 

Production services available include mounting of pictures (wet 
and dry), photocopying, tape recording and duplication, and the 
production of transparencies for overhead projectors. 

COMPUTER CENTER 

The Computer Center serves as a laboratory for instruction in 

computer science and data processing. In addition, it serves as 

a supportive agency for the administration and for the Office of 
the Registrar. 

READING CENTER 

The University maintains a reading center for university students 
and others who desire and need assistance in becoming more pro- 



THE INSTRUCTIONAL PROGRAM 



57 



ficient readers. Education 100, Developmental Reading, is offered 
through the facilities to help students realize a high level of reading 
which is needed for maximum participation in contemporary society 
and to help them experience greater academic success. Diagnostic 
and remedial services are available through the center for university 
students, high school, and elementary age pupils. The center also 
serves as a laboratory for teacher preparation. 




The General College 

O. K. Webb, Jr., Dean 



The General College supervises and administers academic advis- 
ing, student academic programs, and the general education curriculum 
for students at the freshman and sophomore levels. It also has respon- 
sibility for the administration of certain pre-professional programs. 

All freshman students entering the University are enrolled in the 
General College. Transfer students who do not meet the admission 
requirements of a degree granting college, enroll in the General Col- 
lege until such requirements are met. 

The General College is responsible for administering its students' 
academic affairs. Policy decisions in such matters, however, are 
made in cooperation with the dean of the college offering the courses 
in question. 

The college's program of academic advising provides services for 
students during their first two years of college life. During the fresh- 
man year, especially, the adviser will be available to help the student 
adjust to the university environment and assess his scholastic prob- 
lems wisely. Advisers are drawn from the academic faculties, and they 
help students plan academic programs. 

The General College provides an integrated curriculum which 
covers broad areas of knowledge, encompassing all the important 
fields needed by educated persons. 

In addition to the general education courses, students in the 
General College also take preparatory courses for specialized train- 
ing in their major and minor fields. It is important that the student 
be familiar with the degree requirements for the particular college 
from which he plans to graduate and to plan his program carefully. 
The specific requirements and course patterns for the different degrees 
are given in the sections of this catalog referring to the colleges 
which grant the degrees. The student is advised to consult these 
sections as he plans his program for the four years. 



THE GENERAL COLLEGE 



59 



GENERAL EDUCATION REQUIREMENTS 57-63 q.h. 

Courses in communication, humanities, mathematics, social science, 
natural science, and behavioral science are designed to give a student 
competence in communications and logical thinking, a broad acquaint- 
ance with the various components of human knowledge, an under- 
standing of our cultural and social heritage, and an opportunity to 
develop value judgments, constructive attitudes, and the ability to 
function purposefully in a democratic society. A student should make 
every effort to complete this program early in his college career. 

For all baccalaureate degrees, a student shall complete the follow- 
ing requirements in General Education. 

a. Communication 9 q.h. 

English 100, 110, 120 either must be completed or 
proficiency at the level of the courses demonstrated by 
examination. If proficiency is demonstrated by exami- 
nation, appropriate credit will be given without grade. 
Students who are candidates for teacher certification 
must also take Speech 101. 

b. Humanities* 18 q.h. 

Courses must be elected from at least three areas listed 
below. Two of the courses must be in literature. Ap- 
proved courses in literature are marked with an asterisk. 

Art 217, 301, 302, 303, 304, 306 

English, any course in literature 

English 217 (counts as a separate area) 

French *301, *302, *303; 305, 306; *401, *402, 
*403; *465, *467 

Music 217; 304-5-6 

Philosophy, any course subject to stated prerequisites 

Religion, any course subject to stated prerequisites. The 
following satisfy the literature requirement: *202, 
*203, *303, *304, *407 

Spanish *301, *302, *303; 305, 306; *401, *402, 
*403; 457; *461, *463 

Speech 206, 217; 310, 311, 312; 406 



60 



THE GENERAL COLLEGE 



c. Social Sciences 14-16 q.h. 

History 101, 102 or 103, 104 either must be completed 
or proficiency at the level of these courses demonstrated 
by examination. If proficiency is demonstrated by ex- 
amination, appropriate credit will be given without 
grade. 

If a student has completed a year of European or World 
History in high school with an average of B or better, 
he may meet the General Education requirement in his- 
tory by electing History 221, 222 or 231, 232. 

In addition, two courses must be selected from the list 
below. The courses must be from different areas. 

Anthropology 210, 315, 235, 245, 401 

Any course in economics, subject to stated prerequisites 

Geography 101, 102, 203, 216 

Any course in political science, subject to stated pre- 
requisites 

Any course in sociology, except 205 and 206, subject 
to stated prerequisites 

Psychology 201, 202; 450, 451 

d. Biological and Physical Sciences** 9-12 q.h. 

Courses must be selected from one of the areas listed 
below, subject to stated prerequisites: 

Biology (except 107, 207, 303, 450, 451, 452, 457, 

459, 475) 

Chemistry 

Geology 

Physical Science 

Physics 

e. Mathematics 4-5 q.h. 

Mathematics 101, 107, or 111 either must be com- 
pleted or proficiency at the level of these courses 
demonstrated by examination. If proficiency is demon- 
strated by examination, appropriate credit will be given 
without grade. 



THE GENERAL COLLEGE 



61 



f. Physical Education 3 q.h. 

Physical Education activity courses 

* Foreign language courses taken to meet other bachelor's degree 
graduation requirements may not serve to meet general education 
requirements. 

**In the program for applied music, this will be satisfied by a five 
quarter hour course in acoustics and sound offered by the Physics 
Department. 

Further requirements for the degrees are listed under the programs 
of the degree granting colleges. 

PROFICIENCY REQUIREMENTS AND SCREENING 

All students who are candidates for teacher certification must pass 
proficiency tests in reading, speech, and written English. Tests are 
given in speech and reading during the freshman and/or sophomore 
years and in written English during the sophomore year. Transfer 
students who are candidates for teacher certification also must pass 
these tests. 

Transfer students who have completed two full years of college 
will be required to pass the tests in reading and written English within 
the first two quarters after they are admitted. They must pass the test 
in speech within the first three quarters after they are admitted. If 
they do not pass the tests within the allotted time, they will be re- 
quired to withdraw from the University. 

The proficiency requirements and screening are administered by 
the Dean of the General College. 

PRE-PROFESSIONAL PROGRAMS 

It is possible for a student to obtain, at Appalachian, preparation 
for admission to professional schools in other institutions. In most 
instances a student may take two or more years at Appalachian prior 
to transfer to the professional school. In every instance, the student 
should consult the catalog and with the admission officer of the 
professional school as he plans his program. An adviser is available 
for each of the pre-professional programs listed below. 



62 



Legal 



THE GENERAL COLLEGE 



Law schools require a baccalaureate degree for admission. The 
degree may be either the Bachelor of Arts or the Bachelor of Science 
degree. No prescribed pre-law program is required by most law 
schools. Usually the need for a broad general education is emphasized. 

The student should choose his major in terms of his special interest 
in the field of law. It is recommended that his program include courses 
selected from economics and business, English, geography, history, 
mathematics, philosophy and religion, political science, science, soci- 
ology, and speech. Participation in the forensics program should be 
helpful to the pre-law student. 

Medical and Dental 

All medical and dental schools require at least three years of satis- 
factory undergraduate work at an accredited college or university. 
Most state that, all other things being equal, preference will be given 
to those completing a bachelor's degree with an academic major. 
Medical and dental education requires a background in the humanities 
and should not be limited to the sciences. The particular courses the 
student takes are not as important a criterion for admission to medical 
schools as the way he handles his undergraduate work. A B.A. 
curriculum should be followed. 

If they are not required in the program selected, the following 
courses should, nevertheless, be taken: Mathematics 111, 112, 211; 
Chemistry 101-102-103, 201-202-203, 210; Biology 202, 307; 
Physics 101-102-103; Psychology 201. Suggested electives: Psy- 
chology 205; Chemistry 301. 

Nursing 

In cooperation with the University of North Carolina at Greens- 
boro, Appalachian offers the first two years of a program leading 
to the bachelor of science in nursing degree. The following courses 
should be taken by students in this program: English 100, 110, 120, 
201, 202, 203; History 101, 102 or 103, 104; Modern Foreign Lan- 
guage 101-102-103, 104-105-106; Sociology 20 1 ; Anthropology 210; 
Sociology 203 or Anthropology 315; Biology 201-202-203, 301, 307; 
Chemistry 101-102-103; Mathematics 107; Psychology 201, 202; and 
six hours of physical education activity courses. 



THE GENERAL COLLEGE 

Pharmacy 



63 



A B.A. degree in pharmacy requires five years, three of which 
must be spent in residence at the school of pharmacy. The student 
should obtain a copy of the catalog of the school of pharmacy which 
he plans to attend and with his academic adviser adjust his course of 
study to meet his individual needs. 

It is suggested that the pre-pharmacy student take Chemistry 
101-102-103, 201-202-203, 210; Mathematics 107-108; Biology 
204-205-206; English 100, 110, 120; Physics 101-102-103; Eco- 
nomics 201-202-203. 

Engineering 

A student may take at Appalachian most of the work included in 
the first two years of engineering schools. It is important that the 
student who plans to pursue a program of studies leading to a degree 
in engineering be well prepared in mathematics and science. For 
this reason a beginning freshman who plans to follow this course of 
study must have a score of at least 600 of the SAT mathematics 
test and must pass a placement test in mathematics. 

The course of study for the freshman and sophomore years should 
include English 100, 110, 120; Physics 150-151-152, 212; Industrial 
Arts 101-102-103; Chemistry 101-102-103; Mathematics 111, 112, 
211-212-213 and 311-312-313; History 101, 102 or 103, 104 and 
Economics 201-202-203. The student should consult the catalog of 
the engineering school to which he plans to transfer and follow as 
closely as possible the course of study given there for his particular 
field of interest. 

Forestry 

In cooperation with North Carolina State University, Appalachian 
offers the first two years of a program leading to a bachelor's degree 
with a major in forestry. 

It is suggested that the pre-forestry student take Chemistry 101- 
102-103; Biology 101-102-103; English 100, 110, 120; Mathematics 
111, 112, 211-212-213; Economics 201-202-203; Physics 101-102- 
103; and electives in social science and the humanities. 

Students planning to transfer into the Pulp and Paper Technology 
curriculum should take Chemistry 101-102-103, Physics 211, 212, 



64 



THE GENERAL COLLEGE 



213; and should include Chemistry 201-202-203, Organic Chemistry, 
12 credits, in place of the sophomore electives. 

Students planning to enroll in Wood Technology should take 
Chemistry 201-202-203. 

Students planning to enroll in Recreation and Park Administra- 
tion are not required to take physics or calculus. 

Students in the Pre-Forestry curriculum must start their program 
at North Carolina State University with the Summer Camp which is 
prerequisite to junior standing. 

Planning 

Graduate schools of planning accept students with appropriate 
background in the area of social science. Appalachian provides a 
major in social science designed to give better than adequate prepara- 
tion for admission to leading institutions in the field. The program 
consists of a major in one of the social sciences and a minor of 24 
hours from a combination of the other social sciences. Required 
courses are: Geography 201, Introduction to Regional, State, and 
Local Planning; Geography 205, Statistical Methods (or Sociology 
205, or Political Science 205); and 18 hours selected from Geography 
203, Geography 216, Geography 311, Geography 312, Geography 
402, Geography 452, Sociology 310, Sociology 330, Sociology 403, 
Sociology 405, Sociology 450, Political Science 203, Political Science 
305, Political Science 306, Political Science 340, and Economics 455. 




Honors Program 



Honors Council: H. M. Smith, Director, L. Edwards, L. Hilton, 
J. Jackson, M. Newman, R. Richardson, K. Shipps, J. Stines, O. K. Webb. 



The University offers an Honors Program designed specifically for 
superior students. Participation in any part of this program is by 
invitation only; however, a student may petition to participate by 
directing the request to the Director of the Honors Program. 

The Honors Program at Appalachian is based on a two-fold 
approach: General Honors and Departmental Honors. General Hon- 
ors stresses an interdisciplinary or broad approach to learning, while 
Departmental Honors emphasizes depth. Course offerings in Depart- 
mental Honors are listed elsewhere in this catalog under the in- 
dividual departments. 

A General Honors student will take a six-quarter sequence of 
Interdisciplinary Seminars, each conducted by a team of professors. 
These seminars will satisfy 30 hours of General Education require- 
ments in humanities, history, and social science. Interdisciplinary 
Seminars at the junior and senior levels will be offered. Honors 
students who demonstrate satisfactory work in an honors seminar 
will receive a grade no lower than a B. 



COURSES OF INSTRUCTION FOR GENERAL HONORS 



191. The Nature of Man (5).F. 

An interdisciplinary seminar which will study selected literary and 
philosophical masterpieces concerning the nature of the individual, his 
behavior, and his sense of beauty. These subjects may be considered 
also from the point of view of religion and psychology, as well as 
philosophy. 

192. Man and the Universe (5).W. 

An interdisciplinary seminar concerning the development of scientific 
thought and its impact on man's concept of the universe and man's 
relation with his environment. Several basic theories will be emphasized. 



66 



HONOR PROGRAM 



193. Human Organization 



(5).S. 



An interdisciplinary seminar dealing with man's struggle to understand 
his fellow man in social and political contexts by a study of selected 
social and political problems. The areas of history, political science, 
sociology, and cultural anthropology will be involved in this study. 



291. Men and Movements in History 

292. Change and Continuity in Human Society 

293. The Domain of the Arts 



(5).F. 
(5).W. 

(5).S. 




The College of Arts and Sciences 

William C. Strickland, Dean 



In cooperation with other colleges of the University, the College 
of Arts and Sciences strives: 

To provide a liberal education for all Appalachian students. 

To offer instruction appropriate for specialization in the natural 
sciences, social sciences, humanities, and mathematics. 

To prepare students for certain professions. 

To prepare students for entrance into certain professional 
schools. 

To prepare students for graduate study and research. 



DEPARTMENTS 

The College of Arts and Sciences consists of the following twelve 
departments: 

Biology Mathematics 

Chemistry Philosophy and Religion 

English Physics 

Foreign Languages Political Science 

Geography and Geology Psychology 

History Sociology and Anthropology 

DEGREES OFFERED 

The College of Arts and Sciences offers the Bachelor of Arts 
degree with a major in each of these twelve departments. In 
cooperation with the College of Education it offers the Bachelor of 
Science degree with teacher certification in biology; chemistry; 
English; French; history; mathematics; physics; Spanish; science 
with concentration in biology, chemistry, earth science, or physics; 
and social science with concentration in geography, political science, 
or sociology and anthropology. 



68 



THE COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES 



To be admitted to the College of Arts and Sciences as a candidate 
for a baccalaureate degree a student must have: 

1. Completed at least 90 quarter hours. 

2. A quality-point ratio of at least 2.0 (which much be main- 
tained). 

3. Completed 

a. English 100, 110, 120 

b. Six hours of literature 

c. Completion of general education requirements in history 

d. Mathematics 101 or 107 

e. A year of natural science 

f. Three quarter hours of physical education activity courses. 

4. Been accepted by a department in the college as a major in 
that department. 

If a student does not satisfy all of these conditions, he may, with 
the approval of the dean of the college, be admitted provisionally. 

A student admitted provisionally must remove any deficiency by 
the beginning of his tenth quarter at Appalachian. If he does not, he 
is not eligible for continued enrollment. 

A student who is a candidate for a teaching certificate must be 
admitted to the teacher education program by the Chairman of the 
Department of Teacher Education. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

To earn the Bachelor of Arts degree in the College of Arts and 
Sciences, the student must meet the following requirements: 

1. Completion of at least 183 quarter hours with a grade point 
average of at least 2.0. A transfer student must have at least 
a 2.0 grade-point average on all work at Appalachian. 

2. Completion of general education requirements. 

3. Completion of nine quarter hours of a second year of foreign 
language or higher. The Department of Foreign Languages 
places students at the level which they are prepared to perform 
regardless of previously earned units. 



THE COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES 



69 



4. Completion of a major consisting of 36 to 60 quarter hours 
from one of the fields listed below: 



Biology 


Philosophy 


Chemistry 


Physics 


English 


Political Science 


French 


Psychology 


Geography 


Religion 


Geology 


Sociology and Anthropology 


History 


Spanish 


Mathematics 





A student must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on all 
work in the major at Appalachian. A transfer student must 
complete at least 12 quarter hours of work in his major at 
Appalachian and must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average 
on all work in the major at Appalachian. Specific requirements 
for each departmental major preface the list of courses offered 
by the department. 

5. Completion of a minor consisting of 18 to 27 quarter hours 
from a department other than a department in Education. 
A transfer student must complete at least 6 quarter hours in 
his minor at Appalachian. 

6. Electives to complete 183 quarter hours. 

7. Completion of residence requirements. 

8. Compliance with regulations concerning satisfactory citizenship 
and settlement of all expense accounts. 

9. Recommendation of the faculty. 

10. Take the Aptitude Test and the appropriate Advanced Test, if 
available, of the Graduate Record Examination. 

Meeting graduation requirements is the student's responsibility. 

A candidate for the Bachelor of Arts degree may qualify for a 
teaching certificate by admission to professional education courses 
through the Chairman of the Department of Teacher Education and 
by completing all academic and professional education requirements 
for certification. 



70 



THE COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCES 



BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE 

(with teacher certification; B.S."b" program) 

For the requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree with teacher 
certification (B.S."b") see page 163. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 

Courses are listed by departments in alphabetical order. Courses 
numbered 100 to 199 inclusive are normally offered for freshmen; 
200 to 299 for sophomores; 300 to 399 for juniors; 400 to 499 for 
seniors; 300 to 499 for graduate students with the approval of 
adviser; and 500 and above for graduate students. Courses open to 
lower classes are also open to upper classes. For courses numbered 
500 and above the name of the professor who ordinarily teaches 
the course is given in italics following the course description. 

The figure in brackets preceding a course title indicates the 
course number used in the catalog of 1970-71. 

The figure in parentheses after the course title tells the credit in 
quarter hours; for example the figure (3) means three quarter hours. 

Quarters of the year in which the course is offered are represented 
by symbols: "F" for fall quarter, "W" for winter quarter, "S" for 
spring quarter, "SS" for summer session, "Ex" for extension. 

A hyphen in the course number, credit, and quarters of the 
year in which the course is offered indicates that the course extends 
through two or more quarters and that the preceding quarter must 
be completed before the following quarter can be taken. 

The comma in the course number, credit, and quarters indicates 
that the course is continuous but that one quarter may be taken 
independently of another. 

The semicolon in the quarters offered indicates that the course 
is a one quarter course and is repeated in a subsequent quarter. 

Special requirements for admission to a course are stated after 
the word prerequisite. 

The administration reserves the right to withdraw courses for 
which there is insufficient enrollment. 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 
DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 



71 



R. Derrick, Chairman, R. Blackburn, I. Carpenter, Jr., J. Cornell, Jr., 
S. Glover, F. Helseth, R. Henson, W. Hubbard, H. Hurley, J. Martin, 
F. Montaldi, J. Randall, K. Robinson, T .Vergeer. 

The objectives of the Department of Biology are to provide a 
cultural background in the life sciences as a part of every student's 
general education; to prepare students to teach biology; to prepare 
students to meet admission requirements of professional schools; 
to prepare professional biologists; to provide courses in biology for 
teacher certification in other areas such as home economics, physical 
education, and science. 

A major in biology leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree 
consists of 38 quarter hours in biology in courses numbered above 
the 100 level. This must include 201-202-203, 204-205-206, 20 
quarter hours in electives in biology. In addition, the biology major 
must take Chemistry 101-102-103, Physics 101-102-103, and 
Math 107. 

A minor in biology consists of 18 quarter hours above 100 level 
courses, including 201-202, 204-205, and six quarter hours in elec- 
tives in biology. 

A major in biology leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and 
teacher certification consists of 40 quarter hours above the 100 level. 
This must include 201-202-203, 204-205-206, 301, 307, 308, 309, 
454, 455. Inaddition, the biology major must take Chemistry 101- 
102-103, Physics 101-102-103, and Math 107. 

For the curriculum for a major in science and concentration in 
biology leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and teacher 
certification see page 171. 

A major in biology for the master's degree consists of a minimum 
of 36 quarter hours in biology. Required courses include Biology 
454, 455, 500, 501, 503, 505 or 506, 514. 

A major in biology for a Specialist in Science Degree consists of 
a minimum of 36 quarter hours in biology. Required courses include 
610 and 612. (For further information see graduate catalog.) 



72 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 



COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN BIOLOGY 
AND GENERAL SCIENCE 

BIOLOGY 

101-102-103. Introduction to Life Science (3-3-3 ).F-W-S;SS. 

A survey of living organisms and their relationship to each other and 
to their environment. Study of topics from morphology, physiology, 
embryology, and genetics with particular reference to man and healthful 
living. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 

107. Biology (4).F;W;S;SS. 

An experimental approach to the basic concepts of life science that 
are applicable to the elementary school curriculum. Restricted to 
elementary education majors. Lecture three hours, laboratory two hours. 

201. Invertebrate Zoology (3).F. 
The taxonomy, morphology, and physiology of the invertebrates. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 101-102-103. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 

202. Vertebrate Zoology ( 3 ) .W. 
The taxonomy, anatomy, physiology, and natural history of the verte- 
brates. Prerequisite: Biology 101-102-103. Lecture two hours, laboratory 
two hours. 

203. Animal Ecology (3).S. 

A study of ecological principles, interrelationships, environmental fac- 
tors, and distribution of animals. Prerequisite: Biology 101-102-103. 
Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours, 2nd field work. 

204. Introductory Botany (3).F. 
Historical backgrounds of botany, principles of cytology, physiology, 
anatomy, and morphology of the seed plants. Prerequisite: Biology 
101-102-103. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 

205. Survey of Plant Kingdom (3).W. 
A phylogenetic approach to the reproduction, anatomy, and morphology 
of representative plants from each division. Prerequisite: Biology 204. 
Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 

206. Phytoecology (3).S. 
Principles of phytoecology covering such major topics as plant succession, 
plant communities, water relations, energy flow, natural vegetation, 
plant geography and economic botany. Prerequisite: Biology 204, 
205. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 

207. Economic Biology (3).F. 
A study of plants and animals as they affect food, clothing, and 
shelter. For home economics majors only. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 



73 



301. Introductory Animal Physiology (4).W;S. 
Fundamental principles of animal physiology. Prerequisites: Biology 
101-102 103 and Chemistry 101-102-103. Lecture three hours, laboratory 
two hours. 

302. Animal Physiology (4).S. 
Maintenance systems. Prerequisite: Biology 301. Lecture three hours, 
laboratory two hours. 

303. Non Vascular Cryptogams (3).F. 
A morphological and taxonomic investigation of the Algae, Liverworts, 
and Mosses. Techniques of identification, collection, and preservation 
will be stressed in the laboratory. Lecture two hours, laboratory two 
hours. 

304. 305. Systematic Botany (3,3).W,S. 
The general principles of the taxonomy of the vascular plants, utilizing 
elements of the local flora as laboratory material in the consideration of 
identification, nomenclature, classification, and evolutionary mechanisms. 
Prerequisite: Biology 204. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours 
(each course). 

306. Comparative Entomology (3).F. 
A comparative survey of the Insecta and related arthropods with an 
emphasis on morphology and systematics. Methods of collecting and 
preserving insects are covered. Prerequisite: Biology 101-102-103, or 
permission of instructor. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 

307. Vertebrate Anatomy (4).F;W. 
A comparative study of the origin, evolution, and present condition of 
the vertebrate structures. Prerequisite: Biology 201-202-203. Lecture 
three hours, laboratory two hours. 

308. Bacteriology (4).F;S;SS. 

A study of the morphology and physiology of bacteria and their relation 
to man. Prerequisite: Biology 101-102-103 and Chemistry 101-102-103. 
Lecture three hours, laboratory two hours. 

309. Embryology (3).W;S. 
Gametogenesis, fertilization, and structural development of the vertebrate 
embryo. Prerequisite: Biology 101-102-103. Lecture two hours, labora- 
tory two hours. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

350. Biological Science Investigations (5).S. 

A course designed expressly for elementary majors who choose their 
academic concentration in science. Topics from modern biology which 
are introduced in the upper elementary school will be stressed. Pre- 
requisite: Biology 107 and Physical Science 101-102-103. Lecture four 
hours, laboratory two hours. 



74 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 



450. Nature Study (3).SS. 
Observation of common plants and animals, methods of collecting, 
organizing, and presenting nature study materials in the grades. Not 
open to biology majors for credit. 

451. Ornithology (3).S;SS. 
An introduction to the anatomy, physiology, behavior, ecology and 
identification of birds. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. Early 
morning and at least one Saturday all-day field trips are required. 

452. Microtechnique (3).F;SS. 
Technical methods used in preparing materials for microscopic study; 
practical training in preparation of permanent slides of small organisms 
and tissue of higher organisms. Lecture two hours, laboratory four 
hours. 

453. Histology (3).W;SS. 
Microscopic anatomy of the vertebrate body, including a study of the 
principle tissues and organs. Prerequisite: Senior standing and twenty- 
four quarter hours of undergraduate biology. Lecture two hours, 
laboratory two hours. 

454. Genetics (3).F;S;SS. 
A study of principles of variation and heredity governing plants and 
animals with special reference to man. Prerequisite: Biology 101-102- 
103. 

455. Plant Physiology (4).W;S;SS. 

A study of the basic principles of plant physiology and fundamental 
processes such as cell properties, water relations, growth, photo- 
synthesis, respiration, and mineral nutrition. Prerequisite: Biology 204- 
205-206 and Chemistry 101-102-103. Lecture three hours, laboratory 
two hours. 

457. Ichthyology (3).S;SS. 
Taxonomy, distribution, and ecology of fresh-water fishes of eastern 
North America. Management practices will be emphasized. Prerequisite: 
Senior standing and twenty-four hours of undergraduate biology. 

458. Radiation Biology (3).W;SS. 
A study of the use of radioisotopes in biological systems. Laboratory 
six hours. 

459. Mammalogy (3).W;SS. 
The natural history, adaptations, taxonomy, and economic importance 
of mammals. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. Field projects 
are required. 

475. Anatomy and Physiology of the Receptors and Voice 

Mechanism (3).F;SS. 

For special education majors, speech majors, and also an elective for 
biology majors. The study of the organs and tissues involved in human 
communication, normal and defective. 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 

GRADUATE COURSES 



75 



500. Bibliography and Research (3).F;SS. 
A study of bibliographical problems, types of research, the literature 
and methods of scientific writing. Required in the first quarter of 
beginning graduate students. Cornell. 

501. Advanced Animal Ecology (3).F;SS. 
Population analysis, population dynamics, simulated environments, com- 
munity ecology, wildlife management, and environmental modifications 
and adaptations. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. Randall. 

502. Fresh Water Biology (3).SS. 
A study of the physical, chemical, and biological factors affecting 
productivity in lakes, ponds, and streams. Largely a field course dealing 
with various approved methods of studying fresh water. Lecture two 
hours, field work two hours. Derrick. 

503. Bacteriolog of Water, Milk, Food, and Sewage. (4).W;SS. 
Laboratory and field methods dealing with the sanitary aspects of 
foods and food handling; sources and kinds of bacteria in milk, water, 
and sewage with their sanitary significance. Prerequisite: three hours 
of undergraduate bacteriology. Lecture three hours, laboratory two 
hours. Montaldi. 

504. Taxonomy of Vascular Plants (3).SS. 
A study of the gross structure, reproduction, and development of the 
spermatophytes. Special emphasis is placed upon the classification and 
nomenclature of the spermatophytes. Lecture two hours, field work 
two hours. Carpenter. 

505. Animal Physiology I (3).W;SS. 
Physiology of the sensory, nervous, muscular, and circulatory systems; 
laboratory experiments, reports, and readings. Lecture two hours, 
laboratory two hours. Vergeer. 

506. Animal Physiology II (3).S;SS. 
Physiology of respiration, elimentation, excretion, reproduction and 
hormone coordination. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 
Vergeer. 

509. Evolution (3).F;SS. 
Evidences of organic evolution will be considered and evaluated from 
the paleontological, morphological, and physiological standpoints. 
Randall. 

510. Entomology (3).SS. 
Biology and systematics of the Insecta and related Arthropoda with 
emphasis on techniques of collecting, rearing, and identifying common 
insects. Collection required. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 
Cornell. 



76 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 



512. Local Flora (3).SS. 

A course designed specifically for elementary school teachers. A study 
of the common flora and economic plants of North Carolina including 
the collection, common name identification, and methods of preservation. 
Lecture two hours, laboratory and field work two hours. Robinson. 

514. Plant Anatomy and Morphology (3).S;SS. 
A general survey of the external and internal structure of plants; 
detailed study of anatomy and morphology of representative plants from 
all the divisions. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. Carpenter. 

515. Plant Ecology (3).SS. 
A study of units of vegetation and plant succession; factors of the 
habitat; soils and climate; taxonomy of local flora and preparation of 
the herbarium material. Lecture, laboratory, and field work five hours. 
Hurley. 

517. Parasitology (3).F;SS. 
A survey of protozoan, helminthic and arthropod parasites with emphasis 
on causation and prevention of disease. Lecture two hours, laboratory 
two hours. Vergeer. 

518. Advanced Genetics (3).W. 
A review of basic genetic concepts and an extensive investigation of 
recent advances in animal and plant genetics. Lecture two hours, 
laboratory two hours. Martin. 

519. Comparative Invertebrate Embryology (3).F. 
An advanced course in comparative embryology of the vertebrates. 
Derrick. 

520. Cellular Physiology (3).W;SS. 
A study of the fundamental physiological processes at the cellular level. 
Hubbard. 

522. Cryptogamic Botany (4).S. 

Taxonomy, Morphology, and Ecology of the cryptogamic flora ex- 
clusive of the fungi. Lecture three hours, laboratory two hours. Car- 
penter. 

524. Advanced Plant Physiology (5).F. 

Prerequisite: Biology 455. An advanced treatment of the physiology 
of growth and development of higher plants, with emphasis on the 
biochemistry of the essential elements. Helseth. 

530. Seminar (1).F;W;S. 

Presentation of one research paper for each year of full-time graduate 
study. One hour credit given during quarter in which paper is pre- 
sented. Required of all graduate students. 

535. History of Biology (3).S;SS. 

A survey of the history of biology with special emphasis upon experi- 
ments which have led to the discovery of the more important biological 
principles and concepts. Robinson. 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY / / 

548. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;.SS. 

Graduate students with an approved subject of investigation may 
register for this course. The work is subject to their individual needs. 
Limit of eight hours credit. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;S. 

601. Biogeography (3).F. 

The biological, climatological, geographic, and geological factors which 
effect the distribution of animal and plants. Patterns of distribution will 
be studied in relation to various sizes of geological units. Randall. 

603. Advanced Invertebrate Zoology (3).W. 

Morphology, Physiology, life cycles, systematics, and ecology of inverte- 
brates (exclusive of insects). Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 
Henson. 

605. Mycology (3).S. 

An investigation of the fungi with particular reference to the techniques 
of working with these organisms. Lecture two hours, laboratory two 
hours. Carpenter. 

607. Plant Growth and Development (4).S. 

Growth regulatory substances, morphogenetic stimuli, quantitative inter- 
pretations of growth, totipotency and diversification in cultured cells. 
Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. Helseth. 

610. Advanced Seminar (3).W. 

Lectures, readings and discussions dealing with biological principles and 
theories. Staff. 

612. Advanced Independent Study (3).F;W;S. 

Student selects an area of investigation which must be approved by 
instructor and advisor. 

614. Comparative Animal Physiology (4).W. 

A study of physiological adaptations among phyla of animals, including 
basic principles of irritability, coordination and regeneration, hormonal 
control, and responses to environmental factors. Hubbard. 

616. Principles of Animal Taxonomy (4).F. 

A treatment of modern evolutionary systematics emphasizing numerical 
phenetics, serology, cladistic theories of Henning, and practical problems 
of using the International Code of Zoological Nomenclature. Lecture 
three hours, laboratory two hours. Cornell. 

618. Advanced Bacteriology (4). 

Modern techniques and procedures in bacteriology, including instru- 
mental and biochemical methods of analysis and interpretation of data. 
King. 

624. Insect Physiology (4).S. 

Special physiological processes peculiar to insects and other arthropods. 
Lecture three hours, laboratory two hours. Glover. 



78 



DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY 

APPROVED ELECTIVES FROM CHEMISTRY 

454-455. Biochemistry 

506-507. Organic Reaction Mechanisms 

GENERAL SCIENCE 

401. Methods of Elementary School Science (3).F;W;S. 

A survey of scientific principles and concepts suitable for the elementary 
grades. Emphasis is placed upon the construction of units for the 
various grade levels, methods of teaching these units, related demon- 
strations and experiments, and the correlation of the science units with 
other instructional areas. 

450. Science in the Elementary School (3).SS;Ex. 

A course designed for teachers with limited science background. Basic 
concepts, use of simple materials for demonstrations, and the problem 
solving approach are stressed. Lecture and demonstration three hours. 
Available as a workshop. 

507. Science in the Junior High School (3).SS;Ex. 

A laboratory course designed to aid junior high school personnel in 
developing an experimental approach to science. Emphasis will be 
placed upon personnel gaining appropriate skills, and academic com- 
petency to motivate open-ended investigations for groups and individuals. 
Available as a workshop. 



79 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND 
PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

G. Miles, Chairman, G. Atwood, H. Bowkley, M. Denton, J. Johnson, 
A. Overbay, D. Olander, D. Sink, R. Soeder, A. Suttle. 

The objectives of the Department of Chemistry are: 

1. To prepare students to teach chemistry at the high school and 
junior college levels. 

2. To prepare students for continuing their study of chemistry at 
the graduate level. 

3. To prepare chemistry graduates for careers in industry and 
scientific research. 

4. To provide supporting and/or enriching courses in other areas. 

A major in chemistry leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree con- 
sists of 47 quarter hours above the General Chemistry (101-102- 
103). The required courses are Chemistry 201-202-203, 210, 301- 
302-303, 400, 404, and 410 and 12 quarter hours selected from other 
chemistry courses. The chemistry major must take Physics 150-151, 
152; an additional nine to 12 hours in either Biology (301, 308, 454 
recommended), Geology or Physics (470 and 471 not accepted) and 
Mathematics 111-112-211-212-213. 

A minor in chemistry consists of 18 quarter hours above General 
Chemistry. (Chemistry 210 recommended.) 

A major in chemistry leading to the Bachelor of Science degree 
and teacher certification consists of 32 quarter hours above general 
chemistry. The required courses are Chemistry 201, 210, 301, 404 
and 17 quarter hours selected from the other chemistry courses. The 
chemistry major must take a year of physics, Biology 101-102-103 
and Mathematics 111-112-211-212-213. 

For the curriculum for a major in science and concentration in 
chemistry leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and teacher 
certification see page 170. 

In the Master of Arts degree in the junior college teaching pro- 
gram, a major in chemistry consists of a minimum of 45 quarter 
hours of credit. The 45 quarter hours credit includes a thesis for 
six hours credit. A minimum of six quarter hours credit is required 



80 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE 



in education and psychology (12 quarter hours credit required for 
secondary certification). The following chemistry courses are re- 
quired: 450 or equivalent; 460, 502 (to be taken fall term of first 
year); 504; 506; 510; 513 or 514; and 550. 

In the Master of Science degree program, a major in chemistry 
consists of 45 quarter hours of courses including six quarter hours 
credit for research and thesis. The following chemistry courses are 
required of all candidates for this degree: 450 or equivalent; 504; 
506; 510; 513 or 514; 530 and 550. The remaining quarter hours, 
for a total of 45 quarter hours, will be elected from courses in 
chemistry numbered 450 and above, Physics 453 and Mathematics 
461 and 462. 

All graduate students are required to participate in weekly seminar 
discussion periods each quarter in residence. 

All master's degree candidates must pass comprehensive exami- 
nations in the four major fields of chemistry: inorganic, organic, 
analytical and physical. Each must present and defend his thesis 
before the chemistry faculty. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN CHEMISTRY AND 
PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

CHEMISTRY 

101-102-103. General Chemistry (4-4-4). F-W-S. 

A study of the fundamental principles of chemistry emphasizing modern 
atomic theory, the structure and behavior of atoms, and the classifica- 
tion of chemical substances derived from their properties, structure, etc. 
Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 

Laboratory sections numbered below 40 are designed to augment the 
information presented in the lectures and to meet the needs of students 
in all curricula. 

Laboratory sections numbered above 40 are designed to provide an op- 
portunity for the student to engage in more individually oriented experi- 
ments requiring an interest above the ordinary. 

Students, regardless of their curriculum, are free to elect either labora- 
tory in any of the three terms within the year. Each student is judged 
on the basis of performance in the laboratory he or she has chosen. 

111-112-113. Applied Science ( 5-5-5 ) .F-W-S. 

A study of fundamental principles of science. Fundamentals of In- 
organic, Physical, Organic and Biochemistry. Basic principles of me- 
chanics, heat, electricity and magnetism. Credit only for home economics 
majors. Lecture three hours, laboratory 4 hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE 



81 



201-202-203. Organic Chemistry (4-4-4). F-W-S. 

Organic chemical theory as related to structure and methods of deter- 
mining structure and reaction processes introduced in Chemistry 201. 
Functional group and type compounds used to extend the study into 
a survey of organic chemistry in Chemistry 202 and 203. Laboratory 
practices in class reactions and synthesis. Prerequisite: Chemistry 101- 
102-103. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 

210. Quantitative Analysis (4).S. 

An introduction to analytical chemistry, including equilibria, Beer's 
law and oxidation reduction reactions; the basic methods of quanti- 
tative analysis are introduced and practiced with laboratory unknowns. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 101-102-103. Lecture three hours, laboratory 
three hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

301-302-303. Physical Chemistry (4-4-4). F-W-S. 

Chemistry 301 — Mathematical treatment of the theories underlying the 
thermodynamic properties and behavior of gases, liquids, and solids. 
Chemistry 302 and 303 — The treatment of electrochemistry, kinetic 
theory, chemical kinetics, photochemistry, quantum mechanics, mole- 
cular structure methods (photometric, electrometric, infrared, x-ray 
diffraction, nuclear magnetic resonance), colloid chemistry and nuclear 
chemistry. Prerequisites: Mathematics 213 and a year of physics. 
Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 

307. Scientific Glass Blowing (1).S. 

Provides the student with an opportunity to learn the properties of 
scientific glasses with respect to performing simple glass working oper- 
ations. Prerequisite: Chemistry 103 and permission of the instructor. 
Laboratory three hours. 

310. Introduction to Chemical Literature (1).S. 

Introduction to the nature and extent of the chemical literature. Indi- 
vidual library investigations and assignments in primary, secondary 
and tertiary sources of information. Lecture one hour. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit) .F;W;S;SS. 

400. Senior Research (3).F,W,S. 
A laboratory research project under the supervision of a staff member. 
A written report of the results to be submitted to the chemistry faculty 
at the end of the quarter. Chemistry major with senior standing. 

401. Analytical Chemistry (4).F. 
A study of some modern methods of separation and determination, 
including ion exchange, liquid-liquid extraction, and absorption chroma- 
tography. Prerequisite: Chemistry 210. Lecture three hours, laboratory 
three hours. 

404. Inorganic Chemistry (3).F. 

A study of the elements and their compounds based upon the periodic 
properties of the elements and other topics. Lecture three hours. Pre- 
requisite: Chemistry 101-102-103. 



82 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE 



410. Senior Seminar (1).F,W,S. 

Weekly seminar meetings jointly with faculty and graduate students. 
One formal presentation on topic of current interest and importance 
in chemistry. Chemistry major with senior standing. 

450. Qualitative Organic Analysis (4).F. 

A systematic procedure for the identification of organic compounds. 
Laboratory practice in identifying pure organic compounds and mix- 
tures. Prerequisite: Chemistry 201-202-203. Lecture two hours, labora- 
tory six hours. 

452. Instrumental Methods of Analysis (4).W. 
A study of some of the modern instrumental methods of analysis, 
including electrochemistry, spectrophotometry, magnetic resonance spec- 
troscopy and mass spectrometry. Prerequisite: Chemistry 210. Lecture 
three hours, laboratory three hours. 

453. X-ray Analysis of Crystal Structure (4).S. 
Introduction to the theory of space groups and x-ray diffraction by 
crystalline solids. Laboratory work in the application of principles. 
Prerequisite: Analytical geometry, Differential and Integral Calculus, 
Physics 150-151, 152. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 

454-455. Biochemistry (4-4). W-S. 

Properties and metabolism of carbohydrates, lipids and proteins; chem- 
istry of body fluids; biologically active compounds. Prerequisite: Chem- 
istry 201-202-203. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 

457. Laboratory Preparations (1).F,W,S. 

Three hours of laboratory. 

460. [509] History of Chemistry (3).S. 

A study of the development of Chemistry as a science with emphasis 
on the development of basic concepts, ideas and theories. Lecture three 
hours. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

502. Chemical Literature (1)-F. 

To be taken fall term of first year. Lecture one hour. Staff. 

504. Chemical Bond Theories. Sink. (3).F. 

506-507. Organic Reaction Mechanisms. Soeder. (3-3).F-W. 

510. Chemical Thermodynamics. Johnson. (3).W. 

514. Quantum Chemistry (3).W. 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 301-302-303. Johnson. 

513. Optical Methods of Chemical Analysis (4).F. 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 452. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 
Olander. 



DEPARTMENT OF CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICAL SCIENCE 



83 



514. Electrical Methods of Chemical Analysis (4).S. 
Prerequisite: Chemistry 452. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 
Olander. 

515. Electro Chemistry (4).F. 
Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. Johnson. 

518. Radiochemistry (4).S. 

Prerequisite: Chemistry 301-302-303. Lecture three hours, laboratory 
three hours. Olander. 

520. Chemical Kinetics (3 or 4).F. 

Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours (optional). Johnson. 

523. Colloidal Chemistry. Johnson. (3).S. 

530. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. Bowkley. (3).S. 

548. Independent Study. Staff. (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis. Staff. (6).F;W;S;SS. 

PHYSICAL SCIENCE 

101-102-103. Man and His Physical Environment ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 
An integrated perspective of the physical science, study of selected 
topics such as systems of measurement, the expanding universe, struc- 
ture of the earth, kinetic molecular theory of elements and compounds, 
structures and utilization of atoms. The role of science in the develop- 
ment of civilization. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. 



84 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 

L. Hilton, Chairman, R. Akers, B. Boyle, L. Brashear, D. Campbell, 
M. Carriker, A. Coulthard, M. Dunlap, G. Edwards, D. Eggers, 
D. Frantz, S. Harris, H. Heymann, M. Higby, O. Holton, D. Hurley, 
P. Knecht, H. Lilly, S. Logan, J. MacBryde, B. McFarland, M. Moore, 
L. Reed, J. Trimpey, J. VanNoppen, C. Waterworth, J. West, R. Whitener, 
C. Williams, H. Williams; J. Williamson. 

The aim of the Department of English is to give students com- 
petency in written and oral composition and in the interpretation and 
appreciation of literature. 

A major in English leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree consists 
of 57 hours in English above the freshman level, 12 of which may 
be applied toward satisfying the humanities requirement in General 
Education. Required courses are English 201, 202, 203, 204, 206, 
301, 302, 303, 401, 466, two courses in contemporary literature, 
two courses in Shakespeare, and 15 elective hours in English. Re- 
quired also are History 201 and 202. 

A minor in English consists of 27 hours in English above the 
freshman level, 12 of which may be applied toward satisfying the 
humanities requirement in General Education. Required courses are 
English 201, 202, 203, 301, 302, 303, and nine elective hours in 
English. 

A major in English leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and 
teacher certification consists of 57 hours in English above the fresh- 
man level, 12 of which may be applied toward satisfying the humani- 
ties requirement in General Education. Required courses are English 
201, 202, 203, 204, 206, 301, 302, 303, 401, 466, two courses in 
contemporary literature, two courses in Shakespeare, and 15 elective 
hours in English. Required also are History 201, 202, Education 462, 
Library Science 467, and nine quarter hours of a foreign language 
beyond the elementary course. 

The Department of English requires as a prerequisite for graduate 
work an undergraduate major in English equivalent to that available 
at Appalachian State University. Two master's degrees are offered, 
the Master of Science degree for persons wishing courses in pro- 
fessional education as well as English, and the Master of Arts degree 
for persons wishing courses in English alone or with an optional 
minor in a related academic field. 

For the Master of Science degree, a minimum of 36 quarter hours 
(33 with a thesis) of English must be offered, including English 500, 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 



85 



Bibliography and Research; English 466, History of the English 
Language; and either English 512, Literary Criticism or English 521, 
Twentieth-Century Literary Criticism. 

For the Master of Arts degree, a minimum of 45 quarter hours of 
graduate credit must be offered. These may include a minor of up to 
nine quarter hours in a related discipline. They also will include six 
quarter hours credit for the thesis, which is required. Required 
courses in the field are English 500, Bibliography and Research; 
English 466, History of the English Language; and either English 
512, Literary Criticism or English 521, Twentieth-Century Literary 
Criticism. In addition to course work, each candidate will demon- 
strate proficiency in reading a foreign language. 

For requirements concerning the final comprehensive examination 
on the thesis, see the discussion of these elsewhere in this bulletin, 
or consult the chairman of the department. 

The Department of English offers an honors program on the 
freshman, sophomore, junior, and senior levels. Students meeting 
the requirements of the Junior-Senior Honors Program (English 
391, 392, 393, and 491) with a grade of B or A will graduate with 
"Honors" or "Highest Honors" in English. 

191. Freshman Honors Seminar (3). 

Development of individual research and original critical thought; com- 
position. Collateral reading in English, American, or World literature. 
Members selected by the Department of English. 

291. Sophomore Honors Seminar in English Literature (3).F. 

292. Sophomore Honors Seminar in American Literature (3).W. 

293. Sophomore Honors Seminar in World Literature (3).S. 
Members for English 291, 292, and 293 selected by the Department 
of English. 

391-392-393. Junior Honors Seminar ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

Two in-depth units each quarter on major English, American, or World 
authors, genres, or literary movements. Intradepartmental instruction. 
Content varies each quarter. By invitation or application. 

491. Senior Honors Thesis (3). 

Independent study and research. Honors thesis directed by a member 
of the English Department and graded by a departmental committee. 
Oral examination. Prerequisite: Completion of English 391, 392, and 
393 with at least a B average. 



86 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 
COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN ENGLISH 

010. Laboratory in Writing (0).F;W;S. 

100. [101] Elementary Composition (3).F;W;S. 

110. [102] Rhetoric (3).F;W;S. 

The skills and techniques of effective written composition. 

120. [103] Introduction to Literature (3).F;W;S. 

Reading and analysis in the four major genres: Short story, novel, 
poetry, and drama. 

201. English Literature (3).F;W;S. 
A study of major writers from the beginning of English literature 
through Milton. 

202. English Literature (3).F;W;S. 
A study of major writers from Dryden through Keats. 

203. English Literature (3).F;W;S. 
A study of major writers from Tennyson to the present. 

204. Continental Literature (3).F;W;S. 
A study in translation of masterpieces of classical European literature. 

205. Elements of Journalism (3).F;W. 
Writing news stories, editorials, features, and reviews; make-up of school 
and college newspapers. 

206. Advanced Composition (3).F;W;S. 

210. Modern Drama (3).S. 

A study of major works from Ibsen to date. 

212. Black Literature (3).S. 

A critical study of the work of significant Negro writers. 

216. Continental Fiction (3).W. 
A study of major works, in translation, from 1850 to the present, with 
emphasis on the short story. 

217. Cinema Appreciation (3).F;W. 
A critical approach to cinema as an art form. 

220. Creative Writing (3).W. 

An^, introductory course in writing poetry and fiction, specifically the 
short .story, with emphasis on the techniques. 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 



87 



221. Creative Writing (3).S. 

An advanced course in writing. Students may project a novel or work 
in poetry, drama, or the short story. Prerequisite: English 220. 

226. The Popular Novel (3).F. 
A critical study of selected recent best-sellers. 

227. Recent Poetry (3).W. 
A critical study of the poetry of the last two decades. 

228. Oriental Literature (3).S. 
A study of selected writings, in translation, which are representative of 
Oriental thought. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

301. American Literature (3).F. 
A study of major writers from the Puritans through Thoreau. 

302. American Literature (3).W. 
A study of major writers from Hawthorne through James. 

303. American Literature (3).S. 
A study of major writers from Dickinson to the present. 

304. Twentieth-Century American Poetry (3).W;S. 

305. Twentieth-Century American Fiction (3).S. 
307. Advanced English Grammar (3).F;S. 

314. Twentieth-Century English Poetry (3).F. 

315. Twentieth-Century English Fiction (3).F;W. 
348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

401. Modern English Grammar (3).F;W;S. 

402. Seminar, English Literature (3).F. 
(May be repeated for credit as content varies.) 

403. Seminar, American Literature (3).W. 
(May be repeated for credit as content varies.) 

405. Seventeenth Century English Poetry (3).W. 

450. Medieval Literature (3).S. 

451. Chaucer (3).F. 
Reading and interpretation of selections from The Canterbury Tales. 



88 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 



452. Shakespeare's Comedies (3).F. 
An analytical study of four representative comedies; oral and written 
reports on additional comedies and collateral reading. 

453. Shakespeare's Tragedies (3).W. 
An intensive study of Macbeth, Hamlet, King Lear, and Othello; oral 
and written reports on additional tragedies and collateral reading. 

454. Literature of the Romantic Period (3).W. 
A study of the writings of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Shelley, Byron, and 
Keats, with some attention to the minor authors of the period. 

455. Poetry of the Victorian Period (3).S. 
A study of the poetry of Tennyson, Browning, Arnold, Rossetti, Swin- 
burne, and others. 

456. Milton (3).S. 
Rapid reading of Milton's poetry, with major emphasis on Paradise 
Lost and Paradise Regained. Collateral readings from the prose works. 

457. English Literature, 1660-1744 (3).F. 
English literature, exclusive of the drama, from the Restoration to the 
death of Pope. 

458. English Literature, 1744-1798 (3).W. 
English literature, exclusive of the drama, from the death of Pope to 
the beginning of the Romantic period. Supplementary reading from 
the major novelists. 

460. Seminar in Western Drama (3).F. 

A study of Continental, British, and American drama from Ibsen to 
the present, with emphasis on social and literary values. 

462. Shakespeare's Histories (3).S. 

463. Studies in World Literature (3).S. 
Selected topics from European and Non-Western literature in trans- 
lation. 

464. Introduction to Linguistics (3).F. 
Basic survey of Phonemics, Morphemics, and Syntax. 

466. History of the English Language (3).F;W;S. 

469. [504] The American Novel from Its Beginnings 

to 1900 (3).W. 

470. [513] The English Novel from Its Beginnings to 1832 (3).F. 

471. [514] The Victorian Novel (3).W. 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 



89 



GRADUATE COURSES 



500. Bibliography and Research (3).F;SS. 
A study of bibliographical problems, types of research, organization 
and reporting of research. Required in the first quarter of beginning 
graduate students. Trimpey. 

501. English Drama, 1500-1600 Williamson (3).F. 

502. English Drama, 1600-1642 Williamson (3).W. 

503. Non-Dramatic Literature of the Elizabethan Period. (3).W. 
Trimpey. 

505. Southern Literature (3).F. 
A study of the major Southern writers and their contribution to Amer- 
ican Literature. Coulthard. 

506. Studies in the Romantic Period Heymann or Hilton (3).S. 

507. Victorian Prose. (3).W. 
A study of selected writings by Macaulay, Newman, Carlyle, Ruskin, 
Arnold, and Pater. Moore. 

508. American Literature (3).F. 
Studies in American literature from its beginnings to 1830. Hilton. 

509. American Literature (3).W. 
Studies in American literature, 1830-1870. Hilton. 

510. American Literature (3).S. 
Studies in American literature, 1870-1914. Hilton. 

511. American Literature (3).S. 
Studies in American literature, 1914 to the present. Coulthard. 

512. Literary Criticism (3).F. 
The history of literary criticism from Aristotle to the end of the 
nineteenth century. Moore. 

515. Seventeenth-Century English Literature (3).S. 

Trimpey. 

520. Restoration and Eighteenth-Century Drama (3).S. 

Higby. 

521. Twentieth-Century Literary Criticism (3).S. 
Moore. 

522. Twentieth-Century American Novel (3).S. 
Logan. 



90 



DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH 



523. Twentieth-Century English Novel (3).S. 
Holton. 

524. Studies in Linguistics (3).S. 
Theoretical and procedural studies in Descriptive Linguistics. Pre- 
requisite: English 464 or equivalent course. Harris. 

540. Seminar (3-6).F;W;S;SS. 

An opportunity for the graduate student to study a topic in consider- 
able depth. Subject matter will vary from term to term depending on 
interest and need. A student may enroll twice in the course providing 
the content does not duplicate that of a previous seminar. Prerequisite: 
graduate status or permission of instructor. On demand. Staff. 



548. Independent Study Staff 
550. Master of Arts Thesis Staff 



(Variable Credit) .F;W;S;SS. 
(6).F;W;S;SS. 




DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES iJ X 

DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 

R. Prince, Chairman, J. Amaro, P. Bonin, C. Bredow, R. Diaz, W. Evans, 
J. Kauffman, B. Kinsey, E. Powell, T. Ross. 

The objectives of the Department of Foreign Languages are to 
teach students to pronounce, speak, understand, read, and write 
the language they are studying; to give them basic knowledge of 
the principles of the grammar and syntax of the language; to help 
them gather valuable and interesting information and materials 
about the country and peoples whose language they are studying; 
to introduce them to the literature in the language and help them 
gain an appreciation for its masterpieces; to prepare them to be 
better citizens of the world through knowledge of the languages 
and cultures of peoples; to help them appreciate and be enthusiastic 
about foreign languages. 

A major in French or Spanish leading to the Bachelor of Arts 
degree consists of 36 quarter hours above the foreign language 
requirements, including 201, 202, 203, 305, 306, 307, 308, 451, 
and 12 quarter hours of electives on the undergraduate level. 

A minor in French or Spanish consists of 18 quarter hours above 
the foreign language requirements, including 201, 202, 203 and nine 
quarter hours of electives. 

A major in French or Spanish leading to the Bachelor of Science 
degree and teacher certification consists of a minimum of 45 quarter 
hours in one language above the course level of 103, including 
104-105-106, 201, 202, 203, 305, 306, 307, 308, 451, and four 
courses from 301, 302, 303, 401, 402, 403. The department 
recommends that a major in foreign language use electives to build 
up a teaching competence in a related field. 

The Department of Foreign Languages requires as a prerequisite 
to graduate work 36 quarter hours of language study above the 
elementary level. A graduate student who does not have adequate 
undergraduate credits may begin graduate study if at the same time 
he is building up his undergraduate hours to the required level. 
For the master's degree, 36 quarter hours are required in the 
major field, French or Spanish, 6-12 in education, and 6-12 in 
electives. The latter may be in the major field, in another language, 
in education, or in another field, such as English. The only required 



92 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



course is Bibliography and Research, but there are several preferred 
electives. For further advice, consult the Chairman of the Department 
of Foreign Languages. 

THE FOREIGN LANGUAGE LABORATORY 

The Department of Foreign Languages has a 54 booth electronic 
language laboratory. In the laboratory, students listen and respond 
to prerecorded tapes which deal with the material covered in their 
courses. The main purpose of the laboratory is to increase the 
student's ability to pronounce, speak, and understand the language. 
The department believes that the laboratory increases the efficiency 
of language learning and that the extra hours spent in the laboratory 
can be the student's most productive study time. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN FOREIGN LANGUAGES 

FRENCH 

101-102-103. Elementary French ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

The essentials of French grammar, vocabulary and idioms; conversational 
texts used to develop fluent speech and accurate pronunciation. Open 
to those with no previous preparation in French or those who make a 
low score on the French test. Recitation three hours and laboratory 
two hours. 

104-105-106. Intermediate French (3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

Review of French grammar and idioms covering advanced principles; 
audio-lingual practice in classroom and laboratory; readings in French 
from selected texts. Prerequisite: two units of high school French and a 
good score on French test or French 101-102-103. Recitation three 
hours and laboratory two hours. 

201, 202, 203. Conversational French (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

A course to give practical experience in speaking French. Students 
converse with each other, take dictation, make impromptu and prepared 
talks, ask and answer questions, do some composition in French. 
Prerequisite: French 104-105-106 or the equivalent. Recitation three 
hours and laboratory two hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

301, 302, 303. French Literature to 1800 (3,3,3). F,W,S. 

A survey of the development of the French language and literature; 
extensive outside reading; class text material chosen from great authors; 
class reports on plays. 301 goes approximately to 1630; 302 the 
seventeenth century or the classic period; 303 the eighteenth century. 
Prerequisite: 104-105-106 or the equivalent. Lecture three hours and 
laboratory work. 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



93 



305, 306. French Civilization (3,3).F,W. 

A brief study of the history, government, geography, art, music, 
customs, educational system of France. A course designed to give useful 
information about the people who speak French; background reading 
and study. Prerequisite: French 104-105-106 or the equivalent. Lecture 
three hours. 

307, 308. Advanced Grammar and Composition (3,3).F,W. 

A study of French grammar, idioms and syntax. Stress on difficult 
points of grammar which were not covered in earlier courses. Writing 
of original compositions and translations from English to French. The 
purpose is to give students a thorough knowledge of French grammar. 
Prerequisite: French 104-105-106. 

315. Introduction to Literary Criticism (3).S. 

Literary criticism with reference to French Literature. The course aims 
to teach the basic principles of criticism, the "explication de texte" 
method of literary analysis. Readings and "explication" are required. 
Open to French majors with at least junior standing. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit).F;W;S;SS. 

401, 402, 403. French Literature of the (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries 

A survey of French literature in modern times; text material chosen 
from the great authors; class reports on plays; extensive outside readings. 
401 covers the Romantic period; 402 from about 1850 to 1920; 403 
modern contemporary literature particularly since World War II. Pre- 
requisite: French 104-105-106 or the equivalent. Lecture three hours 
and laboratory work. 

451. French Phonetics and Diction (3).S;SS. 

An analysis of the phonetic system of French, studying the physical 
and linguistic basis of French sound production. Use of the laboratory 
for ear training, along with constant study and practice in the proper 
manner and production of French sounds. Offered 1971 SS. 

453. History of the French Language (3).F;SS. 

A general study of the development of the French language from its 
beginnings to the present day with special emphasis on formation from 
Latin along with the other elements which contributed to it. Some 
readings from Old French texts. Consideration of the elements which 
cause linguistic change. Offered in 1973 SS. 

456. Advanced Conversation (3).F;SS. 

A course designed to improve the students' fluency of expression in 
French so that they may have vocabulary and syntax sufficient to 
express their thoughts in conversation at normal speed with good 
pronunciation. Offered 1972 SS. 

459. Linguistics and Language Analysis (3).W;SS. 

A course designed to give a knowledge of descriptive, comparative 
and structural linguistics in relation to Romance languages, enabling 



94 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



students to apply these principles to language structures in French, 
and be better able to analyze the learning problems of their students. 
Offered 1973 SS. 

463. French Poetry of 16th and 17th Centuries (3).W;SS. 

Beginning with Marot, this course will cover the Pleiade poets, and in 
the seventeenth century La Fontaine and Boileau. Offered 1972 SS. 

465. Nineteenth Century Drama (3).F;SS. 

A study of the Romantic drama, the pieces a these, the naturalistic 
and the symbolistic drama. Other plays written up to World War I 
will be included. Offered 1971 SS. 

467. Eighteenth Century Drama (3).W;SS. 

A study of the successors to Moliere and the plays of Marivaux 
Lesage, Voltaire, Beaumarchais and their contemporaries. Offered 
1972 SS. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F;SS. 

A study of the bibliographic problems, the types of research, the 
literature, and methods of writing in the language field. Required of all 
students in the first quarter of graduate study. Amaro or Prince. 

506. French Literature to 1500 (3).W;SS. 

Covers the Medieval and Middle French periods. It begins with the 
Chansons de Geste, and other early writings, including poetry and 
drama. Offered 1972 SS. Bonin. 

508. French Drama to 1650 (3).W;SS. 
A study of French drama from the beginning of the sixteenth century. 
Most emphasis will be placed on Corneille and his contemporaries. 
Offered 1973 SS. Evans. 

509. Classic Drama: Moliere and Racine (3).S.SS. 
A thorough study of the plays of Moliere and Racine showing how they 
exemplified Classicism. Other minor dramatists of the period will be 
touched. Offered 1971 SS. Evans. 

512. Prose Literature of 16th and 17th Centuries (3).F;SS. 

A study of the works, ideas, and influence of Rabelais, Montaigne, 
Calvin, Descartes, La Rochefoucauld and Pascal. Consideration will be 
given to the effects of the Renaissance on literature and on the 
Classic Period. Offered in 1971 SS. Evans. 

514. The French Novel up to 1820 (3).W;SS. 

This course will begin with L'Astree and will include novels of Mme. 
de Lafayette, Lesage, Marivaux, Prevost, Rousseau, Bernardin de St. 
Pierre, Chateaubriand and Benjamin Constant. Offered 1973 SS. Prince. 

518. The Eighteenth-Century Philosophes (3).SS. 

A study of the development of free thought after the age of Louis 
XIV. The influence of the lives, works, and ideas of Voltaire, Rousseau, 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



95 



Montesquieu, and Diderot and the compilation of the Encyclopedic The 
manner in which this age of enlightenment shaped history is em- 
phasized. Offered 1971 SS. Prince. 

520. Nineteenth Century Poetry (3).W;SS. 

A study of the main poetic movements of the century and the poets 
who illustrate them: Lamartine, Hugo, Vigny, Musset, Baudelaire, 
Verlaine, Rimbaud and Mallarme. Offered 1973 SS. Powell. 

522. Nineteenth Century Novels (3).F;SS. 
A study of the main novels and novelists of the period: Hugo, Stendhal, 
Balzac, Flaubert, Zola and Maupassant. Offered 1972 SS. Powell. 

523. Twentieth-Century Novels (3).S;SS. 
A study of the novels and novelists from 1900 to the present. Emphasis 
is placed on recent or present-day writers, including Andre Gide, 
Marcel Proust, Andre Malraux, Francois Mauriac, Julien Green, 
Antoine de St. Exupery, Albert Camus. Offered 1973 SS. Powell. 

525. Twentieth-Century Drama (3).S;SS. 

Plays of the first part of the century are studied, such as those of 
Claudel and Romains. Emphasis is on the present or recent dramatists 
such as Giraudoux, Cocteau, Sartre, Anouilh, Camus, Becket, and 
lonesco. Consideration is given to the present state of the French 
theatre. Offered 1972 SS. Powell. 

548. Independent Study in French (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

GERMAN 

101-102-103. Elementary German ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

The essentials of German grammar, vocabulary, and idioms; conversa- 
tional texts used to develop fluent speech and accurate pronunciation. 
Open to those with no previous preparation in German or those whose 
previous preparation is inadequate. Recitation three hours and laboratory 
two hours. 

104-105-106. Intermediate German ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

Rapid review of German grammar and idioms covering the more 
advanced principles; audio-lingual practice in classroom and laboratory; 
readings in German from selected texts. Prerequisite: 101-103-103 or 
the equivalent. Recitation three hours and laboratory two hours. 

201, 202, 203. Conversational German (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

A course to give practical experience in speaking and writing German. 
Students converse with the professor and each other, take dictation, 
make impromptu and prepared speeches, ask and answer questions, do 
some composition and reading in German. Prerequisite: 104-105-106 
or the equivalent. Recitation three hours and laboratory two hours. 

LATIN 

101-102-103. Elementary Latin ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

This course is designed to give the students a fundamental knowledge 
of the elements of Latin grammar, vocabulary and syntax. It will 



96 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



emphasize the etymological and other influences of Latin on English 
and the Romance languages. Recitation three hours and laboratory two 
hours. 

104-105-106. Intermediate Latin ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A continuation of the study of the main principles of Latin grammar. 
Readings from the prose works of great writers of the time, such as 
Livy, Nepos, Sallust and Cicero. Prerequisite: Two years of high school 
Latin, a good score on Latin Test or Latin 101-102-103. 

301, 302, 303. The Latin Poets (3,3,3). F,W,S. 

An intensive view of Latin poetic forms. Study of works of Ovid, Vergil 
and a study of other Roman poets. Prerequisite: Latin 106. Offered in 
1971-1972. Lecture three hours. 

SPANISH 

101-102-103. Elementary Spanish ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

The essentials of Spanish grammar, vocabulary and idioms; conversa- 
tional texts used to develop fluent speech and accurate pronunciation. 
Open to those with no previous preparation in Spanish or those who 
make a low score on Spanish test. Recitation three hours and laboratory 
two hours. 

104-105-106. Intermediate Spanish (3-3-3).F-W-S. 

Review of Spanish grammar and idioms covering advanced principles; 
audio-lingual practice in classroom and laboratory; readings in Spanish 
from selected texts. Prerequisite: two units of high school Spanish and a 
good score on Spanish test or Spanish 101-102-103. Recitation three 
hours and laboratory two hours. 

201, 202, 203. Conversational Spanish (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

A course to give practical experience in speaking Spanish. Students 
converse with each other, take dictation, make impromptu and pre- 
pared speeches, ask and answer questions; do some composition in 
Spanish. Prerequisite: Spanish 104-105-106 or the equivalent. Recitation 
three hours and laboratory two hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

301, 302, 303. Survey of Spanish Literature (3,3,3). F,W,S. 

A study of the masterpieces of Spanish literature particularly the Siglo de 
Oro, Don Quijote, the Romantic period and the regional novel; class 
texts chosen from greatest authors: extensive outside readings and 
class reports. Prerequisite: Spanish 104-105-106 or the equivalent. 
Lecture three hours and laboratory work. 

305, 306. Hispanic Civilization (3,3).F,W. 

A brief study of the history, government, geography, art, music, customs, 
educational systems of Spain and the Spanish-American countries. A 
course designed to give useful information about the people who speak 
Spanish; background reading and study. Prerequisite: Spanish 104-105- 
106. Lecture three hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



97 



307, 308. Advanced Grammar and Composition (3,3).F,W. 

A study of Spanish grammar, idioms and syntax. Stress on difficult 
points of grammar which were not covered in earlier courses. Writing 
of original compositions and translations from English to Spanish. 
Prerequisite: Spanish 104-105-106. 

312. Twentieth-Century Spanish America (3).S. 

A study of the cultural life of the Spanish American countries; designed 
to give a knowledge of the diverse ideologies with their social, his- 
torical and literary values in the Twentieth Century. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

401, 402, 403. Survey of Spanish- American 

Literature (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

The most important writings from the various Spanish-American 
countries; class text material chosen from the writings of the main 
literary figures from colonial times to the present; extensive background 
readings in literature and on literary figures. Prerequisite: Spanish 
104-105-106 or the equivalent. Lecture three hours and laboratory 
work. 

451. Spanish Phonetics and Diction (3).S;SS. 

An analysis of the phonetic system of Spanish, studying the physical and 
linguistic basis of Spanish sound production. Use of laboratory for ear 
training, along with constant study and practice in the proper manner 
and production of Spanish sounds. Offered 1971 SS. 

453. History of the Spanish Language (3).S;SS. 

A general study of the phonological and morphological development of 
the Spanish language from Latin to the present. Lectures and readings 
from the old texts to trace the origin, evolution and development of the 
Castilian language and that now spoken in South America. Consideration 
of the elements which cause linguistic change. Offered 1973 SS. 

456. Advanced Conversation (3).F;SS. 
A course designed to improve the students' fluency of expression in 
Spanish so that they may have vocabulary and syntax sufficient to 
express their thoughts in conversation at normal speed with good 
pronunciation. Offered 1972 SS. 

457. Hispanic Culture and Civilization (3).S,wSS. 
A course designed to give the students an enlightened understanding of 
the general culture of Spain and the Spanish-American countries and 
increase their knowledge of the geography, history, art, educational 
system, government and social customs of the Hispanic people. Offered 
1971 SS. 

459. Linguistics and Language Analysis (3).W;SS. 

A course designed to give a knowledge of descriptive, comparative 
and structural linguistics in relation to Romance languages, enabling 
students to apply these principles to language structures in Spanish, 
and be better able to analyze the learning problems of their students. 
Offered 1973 SS. 



98 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



461. Nineteenth-Century Prose (3).F;SS. 

The non-dramatic fiction of the nineteenth century with special emphasis 
on the Regional novel. Readings from Pedro A. de Alarcon, Perez 
Galdos, Pardo Bazan, Valera, Pereda, Blasco Ibanez, and others. Offered 
1970 SS. 

463. Contemporary Spanish Literature (3).W;SS. 

A study of the modern renaissance of the artistic and cultural life of 
Spain, impelled by the Generation of '98. Also a study of the poetry of 
Garcia Lorca and Juan Ramon Jimenez, the plays of Casona and Buero 
Vallejo and the modern novels of various writers. Offered 1973 SS. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F;SS. 

A study of the bibliographic problems, the types of research, the 
literature, and methods of writing in the language field. Required of all 
students in the first quarter of graduate study. Amaro or Prince. 

512. The Picaresque Novel (3).F;SS. 
A study of the origin and development of the picaresque novel and 
its impact on world literature. Readings from the outstanding picaresque 
novels such as Lazarillo de Tormes, Guzman de Alfarache, La Vida del 
Buscon, La Picara Justina and Marcos de Oregon. Offered 1971 SS. 
Amaro. 

513. Cervantes (3).S;SS. 
A study of the life and works of Cervantes, with particular emphasis 
on the Quijote. Offered 1971 SS. Amaro. 

514. Golden Age Drama I (3).W;SS. 
Lope de Vega and his contemporaries. Beginning with the precursors 
of Lope de Vega, Juan del Encina, Torres Naharro, Lope de Rueda 
and Juan de la Cueva, the course covers the outstanding works of 
Lope de Vega and some of the plays of Tirso, Alarcon, and Guillen de 
Castro. Offered in 1971 SS. Amaro. 

515. Golden Age Drama II (3).S;SS. 
Calderon and his contemporaries. Calderon de La Barca, Rojas Zorrilla 
and Augustin Moreto are studied with emphasis on the important 
Works of Calderon, including his autos sacramentales. Offered 1972 SS. 
Amaro. 

519. Nineteenth-Century Drama and Verse (3).S;SS. 

An intensive study of Spanish theatre and verse from Romanticism to the 
Generation of '98, including works of Espronceda, Becquer, Campoamor, 
Zorilla, Duque de Rivas, Hartzenbusch, and others. Offered 1972 SS. 
Amaro. 

522. Spanish-American Literature to 1888 (3).F;SS. 

The extension of Spanish peninsulan literature in the colonies, beginning 
with cartas and relaciones of the conquistador es, the epic and lyric 
poets, and all literature down to Modernismo. Emphasis is given to 
the gauchesca literature. Offered 1972 SS. Diaz. 



DEPARTMENT OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES 



99 



523. Contemporary Spanish- American Literature (3).SS. 

The birth of modemismo, and its influence on the world literature. The 
maturing of Spanish-American prose, novela and cuento, in the twentieth 
century with readings from various novelists. Offered 1973 SS. Diaz. 

525. The Spanish-American Novel and Drama (3).S;SS. 

Representative works of outstanding authors from the Wars of In- 
dependence to the present — including Isaacs, Rivera, Azuela, Guiraldes, 
Asturias, Sanchez, Usigli and others. Offered 1972 SS. Diaz. 

548. Independent Study in Spanish (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 







ii&*'«* 



~-gr 



100 



DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 
DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 

J. Yoder, Chairman, J. Callahan, T. Epperson, Jr., O. Gade, R. Hartig, 
W. Imperatore, F. McKinney, R. Reiman, J. Upchurch, F. Webb, Jr. 

The objectives of the Department of Geography and Geology are: 

1. To provide a scholarly environment in which truth is pursued 

and natural laws are respected. The approach and presentation 
are such that students may be able to gather essential facts, 
state problems clearly, distinguish objective data from opinions, 
think creatively and critically, define pertinent issues, and 
suggest effective ways to promote man's proper appraisal and 
use of his surroundings. 

2. To offer an adequate and well balanced curriculum which will 
enable majors to find a productive place in society or pursue 
advanced degrees in recognized universities. 

3. To contribute to the liberal education of non-majors as well as 
majors. 

A major in geography leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree 
consists of 45 quarter hours, including Geography 101, 102, 203, 
205, 311, 410, Geology 101, 102, 103, and 15 hours of electives. 
The department also requires History 201 and 202. The foreign 
language taken must be approved by the Department of Geography. 

A minor in geography consists of 24 quarter hours, including 
general education requirements. 

The department also provides a concentration in geography for 
majors in social science seeking the Bachelor of Science degree 
and teacher certification. (See page 171). 

A major in geology leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree consists 
of 56 quarter hours including Geology 101, 102, 103, 311, 312, 
313, 314, 331, 332, 333, 341, 425, 472, and a six- to nine-hour 
summer field camp. A geology major must take Mathematics 111, 
112, 211; Chemistry 101-102-103; Physics 101-102-103; second year 
of either French, German, or Russian. 

A minor in geology consists of Geology 101, 102, 103, and 15 
quarter hours of geology electives. 

For the curriculum in science and concentration in earth science 
leading to the Bachelor of Science degree with teacher certification, 
see page 170. 



101 



DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN GEOGRAPHY 
AND GEOLOGY 

GEOGRAPHY 

101. Physical Geography (4).F;W;S. 
The earth's astronomical relations, factors of weather and climate, and 
physiographic features. Lecture three hours, laboratory two hours. This 
course or permission of chairman is prerequisite to all other geography 
courses. 

102. World Regions (5).F;W;S. 
Relation of human activities to the larger geographic regions of the 
world. 

201. Introduction to Regional, State, and Local Planning (3).S. 
The role, nature, and component activities of regional, state, and local 
planning. 

203. Economic and Commercial Geography (3).W;S. 

Geographic factors involved in production, distribution, consumption, 
and conservation of the major crops, minerals, and industries of the 
world. 

205. Statistical Methods (3).F;W;S. 

(Same as Psychology 205) 

210. Weather and Climate (3).S. 

The basic elements of weather and instruments used to measure and 
record them are considered. The world pattern and characteristics of 
climates are examined using the Koppen system of climatic classifi- 
cation. 

215. Descriptive Astronomy (3),S;SS. 
Same as Physics 215. 

216. Conservation of Natural Resources ( 3 ) .S. 
Conservation problems and techniques of water, soil, minerals, plants, 
animals, and human resoures. No prerequisite. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

301. Geography of Europe (3).F. 
Continental and world trade, cultural factors, geographic factors of the 
regions and countries of Europe. 

302. Geography of South America (3).W. 
Geographic regions, political divisions, commerce, industry, and pros- 
pects for the future. 



102 



DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 



303. Geography of Asia (3).S. 
Climate, relief, natural resources, social and political problems, and 
economic activities. 

304. Geography of Africa (3).S. 
The peoples, regions, climates, resources, and economic activities of 
the continent. 

305. Geography of the Soviet Union (3).F. 
The location, population, political status, natural environment, economy, 
problems, and potentialities of the U.S.S.R. 

306. Fundamentals of Political Geography (3).S. 
A study of the relations between geographic factors and international 
activities of world powers. 

307. Geography of Anglo America (3).S. 
The soils, climate, minerals, crops, industries, biotic resources, and 
their world relations as reflected by geographic factors. 

311. Cartography and Graphics (3).W. 
Theory and practice in map and chart design and construction. Em- 
phasis on techniques, use of source data for map construction, and 
graphic presentation of statistical materials. 

312. Fundamentals of Urban Geography (3).S. 
An analysis of urban centers with emphasis on classification, site, 
situation, distribution, function, and land use. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

402. Field Methods in Geography (3).S. 

Methods in measurements, observation, recording, and synthesis of field 
data. Field analysis of all features in one small type area required, 
including completed maps and written report. Prerequisite: Geography 
311, 410. 

410. Maps and Aerial Photographs (3).F. 

Theory and procedure for practical interpretation of cultural and 
natural features as reflected by maps and aerial photographs. 

440. Seminar in Geography (3). On Demand 

A course designed for seniors who plan to do graduate work in 
geography. A research paper is the end product of the course. 

448. Independent Study in Geography (3).F;W;S. 

Open to seniors majoring in geography. Prerequisite: Permission of 
adviser and chairman of department. 

450. Geographic Influences in American History (3).W. 

Man's reaction to and use of environmental factors as he occupied the 
territory of the United States. 



DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 



103 



451. Geography of the South (3).W. 
An intensive regional study of southern United States. Special attention 
is given to climate, soils, land use, minerals, industries, and current 
cultural patterns. 

452. Geography of Manufacturing (3).F. 

A survey of world manufacturing, emphasizing distribution, commodity 
production, and plant site location theory. 

460. Development of Geographic Thought (3).S. 

Series of topics selected in order to acquaint the geography major 
with the basic literature and evolution of the broad field of geography. 
Prerequisite: Geography major or consent of the instructor. 

482. [455] Geomorphology (4).W. 

Same as Geology 482. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research Yoder. (3).F;SS. 

502. Urban Geography (3).S. 

An analysis of urban centers from historical development through 
the contemporary city. Emphasis is placed on classification, site, 
situation, distribution, functions and patterns of land use, culminating 
in urban problems, trends, and city planning. Epperson. 

506. Geographic Aspects of World Affairs (3).S. 
A geographic analysis of major world movements and events associating 
the physical environment with social, political, and racial factors. Yoder. 
(Same as Political Science 517). 

507. Geography of Eastern United States (3).F. 
The physiography, climate, soils, minerals, and the associated economic 
activities of the Eastern United States. Yoder. 

508. Geography of Western United States (3).W. 
The physiography, climate, soils, minerals, and the associated economic 
activities of the Western United States. Yoder. 

509. Concepts in Geography (3).F. 
Investigation and discussion of selected geographic concepts, both 
physical and cultural, which apply to man's utilization of earth-space. 
Open, with consent of instructor, to graduate non-majors. Reiman. 

540. Seminar (3-6). S. 

A specialized course involving advanced study, research, and writing 
by small groups in selected areas. Students may enroll twice in this 
course for credit totaling six quarter hours, but in no case shall 
students receive credit for a seminar which duplicates the content of 
one for which they have previously received credit. 



104 



DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 



548. Independent Study in Geography (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 
A program involving advanced study, research, and writing adapted to 
serve students with exceptional interests. The project must be approved 
by the instructor and chairman of the department. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;S;SS. 



GEOLOGY 

101-102-103. Introduction to Geology ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S;SS. 

Description of the composition and origin of earth materials, physical 
processes which change the earth and modify earth materials, and 
history of the earth and its inhabitants as related to North America. 
Lecture: two hours; laboratory; two hours. 

215. Descriptive Astronomy (3).S;SS. 

Same as Physics 215. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

311-312. Mineralogy I and II (4-4). F-W. 

Fundamentals of crystal chemistry as applied to minerals. Identification, 
classification, and description of crystals and minerals according to 
chemical composition and atomic structure. X-ray identification of 
typical minerals and calculations of their Miller Indices. Prerequisites: 
Geology 101-102-103 and General Chemistry or consent of instructor. 
Lecture: three hours; laboratory: three hours. 

313. [312] Igneous and Metamorphic Petrology (4).S. 
The characteristics, genesis, classification, and megascopic identification 
of common igneous and metamorphic rocks. Prerequisites: Geology 
311-312. Lecture: three hours; laboratory: three hours. 

314. Optical Mineralogy and Petrography (5).S. 
Theory and use of the polarizing microscope. Study of the common 
rock-forming minerals and common rocks in thin sections. Prerequisites: 
Geology 311 and Geology 313. Lecture three hours, laboratory six hours. 

331. [315] Introduction to Stratigraphy and Sedimentation (4).S. 
A study of sedimentary rocks including their properties, classification, 
and the processes and environments which they represent. Principles of 
collection and interpretation of stratigraphic data, correlation, and 
nomenclature. Emphasis placed on field relationships. Prerequisites: 
Geology 103. Lecture: three hours; laboratory: three hours. 

332-333. [460] Introduction to Paleontology I and II (4-4). W-S. 
Study of phylogenetic$, morphology, temporal distribution and paleo- 
ecology of fossils, with emphasis on invertebrates. Prerequisites: Geology 
103 or Biology 103. Lecture: three hours; laboratory: three hours. 

341. [313] Structural Geology (4).F. 

Nature, classification, genesis, and quantification of structures with 
emphasis on field relationships. Prerequisites: Geology 101-102-103. 
Lecture: three hours; laboratory: three hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 



105 



348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

350. Earth Science Investigations (5).S. 

A course designed expressly for elementary education majors who 
choose their academic concentration in science. The composition of the 
earth and the physical processes continuously changing it will be studied. 
Emphasis upon man's ability to alter these forces such as erosion and 
pollution will be stressed. Prerequisite: Biology 107 and Physical Science 
101-102-103. Lecture four hours, laboratory two hours. 

353. Geology of North Carolina (3).S. 

Study of the geologic history of North Carolina and geologic principles 
exemplified by specific areas and problems within the state. One or more 
field trips required. Primarily for students intending to teach earth science 
in North Carolina. Not open to geology majors for credit. Prerequisites: 
Geology 101-102-103 or consent of instructor. Lecture: three hours. 

425. Geology Research Project (1-2).F;W;S. 

Study of special problem, field or laboratory, under supervision of 
Geology Staff. Quarterly progress report and final report of investigation, 
including results, must be submitted for evaluation. Upper division status 
and special permission. 

442. Ground-water Geology (3).W. 

Distribution, principles of occurrence, and utilization of underground 
water. Prerequisites: Geology 101-102-103. Lecture: three hours. 

450. Earth Science (3).W;SS. 

Study of the earth in space with emphasis on the solar system; the effects 
of weathering, erosion, and diastrophism on the lithosphere. Pre- 
requisites: Consent of the instructor. Not open to geology majors. 
Lecture: three hours. 

461. Introduction to Geochemistry (4).F. 
Chemical constitution of the earth, distribution of elements, and 
geochemical prospecting. Prerequisites: Geology 313 and Chemistry 
103. Lecture: two hours; laboratory: four hours. 

462. Introduction to Oceanography (3).W. 
A study of physical, chemical, biological, and geological oceanography 
and their interrelationships. Prerequisites: At least two of the following 
courses: Physics 103, Chemistry 103, Biology 103, Geology 103. Lec- 
ture: three hours. 

463. Appalachian Geology (3).S. 
Study of tectonics and stratigraphy as exemplified by the central and 
southern Appalachian mountain system. One or more field trips 
required. Prerequisites: Geology 331 and Geology 341. Lecture: two 
hours; laboratory: three hours. 

472. [451] Economic Geology (3).W. 

Principles, processes, and distribution of major metallic and non- 
metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations. Prerequisites: Geology 
313, Geology 331, and Geology 341. Lecture: three hours. 



106 



DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY 



473. Seminar in Earth Science (l).On Demand 

A survey of sources and uses of materials and aids for earth science 
teachers. Prerequisites: Consent of instructor. 

482. [455] Geomorphology (4).W. 

Origin and recognition of landforms; descriptive and quantitative as- 
pects supplemented by means of maps, aerial photographs, laboratory, 
and field study. Prerequisites: Geology 101-102-103. Lecture three 
hours; laboratory; three hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 
DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 



107 



R. Carroll, Chairman, G. Antone, C. Blackburn, H. Bond, H. Counihan, 
M. Dixon, E. Dougherty, E. Drozdowski, J. Fish, E. Gibson, L. Green, 
S. Hanft, D. Heisser, R. Hoover, S. Horvath, J. Jackson, W. Kinsey, 
E. Melton, P. Petschauer, L. Pritchett, R. Ramsey, A. Reinerman, 
C. Ross, K. Shipps, S. Simon, I. Van Noppen, E. Wu. 

The Department of History seeks: (1) to provide a basis for a 
liberal education through the study of mankind's past; (2) to provide 
background and preparation for careers in politics, law, journalism, 
religion, and other fields; and (3) to prepare students for both 
teaching and continuing advanced studies in history. 

A major in history leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree or to 
the Bachelor of Science degree and teacher certification consists of 
at least 50 quarter hours in history, including 101, 102, 103, 104, 
201, 202, 299, and one of the following sequencies, 221, 222 or 
231, 232 or 241, 242, but excluding History 206 and whichever 
eight-hour sequence the student has counted as fulfillment of general 
education requirements. History majors seeking a Bachelor of Arts 
degree are required, and those seeking a Bachelor of Science degree 
are strongly urged to acquire proficiency in a foreign language 
equivalent to courses 101 through 106. 

In selecting courses for a major, the student may elect to emphasize 
the history of the United States, or the history of Europe, but he 
may not present a major exclusively in either of these areas. It is 
the policy of the department to advise all history majors to register 
for History 299 in their sophomore year or in the first quarter after 
they elect to major in history. 

A minor in history consists of 26 quarter hours above general 
education requirements, including 201, 202, and 299. 

For the curriculum in social science leading to the Bachelor of 
Science degree and teacher certification see page 163. M 

Honors courses in history carry full credit toward the major and 
are open to students who have previously distinguished themselves. 
To graduate "with honors" in history it will be necessary for a stu- 
dent to complete successfully at least one two-quarter seminar in 
Western Civilization or American history, one junior colloquium, a 
senior honors essay, and an examination. 



108 



DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 



For a Master of Arts degree, a graduate student should take 33-37 
quarter hours of work in history, including History 512 or 524, His- 
tory 500 and, if a thesis is not submitted, History 548. A program 
of studies will be determined through counseling to meet the needs 
and interests of the student. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN HISTORY 

101, 102. Western Civilization to 1600 (4,4).F;W;S. 

A survey of the principal developments in western civilization: to the 
12th century; 1100 to 1600. 

103, 104. Western Civilization since 1500 (4,4).F;W;S. 

A survey of the principal developments in western civilization: 1500- 
1815; 1815 to present. 

191, 192. Honors Seminar: Western Civilization (4,4).W,S. 

A study of selected topics in the history of Western Civilization. 

201, 202 [201, 202, 203]. History of the (4,4).F;W;S. 

United States 
A survey of United States history: to 1865; since 1865. 

206 [306]. North Carolina Social Studies (3).F;W;S. 

A study of the geography, history, and economic and social problems 
of North Carolina. Not counted toward a major in history. 

215 [315]. The United States and the (3).F;W;S. 

Contemporary World 

A course which traces the historical antecedents of contemporary issues 
confronting the United States. 

221, 222 [430, 431, 432]. History of Asia (4,4)W,S. 

History 221 is an introduction to the political, social, and cultural 
developments of China and Japan; History 222 surveys the transforma- 
tion of Asian countries under the Western impact, with special emphasis 
on the emerging nations. 

231, 232 [340, 341, 342]. History of Latin America (4,4).F,W. 
A survey of Latin American history: through the wars of independence; 
from independence to the present. 

241, 242 [360, 361]. History of Africa (4,4).W,S. 

A survey of African history: to 1850; since 1850. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

291, 292. Honors Seminar: United States History (4,4).F,W. 

A study of selected topics in American history. 



DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 



109 



299. History: Scope and Method (2).F;S. 

Introduction to the nature, meaning, and method of history, and to 
problems in research and writing. Required of all history and social 
science majors. 

322. The Ancient World (4).F. 

An examination of selected topics in Graeco-Roman history. 

325 [459, 460]. The High Middle Ages (4).W. 

An examination of selected topics in the history of Europe, 900-1300. 

328 [461]. Renaissance and Reformation (4).S. 

An examination of the meaning of the Renaissance in terms of human- 
ism and the plastic arts; the background and principal developments of 
the Lutheran and Calvinist movements. 

334, 335 [301, 302, 303]. History of England (4,4).F,W. 

A survey of political, social, and interlectual developments: to 1660; 
since 1660. 

343 [456]. Colonial America (4).F. 

The social, political, and intellectual developments of the thirteen 
colonies to 1763. 

344. United States History, 1763-1801 (4).W. 

Major emphasis on political, social, and intellectual developments dur- 
ing the Revolutionary, Confederation, and Federalist periods. 

346. Civil War and Reconstruction (4).S. 

A study of the causes of the Civil War, its conduct, North and South, 
and its national and international impact; the political, social, and 
economic aspects of Reconstruction in the South and the nation. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

349. [450]. Foundations of Modern America, (4).W. 
1877-1917 

A study of the emergence of industrialization, urbanization, and re- 
form, and their influence on social and political developments from 
1877 to 1917. 

350. [451]. United States, 1920 to the Present (4).F;S. 
A history of developments in the United States from 1920 to the present. 

391. Junior Honors Colloquium (4).F;S. 

Required of all students reading for honors in history. 

401. Modern China (4).F. 

Traces the rise of modern China, evaluating some basic issues, both 

foreign and domestic, arising from the changing scenes of China since 
the founding of the Republic. Prerequisites: 221, 222. 

412 [462]. History of Mexico (4).S. 

A survey of Mexican history from the Spanish conquest to the present. 



110 



DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 



422, 423 [466, 467]. History of France (4,4). F,S. 

A survey of French history: 1648-1815; 1815 to the present. 

440. Seminar in History (4).F;W;S. 

Intensive investigation of selected topics. 

442 [410, 411]. United States Foreign Policy (4).W;S. 

A survey of American foreign policy from the beginning of the republic, 
with major emphasis on the period from 1900 to the present. 

444 [405, 406]. United States Economic History (4).F. 

A study of selected economic influences and institutions in America 
from colonial days to the present. 

446 [320, 321]. United States Constitutional History (4).S. 

A survey of the constitutional aspects of American developments since 
1789, with major emphasis on developments since the Civil War. 

452 [475, 476]. United States Cultural-Intellectual History (4).F. 
A study of American ideas and civilization as expressed in religious 
developments, social reform thought and movements, science, art and 
architecture, higher education, and American-European cultural inter- 
action. 

454. North Carolina History (4).W. 

A study of North Carolina history from its establishment as a colony 
to the present. 

455 [485, 486]. The Afro- American Experience (4).W. 

From slave origins to the present, with emphasis on the period since 
Emancipation. 

462, 463 [468]. History of Central Europe (4,4). F,W. 

A survey of social, political, and intellectual developments in Central 
Europe: to 1815; since 1815. 

472, 473 [457, 458]. History of Russia (4,4). F,S. 

A survey of imperial Russia from the 15th Century to 1917; the Russian 
revolution and the Soviet state since 1917. 

491. Senior Honors Essay (2).F;W;S. 

Open only to seniors reading for honors in history. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F;SS. 
A study of bibliographical problems, types of research, and organization 
and reporting of research. Required in the first quarter of all beginning 
graduate students. Van Noppen, Dixon. 

501. Interpreting American History (3).SS. 
A review of American history through study of conflicting interpreta- 
tions of great issues. Dixon. 



DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 



111 



502. Formation of the American Union (3).F. 

A study of the period 1763-1800 in American history. Emphasis is on 
the American Revolution, the Articles of Confederation, and on vary- 
ing historical interpretations of these events. Dixon. 

504. Jacksonian Democracy (3).S. 

Political, social, and cultural changes in the United States during the 
second quarter of the nineteenth century and the forces which produced 
the changes. Van Noppen. 

506 [503]. Studies in Civil War and Reconstruction (3).S. 

Van Noppen, Drozdowski. 

507. Studies in the History of the South Van Noppen. __ (3).W. 

509. Studies in 20th Century United States Antone, Fish. (3).S. 

510. Studies in U. S. Foreign Policy Dixon, Blackburn. (3).W. 

511. Studies in American Intellectual History Drozdowski. (3).W. 

512 [491]. American Historiography (3).F. 

A study of the writing of American history from the 17th Century to 
the present, with emphasis on the historical philosophies, interpretations, 
and careers of the major nineteenth and twentieth century historians. 
Drozdowski. 

514. Studies in the English Democratic Tradition (3).S. 

Carroll, Hanft. 

516. Studies in 16th and 17th Century Europe Green. (3).F. 

519. Studies in 18th Century Europe Petschauer. (3).W. 

521. Studies in 19th Century Europe Reinerman. (3).F. 

522. Studies in 20th Century Europe Reinerman. (3).S. 

524 [490]. European Historiography (3).W. 

A study of the development of historical writing in the West from 
ancient Greece to the present, with some attention to methodology, 
primary sources, and the philosophy of history. Carroll, Green. 

530. Studies in 20th Century China Wu. (3).S. 

540. Seminar (3).W;S. 

A specialized course involving advanced study, research, and writing by 
small groups in selected areas. Barring duplication, a student may enroll 
twice for a credit totaling six quarter hours. Staff. 

545. Seminar in Teaching of History in College (1).F;S. 

Required of graduate students in the Junior College program. Staff. 



112 



DEPARTMENT OF HISTORY 



548. Independent Study (Variable Credit) .F;W;S;SS. 

Supervised individual reading and research. The student pursues a 
project approved by the instructor, department chairman, Dean of 
the Graduate School, and the Dean of the College of Arts and Sciences. 
Prerequisite: admission to candidacy. Staff. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis Staff. (3-6).F;W;S;SS. 



DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS jLJLO 
DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 

H. Durham, Chairman, J. Boyte, G. Buckland, M. Carter, R. Curd, 
M. Eargle, R. Ensey, R. Graham, W. Hawkinson, E. Lane, W. Lemons, 
A. McEntire, W. Paul, L. Perry, R. Richardson, P. Sanders, R. Schalk, 
J. Smith, S. Stacy, J. Williams. 

Through its faculty and curriculum the Department of Mathe- 
matics provides undergraduate and graduate programs of study which 
are designed ( 1 ) to complement other areas of study in the University 
and (2) to prepare students to teach mathematics on the elementary, 
secondary, and junior college levels, to pursue graduate study in 
mathematics, or to begin careers as professional mathematicians in 
business and industry. 

A major in mathematics leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree 
consists of 51 quarter hours in the Department of Mathematics in- 
cluding Mathematics 111, 112, 211, 212, 213, 214, 321, 322, and 
22 post-calculus quarter hours of electives which must include at 
least six quarter hours from 400 level courses. The student's adviser 
is expected to guide the student into a constructive program which 
meets the student's needs. 

A minor in mathematics consists of 24 quarter hours in the De- 
partment of Mathematics including Mathematics 111, 112, 211, and 
12 quarter hours of courses numbered 200 or above. 

A major in mathematics leading to the Bachelor of Science degree 
and teacher certification consists of 51 quarter hours in the Depart- 
ment of Mathematics including Mathematics 111, 112, 211, 212, 
213, 214, 321, 322, 361, 362, 491, 492, and ten post-calculus 
quarter hours of electives. Physics 150, 151, and 152 is also required 
for this degree program. 

A student beginning a graduate program of study leading to a 
master's degree in mathematics must have the equivalent of an 
undergraduate major in mathematics. The Department of Mathe- 
matics offers graduate programs in secondary school teaching and 
junior college teaching as well as a general academic graduate 
degree program. Specific information regarding degree requirements 
for these programs may be obtained by examining the section of 
this catalog concerned with the Graduate School or by contacting 
the Chairman of the Department of Mathematics. 



114 



DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 
COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN MATHEMATICS 

101. Introduction to Mathematics (5).F;W;S. 

A study of the logical structure of mathematics including such topics 
as elementary set theory and logic, number systems, and algebraic 
processes. This course or its equivalent is required of all students. 

104. Mathematics For Elementary School Teachers (4).F;W;S. 
A course designed for the future elementary school teacher. Among 
other topics this course will include a development of the real number 
system, Euclidean and non-Euclidean geometry, number theory, and 
problem solving. Prerequisite: Mathematics 101. 

107-108. Algebra and Trigonometry (5-3).F-W. 

An integrated study of algebra and trigonometry including such topics 
as the real and complex number systems, algebraic relations and func- 
tions, trigonometric functions, and elementary theory of equations. For 
the semi-technical student who wishes to strengthen his background in 
the computational aspects of the mathematics he began in high school. 

111-112. Analytic Geometry and Calculus I and II (4-4). F-W. 

A study of basic analytical geometry, analytic trigonometry, limits, 
continuity, differentiation, and integration. To be included is a review 
of algebraic concepts necessary for the completion of the calculus 
sequence. 

211. Analytic Geometry and Calculus III (4).S. 

A study of trigonometric and exponential functions, parametric equa- 
tions, arc length, polar coordinates, and methods of integration. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 112. 

212-213. Analytic Geometry and Calculus IV and V (4-4). F-W. 
A study of applications of integration, solid analytic geometry vectors 
in two and three dimensions, infinite series, partial differentiation, and 
multiple integration. Prerequisite: Mathematics 211. 

214. Introduction to Linear Algebra (3).W;S. 

A study of vectors, matrices, and linear transformations, principally 
in two and three dimensions. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

311-312-313. Differential Equations ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A study of methods of solution of ordinary differential equations. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 211. 

321-322. Modern Algebra (3-3).F-W. 

A study of rings, integral domains, integers, fields (rational, real, and 
complex), groups, and polynomials. Prerequisite: Mathematics 211 or 
permission of the instructor. 

325. A Study of Integers (3).S. 

A study of the integers beginning with the Peano postulates and includ- 
ing the Fundamental Theorem of Arithmetic, Diophantine equations, 



DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 



115 



congruences, Fermat's and Wilson's theorems, perfect numbers, Euler's 
theorem, Fermat's conjecture, and the Goldbach conjecture. Emphasis 
will be on the historical as well as the theoretical development of the 
subject. Prerequisite: Mathematics 321 or permission of the instructor. 

331-332-333. Mathematics for Elementary Teachers ( 5-5-5 ).F-W-S. 
A study of the area of mathematics related to the modern elementary 
school curriculum. To be included are topics from abstract algebra, 
geometry, number theory, mathematical logic, trigonometry and intui- 
tive calculus. Not open to mathematics majors. Prerequisite: Mathe- 
matics 101. 

341. History of Mathematics (3).F. 

A study of the development of mathematical thought. 

343. Mathematics of Finance (3).S. 

A study of simple and compound interest, annuities, amortization, sink- 
ing funds, depreciation, bonds, stocks, and life insurance. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 108. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

361-362. Introduction to Geometry (3-3).F-W. 

A study of the development of Euclidean geometry including both the 
synthetic and the metric approach. Topics to be considered include 
parallelism and similarity, measurements, ruler and compass construc- 
tions, and consideration of at least one non-Euclidean geometry. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 211 or permission of the instructor. 

371. Introduction to the Application of Mathematics (3).S. 

A survey of problems in the physical, engineering, biological and man- 
agement sciences in which undergraduate level mathematics is useful 
in the formulation and solution. 

414. Introduction to Numerical Methods (3).F. 

The analysis and application of selected numerical methods for the 
solution of polynominal equations, systems of linear equations, and 
differential and integral equations. The student should have some 
familiarity with differential equations and computer programming. 

316. Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems (3).W. 

A study of several systems of orthogonal functions and how these 
systems are used to solve certain partial differential equations occurring 
in mathematical physics. Prerequisite: Mathematics 313. 

417. Intermediate Differential Equations (3).S. 

A study of the theory of ordinary differential equations emphasizing 
the existence and uniqueness of solutions to certain classes of differen- 
tial equations. Prerequisite: Mathematics 312. 

440. Undergraduate Seminar (Variable Credit ).F;W;S. 

(Permission to register must be given by the department chairman.) 

453. Mathematical Logic (3).S. 

A study of the sentential calculus, the calculus of classes, the restricted 
predicate calculus, and the extended predicate calculus. 



116 



DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 



456. Geometry for Elementary School Teachers (3).S;SS. 

An informal treatment of aspects of geometry which are relevant to 
the elementary school curriculum. The topics considered include con- 
gruence, measure of segments and angles, constructions, parallels and 
parallelograms, similarity, space geometry, areas and volumes, and 
measurements related to circles. Not open to mathematics majors. 

459. Foundations of Arithmetic (3).SS;Ex. 

A study of the law of arithmetic, concept of number, postulational treat- 
ment of number systems, logical reasoning. Not open to mathematics 
majors. 

461-462-463. Introduction to Real Variables ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A rigorous treatment of the concepts of sequences, series, limit, con- 
tinuity, differentiation, integration, and sequences and series of functions. 

466-467. Introduction to Complex Variables (3-3).W-S. 

An introduction to the study of complex variables to include such 
topics as line integrals, the Cauchy theorem, the Cauchy integral 
formula, Morera's theorem, and the Laurent Series. 

471-472. Introduction to Abstract Algebra (3-3).F-W. 

A study of certain concepts from set theory, semi-groups and groups, 
rings, integral domains, fields, elementary factorization theory, groups 
with operators, modules and ideals, and lattices. Prerequisite: Mathe- 
matics 322. 

474-475. Introduction to Linear Algebra (3-3).W-S. 

A study of vectors, vector spaces, matrices, linear mappings, determi- 
nants, scaler products, orthogonality, bilinear maps, characteristic 
polynomials, Hamilton-Cayley theorem, spectral theorem, Schur's lemma, 
and multilinear products. Prerequisite: Mathematics 322. 

477-478. Introduction to Topology (3-3).F-W. 

A study of the basic concepts of general topological spaces including 
such topics as elementary point set topology, product spaces, metric 
spaces and continuous functions. 

481. Foundations of Geometry (5).F;S. 

A treatment of projective geometry including both the synthetic and 
the analytic approach. Also to be considered is a study of the relation 
of Euclidean, affine and hyperbolic geometries to projective geometry. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 362 and linear algebra. 

491-492-493. Probability and Mathematical ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

Statistics 
A study of probability and statistics based on discrete and continuous 
sample spaces. Prerequisite: Mathematics 211. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

511-512-513. Real Variables ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A study of the Lebesgue Integral leading to the proof and applications 
of the Lebesgue-Radon-Nikodym theorem. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
462. Graham, Richardson. 



DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 



117 



516-517-518. Applied Mathematics (3-3-3).On demand. 

A study of Fourier series, series solutions of ordinary differential 
equations, Laplace and Fourier transforms, solutions of partial differ- 
ential equations by separation of variables, boundary value problems. 

519-520. Functional Analysis (3-3).W-S. 

A course to include the study of normability and metrizability of 
topological spaces, the category theorems, the closed graph theorem, 
convexity, and dual topologies. Prerequisite: Mathematics 472 and 478. 
Durham. 

521-522-523. Abstract Algebra (3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A study of groups, rings, modules, Galois theory, and representation 
theory to include an introduction to homological algebra and the theory 
of categories. Prerequisite: Mathematics 472. Perry, Smith, Ensey. 

525-526. Theory of Numbers (3-3).W-S. 

A study of the properties of integers, Euclid's algorithm, Diophantine 
equations, prime numbers, congruences, residues of powers, quadratic 
residues, and quadratic forms. Smith. 

527-528-529. Linear Algebra ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

Linear spaces, linear transformations, matrices, determinants, oriented 
linear spaces, tensor-algebra, exterior algebra, duality, inner product 
spaces, linear mappings of inner product spaces, symmetric bilinear func- 
tions, quadrics, unitary spaces, and invariant subspaces. Prerequisite: 
Mathematics 475. Perry. 

531-532-533. Topology ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A study of such selected topics as Peano spaces, metric spaces, charac- 
teristics of arcs and simple closed curves, Euclidean topology, combina- 
tional topology, and algebraic topology. Prerequisite: Mathematics 478. 
Durham, Curd. 

537-538-539. Complex Variables ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A course to include the residue calculus, algebraic and elliptic functions, 
conformal mappings, and the study of entire and meromorphic functions. 
Prerequisite: Mathematics 467. Richardson. 

540. Graduate Seminar (Variable credit). F;W;S. 

548. Independent Study in (Variable credit). F;W;S;SS. 

Mathematics 

Independent reading and research done under the supervision of a 
designated member of the staff. Prerequisite: 18 hours of graduate 
mathematics. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;S. 

559. Investigations in the Teaching of Mathematics (3).SS. 

An examination of recent research and experimental programs in the 
teaching of secondary school mathematics. 



118 



DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 



567. Computer Applications in the High School (3).SS. 
An examination of ideas fundamental to computers and data processing 
together with programming experience. Effects of the computer on the 
high school curriculum and as a teaching aid will be discussed. Use of 
a computer will be included. 

568. Mathematical Applications in the High School (3).SS. 

Disciplines 

An examination of mathematical theories with respect to their appli- 
cations to other high school disciplines such as biology, chemistry and 
physics. 

569. Special Topics in Mathematics Education (1-6).SS. 
A flexible program of reading, study, planning, and writing designed to 
meet the needs of individual teachers or groups of teachers in the field 
of secondary school mathematics. Prerequisite: 18 hours of graduate 
mathematics education courses. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN COMPUTER SCIENCE 

A minor in computer science consists of eighteen quarter hours. 

251. Fortran Programming (2).F;S;SS. 

A study of FORTAN programming language and flowcharts as applied 
to scientific problems. Intended for any student having a need for com- 
puter assistance. No prerequisite. 

351. Introduction to Computer Science (4).F. 
A study of the basic ideas of computers and their use, with emphasis 
on digital computers. Topics include number systems, boolean algebra, 
stored program concepts, system configurations, and current state of 
the art. 

352. Technical Programming (5).W. 
Compiler languages and their applications to linear programming, nu- 
merical analysis, and other topics are considered. Students will operate a 
computer or a remote terminal to run some programs. Prerequisite: 
Computer Science 351. 

353. Computability (5).F.S. 
A study of the use of computers in simulation, Monte Carlo methods 
of analysis, linear programming, and management information systems. 
Prerequisite: Computer Science 352. 

354. Individual Study in Computer Science (4).F;W;S. 
Independent reading or research in the area of computer science under 
the direction of a staff member. Prerequisite: Computer Science 352. 

356. Current Computer Use (1-6). On demand. 

This course consists of work done with a cooperating institution which 
makes use of computers. This work is to be part of the total computer- 
oriented activity of the cooperating institution so that it will contribute 
significantly to the student's background in the field. Permission to regis- 
ter must be given by the department chairman. 



DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS 



119 



357. Research Support (1-6). On demand. 

This course consists of assisting in research activities of various types 
and is aimed at the design and implementation of research which de- 
pends on the computer for computations. The student must be directly 
involved in providing the computer support phase of the research. Per- 
mission to register must be given by the department chairman. 



120 



DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION 

DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION 

C. T. Davis, Chairman, R. Humphrey, R. Ruble, J. Stines, W. Strickland, 
O. K. Webb, G. Wingard. 

The Department of Philosophy and Religion serves to acquaint 
students with the beliefs and methods of inquiry that are the basis 
for man's intellectual and religious adventure from earliest times 
to the present. Creative persons have always sought to think through 
the grounds of their beliefs and to develop a conception of the mean- 
ing of life which both provides for growth and is able to be justified. 
By exploring the history and development of philosophy and re- 
ligion, with tools of modern scholarship, this process can be 
furthered and deepened. 

Beginning this year, 1971-72, the Department of Philosophy and 
Religion will offer separate majors in these two areas. 

A major in philosophy leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree con- 
sists of 46 quarter hours including Philosophy 200, 201, 202, 203, 
204, 205, 401 or 402, and 19 additional hours, three of which must 
be a seminar. 

A major in religion leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree consists 
of 46 quarter hours including Religion 202, 203, 302, 305, 306, 
308, 403, and 15 additional hours, three of which must be a seminar. 

A minor in philosophy or religion consists of 23 quarters hours. 

A student majoring in religion may not count towards general 
education requirements those religion courses listed as satisfying 
the literature requirement in the humanities section of General 
Education. 

To earn the Bachelor of Arts degree the student must complete 
nine quarter hours of a second year of a foreign language or higher. 
The department recommends that a major in philosophy or religion 
who anticipates graduate studies elect a second foreign language in 
addition to the one required (German and French are preferred). 

The department requires a student majoring in philosophy or 
religion to take History 101, 102, 103, and 104 or the equivalent. 



121 



DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN PHILOSOPHY 
AND RELIGION 

PHILOSOPHY 

189. Basic Concepts in Philosophy (5).F;W;S. 

A general introduction to the basic patterns and methods of philosophy 
as presented through representative thinkers. 

200. [301] Logic (3).F;S. 
A study of logistic method, cogency and clarity in reasoning. The pur- 
pose is to develop the student's capacity for accurate reasoning and 
sustained reflection. 

201. Ancient Philosophy (5).F;W. 
An introduction to philosophy through the study of the Pre-Socratic 
philosophers and of Plato and Aristotle. 

202. Medieval and Renaissance Philosophy (3).W. 
A study of Neoplatonism, early Christian ideas and thinkers of the 
medieval and renaissance eras, with concentration especially on Augus- 
tine and Thomas Aquinas. 

203. Modern Philosophy (5).S. 
A study of views of eminent philosophers of the seventeenth, eighteenth, 
and nineteenth centuries. 

204. Contemporary Philosophy (5).S. 
A study of the views of eminent philosophers of the twentieth century. 

205. [302] Ethics (3).W. 
A critical and historical examination of ethical systems and the meaning 
of moral ideas. 

206. [303] Aesthetics (3).W. 
A study of aesthetic values in nature, art, literature, music, and archi- 
tecture. Not offered 1971-72. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit) .F;W;S;SS. 

301. [304] Philosophy of Religion (3).F. 
A philosophical study of the nature and significance of religion. Types 
of religious systems, problems of religious language, and specific religious 
concepts will be considered. Not offered 1971-72. 

302. [305] Philosophy in America (3).S. 
A study of the principal movements in philosophical thought in America; 
selected readings from outstanding American philosophers. Not offered 
1971-72. 

303. [306] Philosophy of Science (3).F. 
A critical-historical study of the meaning of science, the formation of 
scientific language and methodology, and the philosophical presupposi- 
tions and implications of scientific thought. Prerequisite: Philosophy 
189, 201, a major in science, or permission of the instructor. 



122 



DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION 



304. [307] Political Theory Through the (3).F;SS. 
Seventeenth Century 

See Political Science 302 for course description. 

305. [308] Modern Political Thought (3).W;SS. 
See Political Science 303 for course description. 

306. [309] Contemporary Political Thought (3).S. 
See Political Science 304 for course description. 

307. [310] The Enlightenment (3).W. 
An intensive analysis of the philosophers and philosophical motifs that 
comprise the eighteenth century enlightenment. Prerequisite: Philosophy 
189, 201, 203, or permission of instructor. Alternate years with Philos- 
ophy 308. Not offered 1971-72. 

308. [311] Nineteenth Century Philosophy (3).W. 
A critical investigation and interpretation of the dominant philosophers 
and philosophical motifs of the nineteenth century. Particular attention 
will be given to Post-Kantian and Neo-Hegelian idealism, the romantic 
movement, and the philosophy of evolution. Prerequisite: Philosophy 
189, 201, 203, or permission of instructor. Alternate years with phil- 
osophy 307. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

401. The Nature of Reality (3).W. 
A basic investigation of the nature of reality. Prerequisite: Philosophy 
189, 201, 203. Alternate years with philosophy 402. Not offered 1971-72. 

402. [401] The Nature of Knowledge (3).W. 
A basic investigation of the nature of knowledge. Prerequisite: Philos- 
ophy 189, 201, 203. Alternate years with philosophy 401. 

403. [402] Analytic Philosophy (3).F. 
A systematic and critical study of the positivistic, linguistic, and analytic 
philosophies of the twentieth century. Particular attention will be given 
to Moore, Russell, Ayer, and Wittgenstein. Prerequisite: Philosophy 189 
or 204. Not offered 1971-72. 

404. [403] Phenomenology and Existentialism (3).F. 
A critical-historical study of the origins and development of existentialist 
thought. Attention will be given to Nietzsche, Kierkegaard, and Husser- 
lian phenomenology as a background for concentrated treatment of 
contemporary religious and atheistic extentialism. Prerequisite: Philos- 
ophy 189, 203, 204, or permission of instructor. 

405. [404] Philosophies of History (3).S. 
An intensive analysis and interpretation of the dominant philosophies 
of history from Augustine to Toynbee. Particular attention will be given 
to the writings of Augustine, Joachim of Floris, Machiavelli, Vico, Vol- 
taire, Condorcet, Hegel, Marx, and Toynbee. Alternate years. Not 
offered 1971-72. 



DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION 



123 



451. Seminar: Studies in the History of Philosophy (3).W. 

An intensive study of one philosopher or philosophical movement. The 
subject of this course will vary from year to year and barring duplica- 
tion of subject matter a student may repeat the course three times for 
credit. Prerequisite: Philosophy 189 or 201 or permission of instructor. 
Not offered 1971-72. 

460. Seminar: Special Problems in Philosophy (3).S. 
This course is designed to provide an opportunity to undertake a 
thorough investigation of one major idea or problem of philosophical 
import. The topic will vary from year to year and barring duplication 
may be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: Philosophy 189 or 201 or 
permission of instructor. 

461. Independent Study (3-6).F;W;S. 
Intensive reading, research, and student-faculty conference on special 
subjects for advanced students. By permission of the department and 
individual approval of the instructor concerned. On demand. 

RELIGION 

AREA I. THE NATURE OF RELIGION 

200. Religion and the Life of Man (5).F;W;S. 

An analysis of the meaning of religious phenomena. 

450. Seminar: Studies in the Nature of Religion (3).F. 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Not offered 1971-72. 

AREA II. THE MAJOR RELIGIOUS TRADITIONS OF THE WORLD 

A. Jewish Studies 

202. [201] The History of Israel (5).W. 
A study of the history and faith of Israel during the biblical period. 

302. Judaism (3).S. 

An examination of the faith and literature of Post-exilic Judaism. 

B. Christian Studies 

203. The Life and Teaching of Jesus (5).F;S. 
An examination of the life and teaching of Jesus as presented in the 
gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke. 

213. [306] Early Christianity (3).F. 
A study of Christianity from its origin to the fall of Rome, focusing on 
its struggles to interpret its mission in the context of the Roman Empire. 

214. [307] Medieval and Reformation Christianity (3).W. 
Christian thought from the fall of Rome to the Reformation, including 
consideration of monastic thought, Christianity and Greek Philosophy, 
the nature of the Christian Church, Augustine, Aquinas, Luther, and 
Calvin. 



124 



DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

303. [301] The Life and Letters of Paul (3).W. 
A survey of the life and teachings of Paul, giving special consideration 
to his contribution to the thought and spread of Christianity. Alternate 
years with Religion 304. Not offered 1971-72. 

304. [205] The Gospel of John (3).W. 
An inquiry into the nature, character, and message of John's Gospel. 

C. Near Eastern and Primitive Religions 

305. [302] Religions of the World (5).W. 
A study of primitive religions and of the historical development of the 
religions of the Near East with special emphasis on Islam and Zoro- 
astrianism. 

D. The Religions of the Far East 

306. [303] Religions of the World (5).F;S. 
A study of the historical developments of the religions of India, China 
and Japan. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

E. Area Studies 

403. [401] Contemporary Religious Thought (5).S. 

A study of the main developments in recent religious thought as seen 
in such twentieth century thinkers as Paul Tillich, Reinhold Niebuhr, 
Jacques Maritain, Martin Buber, Rudolph Bultmann, and Karl Barth. 
Alternate years with Religion 407. Not offered 1971-72. 

455. Seminar: Studies in the Major Religious (3).W;S. 

Traditions of the World 
Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. 

AREA III. RELIGION AND CULTURE 

307. [305] Christian Ethics (3).W. 
The nature of Christian ethics. Analysis of leading ethical themes based 
on the Christian gospel. History of Christian ethical thought and dis- 
cussion of such problems as freedom, politics, race relations, war and 
peace. 

308. [204] Religion in America (3).S. 
A survey of the development of religious thought and practice in the 
United States. 

407 [402] Religious Ideas in Literature (3).F. 

A study of the religious ideas in the writings of such men as Milton, 
Donne, Dante, Browning, Dostoievsky, Faulkner, Beckett, Kafka, Camus, 
Sartre, MacLeish, and T. S. Eliot. Alternate years with Religion 403. 



DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION 



125 



460. Seminar: Studies in Religion and Culture (3).S. 

Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. Not offered 1971-72. 

AREA IV. HONORS COURSES AND INDEPENDENT STUDY 

490. Independent Study (1-6).F;W;S. 

Intensive reading, research, and student-faculty conferences on special 
subjects for advanced students. By permission of the department and 
individual approval of the instructor concerned. On demand. 



126 



DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 

W. Connolly, Chairman, R. Franks, G. Lindsay, R. Nicklin, J. Watson. 
The objectives of the Physics Department are: 

1. To give an understanding to the beauty and symmetry of the 
laws of nature. 

2. To develop in all students a curiosity and questioning attitude 
towards their physical environment. 

3. To train students to teach science at all levels. 

4. To encourage students to consider graduate school with the 
aim of a professional life as a scientist. 

A major in physics leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree consists 
of a minimum of 48 hours in physics above the 100 level including 
211, 212, 213, 301, 302, 303, 304, 320, 330, 404, and 450. In 
addition, two quarter hours minimum must be taken from Experi- 
mental Physics (440, 441, 442) and ten quarter hours in physics 
electives. A physics major must take 9-12 quarter hours of biology, 
Chemistry 101, 102, 103 and Mathematics 111, 112, 211, 212, 213, 
and 311, 312, 313. 

A minor in physics consists of 18 quarter hours above the 100 
level including 211, 212, 213, and six hours of electives. A minor 
in physics requires Mathematics 111, 112, 211, 212, and 213. 

A major in physics leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and 
teacher certification consists of a minimum of 48 quarter hours in 
physics including 101, 102, 103 or 150, 151, 152, and 211, 212, 
213, 301, 303, 320, and 450. In addition, two quarter hours must 
be taken from Experimental Physics (440, 441, 442) and ten hours 
of physics electives. A physics major in this program must take 
9-12 quarter hours of biology, Chemistry 101, 102, 103, and 
Mathematics 111, 112, 211, 212, 213, 311, 312, and 313. 

For the curriculum for a major in science and concentration in 
physics leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and teaching 
certification, see page 170. 



DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS J_^ / 
COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN PHYSICS 

101-102, 103. General Physics ( 4-4-4). F-W,S,SS. 

A study of the basic principles of physics; mechanics heat, sound, elec- 
tricity, magnetism, light, and modern physics. Prerequisite: Mathematics 
107 or equivalent. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 

105. Physics of Sound (5).S. 

A course designed primarily for music majors and for those interested 
in the science of wave phenomena. A study of audible sound, standing 
waves, resonance, auditory perception, instrument and room acoustics. 
A minimum of mathematical analysis will be used. Lecture four hours, 
laboratory two hours. 

150-151, 152. Analytical Physics (5-5-5 ).F-W,S. 

An analytical and quantitative approach to classical and modern physics 
employing some calculus. Especially designed for students majoring in 
Chemistry, Mathematics, Physics, and Pre-engineering. Lecture four 
hours, laboatory three hours. 

211, 212, 213. Intermediate Physics I, II, III (4,4,4). F,W,S. 

An analytical and quantitative approach to classical physics employing 
calculus. A study of optics, radiation, mechanics, and electricity and 
magnetism. Designed for students majoring in physics. Prerequisite or 
corequisite: Mathematics 211, 212, 213. Prerequisite: Physics 101, 102, 
103 or Physics 150, 151, 152. Lecture three hours, laboratory three 
hours. 

215. Descriptive Astronomy (3).S;SS. 

A study of the universe — sun, moon, planets, asteroids, meteors, comets; 
measurement of time; astronomical instruments; stars and galaxies. Pre- 
requisite: Mathematics 101, or 107. Lecture three hours. Same as 
Geology 215. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

NOTE: Physics 101, 102, 103 or 150, 151, 152 and 211, 212, 213 or 
equivalent and Mathematics 211, 212, 213 or equivalent are prerequisite 
to all physics courses above the 200 level. Mathematics 311, 312, 313 
are corequisite to 300 level physics courses and prerequisite to all courses 
above the 300 level. 

301-302. Mechanics (4-3).F-W. 

A study of dynamics of rigid and non-rigid bodies, central force fields, 
damped and undamped vibrating systems, wave motion, Lagrange's and 
Euler's equations. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours for 301 
and lecture three hours for 302. 

303-304. Electricity and Magnetism (4-3).W-S. 

A study of electric and magnetic phenomena, electrostatics, Gauss' Law, 
resistivity and conductivity, direct and alternating currents, electro- 
magnetic induction, Maxwell's equations: Lecture three hours, laboratory 
three hours for 303 and lecture three hours for 304. 



128 



DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 



320. Modern Physics (3).F. 

A study of the more recent discoveries and developments in physics. 
Relativity; x-rays; natural and artificial radioactivity; nuclear fission; 
atomic physics; high energy accelerators. Lecture three hours. 

330. Heat and Thermodynamics (3).S. 

A study of the first and second laws of thermodynamics, including topics 
such as temperature measurements, transfer of heat; Maxwell's equa- 
tions. Lecture three hours. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

350. Physical Science Investigations (5).W. 

A course designed expressly for elementary education majors who choose 
their academic concentration in science. Classical and modern physical 
science will be discussed as a basis for the topics introduced in the 
upper elementary curriculum. Prerequisite: Biology 107 and Physical 
Science 101-202-103. Lecture four hours, laboratory two hours. 

380. Nuclear Radiation Detection (3).F. 

A study of the theory and application of various types of nuclear de- 
tectors such as Geiger-Muller, scintillation, gas flow, photographic film, 
bubble chamber, etc. Theory and experiment with different counters, 
geometry of counters, probability of error in counting. Lecture two 
hours, laboratory three hours. 

404. Nuclear Physics (3).F. 

Theory of the atom, spectra, nuclear reactions, properties of Alpha, 
Beta and Gamma rays and their interactions with matter. Introduction 
to Wave Mechanics. Prerequisite: Physics 320. Lecture three hours. 

440, 441, 442. Experimental Physics (Maximum credit 6).F,W,S. 
Advanced laboratory in mechanics, heat, optics, sound, nuclear, physics, 
electricity and magnetism. Laboratory three hours for each our of credit. 

450. Seminar (Maximum credit 3).F;W;S. 

A study of current physics research results. 

453. Electronics (4).W. 

Simple alternating current theory; vacuum, gas discharge tubes and 
transistors; thermionic emission; space charge phenomena; circuit anal- 
ysis; electron ballistics; voltage and current amplifiers. Prerequisite: 
Physics 303. Lecture three hours, laboratory three hours. 

455. Introduction to Statistical Physics (3).W. 

A study of entropy, Maxwell's Thermodynamic equations, Maxwell- 
Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac and Bose-Einstein statistics. Develops macro- 
scopic thermodynamic relations from microscopic models. Prerequisite: 
Permission of instructor. Lecture three hours. Offered on demand. 

460-461. Quantum Mechanics (3-3).F-W. 

Non-relativistic quantum theory, including the Bohr theory, the Schro- 
edinger theory, and perturbation theory. Constant potential problems, 
the hydrogen atom problem, and the harmonic oscillator problem will 
be considered in detail. Lecture three hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS 



129 



462. Quantum Mechanics (3).S. 

Taught on demand. Prerequisite: Physics 460-461. Lecture three hours. 

470, 471. Physics for High School Teachers (3,3).SS. 

A study of the fundamental laws of physics with emphasis on demon- 
strations and methods. Designed for those currently teaching high 
school physics and for those planning to teach high school physics. 
Lecture three hours. Not an approved elective for physics majors or 
minors. 

480. Introduction to Solid State Physics (3).S. 

Elementary crystal structure, x-ray analysis of crystals, band theory of 
solids, study of electronic properties of metals and semiconductors. 
Lecture three hours. 

490, 491, 492. Theoretical Physics (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

Each quarter will be independent and will be devoted to separate topics 
such as: electric circuit theory, vector analysis and coordinate trans- 
formations, partial differential equations of physics, theory of relativity, 
waves, Fourier series and orthogonal functions. Lecture three hours. 



130 



DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 

DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 

R. Moore, Jr., Chairman, J. Barghothi, M. Hoffman, A. Hughes, R. Moy, 
A. Rahhal, D. Sutton, M. Williamson. 

The purposes of the Department of Political Science are to enable 
students to critically observe, to analyze and to understand the 
complex political world in which they live; further, its purpose is 
to encourage students to become knowledgeable and active citizens 
who play a role in the political processes of the nation and the 
world. 

A major in political science leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree 
consists of 48 hours including Political Science 200, 201, 203 and 
one course in each of the following areas in political science: 
Political Theory; International Relations; The Political Process; Com- 
parative Government; Public Law and Judicial Behavior; Advanced 
American Government; and Public Administration. The remaining 
18 hours consist of electives. The department requires a student 
majoring in political science to take History 201, 202 in addition 
to the requirements in general education. To earn the Bachelor of 
Arts degree the student must complete nine quarter hours of the 
second year of a foreign language. 

A minor in political science consists of 24 quarter hours including 
200, 201, 203 and at least one course in the area of Political Theory 
and one course in International Relations. The remaining nine hours 
are electives at the 300-400 level. 

The department also provides a concentration in political science 
for those majors in social science seeking a Bachelor of Science 
Degree and teacher certification. See page 171. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN POLITICAL SCIENCE 

200. Introduction to Political Science (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Political Science as a discipline, its method and outlook. Introduction to 
scope and content of Politics: theory and operations of democratic 
and nondemocratic governments. Required of all political science majors 
and social science majors concentrating in political science. 

201. American National Government (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A study of the formation and development of the national government, 
its organization, functions, and powers. 



DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 



131 



202. Problems and Policies of (3).F;W;S;SS. 

American Government 

A study of the policies, function, and programs of the national govern- 
ment. Specific policies in the area of labor, agriculture, business, wel- 
fare, civil rights, and national security are critically analyzed against a 
background of history, politics, and governmental institutions. 

203. American State and Local Government (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A study of the organization, functions, and powers of state, county, and 
municipal government in the United States. 

205. Statistical Methods (3).F;W;S. 

Same as Psychology 205. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

301. An Introduction to Political Analysis (3).F. 
An introduction to the basic research methods in political science: be- 
havioral methods for collection, review, organization and analysis of 
political data and historical quantitative comparative techniques of 
analysis. 

302. Political Theory Through The Seventeenth Century (3).F;SS. 
A survey and analysis of political thought from Plato through the 
seventeenth century, including selected writings of Plato, Aristotle, 
Aquinas, Machiavelli. (Also offered as Philosophy 304.) 

303. Modern Political Thought (3).W;SS. 
A historical survey and philosophical analysis of political thought from 
the Reformation through the nineteenth century. (Also offered as 
Philosophy 305.) 

304. Contemporary Political Thought (3).S. 
A critical study of the principal political theories of the present day. 
(Also offered as Philosophy 306.) 

305. Government and Politics in Rural America (3).S. 
A study of governmental organization and community power structures 
in rural America with emphasis on current problem areas such as law 
enforcement, public service facilities and finances. 

306. Government and Politics in Urban America (3).F. 
A study of the politics and problems of suburban and urban areas. 
The course will include government organizations, community power 
structures, urban political organizations, and selected problems of urban 
government. 

309. American Political Parties" (3).F. 
A study of the nature, organization, administration, function of political 
parties, with consideration given to their role in democracy, pressure 
groups, problems of American suffrage, political campaigning. 

310. International Relations (3).F;W;S. 
A survey of the problems in international relations, including power 
politics and organizations for settling international problems. 



132 



DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 



340. Public Opinion and Propaganda (3).F;W. 

(Same as Sociology 340) 

A study of the media and techniques of propaganda, and of propaganda 
as an instrument of public opinion formation. Concepts from political 
science and sociology will be used in an analysis of the formation and 
nature of public opinion and pressure groups. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

360. Introduction to Law (3).F. 
An examination of the antecedents of the American Legal System; 
emphasis on selected legal systems and political institutions of the 
Hebrews, Ancient Greece, Rome and Medieval Europe; the evolution 
of Roman Law, the influence of the Christian Church and of English 
common law and equity. 

361. [461] The American Judicial Process (3).F;SS. 
An examination of Judicial systems, court procedures, appeals proce- 
dures, and the use of legal reference materials with selected cases. 

364. [464] The Administrative Process (3).F. 

A study of the historical development and functioning of administrative 
agencies at all levels of government. 

369. [459] The Legislative Process (3).F. 

A study of the structure, functions, and behavior of local, state, and 
national legislative bodies with emphasis on composition, leadership 
procedures, party and interest group roles, constituency influence and 
representation theory. 

402. The Presidency (3).W. 

The central role of the American Presidency in the political processes. 
Emphasis on contemporary institutional nature of that office and the 
behavior of its occupants. 

408. Governments and Politics in the Middle East (3).W. 

A study of the governments and politics of Iran, Iraq, Syria, Lebanon, 
Egypt, Jordan, Saudi Arabia, and Turkey. 

450. Democracy and Communism (3).F;Ex. 
A course designed for teachers with a limited political science back- 
ground. An analysis of the basic concepts of democracy and com- 
munism and of the materials available for classroom instruction dealing 
with these competing ideologies. 

451. Governments and Politics of Asia (3).F. 
A study of the policies and institutions of the major Asian governments. 
Primary emphasis is given to the political evolution and current imple- 
mentation of the major internal and foreign policies of Japan, China, 
and India. 

452. Latin American Government and Policies (3).F. 
The structure and dynamics of Latin American political institutions. 
Attention is given to formal institutions and to basic social, economic, 
and cultural factors. 



DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 



133 



454. The Electoral Process (3).S. 
An examination of the factors which contribute to an electoral choice. 
Both sociological and psychological influences are considered. 

455. American Political Thought (3).W. 
A study of the main currents of political thought in the United States 
from 1776 to the present. 

456. Intermediate Statistical Methods (3).W. 
Same as Psychology 456. 

457. International Law (3).W. 
An examination of the nature, scope, sources and sanctions of inter- 
national law; the rights and duties of states and individuals. 

458. International Organizations (3).W;SS. 
An examination of the development and functioning of world organiza- 
tions with special emphasis on the United Nations and its specialized 
agencies. 

460. American Foreign Policy (3).S;SS. 

A study of the political process by which contemporary foreign policy 
is made and executed. 

462, 463. Constitutional Law of the United States (3,3).W,S. 

An intensive study of the court decisions which have contributed to the 
contemporary interpretation of the American Constitution. 

465. Principles of Public Administration (3).W;SS. 
A study of administrative organization, relationships, and controls in 
the United States with emphasis on national public administration. 

466. Administrative Law (3).S. 
This course stresses the legal principles and practical doctrines involved 
in the work of administrative tribunals vested with quasi-legislative or 
quasi-judicial powers, or both. 

467. Public Personnel Administration (3).S;SS. 
A study of public personnel systems in the U. S. with major concen- 
tration on the national civil service system. Special emphasis is given to 
current research in the areas of leadership, informal organization, 
motivation and small group theory. 

470. Political Sociology (3).S. 

Same as Sociology 470. 

473. Politics of Developing Nations (3).S. 

An examination and analysis of the political processes in the developing 
areas of the world, consideration of stresses of change, the international 
interactions and behavior of nations in their struggle toward political 
modernization. 



134 



DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 



475. The Governments and Politics of (3).F. 

Western Europe 

A survey of the Governmental institutions and political process in the 
parliamentary democracies of Western Europe with special emphasis 
on Great Britian, Federal Republic of Germany and France. 

476. [453] Governments and Politics of Eastern Europe (3).W. 
A survey of the governmental and party institutions, practices, and 
procedures in the Soviet Union and Eastern Europe. 

478. Governments and Politics of Africa (3).S. 

South of the Sahara 

A study of the governments and political institutions, domestic and 
international politics of the independent states of sub-Saharan Africa. 

480. Internship in Public Affairs (3-6).F;W;S;SS. 

Field work in the office of a governmental agency; city, county, state or 
national. Under certain circumstances, it might be the office of a 
political party organization or in that of some organized pressure group. 
The type of internship and place of organization in which it is taken 
must be satisfactory to the student and to the department. A research 
paper in which the student correlates his academic knowledge with his 
practical experience is required. 

481. The Political Novel (3).S. 
An examination of the contributions of the novelist in creating a 
political model that can be used to effectively explain and describe 
political behavior. 

482. Political Leadership (3).W. 
An examination of the factors responsible for the development of the 
political leader; the influence of third persons, health, family back- 
ground, personality, social class, and the accidents of history that place 
a particular individual in a position to assume leadership. 

490. Seminar: Scope and Methods of (3).F;W;S. 

Political Science 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F. 
Hoffman. 

501. Readings and Research in Political Behavior (3).W. 
A comparative analysis of the factors influencing political behavior, 
political socialization and political participation. Hoffman. 

504. Seminar in American Government and Politics (3).F;SS. 

Special investigation of selected topics in American government and 
politics. The topic will vary from year to year and barring duplication 
may be repeated for credit. Moore, Sutton. 



DEPARTMENT OF POLITICAL SCIENCE 



135 



505, 506, 507. Readings and Research in (3,3,3).F,W,S. 

Empirical Political Theory 

An in-depth analysis of Political Belief Systems, recent Democratic 
Theories, and Political Personality. Barghothi. 

508. Readings and Research in Public Law and (3).S. 

Judicial Behavior 

An examination of the multiple roles of law and the judicial system in 
the formulation and execution of public policy to include the role of the 
judiciary in politics and government with emphasis on variables affecting 
judicial decision making. Moore. 

510. Democratic and Totalitarian Systems (6).SS. 

A comparative analysis of constitutional democracy and totalitarian 
systems. Offered as a summer institute. Hughes, Moy. 

513. Readings and Research in International Relations (3).W;SS. 
This course will concern itself with in-depth treatment of the problems 
and policies of Developing Nations, the issues of Colonialism, Imperial- 
ism, Nationalism, and an examination of current methodological trends 
in the exploration of these problem areas. Barghothi, Moy. 

515. Problems of Public Administration (3).F;SS. 

Graduate seminar dealing with the development of contemporary 
organization and management theories. Use will be made of case studies 
in relating theory to administrative practices. Rahhal. 

517. Geographic Aspects of World Affairs (3).S. 

A geographic analysis of major world movements and events associating 
the physical environment with social, political, racial factors. Yoder. 
(Same as Geography 506) 

525. Seminar in Comparative Government and Politics (3).S;SS. 
An examination of selective areas of Comparative Governments. The 
topic will vary from year to year and barring duplication may be 
repeated for credit. Moy. 

535. Problems in State and Local Government (3).W;S. 

Research on selected topics and American state and local government. 
The topic will vary from year to year and barring duplication may be 
repeated for credit. Williamson. 

540. Seminar (3). On Demand 

Staff. 

548. Independent Study in Political Science (Variable Credit). 

F;W;S;SS. 
Staff. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (3-6).F;W;S;SS. 



136 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 

B. Johnson, Chairman, W. Brigner, H. Burton, D. Clark, J. Crouch, 
M. Dowell, D. Duke, P. Fox, M. Gilley, G. Hubbard, I. Kauffman, 
R. Levin, H. McDade, W. Moss, M. Powell, T. Snipes, R. Steenland 
G. Wesley. 

The objectives of the Department of Psychology are: 

1. To prepare students for postgraduate and terminal programs 
in psychology. 

2. To create a viable interest in psychology — an interest that will 
be paralleled by a growing competency in the discipline. 

3. To provide future teachers with workable repertoire of sound 
psychological principles to underlie the teaching methodology. 

4. To advance psychology as a science and as a means of advanc- 
ing human welfare. 

A major in psychology leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree 
consists of 42 quarter hours of psychology including Psychology 201, 
202, 205, 321 or 365, 364, 457, 458, one course from 301, 450, 
451, 452, or 499 and 18 hours of electives. A minor in psychology 
consists of 21 quarter hours including 201, 202, and 15 hours of 
electives. 

The Master of Arts degree in General-Theoretical Psychology con- 
sists of 45 quarter hours, including six quarter hours credit for re- 
search and thesis. Required courses include Psychology 457, 458, 
500, 534, and 550. A candidate may take any four of the following 
courses: Psychology 466, 528, 529, 530, or 531. A reading knowl- 
edge of an approved foreign language is required of all candidates 
for the degree. The candidate may select a minor field in sociology 
or the physical or biological sciences. 

The Master of Arts degree in Clinical Psychology consists of 70 
quarter hours of graduate credit, including six quarter hours of 
research and thesis. Required courses include Psychology 500, 534, 
550, 551 through 554, and 560. In addition to course work, thesis 
practicum, and internship, each candidate shall demonstrate reading 
proficiency in an approved foreign language. 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY JLo / 
COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN PSYCHOLOGY 

201. General Psychology (3).F;W;S. 
Emphasizes psychology as a science of human behavior; man as a 
biological organism in a social world; man as a motivated person 
with attitudes, emotions, needs, desires; man as a thinking, imagining, 
reasoning, learning person. Attempts to relate man to his biological, 
physical, cultural, and personal worlds. 

202. General Psychology (3).F;S. 
A continuation and extension of 201. Emphasis placed on emotional 
and social handicaps, cognitive processes, personality, group-related 
behavior, communication, and industrial psychology. 

205. Statistical Methods (3).F;W;S. 

A study of the basic principles and methods of descriptive and 
inferential statistics. Provides experience in the presentation and analysis 
of quantitative data. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

301. Human Growth and Development (3).F;W;S. 
A study of the interaction of biological and environmental factors in 
the growth of the individual from conception to maturity. Special 
sectioning of elementary and secondary majors is used to place emphasis 
on the pupils of the school age to be taught. Required of majors in 
elementary and secondary education. 

302. Educational Psychology (3).F;W;S. 
An analysis of the processes important in learning. The major concepts, 
theories, and research in learning, thinking, and development are em- 
phasized. Special attention is given to educational applications. Required 
of majors in elementary and secondary education. 

303. Principles of Behavior (3).F;W;S. 
A study of the meaning, dynamics, and determinants of personality. 
Effective and unsuccessful kinds of adaptation are contrasted. Emphasis 
is placed on educational application. Required of majors in elementary 
and secondary education. 

320. Motivation (3).F. 
Theories and experimentally determined facts concerning drives, needs, 
preferences and desires. Prerequisite: Psychology 201. 

321. Sensation and Perception (3).W. 
Deals with the methods and approaches to the study of sensation 
and perception. Emphasizes theoretical interpretations and experimental 
results. Prerequisite: Psychology 202. 

322. Language and Communication (3).S. 
An introduction to psycholinguistics and verbal behavior. Includes 
acquisition, sequential structure and semantic aspects. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 201. 



138 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 



348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

364. Principles of Learning (3).F. 
A topic approach to the psychology of learning. Includes reinforcement, 
extinction, patterns of reinforcement, generalization, discrimination, 
transfer of training, retention, forgetting, etc. Prerequisites: Psychology 

201 and 205. 

365. Experimental Psychology (3).W. 
A concentration upon the description of problems, methods, design 
and procedures for analyzing data. Prerequisites: Psychology 201 or 

202 and 205. 

375. Introduction to Rehabilitation (3).F. 
A study of the historical development of vocational rehabilitation. 
Emphasis placed on the conceptual, philosophical, and legal aspects 
of the vocational rehabilitation program. Prerequisite: Psychology 201 
or permission of instructor. 

376. The Rehabilitation Process (3).W. 
The concept of counseling in rehabilitation. The basic aspects of human 
growth and behavior; counseling definitions and theories. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 201 or permission of instructor. 

440, 441, 442. Seminar in Psychology ( 1,1,1 ).F,W,S. 

Consideration of some of the contemporary research issues in psychology. 
Opportunities for majors to consider a particular aspect of psychology 
in depth. Topics vary from year to year depending upon the interests of 
students. Prerequisites: Eighteen hours of psychology or permission of 
chairman. 

448. Independent Study m (3).F;W;S. 

Intensive reading, research and student-faculty conferences on special 
subjects for advanced students. Admission only with approval of the 
department. 

450. Psychology of Personality (3).F. 
A study of factors involved in the development of personality. Pre- 
requisite: Psychology 201. 

45 1 . Social Psychology ( 3 ) .W. 
A study of social implications and applications of group stimulation, 
response, interaction, change and sometimes disintegration. 

452. Abnormal Psychology (3).S. 
A study of various abnormal phases of behavior; prevention and treat- 
ment of certain social-emotional problems; examination of recent 
clinical and experimental findings. Prerequisite: Psychology 201 or 303. 

455. Advanced Educational Psychology (3).F;W;S. 

The psychology of learning as it applies to the learner, the learning 
process and the teaching situation. 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 



139 



456. Intermediate Statistical Methods (3).W. 
Depth study of analysis of variance, analysis of covariance, correlation 
and regression, relationships to basic research and experimental design. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 205 or equivalent. 

457. Physiological Psychology (3).S. 
An examination of the biological correlates of behavior, structure and 
functions of the sensory and motor systems, endoctrine and metabolic 
processes. Prerequisite: Psychology 202 or permission of instructor. 

458. History and Systems of Psychology I (3).F. 
An overview of the origins and development of psychological concepts, 
movements and fields of study existing before and during the early 
1900's. Emphasis placed on an understanding of the philosophical 
thought lying behind current psychological systems. Prerequisites: 
Twelve hours of psychology. 

459. History and Systems of Psychology II (3).W. 
A depth study of twentieth century psychological systems and theories. 
Emphasis placed on an understanding of current psychological issues, 
formulations and methodologies. Prerequisite: Psychology 458. 

460. Psychology of Disability (3).S. 
Examination of the physical, psychological, and sociological problems 
associated with handicapping conditions. Prerequisite: Psychology 201, 
375 or permission of instructor. 

461. Field Work in Vocational Rehabilitation (3).S. 
Supervised field placement in a rehabilitation facility or district office 
to expose the student to contemporary problems and issues of the 
physically, mentally, and socially handicapped and provide him an 
opportunity to apply the basic principles of vocational rehabilitation. 
Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. 

466. Comparative Psychology (3).S. 

Covers psychological processes in infrahuman organisms, the place of 
animal experimentation in psychology and animal research. Prerequisites: 
Psychology 201 and 205 or equivalent. 

470, 471, 472. Industrial Psychology (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

A survey of potential and actual applications of psychological principals 
and methods to the problems of business and industry. Attention given 
to the structure and dynamics of organizations, labor management 
relations and employee and consumer behavior. Prerequisite: Psychology 
201. 

499. Psychology of Early Childhood (3).F. 

A study of the origin of life and the principles of growth operative 
during the prenatal, postnatal, infant and early childhood periods; the 
first five years of life. The laboratory is offered in conjunction with the 
Nursery School and gives opportunity for the student to develop under- 
standing through systematic observation and individual case history 
studies. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. Prerequisites: Nine 
hours in psychology. 



140 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 



GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Research Problems ( 1 ) ( 1 ) ( 1 ) .F;W;S. 

A study of research problems, types of research, organization and 
reporting of research. Required in the first three quarters of graduate 
study. (Meets two hours every other week.) Staff. 

501. Psychology of Late Childhood (3).W. 
A study of childhood behavior from the ages of five through ten. 
Physiological, emotional, social and intellectual aspects are examined. 
Prerequisites: Nine hours of psychology or permission of instructor. 
Snipes, Crouch. 

502. Psychology of Adolescence (3).S. 
A consideration of the physical, intellectual, social and emotional 
changes expected during adolescence. Prerequisite: Nine hours of 
psychology or permission of instructor. Snipes, Crouch. 

510. Psychology of the Gifted (3).W. 

A study of the identification, needs, and motivation of the gifted and 
of research conducted with this group. Winford. Hubbard. 

512. Psychology of the Socially and Emotionally (3).W. 

Maladjusted 

Characteristics, identification and programs of prevention and re- 
education for both the emotionally disturbed and the socially mal- 
adjusted. Wesley, Moss. 

514. Use and Interpretation of Group Tests (3).F;S. 

Same as Education 514. 

519. Analysis of the Individual (3).W. 

An application of psychological principles and guidance techniques of 
self -appraisal of the personality of others. Prerequisite: Psychology 
450. Wesley, Gilley, Levin. 

526. Individual Intelligence Testing — Wechsler Scales (3).W. 
A study of the development, standardization, administration and inter- 
pretation of the Wechsler Intelligence Scales. Supervised practice in 
administration. Prerequisite: Psychology 514 or equivalent. Johnson, 
Levin, McDade. 

527. Individual Intelligence Testing — Stanford-Binet (3).S. 
Scales 

A study of the development, standardization, administration and inter- 
pretation of the Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scale. Supervised practicum 
in administration. Prerequisite: Psychology 514 or equivalent. Johnson, 
Levin, McDade. 

528. Theories of Learning (3).F. 
A course designed to promote understanding of the theories of learning 
of historical and current value. Prerequisite: Psychology 364 or 455. 
Brigner, Kauffman, Fox, Moss. 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 



141 



529. Advanced Experimental Psychology (3).S. 
The application of experimental methods to a variety of psychological 
phenomena. Emphasis will be placed upon each student conceiving, 
conducting, and reporting an experiment. Prerequisite: Psychology 365 
or equivalent. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. Brigner, 
Kauffman, Fox. 

530. Theories of Personality (3).S. 
A critical study of individual theories of personality structure and 
development with their characteristic research and influence. Clark, 
Gil ley. 

531. Advanced General Psychology (3).F. 
A critical study of some of the major experimental and research 
findings and methods in contemporary psychology. Prerequisites: Psy- 
chology 202 and nine hours psychology. Brigner, Duke, Kaufftnan, Moss. 

532. Evaluation of Exceptional Children (3).F. 
A study of special diagnostic procedures with children who have 
physical, intellectual, sensory impairments. Prerequisite: Education 456 
or equivalent. Hubbard, Winford. 

534. Advanced Statistics (3).W. 
A continuation of 456. Statistical estimation, inference, hypothesis 
testing, scaling, and the use of quantitative models in design and 
analysis of research. Prerequisite: Psychology 456 or equivalent. Dowell, 
Kauffman, Fox. 

535. Advanced Abnormal Psychology (3).F. 
A critical examination of major theories and data concerning the 
emotionally handicapped. Emphasis placed on recent findings and 
experimental research. Prerequisites: Psychology 450 or 530, 452 or 
permission of instructor. Johnson, Gilley. 

536. Theories of Psychotherapy (3).S. 
A critical evaluation of major theories of psychotherapy, including cross 
cultural studies, current applications and research findings. Prerequisite: 
Psychology 535. Gilley, Levin, McDade. 

540. Seminar in Psychology (3).S. 

Consideration of some of the contemporary research issues in psychol- 
ogy. Opportunity for graduate students to consider a particular aspect of 
psychology in depth. Topics vary from year to year depending upon 
the interests of students. Prerequisite: Graduate status or permission of 
instructor. Staff. 

548. Independent Study. Staff. (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis. Staff. (6).F;W;S. 

551, 552, 553. Clinical Practicum I ( 1,1,1 ).F,W,S. 
Introduction to interdisciplinary team approach to problems in voca- 
tional and emotional areas; directed observation of starlings, interviews, 
psychotherapy and psychological assessment at the Psychological Services 
Center. Prerequisite: Admission to MA program in clinical psychology. 
Clinical Staff. 



142 



DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY 



554. Clinical Practicum II (3).F. 
Progressive assumption of clinical responsibility in psychotherapy, 
psychological testing, referral procedures; supervision in these areas 
by licensed psychologists at the Psychological Services Center or other 
designated practicum locations. Prerequisites: Clinical Practicum I. 
Clinical Staff. 

555. Advanced Developmental Psychology (3).F. 
Study at advanced level of developmental stages throughout the course 
of life, from conception through old age. Special attention will be given 
to current theories, to methodology, and to illustrative areas of research. 
Prerequisite: Psychology 205 and preceded by, or taken concurrently 
with, Psychology 457. Fox, Gilley, Snipes. 

556. Experimental Analysis of Mental Deficiency (3).W. 
Research, etiology, diagnosis, prognosis, and behavior modification in 
the area of mental deficiency. Prerequisite: Psychology 555. B. Johnson. 

557. Clinical Psychology (1).F. 
Seminar on issues in professional clinical psychology; licensing, ethical 
and legal considerations in clinical psychology, role relations with other 
professions. Prerequisite: Clinical Practicum I. Clinical Staff. 

558. Projective Techniques (3).S. 
Theory, research findings and clinical applications of major projective 
techniques, with emphasis on Rorschach and TAT. Prerequisite: Psy- 
chology 526, 527, 535. Gilley, Levin, McDade. 

559. Advanced Psychological Assessment. (3).F. 
Advanced supervision in techniques of individual psychological evalu- 
ations, including interview techniques, behavioral observations and assess- 
ment of personality and intellectual functioning in persons with be- 
havior disorders; the writing of meaningful psychological reports, in- 
cluding appropriate recommendations for treatment or referral. Pre- 
requisites: Psychology 526, 527, Clinical Practicum I. 551, 552, 553. 
Gilley, Levin, McDade. 

560. 561. Internship (6,6). W,S. 
Six months full time placement in mental health setting under super- 
vision of a licensed psychologist; psychological evaluation, individual 
and group psychotherapy; work with interdisciplinary team; consulta- 
tion with community agencies, schools, and work in institutional settings. 
Prerequisite: Completion of course work in MA Clinical Psychology 
program. Clinical Staff. 



DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY J_40 
DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 

A. M. Denton, Jr., Chairman, H. Ayers, L. Brown, R. Jackall, 
L. Keasey, F. Lovrich, M. Marcum, B. Purrington, S. Westfall. 

The undergraduate major in sociology is designed to provide a 
mature understanding of social behavior and to give preparation 
for a variety of careers. A student, with the assistance of his adviser, 
may select courses that will provide the foundation for careers in 
the professions, social work, social services, and governmental service. 
Further study in Graduate School is also possible. 

A major in sociology leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree consists 
of 42 hours including 201, 205, 206, 461, and Anthropology 210, 
and 27 quarter hours of electives in sociology. Anthropology 235 
and 315 may be taken for credit toward the major in sociology unless 
the student is minoring in anthropology. 

A minor in sociology consists of 24 quarter hours including 
Sociology 201, Anthropology 210, and 18 quarter hours of electives 
in sociology. 

A minor in anthropology consists of 24 quarter hours including 
Anthropology 210, 402, Sociology 201, and 15 quarter hours of 
electives in anthropology. 

The Master of Arts degree with a major in sociology is offered in 
the program for secondary school teachers and in the program for 
junior college teachers. An undergraduate major in sociology is pre- 
requisite for either program. 

The major consists of a minimum of 33 quarter hours in sociology, 
six hours of which may be for the thesis if the candidate elects to 
write a thesis. Courses in sociology that are required are Sociology 
500, Bibliography and Research; Sociology 456, Intermediate Statis- 
tical Methods; and Sociology 525, Contemporary Sociological Theory. 
If the candidate has not had the equivalent of Sociology 205, Statis- 
tical Methods, and Sociology 461, The Development of Sociological 
Theory, in his undergraduate program, he must take them and will 
receive graduate credit for 46 1 . 

For further information about required courses in education and 
total hours required in these graduate programs, see the section on 
the Graduate School in this catalog, or see the Graduate School 
catalog. 



144 



DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 



For the curriculum for a major in social science and concentration 
in sociology and anthropology leading to the Bachelor of Science 
degree and teacher certification, see page 171. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN SOCIOLOGY 
AND ANTHROPOLOGY 

SOCIOLOGY 

198. Marriage and Family Relations (3).F;W;S. 

Analysis of the forms and functions of family relationships; sex roles, 
marital choice, procreation, and socialization; history of American 
family patterns and effects of contemporary social changes. This course 
may not be counted toward a major or minor in sociology. Sociology 
majors and minors should take Sociology 305. 

201. General Sociology (3).F;W;S. 

An introduction to the field of sociology. How society and its com- 
ponent parts are structured; analysis of the structure and function 
of social institutions and groups; relationships of the individual to 
society. Prerequisite to all sociology courses except 198 and 203. 

203. Major Social Issues and Problems (3).F;W;S. 

Critical analysis of some of the major social issues and problems current 
in American society. 

205. Statistical Methods (3).F;W;S. 
A study of the basic principles and methods of descriptive and inferential 
statistics. Provides experience in the presentation and analysis of quan- 
titative data. 

206. Research Methods (3).W;S. 
Relationship of theory to research; research design, sampling procedures, 
research analysis. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

300. Criminology (3).F;S. 

The study of crime and delinquency as social phenomena. Nature 

and types of criminal behavior, theories of causation, control and 
prevention; methods of treatment. 

305. Family Organization and Interaction (3).F;W. 

Analysis of family structure, functions, and relationships. Social-cultural 
differences in family behavior. Comparison of roles and values in 
various cultures. 

310. Juvenile Delinquency (3).W. 

Evaluation of knowledge and research in the causation and correction 
of juvenile delinquency; family background and socialization, individual 
life experience, cultural and ecological situations affecting delinquents; 
analysis of attempts to predict and control delinquency. 



DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 



145 



320. Collective Behavior (3).F. 

Analysis of crowd, mass, public behavior; patterns of leadership, 
institutionalization and social control in social movements of various 
kinds and their effects upon the social order. 

330. The Community (3).S. 

Analysis of the structure and functioning of rural and urban communities; 
social organization and social change within and among communities. 

340. Public Opinion and Propaganda (3).F;W. 

A study of the media and techniques of propaganda, and of propaganda 
as an instrument of public opinion formation. Concepts from political 
science and sociology will be used in an analysis of the formation and 
nature of public opinion and pressure groups. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

350. Social Deviation (3).F. 

The course emphasizes the social factors in causation. Review is made 
of the leading theories in deviation and then deviation types are analyzed; 
homosexuality, drug use and addiction, alcoholism, alienation, etc. 

403. Industrial Sociology (3).W. 

Theory and types of productive systems from an historical perspective; 
social structure and functions of industry and trade unionism; analysis 
of inter-relationships between industry and society. 

405. Population and Society (3).W. 

Systematic study of the growth and change of populations in relation to 
their cultural setting; trends in fertility, mortality, migration, composition, 
and population policies; national and international implications of recent 
population growth trends. 

410. Field of Social Work (3).F;W. 
Historical background, scope, philosophy, aims, and methods of social 
work; study of organization and methods utilized by local agencies; 
employment opportunities. 

411. Social Welfare— Field Work (3).S. 
Study of the relationships between a community's welfare needs and 
its social agencies; analysis of recent social welfare legislation. Pre- 
requisite: Sociology 410 and written permission of instructor. 

440. Seminar (3-6). On Demand 

Study, research and writing in selected areas. A student may enroll 
in this course twice for a total of six hours, providing the course 
content is non-duplicating. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. 

448. Independent Study; Directed (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 
Reading and Research 

449. Field Experience; Internship (Variable Credit). On Demand 



146 



DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 



450. Race Relations (3).F. 
Analysis of intergroup relationships; the bases of conflict, accommodation 
and assimilation; the nature and consequences of prejudice and dis- 
crimination; evaluation of proposals for reduction or elimination of 
prejudice and discrimination. Prerequisite: Sociology 201 or 203. 

451. Social Psychology ( 3 ) .W. 
A study of the behavior and experience of the individual in social 
contexts. 

456. Intermediate Statistical Methods (3).W. 

Depth study of analysis of variance, analysis of covariance, correlation 
and regression, relationships to basic research and experimental design. 
Prerequisite: Sociology 205 or equivalent. 

461. The Development of Sociological Theory (3).W;S. 

Development of sociological theory from Auguste Comte (19th century) 
to the present. 

470. Political Sociology (3).S. 

Social influences on political behavior; the relationship between political 
and other institutions. (Same as Political Science 470.) 

480. Sociology of the Family (3).S. 

The origin and development of the family as a social institution; the 
contemporary family in various cultures; the relationship of the family 
to the economic, political, religious, and educational institutions in 
American society. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F. 

Brown. 

502. Concepts in Sociology (3).F. 

Systematic survey and critical analysis of selected sociological concepts 
and theories. This course is for graduate students who have a limited 
background in sociology. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor or de- 
partment chairman. Denton, Keasey, Jackall. 

508. Urban Sociology (3).W. 

Urbanism as a way of life. Growth and development of urban areas, 
urban social organization, change and problems, ecological patterning, 
urban planning and social controls. Denton, Westfall. 

510. Social Structure (3).S. 

An analysis of social stratification, its nature and function, caste, 
estates, classes, rank and prestige; community power structure; bureau- 
cratic organization. Denton, Brown. 

515. Complex Organizations (3).F. 

An examination of theories of large-scale organizations with a substantive, 
comparative analysis of types such as bureaucratic, prison, hospital, 
industrial, scientific, and voluntary organizations. Jackall. 



DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 



147 



520. Demography (3).S. 

A systematic survey and analysis of major theories of population 

growth and change. Intensive analysis of world population trends. 
Denton, Brown. 

525. Contemporary Sociological Theory (3).S. 

A review and assessment of the works of leading contemporary 
sociologists with critical analysis centering around the nature of 
sociological explanation. Westfall. 

540. Seminar (3-6). On Demand 

A specialized course involving advanced study, research, and writing 
by small groups in selected areas. Students may enroll twice in this 
course for credit totaling six quarter hours, but in no case shall 
students receive credit for a seminar which duplicates the content of 
one for which they have previously received credit. Staff. 

548. Independent Study: Directed Reading (Variable Credit), 
and Research F;W;S;SS. 

549. Field Experience; Internship (Variable Credit). On Demand 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;S;SS. 

ANTHROPOLOGY 

210. General Anthropology (3).F;W;S. 

An introduction to the field of anthropology; a study of the major 
racial groups and their characteristics; archaeological evidence of 
cultural evolution and growth. 

235. North American Archaeology (3).F. 

A general survey of Indian life in North America before white contact. 
Basic archaeological concepts will be introduced; emphasis on the pre- 
history of the Eastern U.S., the Southwest, and the Great Plains. 

245. Man and His Environment (3).W. 

The interrelationship between man and his natural environment. How 
man adapts to and changes his surroundings; the role of the environment 
in man's biological and cultural evolution; the effects of environmental 
deterioration on modern man. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit) .F;W;S;SS. 

315. Cultural Anthropology (3).F;S. 

The nature of culture and society; a study of a variety of cultures 
on different developmental levels, including social, economic, political, 
educational, and religious systems and their interrelationships; a com- 
parison of preliterate with contemporary societies. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 



148 



DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 



401. North American Indians (3).W. 
An ethnographic survey of the American Indian cultures. Emphasis on 
cultural differences in social structure and personality. 

402. Archaeological Method and Theory (3).S. 
A survey of the basic methods and techniques of archaeological field 
work and analysis and the theory of methodology of archaeological 
interpretation. Occasional weekend field trips. Seniors or consent of 
instructor. 

440. Seminar (3-6). On Demand 

Study, research and writing in selected areas in anthropology. A student 
may enroll in this course for a total of six hours, providing the course 
content is non-duplicating. Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. 



448. Independent Study; Directed 
Reading and Research 



(Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 



449. Field Experience; Internship (Variable Credit). On Demand 

465. Folk and Peasant Cultures of the Modern World (3).S. 

Descriptive and theoretical analysis of modern folk and peasant cultures 
in different areas of the world. Emphasis on problems of social 
change and urbanization. 




The College of Business 

William V. Muse, Dean 

Formed in 1970, the College of Business has as its primary aim 
the development of future leaders for the business and industrial 
community. Through courses of instruction and other educational 
programs an attempt is made to develop the analytical skill and 
decision-making ability of each student; to enhance one's under- 
standing of economic concepts and business practices; and to expand 
one's awareness of the role and function of industrial organizations. 

DEGREES OFFERED 

Appalachian State University, through the College of Business, 
offers the following degrees: 

1. Bachelor of Science in Business Administration (with a con- 
centration in either economics or business) 

2. Bachelor of Science (with teacher certification) 

3. Bachelor of Arts 

4. Master of Arts 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BUSINESS 
ADMINISTRATION DEGREE 

In order for a student to earn the Bachelor of Science in Business 
Administration Degree, the following requirements must be met: 

1. Completion of a minimum of 183 quarter hours with a grade- 
point average of at least 2.0. A transfer student must have 
at least a 2.0 grade-point average on his work at Appalachian. 

2. Completion of the general education requirements as out- 
lined in the section on the General College. 

3. Completion of a minimum of 60 quarter hours in the major 
fields. A student must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average 
on all work attempted in the major. A transfer student must 
complete at least 12 quarter hours of work in his major at 
Appalachian and must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average 
on all work attempted in the major at Appalachian. 



150 



THE COLLEGE OF BUSINESS 



4. Completion of a minor consisting of a minimum of 18 to 27 
quarter hours from a department other than a department 
in the College of Education. 

5. Completion of residence requirements. 

6. Compliance with regulations concerning satisfactory citizenship 
and the settlement of all expense accounts. 

7. Recommendation of the faculty. 

8. Completion of required Aptitude Test and the Admission 
Test for Graduate Study in Business (ATGSB). 

Each student is assigned advisors who will help him select and 
plan major and minor curricula; however, the final responsibility for 
meeting academic requirements remains with the student. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 
(with teacher certification) 

For the general requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree 
with teacher certification see page 163. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

In order for a student to earn the Bachelor of Arts degree in the 
College of Business, the following requirements must be met: 

1. Completion of at least a minimum of 183 quarter hours with 
a grade-point average of at least 2.0. A transfer student must 
have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on his work at Appa- 
lachian. 

2. Completion of general education requirements as outlined in 
the section on the General College, pages 59, 60, and 61. 

3. Completion of nine quarter hours of a second year of foreign 
language or more. The Department of Foreign Languages 
places students at the level at which they are prepared to per- 
form regardless of previously earned units. 

4. Completion of a major consisting of a minimum of 60 quarter 
hours. A student must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average 
on his work in the major. A transfer student must complete 
at least 12 quarter hours of work in his major at Appalachian 
and must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on his work 
in the major at Appalachian. 



THE COLLEGE OF BUSINESS 



151 



5. Completion of a minor consisting of 21 to 24 quarter hours 
from a department other than a Department in Education. 

6. Completion of residence requirements. 

7. Compliance with regulations concerning satisfactory citizenship 
and the settlement of all expense accounts. 

8. Recommendation of the faculty. 

9. Completion of required Aptitude Test and the Admission Test 
for Graduate Study in Business (ATGSB). 

Each student is assigned advisers who will help him select and 
plan major and minor curricula; however, the final responsibility for 
meeting academic requirements remains with the student. 

A candidate for the Bachelor of Arts Degree may qualify for a 
teacher's certificate by admission to professional education courses 
through the Chairman of the Department of Teacher Education and 
by completing all academic and professional education requirements 
for certification. 

MASTER OF ARTS DEGREE 

For the general requirements for the Master of Arts degree see 
page 154. 

ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE OF BUSINESS 

To be admitted to the College of Business as a candidate for a 
baccalaureate degree a student must have: 

1. Completed at least 90 quarter hours. 

2. A quality-point ratio of at least 2.0. 

3. Completed 

a. English 100, 110, 120. 

b. Six hours of literature. 

c. History (completed general education requirements in 
history). 

d. Mathematics 101 or 107. 

e. A year of natural science. 

f. Three quarter hours of physical education activity courses 

4. Been accepted by the College of Business as a major. 



152 



THE COLLEGE OF BUSINESS 



If a student does not satisfy all of these conditions, he may, with 
the approval of the dean of the college concerned, be admitted 
provisionally. A student admitted provisionally must remove any 
deficiency by the beginning of his tenth quarter at Appalachian. 
If he does not, he is not eligible for continued enrollment. 

A student who is a candidate for a teaching certificate must be 
admitted to the teacher education program by the Chairman of the 
Department of Teacher Education. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 

Courses are listed by departments in alphabetical order. Courses 
numbered 100 to 199 inclusive are normally offered for freshmen; 
200 to 299 for sophomores; 300 to 399 for juniors; 400 to 499 for 
seniors; 300 to 499 for graduate students with the approval of ad- 
viser; and 500 and above for graduate students. Courses open to lower 
classes are also open to upper classes. For courses numbered 500 
and above the name of the professor who ordinarily teaches the 
course is given in italics following the course description. 

The figure in brackets preceding a course title indicates the course 
number used in the catalog of 1970-71. 

The figure in parentheses after the course title gives the credit 
in quarter hours; for example the figure (3) means three quarter 
hours. 

Quarters of the year in which the course is offered are repre- 
sented by symbols: "F" for fall quarter, "W" for winter quarter, 
"S" for spring quarter, "SS" for summer session, "Ex" for extension. 

A hyphen in the course number, credit, and quarters of the year 
in which the course is offered indicates that the course extends 
through two or more quarters and that the preceding quarter 
must be completed before the following quarter can be taken. 

The comma in the course number, credit, and quarters indicates 
that the course is continuous but that one quarter may be taken 
independently of another. 

The semicolon in the quarter offered indicates that the course 
is a one quarter course and is repeated in a subsequent quarter. 

Special requirements for admission to a course are stated after 
the word prerequisite. 

The administration reserves the right to withdraw courses for 
which there is insufficient enrollment. 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS .LOO 
DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 

O. Sutton, Chairman, R. Angell, A. Blackburn, J. Brashear, W. Brown, 
F. Clamon, J. Courbois, B. Elledge, S. Harris, M. Hawkinson, R. Hopkins, 
J. Jones, A. Kannwischer, C. Messere, T. Mukherjee, W. Muse, J. Riner, 
C. Speer, R. Stetcher, E. Taylor, N. Trivette, K. Tulley, R. Weber, 
R. West, J. Wilson, G. Zuckerman. 

The objectives of the Department of Economics and Business 
are to help students to become effective leaders by developing skills, 
attitudes, and understandings essential for the successful direction 
of business relationships; to gain and use concepts and terminology 
of business and economic theory which will aid them in solving 
problems involving political, social, business and economic environ- 
ments; to recognize the importance of interdisciplinary relationships 
and to feel a responsibility, through cooperative effort, to promote 
utilization of a general education. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE IN BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 

The Bachelor of Science in Business Administration degree may 
be in either business or economics. The business curriculum con- 
sists of 60 quarter hours above course 103. These 60 quarter hours 
must include Economics 201-202-203, 301 or 302, 456; Business 
204-205-206, 320, 415, 458; and 27 quarter hours of electives. 
Business 403, 404, and 405 may not be taken as electives for this 
program. 

The economics curriculum consists of 60 quarter hours including 
Economics 201-202-203, 301, 302, 307, 456; Business 204-205-206, 
320; and 27 quarter hours selected from the following of which 
18 quarter hours must be in economics: Economics 303, 305, 306, 
403, 405, 406, 452, 453, 455, 490; Business 306, 400, 401, 402, 
415, 458, 459, 460, and 462. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 
(with teacher certification) 

A major in economics and business with teacher certification may 
be in either the comprehensive or basic business curriculum. The 
comprehensive curriculum consists of Business 102, 103 and a mini- 
mum of 60 quarter hours above course level 103. These courses 
include Business 104, 201-202-203, 204-205-206, 302, 303, 304 
or 305, 306, 320, 400, 401 or 402, 403, 404 or 405, 415, and 



154 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



Economics 201-202-203. Those who select the basic business cur- 
riculum must complete in lieu of shorthand (Business 201-202-203, 
304) Business 458, and nine quarter hours in economics and/or 
business with at least 3 hours in accounting. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS 

The Bachelor of Arts degree consists of 60 quarter hours above 
course 103. These 60 quarter hours must include Economics 201- 
202-203, 301 or 302, 456, Business 204-205-206, 320, 415, 458, 
and 27 quarter hours of electives in economics and business. Busi- 
ness 403, 404, and 405 may not be taken as electives for this 
program. A student may include not more than nine quarter hours 
in office skills in the major for the Bachelor of Arts degree. 

MASTER OF ARTS 

The Master of Arts degree in economics and business consists of 
54 quarter hours, including Business 500, a course numbered 500 or 
above in marketing or finance, Business 515, and a course numbered 
500 or above in economics, 24 quarter hours selected with the ap- 
proval of the graduate adviser, and a minor of 18 quarter hours. 

MINOR IN ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 

A minor in economics and business leading to a baccalaureate 
degree consists of Economics 201-202-203, and 15 quarter hours 
of electives in economics and/or business. Business 101, 102, 103, 
403, 404, and 405 may not be taken as electives for this program. 
A student may include not more than nine quarter hours in office 
skills in the minor for the Bachelor of Arts degree. 

ECONOMICS FOR SOCIAL SCIENCE MAJOR 

For the curriculum for a major in social science and concentra- 
tion in economics leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and 
teacher certification see page 171. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 

ECONOMICS 

200. General Economics (3).F;W;S. 

A survey course of elementary economics designed for non-business 
and non-social studies majors who plan to take only one course in 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



155 



the field. A brief treatment of the production and distribution of 
wealth in society, money and banking, the organization of business, and 
international trade. Credit will not be given for both 200 and 201. 

201-202-203. Principles of Economics ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A study of the present-day economics system; demand, supply, prices 
and costs; wages, rent, interest and profit; business cycles, money, 
banking and the Federal Reserve System; international trade; and a 
comparison of Capitalism, Socialism, Communism, and Facism. Credit 
will not be given for both 200 and 201. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

301. Micro-Economic Analysis (3).W. 
An intermediate course in economic theory with emphasis on the 
theory of consumer behavior, price theory, and resource allocation. 
Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

302. Macro-Economic Analysis (3).F;W;S. 
An analysis of the nation's income, output, employment, and general 
price level. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

303. Labor Economics (3).W. 
Position of the laborer and some of his problems in our industrial 
society. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

305. International Economics (3).W. 
International trade and the theory of comparative advantage are 
studied. Special attention is given to free world trade, and the eco- 
nomic development in other countries and groupings as in the European 
Economic Community. History and problems of United States foreign 
trade policy are discussed. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

306. Current Economic Problems (3).S. 
Discussion of current economic problems of society, economic effects 
of proposed legislation, background causes of current problems, and 
discussion of suggested solutions. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

307. Money and Banking (3).F. 
How money and credit instruments are issued and secured, structure 
and effects of commercial banking and the Federal Reserve system, 
impact on monetary and fiscal policy. Prerequisite: Economics 201- 
202-203. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

403. Competition and Monopoly (3).S. 

A study of imperfectly competitive markets, the economic and legal 
issues which they raise, and the policy solutions which have been 
attempted is the United States. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

452. Comparative Economic Systems (3).S. 

A critical analysis of the theory and practice of the economic systems 
of Capitalism, Communism, Socialism, and Fascism. Prerequisite: Eco- 
nomics 201-202-203. 



156 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



453. Economic Fluctuations (3).F. 

An analysis of the causes, consequences, forecasting, and control of 
syclical fluctuation. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

455. Public Finance and Taxation (3).F. 
Government revenues, expenditures, budgets, and financing taxes; shift- 
ing and incidence of taxation, public debts and economic effects of 
government monetary and fiscal policies. Prerequisite: Economics 201- 
202-203. 

456. Statistics for Business Control (3).S. 
Statistics as a tool for decision making as employed in the fields of 
accounting, market research, production management, economics, and 
other areas of business. 

460. Seminar in Economics (3).S. 

An extended investigation of some specific topic with a view to giving 
training in methods of research and studying intensively some subject 
in the field of economics. Prerequisites: Economics 201-202-203, 302, 
and nine hours of economics, senior classification. (Offered on demand.) 

GRADUATE COURSES 

502. Economic Problems of Developing Countries (3).S. 

An analysis of the economic problems of current importance in de- 
veloping nations. Prerequisite: Economics 201, 202, 203. Courbois. 

516. Analysis of the American Economy (3).F. 
An examination of the actual operations of the American economy 
and an analysis of the findings in terms of economics theory. (By per- 
mission only). Bar shear. 

517. Economics of the Disadvantaged (3).S. 
Special emphasis will be placed on the study of the economic prob- 
lems of rural and inner-city disadvantages and their possible contri- 
butions to the individual and local, regional, and national economics. 
(Offered on demand). Sutton. 

518. Monetary Theory (3).S. 
The development of theories of money and its value. Controversy 
over the quantity theory. The role of interest rates. Policy implications. 
Prerequisite: Economics 307. Brashear. 

548. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

Sutton. 

551 [501], 552. History of Economic Thought (3).F,W. 

Origin, development, and meaning of current conflicts in economic 
theory. A study of merchantilist, classical, neo-classical, and Keynesian 
economics. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. Brashear. 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



157 



BUSINESS 



101, 102-103. Typewriting (3,3-3 ).F-W-S. 

The typewriting keyboard and theory. Students who have completed 
successfully one semester of typewriting or equivalent are not eligible 
to register for 101. Recitation and laboratory five hours. 

104. Business Mathematics (3).F;W;S. 
The fundamental processes of mathematics and their application to 
common practices. Available to upperclassmen by permission and to 
all freshmen. 

105. Elements of American Business (3).F;W;S. 
The relationship and responsibility of business to its economic, social 
and political environment. (Available to freshmen only). 

106. Personal Finance (3).F;W;S. 
Management of personal finances, budgeting, savings, insurance, stocks 
and bonds, and real estate. 

201, 202-203. Shorthand (3,3-3).F-W-S. 

Mastery of principles of Gregg Shorthand and ability to take dictation. 
Students who have completed successfully one semester of shorthand 
or equivalent are not eligible to register for 201. Recitation five hours. 

204-205-206. Elementary Accounting ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

Principles and fundamentals of accounting procedure and practices. 
Laboratories scheduled as needed. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

300. Typewriting (3).SS. 
A terminal course in the use of typewriter and duplicating machines 
for non-business students who have had no previous typewriting. Recita- 
tion and laboratory five hours. 

301. Principles of Selling (3).F. 
A study of the basic principles and techniques of selling. 

302. Business Communications (3).F;W;S. 
The principles and application of business letter writing. 

303. Office Machines (3).F;W;S. 
Practice in the use of common office machines. Prerequisites: Type- 
writing and Accounting. 

304. Advanced Shorthand (3).W. 
Ability to take rapid dictation and transcribe it is developed. Pre- 
requisite: Business 202-203. Recitation and laboratory five hours. 

305. Advanced Shorthand (3).S. 
Advanced study of shorthand dictation and transcription. Prerequisite: 
Business 202-203. 



158 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



306. Intermediate Accounting (3).F;W. 
Application of accounting to various forms of business organization. 
Prerequisite: Business 204-205-206. 

307, 308. Intermediate and Advanced Accounting (3,3).W,S. 
Further application of accounting to various forms of business organiza- 
tion. Prerequisites: Business 204-205-206, 306. 

312. Office Procedure and Performance (3).S. 

A study of office personnel traits and duties. 

320. Principles of Marketing (3).F;W;S. 
The basic principles of marketing as they relate to the economy. Pre- 
requisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

321. Principles of Retailing (3).W. 
A study of the problems involved in the activities of locating, buying, 
pricing, inventorying, displaying, and advertising of merchandise. 

322. Principles of Advertising (3).S. 
The principles of sales appeal through the various advertising media 
and the effect of advertising on business and the economy. 

323. Wholesaling (3).W. 
Wholesaling structure, history and present status. Task of wholesaling 
in economy, functions, types of institutions, and management of whole- 
sale enterprises. Prerequisite: Business 320. 

324. International Marketing (3).F. 
Principles and practices of international marketing. Business operations 
in importing and exporting. Distribution and financing practices in 
foreign markets. Prerequisite: Business 320. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

350. Internship in Industry (9).F;W-S. 

A full-time work experience in industry. (By permission only). 

400. Business Law (3).F;W;S. 

A treatment of the fundamental principles of law relating to business. 
Emphasis is placed upon the study of contracts, negotiable instruments, 
and agencies. 

401. Business Law (3).F;W. 

A continuation of 400. Emphasis is placed upon the study of personal 
property and bailments, sales, partnerships, corporations. Prerequisite: 
Business 400. 

402. Business Law (3).S. 
Real property, insurance, security devices, bankruptcy, trusts and 
estates, and government regulation. Prerequisite: Business 400. 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



159 



403. Co-operative Office Education (3).F;W;S. 
At least 90 hours of actual work in an office. Group conferences to be 
arranged. (By permission only). Prerequisite: Business 103 and 303 or 
equivalent. 

404. Principles of Vocational Business Education (3).W;S. 
A study in the curriculum, current problems and other interrelated 
factors in Vocational Business Education. (By permission only). 

405. Teaching the Non-Skill Business Courses (3).F;S. 
A study of the use of various teaching aids and successful methods 
used in the teaching of the basic business subject. (By permission only). 

415. Business Management (3).F;W;S. 

An integrated and analytical study of the functions of business with 
emphasis on management, organization, ownership, and operation. 
Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

441. Special Projects (1-6).F;W;S. 

Individual or group supervised experiences in selected areas of business 
and /or economics. Offered on demand and with approval of the chair- 
man. 

451. Office Management (3).W. 
A study of principles of scientific management as they relate to the 
office. 

452. Income Tax Accounting (3).W. 
A presentation of the underlying principles of income taxation and 
the special accounting problems involved in the calculation of federal 
and state liability, with emphasis on the individual return. Prerequisite: 
Business 204-205-206. 

453. Cost Accounting (3).F. 
Principles of manufacturing and distribution cost accounting. Material, 
labor, and overhead costs in job order and process cost accounting. 
Business procedures and their adaptation to business situations and 
needs of management. Prerequisite: Business 204-205-206. 

454. Government Accounting (3).S. 
Application of principles of accounting and budgeting to municipal, 
state, and federal governmental units. Prerequisite: Two quarters of 
accounting on the 300 level. 

455. Corporate Tax Accounting (3).S. 
A further study of tax accounting with special emphasis placed on 
corporations, estates, and trusts. Prerequisite: Business 452. 

457. Managerial Cost Accounting (3).W. 

Attention is given to internal reporting of product costing, personnel 
responsibility, alternatives, and competitive conditions. Prerequisite: 
Business 453. 



160 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



458-459. Principles of Finance (3,3).F,W. 

Survey of the financial area from the standpoint of the individual 
business corporation. Consideration of both internal financial manage- 
ment and external relationships with money and capital markets, finan- 
cial planning, sources of funds, classes and types of securities, valuation 
of business enterprises. Prerequisites: Business 204-205-206 and Eco- 
nomics 203. 

460. Personnel Management (3).W. 
Principles and policies governing present-day employment and em- 
ployer-employee relationships. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

461. Credits and Collections (3).F. 
An analysis of the principles and practices in business consumer 
credit and collection. Topics studied include sources of credit, use 
of credit instruments, financial analysis, and sources of credit informa- 
tion. Prerequisite: Business 458. 

462. Investment Management (3).W. 
A study of investment principles and practices. Emphasis is placed 
on the understanding of risks and the establishing of investment policies 
for both individual and institutional investors. Prerequisites: Business 
204-205-206, Economics 201-202-203. 

463. Production Management (3).S. 
An analysis of the managerial problems involved in the areas of product 
developing, plant and equipment, manufacturing planning, and controls, 
production standards, forecasting, routing, scheduling, dispatching and 
material control. Prerequisite: Economics 201-202-203. 

465. Introduction to Automated Data Processing (3).F. 
Card designing, key punching, sorting, tabulation, and preparation 
of reports. Application to problems in business and economics. 

466. Advanced Business Data Processing (3).W. 
Advanced problems in the use of the computer. Preparation of flow 
charts and system design. Prerequisite: Business 465. 

467. Business Systems Analysis (3).S. 
Designing data processing systems to satisfy business system's require- 
ments. Prerequisites: Business 466. 

470, 471, 472. Industrial Psychology (3,3,3 ).F,W,S. 

See Psychology 470, 471, 472. Prerequisite: Psychology 201. 

481. Principles of Life Insurance (3).F. 
This is a course in fundamentals of legal reserve life insurance, 
company organization and operation, insurance associations, and state 
supervision and regulation of companies and associations. Prerequisites: 
Business 400 and Economics 201-202-203. 

482. Principles of Property and Casualty Insurance (3).W. 
Topics include casualty insurance, fire insurance, marine insurance, 
liability insurance, insurance carriers, underwriters associations, and 
state supervision and regulation. Prerequisites: Business 400 and Eco- 
nomics 201-202-203. 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



161 



485. Principles of Real Estate (3).S. 

The course covers the following areas: economics of real estate; legal 
instruments used in real estate transactions; the real estate market; 
the real estate business; and the public and real estate activities. 
Prerequisites: Business 400, and Economics 201-202-203. 

490. International Finance (3).S. 

Financial procedures and practices of firms engaged in international 
trade of goods, services and capital as well as institutional operations of 
international finance are considered. Special attention is given to prob- 
lems of the balance of payments, the foreign exchange mechanism, and 
currency convertibility. Prerequisite: Economics 305. 

492. Theory and Auditing (3).F. 
Basic principles of auditing with emphasis on analyzing and verifying 
records and reports. Prerequisite: Business 204, 205, 206. 

493. [504] C.P.A. Problems (3).S. 
A study of complex accounting problems under simulated C.P.A. exami- 
nation conditions. Recommended only for those who are preparing to 
take the C.P.A. examination. Prerequisite: Business 306 and 307 or 308. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F. 
A study of bibliographical problems, types of research, and organiza- 
tion and reporting of research. Required in the first quarter of all 
beginning graduate students. Sutton. 

501. Corporation Finance (3).W. 
An intensive survey of the instruments and procedures of corporate 
finance. The internal and external sources of funds available to a busi- 
ness and corporate capital structures are analyzed. Mergers, recapitali- 
zations, and intercorporate structures are discussed. Prerequisite: Busi- 
ness 458. Weber. 

502. Marketing Problems and Policies (3).W. 
Problems involving marketing organizations and methods with emphasis 
upon functions, institutions, and channels and their relationship to 
the consumer. Prerequisite: Business 320 or equivalent. Staff. 

503. Advanced Business Law (3).W. 
Law as it applies to the everyday business transactions of individuals 
and the organization and operation of a business enterprise. West. 

505. Current Problems in Business Education (3).W. 
Problems in organizing and administering business education programs. 
Riner. 

506. Instruction of the Secretarial Subjects (3).SS. 
Trends and research in the teaching of shorthand, typewriting, and 
related subjects. Tully. 



162 



DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS 



507. Instruction in the Basic Business Subjects (3).S. 
Objectives, organization of the curriculum, instructional materials, 
and methods of instruction of the basic business subjects. Riner. 

508. Business Report Writing (3).F. 
A study of principles and functions of communications for a business 
enterprise. Tully. 

512. Materials, Methods, Equipment in Business 

Education (3).SS. 

Investigations and demonstrations of recently developed materials, 
methods, and equipment used in teaching the business subjects in 
secondary schools. Offered as workshop on demand. Hawkinson. 

515. Business Management (3).S. 

Background, principles, techniques and basic problems of business 
management; budgeting and purchasing policies; emphasis on in- 
terdependence and interrelationship of management activities and 
functions. Sutton. 



516. Personnel Administration 

Problems and practices in personnel management. Jones. 



(3).S. 



517. Seminar in Accounting Sutton. 
548. Independent Study Sutton. 
550. Master of Arts Thesis 



(3).SS. 

(Variable Credit) .F;W;S;SS. 

(6).F;W;S. 




The College of Education 

Ben H. Horton, Dean 

The College of Education has primary responsibility for the 
preparation of young men and women as elementary teachers, 
secondary teachers, teachers in special subject areas, librarians, 
reading, supervisors, audiovisual directors, counselors, teachers for 
higher education, administrators for the public schools, and insti- 
tutions of higher education. 

DEPARTMENTS 

The College of Education consists of the Departments of Ad- 
ministration, Supervision, and Higher Education; Library Science; 
Special Programs; and Teacher Education. 

The College of Education offers the Bachelor of Science degree 
with teacher certification in the fields of elementary education, 
library science, and special education in the area of mental 
retardation. The Bachelor of Science degree with teacher certifica- 
tion may also be earned in each of the following fields: art; 
biology; chemistry; economics and business; English; French; 
health and physical education; history; home economics educa- 
tion; industrial arts; mathematics; music; physics; Spanish; speech; 
science with concentration in biology, chemistry, earth science, 
or physics; social science with concentration in geography, politi- 
cal science, sociology and anthropology, or economics; and special 
education in the area of speech and hearing. 

The College of Education has the responsibility for administering 
the program leading to the Bachelor of Technology degree. This 
program is for selected graduates of technical institutes and com- 
munity colleges in business and engineering technology. It does not 
lead to teacher certification. 

BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE 
(with teacher certification) 

To earn the Bachelor of Science degree with teacher certification, 
it is necessary that the following requirements be met: 



164 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 



1. Completion of at least 183 quarter hours with a grade-point 
average of at least 2.0. A transfer student must have at least 
a 2.0 grade-point average on all work at Appalachian. 

2. Completion of the general education requirements. 

3. Demonstration of proficiency in reading, speech, and written 
English. The candidate for a teaching certificate must take 
Speech 101. 

4. Completion of a major consisting of 36 to 85 quarter hours 
from one of the fields listed below: 

Art Music 

Biology Physics 

Chemistry Science, with concentration 
Economics and Business in Biology, Chemistry, 

Elementary Education Earth Science, or Physics 

English Social Science, general or 
French with concentration in 

Health and Physical Geography, Political 

Education Science, Sociology and 

History Anthropology, or Economics 

Home Economics Spanish 

Education Speech 

Industrial Arts Special Education 
Library Science Mental Retardation 

Mathematics Speech and Hearing 

A student must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on 
all work in the major. A transfer student must complete at 
least 12 quarter hours of work in his major at Appalachian 
and have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on all work at 
Appalachian in the major. With the exception of the science 
and social science major, specific requirements for each major 
preface the list of courses offered by the department. Require- 
ments for the interdepartmental majors of science and social 
science are given on pages 170 and 171. 

5. Completion of professional education requirements as follows: 

Education 301, 302, 303 or 304, 305 6 or 9* q.h. 

Psychology 301, 302, 303 9 q.h. 

Methods course or courses 3-9* q.h. 

Education 404, 405, or 407 15 q.h. 

33-42* 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 



165 



♦Additional courses in education are required for elementary edu- 
cation and special education majors. See the statement on the 
requirements for these majors. 

6. Electives to complete 183 quarter hours. 

7. Completion of residence requirements. 

8. Compliance with regulations concerning settlement of all 
expense accounts and satisfactory citizenship. 

9. Recommendation of the faculty. 

10. Take the Common Examination and the Teaching Area 
Examination, if available in his field, of the National Teacher 
Examinations. 

Meeting graduation requirements is the responsibility of the 
student. 

A candidate for a North Carolina teaching certificate must meet 
the standards of the "approved program." 

BACHELOR OF TECHNOLOGY DEGREE 

The Bachelor of Technology degree is offered for a limited number 
of selected graduates of technical institutes and community colleges. 
To be eligible for consideration for admission to this program, one 
must hold the Associate in Applied Science degree in business or 
engineering technology from a technical institute or community 
college. Applicants must submit 1 ) evidence that they have mastered 
the basic technical skills in their areas, 2) an endorsement by the 
occupational director or dean of the community college or technical 
institute, and 3) a statement from the president of the institute or 
community college that they are persons whose mastery of skills and 
personal qualifications are such that they might reasonably be ex- 
pected to become successful teachers of technical or vocational 
subjects. Applications should be directed to Admissions Officer, 
Appalachian State University. 

To earn the Bachelor of Technology degree, it is necessary that 
the following requirements be met: 

1. Completion of at least 90 quarter hours at Appalachian with 
a grade-point average of at least 2.0. 



166 






THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 





3 


q.h. 




3 


q.h. 




8 


q.h. 




3 


q.h. 


Total 


23 


q.h. 


speech, 


and 


written 



2. Completion of the following general education requirements: 

Two courses in literature 6 q.h. 

One course from Art 217, English 217, 

Music 217, or Speech 217 
One course in Philosophy or Religion 
History 101, 102, or History 103, 104 
Psychology 201 

3. Demonstration of proficiency in reading, 
English. 

4. Completion of an area of specialization consisting of a mini- 
mum of 18 quarter hours. The courses in the area of special- 
ization are chosen with the approval of the student's adviser 
from departments whose offerings are related to the student's 
field of interest. Courses from economics and business are 
chosen by the student in business technology. The student in 
engineering technology will choose from the courses in in- 
dustrial arts, the physical sciences, and mathematics. The 
student must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on all 
work in the area of specialization. 

5. Completion of professional education requirements as follows: 

Education 304, 306, 495, 497 12 q.h. 

Psychology 301, 302, 303 9 q.h. 

Education 496 15 q.h. 

Total 36 q.h. 

6. Completion of 10 quarter hours of electives. If the student 
has not had a year of a natural science at the two-year insti- 
tution, he must take a year (9 q.h.) of a natural science at 
Appalachian. 

7. Completion of residence requirements. 

8. Compliance with regulations concerning settlement of all 
expense accounts and satisfactory citizenship. 

9. Recommendation of the faculty. 

10. Take the Common Examination and the Area Examination of 
the National Teacher Examinations. 

Meeting graduation requirements is the responsibility of the 
student. 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 

ADMISSION TO THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION AND 
TO THE TEACHER EDUCATION PROGRAM 



167 



To be admitted to the College of Education and to the teacher 
education program a student must have: 

1 . Completed at least 90 quarter hours 

2. A quality-point ratio of at least 2.0 

3. Completed 

a. English 101, 102, 103 

b. Six hours of literature 

c. History 101, 102, or 103, 104. 

d. Speech 101 

e. Mathematics 101 or 107 

f. A year of natural science 

g. Three quarter hours of physical education activity courses 

4. Demonstrated proficiency in reading, speech, and written 
English. 

5. Been accepted by a department as a major in that department. 

6. A recommendation from the chairman of the department in 
which the student is majoring. 

7. A recommendation from the Dean of Student Affairs that the 
student has no health, personality, or citizenship deficiency 
detrimental to the welfare of pupils. 

Procedure for applying to the Department of Teacher Education. 

1. Between the fourth and sixth weeks of his sixth quarter the 
student will report to the chairman of his proposed department 
to secure his dean's card and a check sheet. 

2. The student will bring the dean's card and check sheet for his 
major to the chairman of the Department of Teacher Educa- 
tion and leave them with the secretary. 

3. He will request from the secretary of the Department of 
Teacher Education an application form which he will complete 
and hand to her before he leaves the office. 

STUDENT TEACHING 

Beginning with the ninth quarter and extending through the 
twelfth, each student who is taking a program leading to teacher 



168 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 



certification is expected to do student teaching for one quarter in 
the field for which he has been preparing. This work will consist 
of full-time teaching under the guidance of a competent and 
experienced teacher. The student will spend full time in the school 
where he does his student teaching, and his formal teaching load 
will be gradually increased until he has an opportunity to carry 
from one-half to all the teaching load of his supervising teacher. 
Student teaching provides the student professional laboratory ex- 
perience in the same activities in which the regular teacher engages. 
In addition to the regular classroom teaching activities, the student 
will experience and share in the extra-curricular activities of the 
school, community activities, professional activities such as faculty 
meetings, routine activities such as making reports, and meeting 
and working with parents. 

The assignment of a student to a particular school or laboratory 
situation will be based upon the needs, interests, and abilities 
of the individual student and the characteristics of the particular 
school. 

Student teaching assignments in off-campus schools will conform 
to the local schedule with reference to the Thanksgiving, Christmas, 
and Easter holidays. 

CONDITIONS PREREQUISITE TO STUDENT TEACHING 

The following requirements must be met prior to student teaching: 

1. Application must be filed not later than the last day of fall 
quarter preceding the school year, September 1 to August 31, in 
which the student expects to do student teaching. 

2. A student who has applied for student teaching, and has 
been officially checked by the registrar as having a 2.0 both in 
his overall program and major field (and is eligible in all other 
respects), will be unconditionally placed. Any others who may be 
tentatively placed must have a grade-point average of at least 
2.0 both in his overall program and major field by the end of the 
quarter immediately preceding student teaching. 

3. A student must have the recommendation of his academic 
adviser and the approval of the chairman of the department in 
which he is majoring. A student who is planning to graduate in 
three calendar years may register for student teaching in the ninth 
quarter. 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 



169 



4. Elementary, kindergarten, or special education majors — A 
student must have the approval of the Chairman of the Department 
of Teacher Education. Prior to student teaching, elementary majors 
must have completed Education 302 and 303, Education 310, 401, 
or 402 and 403, and Psychology 301 and 302. Education 301 and 
Psychology 303 may be taken prior to or following student teaching, 
but is a requirement for graduation. 

5. Secondary Majors — A student must have the approval of the 
Chairman of the Department of Teacher Education. Prior to student 
teaching, secondary majors must have completed Education 305, the 
required methods course, and Psychology 301 and 302. Education 
304 may be taken prior to or following student teaching, but is a 
requirement for graduation. A student may qualify under either 
the elementary or secondary requirements if he is a major in a 
special subject (art, health and physical education, library science, 
or music). 

6. Each applicant must agree to give full time, one quarter, to 
student teaching. 

TEACHER CERTIFICATION 

For a regular Class A Certificate in North Carolina, a candidate 
must make a composite minimum score of 950 on the National 
Teacher Common examination and the teaching Area Examination. 
When a teaching area examination is not available, a minimum 
score of 475 on the Common Examination is required for a regular 
Class A Certificate. A candidate who makes a minimum composite 
score of 875 on the National Teacher Commons Examination and 
the Area Examination will be given probationary certification for 
one year. When a teaching Area Examination is not available, 
a minimum score of 425 on the Common Examination is required 
for probationary certification for one year. No certification is 
issued to an applicant who fails to make the minimum scores as are 
herein stated. 

"A candidate must meet all requirements for the Class A Certifi- 
cate (and below) on rating involved and in addition attain the 
required minimum composite score on a combined common exami- 
nation and the appropriate teaching area(s) examination. When 
adding a new field at the same level of the certificate already 
held, only the examination (if available) in the new field is 



170 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 



required (e.g., one holding a social studies certificate and desiring 
to add the subject English will be required to meet the minimum 
score of 475 in the area of English). If an examination is not 
available in the new field, the score requirement is not applicable. 
Seeking a change in certificate will in no way affect the presently 
held certificate or rating. The composite score provision is not 
applicable to the graduate and advanced certificates. As indicated 
in the score table above, a minimum score is required on each part 
of the examination." 

All transcripts showing that the student is qualified for a teaching 
certificate bear this notation: 

This is to certify that (name) has satisfactorily completed the 
regular National Council for Accreditation of Teacher Educa- 
tion accredited program of this institution for the preparation 
of teacher and that (he or she) is specifically prepared to 
teach (subject). This applicant has met all other appropriate 
standards of this institution which are required for full recom- 
mendation for teaching. 

INTERDEPARTMENTAL MAJORS LEADING TO 
TEACHER CERTIFICATION 

CURRICULUM IN SCIENCE 

A major in science leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and 
teacher certification must include Mathematics 107-108 or equivalent; 
Biology 101-102-103; and two of the following three sequences: 
Chemistry 101-102-103; Physics 101-102, 103 or 150-151, 152; 
Geology 101-102-103; plus a concentration in one of the areas below. 

A concentration in biology includes Biology 201, 202, 203, 204, 
205, 206, 301, 307, 308, 309, 454, and 455; Chemistry 101-102-103; 
Physics 101-102, 103. 

A concentration in chemistry includes Chemistry 101-102-103, 
201, 210, 301, 404, and 17 quarter hours selected from other 
chemistry courses; Mathematics 111-112-113-211-212-213; Physics 
101-102, 103 or 150-151, 152. 

A concentration in physics includes Physics 211, 212, 213, 301, 
303, 320, 440, 441, 450, and ten hours of electives in physics. 
Chemistry 101-102-103; Mathematics 111-112-211-212-213, 311- 
312-313. 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 



171 



A concentration in earth science includes Geography 101, 203, 
210, 215, 311, and Geology 311, 312, 313, 341, and 14 hours of 
electives; plus either Chemistry 101-102-103 or Physics 101-102, 
103. 

CURRICULUM IN SOCIAL SCIENCE 

A major in social science leading to the Bachelor of Science 
degree and teacher certification consists of 87 quarter hours in social 
science including general education requirements in social science. 
This must include 33 quarter hours in history including History 101, 
102, or 103, 104, and 201, 202, 215, 299, and 12 hours from 
other history courses. The social science major must complete 
Geography 101, 102; Political Science 200, 201, 203; Sociology 
201, 203 and Anthropology 210; and Economics 201, 202, 203. 
In addition, the social science major may complete a concentration 
of at least an additional 18 quarter hours in geography, political 
science, sociology and anthropology, or economics. 

The social science major may elect to take a spread in the various 
fields of social science. If so, 18 hours of electives in social science 
will replace the 18 hours of concentration. 

A concentration in geography of the social science major must 
include Geography 203, 210, 311, and nine approved quarter hours. 
The person taking a concentration in geography will take Geology 
101, 102, and 103 to satisfy the general education requirement in 
natural science. 

A concentration in political science of a social science major 
must include Political Science 200, 201, 203, at least one course in 
each of the following areas of political science: Political Theory; 
International Relations or Comparative Government; The Political 
Process; Public Law and Judicial Behavior or Advanced American 
Government or Public Administration. The remaining 6 hours are 
elective. 

A concentration in sociology and anthropology of the social 
science major must include Sociology 205, 206, 461 and nine 
quarter hours of electives in sociology and anthropology. 

A concentration in economics of the social science major must 
include Economics 301 or 302 and 15 quarter hours of economic 
electives. 



172 



THE COLLEGE OF EDUCATION 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 

Courses are listed by departments in alphabetical order. Courses 
numbered 100 to 199 inclusive are normally offered for freshmen; 
200 to 299 for sophomores; 300 to 399 for juniors; 400 to 499 for 
seniors; 300 to 499 for graduate students with the approval of ad- 
viser; and 500 and above for graduate students. Courses open to 
lower classes are also open to upper classes. For courses numbered 
500 and above the name of the professor who ordinarily teaches the 
course is given in italics following the course description. 

The figure in brackets preceding a course title indicates the 
course number used in the catalog 1970-71. 

The figure in parentheses after the course title tells the credit in 
quarter hours; for example the figure (3) means three quarter hours. 

Quarters of the year in which the course is offered are represented 
by symbols: "F" for fall quarter, "W" for winter quarter, "S" for 
spring quarter, "SS" for summer session, "Ex" for extension. 

A hyphen in the course number, credit, and quarters of the 
year in which the course is offered indicates that the course extends 
through two or more quarters and that the preceding quarter must 
be completed before the following quarter can be taken. 

The comma in the course number, credit, and quarters indicates 
that the course is continuous but that one quarter may be taken 
independently of another. 

The semicolon in the quarters offered indicates that the course 
is a one quarter course and is repeated in a subsequent quarter. 

Special requirements for admission to a course are stated after 
the word prerequisite. 

The administration reserves the right to withdraw courses for 
which there is insufficient enrollment. 



173 



DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION, SUPERVISION, 
AND HIGHER EDUCATION 

DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION, 
SUPERVISION, AND HIGHER EDUCATION 

N. Shope, Chairman, W. Anderson, R. Blanton, L. Cooper, P. Federoff, 
B. Harris, A. Hooks, B. Horton, J. Jackson, N. Miller, R. Randall, 
N. Shelton. 

The Department of Administration, Supervision, and Higher 
Education is responsible for organizing and providing instructional 
programs leading to certification of personnel for administrative 
and supervisory positions in education, organizing and providing 
related courses, programs, and services designed to meet the needs 
of administrative and supervisory personnel in elementary and sec- 
ondary schools and in higher education, and organizing and providing 
programs and services designed in cooperation with schools or other 
agencies relating to any areas of improvement and progress in educa- 
tional institutions. The department also provides advisory and ad- 
ministrative services essential to the effectiveness of its program. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN ADMINISTRATION, 
SUPERVISION, AND HIGHER EDUCATION 

EDUCATION 

306. The Technical Institute (3).W. 

A background in the philosophy, goals and purposes of vocational and 
technical programs in postsecondary institutions. Emphasis is placed on 
the role of the technical institute. 

491. Philosophical Foundations of Education (3).S;SS. 

Classical and modern philosophies are analyzed for their influences on 
educational practices. 

495. Teaching in the Occupational Programs (3).F. 
A study of effective methods and techniques of teaching vocational and 
technical subjects. Attention is given to class organization, student- 
instructor planning, methods of teaching manipulative skills and related 
information, shop laboratory safety, and evaluation. 

496. Student Intern: Occupational Programs (15).W. 
A full-time teaching internship for one quarter under the supervision 
of experienced personnel in a community college or technical institute. 

497. Seminar on the Technical Institute (3).S. 
Discussion and analysis of the problems, research, and recent trends in 
the technical institute. 



174 



DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION, SUPERVISION, 
AND HIGHER EDUCATION 



GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Research in Education (3).F;W;S. 
A study of various types of research and the logical organization of 
research and reporting; required in first quarter for persons working 
for Master of Arts Degree in any area in education, industrial arts, 
library science. Staff. 

501. Public School Administration (3).F;SS. 
A study of basic structure, organization, and administration of American 
public education; the role of the various agencies and administrative 
personnel; financial support; special problems. Prerequisite: three years' 
teaching experience. Hooks, Shope. 

502. Organization and Administration of the Secondary (3).F;SS. 

Schools 

A study of secondary education and administration, research, cur- 
riculum, schedule making, opening and closing of school. Prerequisite: 
three years' teaching experience. Hooks. 

503. Problems of the Public School Administrator (3).SS. 
A study of the practical problems involved in administering the public 
schools. Prerequisite: three years' teaching experience. Randall. 

504. Organization and Administration of the (3).W;SS. 

Elementary School 

A study of the role of the administrator in modern elementary education. 
Prerequisite: three years' teaching experience. Hooks. 

505. Supervision of Instruction (3).S;SS. 
A study of the nature and function of supervision, recent trends, 
teacher participation in policy formation, the organization and planning 
of supervision. Prerequisite: three years' teaching experience. Federoff. 

506. Curriculum Construction (3).F;S;SS. 
A study of principles, effective practices, and techniques appropriate for 
overall curriculum planning. Federoff. 

510. Extra-Curricular Activities (3).F;SS. 

A study of extra-curricular activities which modern schools are expected 
to carry out as a part of their educational program. Randall. 

512. Junior High School Curriculum and Organization (3).SS. 

A study of the junior high school in terms of its origin, functions, 
curriculum, and organization. Hooks. 

517. School Supervision (3).SS. 
This course is planned for students preparing for positions as general 
county and city supervisors. Shope. 

518. Public School Finance (3).S;SS. 
A study of educational theory and operating principles which will 
contribute to the understanding of the nature of problems of public 
school finance. Prerequisite: Three years' teaching experience. Shelton. 



DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION, SUPERVISION, 1 HT 
AND HIGHER EDUCATION JL f O 

525. Problems in Educational Administration (3 or 6).F;W;S. 

A study of current trends, issues, and problems related to the organiza- 
tion and administration of the instructional program. The course is 
designed for school administrators and other present and prospective 
educational leaders. May be offered as a six-hour field study. Shelton. 

535. Philosophy of Education (3).F;SS. 

Current educational issues and decisions are analyzed from the view- 
point of the philosophical bases which may underlie them. Miller. 

539. Core Curriculum (3).SS. 

A study of the development and organization of the core curriculum 
with consideration given to objectives, methods, activities, and evalua- 
tions of this type of curriculum. Shelton. 

542. Instruction Programs of the (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Two- Year College 

An analysis of the curriculum and techniques of instruction in the 
comprehensive community college. Attention is also given to studying 
the philosophy and purposes. L. Cooper. 

543. Organization and Administration of the (3).SS. 

Two-Year College 

A study of the various types of two-year colleges and how they 
are administered at the state and local levels. Emphasis is placed on 
North Carolina's community colleges. Harris. 

544. Seminar on the Two- Year College (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Discussion and analysis of the problems, research, and recent trends 
in the two-year college. L. Cooper. 

545. Practicum in College Teaching (3).F;W;S. 
Supervised experience in college teaching. Open only to graduate 
assistants and graduate fellows. L. Cooper. 

546. Elementary School Curriculum (3).SS. 
A study of the elementary school curriculum in modern schools; 
recent trends in curriculum revision and organization. Anderson, Hooks. 

547. Social Foundations of Education (3).F;SS. 
The purpose of the course is to acquaint students with the role of 
the school in relation to its social setting and organization. Staff. 

548. Independent Study. Staff. (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

549. School Building Planning (3).W;SS. 
Emphasis upon educational planning of teaching space and facilities, 
planning buildings for newer instructional equipment, power require- 
ment, efficient use of existing facilities, economical housekeeping and 
maintenance programs. Reynolds. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;S. 



176 



DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION, SUPERVISION, 
AND HIGHER EDUCATION 



552. Supervision of Instruction in the Two- Year College (3).SS. 
Organization and planning of supervision, the development of skills 
in cooperative planning, and the evaluation of activities for the college 
student. L. Cooper. 

553. Planning the Community College (3).S. 
Analyzing communities and determining aims and objectives in planning 
curricula in general education and vocational education for the com- 
munity college. L. Cooper. 

560. School Law (3).W;SS. 

The purpose of the course is to analyze the fundamental principles 
underlying the relation of the state to education and to reduce to 
systematic organization the principles of the case or common law 
which are applicable to practical problems of school organization and 
administration. The course will also consider the duties and responsi- 
bilities of personnel in the school system. Shelton. 

562. Secondary School Curriculum (3).SS. 

A study of the modern secondary school curriculum; development, 
recent trends, and organization; including the philosophy and psy- 
chology upon which these practices are based. Miller, Hooks. 

51 A. Teaching Internship in the Two- Year College (6-9).F;W;S. 
Supervised experience in a community college or technical institute. 
Open to graduate students in the junior college program who have 
completed one-half or more of their course work. L. Cooper. 

575. Internship in Education Administration (6).F;W;S. 
Leadership and management experiences under the direction of com- 
petent principals, supervisors, superintendents or other appropriate 
administrators. Shelton. 

580. History of American Education (3).S;SS. 
A study of the historical development of education in the United 
States. Special emphasis is given to educational concepts and practices 
as they relate to political, social, and cultural developments in the 
growth of a system of public eduaction. Melton. 

581. Programs for Adult Education (3).F;SS. 
An introduction to principles involved in the teaching of adults. The 
role of adult education in society, the historical development of adult 
education in America, and the nature of the adult learner are considered. 
Staff. 

582. Organization and Administration of (3).SS. 
Learning Laboratories 

This course is designed to acquaint teachers and administrators with 
the unique nature of learning laboratories. Particular emphasis will be 
given to organization and administration of learning laboratories and 
programmed materials centers in community colleges. Staff. 



DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION, SUPERVISION, ~\ H H 
AND HIGHER EDUCATION J_ / / 

584. Administrative Internship in the (3-9).F;W;S. 

Two-year College 

Supervised administrative experience in a community college or technical 
institute. Open to graduate students in the junior college program who 
have completed one-half or more of their course work. Bolick. 

585. Computer Applications in Educational (3).S;SS. 

Administration and Finance 

An investigation of the use of packaged programs related to adminis- 
trative problems; e.g., scheduling, registration and student records and 
their use in facilitation of innovation in instruction. In addition to the 
examination of prepackaged software, the course will consider the design 
of systems for unique local situations. Staff. 

586. Computer Applications in Instructional Programs (3).S. 
An overview of computer-assisted instructional programs and learning 
theories related to the development of such programs. Staff. 

587. Statistical Applications in Education (3).W;SS. 
Statistical methods and analysis as applied to education. A study of 
measures of reliability, variability, correlation, central tendency, and 
problems of sampling. Maynor. 

588. Method and Process in Community Relations (3).F. 
Analysis of the interactive process within and between groups, em- 
phasizing the formation and functioning of groups, development of 
skills essential for effective leadership, techniques of school-community 
relations. Attention is given to parent contacts, citizen participation, 
press, radio, television, printed materials, and other media. Shope. 

600. Seminar in Research Design (3-6). S. 
The application of research techniques in the investigation of educational 
problems. This course is of particular value in the definition and design 
of the research required for advanced graduate degrees. Maynor. 

601. Seminar in Educational Leadership. Shope. (3 or 6).F;S. 

618. Seminar in Finance and Taxation (3).F;SS. 

Advanced studies in taxation, statutory programs for school support, 
budget making, fiscal management and business operation of school 
systems. Shope. 

625. Advanced Problems in Educational 

Administration (3-6).F;W;S. 

Open to sixth-year students only. Shelton. 

648. Independent Study (3-6).F;W;S;SS. 

Directed individual study at the post-master's level. This course may 
give three to six hours credit and may allow investigation of one or 
more areas on an individual basis with faculty direction. Staff. 



178 



DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATION, SUPERVISION, 
AND HIGHER EDUCATION 



649. Seminar in Facilities and Maintenance (3).S;SS. 

Planning the modern school plant, design and nature of functional edu- 
cational facilities, personnel involvement, maintenance, determining the 
needs of the community, factors in the selection of sites, architectural 
and contractual services. Reynolds, Shope. 

660. Seminar in Legal Problems in Education (3-6).S;SS. 

Legal bases for organizing and conducting public and private school 
systems, statutes and court decisions affecting educational functions. 
Shope. 

682. Programs for Continuing Adult Education (3).F. 
A study of the continuing nature of learning, how adults learn and 
how adult education programs are organized for effective operation. 
Staff. 

683. Post-Secondary Technical and Vocational (3).W;SS. 
Education 

A study of the role of technical and vocational education in society. 
Consideration is given to determining needs for specific training in a 
given community and developing programs appropriate to meet those 
needs. Staff. 

684. The General Education Program for (3).S;SS. 

Higher Education 

An overview of general education and its place in post-secondary edu- 
cation. Emphasis is given to building on earlier educational experiences 
in constructing a viable college general education program. Harris. 

686. Higher Education in America (3).F. 
Historical approach to the development of higher education from 
colonial colleges to the present. L. Cooper. 

687. Seminar in College Administration (3-6).S;SS. 
A study of the governance of higher educational institution. Con- 
sideration is given to legal bases, organizational patterns, development 
politics, administrator and faculty responsibilities. Harris. 

690. Seminar in Education for the Disadvantaged (3-6).W;SS. 

A study of problems related to education of the culturally different 
and educationally disadvantaged student and the administrative facet 
of these problems. Modification in curriculum in the development of 
compensatory and remedial programs are prime concerns. Shope. 



DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SCIENCE JL / C/ 

DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SCIENCE 

D. Cox, Chairman, M. Busbin, Jr., I. Justice, L. McGirt, M. Newman, 
E. Query. 

A major in library science leading to the Bachelor of Science 
degree and certification as school librarian consists of Library 
Science 301, 302, 305, 306, 307, 401, 402, 450, 451 or 452 or 
453, 454, 456, and 475; English 302, 303, 304 or 305 or 314 or 
315; History 202; Education 301 and 302 or 304 and 305, 404, 
466 and 475; and Psychology 301, 302, 303. 

A minor in library science leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree 
consists of 24 quarter hours, including Library Science 301, 302, 
401, 475, and 12 quarter hours in approved electives. 

A student may qualify for a Library Science Certificate in North 
Carolina by completing an approved program of 27 quarter hours 
in library science and nine quarter hours in audio-visual education. 

A student may qualify for a Teacher-Librarian Certificate by 
completing an approved program of 18 quarter hours in library 
science in addition to the applicant's certification in another area. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN LIBRARY SCIENCE 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

300. Library Materials and Resources for 

Elementary Teachers (3).F;W;S. 

Aids and sources of information concerning books and materials; 
basic factors and problems in selection; the use of books and libraries 
as resources for teaching materials. Not open to library science majors. 

301. Introduction to Librarianship (3).F;SS. 
Historical background of the library profession; objectives and functions 
of the modern library; library standards; survey of professional literature. 

302. Reference Sources and Services (3).W;SS. 
Evaluation and use of basic reference materials; citation and biblio- 
graphic form; techniques and procedures in reference work. 

304. Children's Literature (3).F;W;S. 

Developing a background in the history of children's literature, evaluating 
modern writers and illustrators of children's books, and studying the 
various phases of literature which should be presented to elementary 
children. Not open to library science majors. 



180 



DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SCIENCE 



305. Selection of Library Materials (3).F;SS. 
Basic factors, problems, and aids in the selection of books and materials. 

306. Books and Materials for High School 

Libraries (3).S;SS. 

Books and materials in relation to adolescent needs and interests and 
the high school curriculum. Prerequisite: Library Science 305. 

307. Books and Materials for Elementary 

School Libraries (3).W;SS. 

Books and materials in relation to children's needs and interests and 
the elementary curriculum. Prerequisite: Library Science 305. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

401-402. Organization and Administration 

of the School Library (3-3).F;W;S;SS. 

Acquisition, processing, circulation of materials; student assistants; 
records and reports; attendance and scheduling; library quarters and 
equipment; professional relationships; evaluation of library services. 

450. Organization and Administration 

of Non-Book Library Materials (3).F;SS. 

Acquisition, preparation, housing, and circulation of non-book library 
materials. 

451. Literature of the Humanities (3).F;SS. 
A survey of special reference works, bibliographies, and landmark 
books in the areas of literature, philosophy and religion. Prerequisites: 
Library Science 302, 305. 

452. Literature of the Social Sciences 

and the Fine Arts (3).W;S;SS. 

A survey of special reference works, bibliographies, and landmark 
books in the areas of biography, history, travel, the social sciences, 
and the fine arts. Prerequisites: Library Science 302, 305. 

453. Literature of Science and Technology (3).W;S;SS. 
A survey of special reference works, bibliographies, and landmark 
books in the pure and applied sciences. Prerequisites: Library Science 
302, 305. 

454. Literature for Young Adults (3).W;S;SS. 
Discussion and evaluation of contemporary literature, both adolescent 
and adult, available for young adults. Comparison between classic and 
modern books for youth. 

455. Interpreting Books to Readers (3).F;S. 
Storytelling, annotations, book reviewing, the book talk, radio, tele- 
vision, story recordings. Prerequisite: Library Science 304 or 307. 



DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SCIENCE 



181 



456. Critical History of Children's Literature (3).F;SS. 
A survey of the origins and development of literature for children in 
England and America from Anglo-Saxon times to the present. Critical 
analysis of what has endured and why. 

457. School Library Workshop. (3).SS. 

458. Junior College Library Workshop. (3).SS. 

467. Correlating Teaching with the Library (3).F;S;SS. 

Planned to help the classroom teacher understand better the function 
and use of the school library as a means of vitalizing teaching. Not 
open to library science majors. 

475. Cataloging and Classification (3).F;W;SS. 
Study of the principles of cataloging and classification of books and 
non-book materials. Preparation of a practice file and manual. 

476. Children's Literature Workshop (3).SS. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

The chairman of the Department of Library Science should be 
consulted for information on prerequisites to graduate courses in 
library science. 

500. Research Methods in Librarianship (3).F;SS. 
A survey of scientific methods of research with application to specific 
problems in librarianship. Cox. 

501. American Library Resources (3).W;SS. 
A survey of agencies, activities, materials, methods, and devices which 
support, assist, or develop libraries and librarianship. Staff. 

502. Administration and Supervision of School 
Library Systems 

Designed for the experienced school librarian in preparation for super- 
visory positions in large units of school library service. Involves a 
critical study and analysis of problems in organization and administration 
of city, county, and state school library systems. Cox. 

503. Reading Interests and Guidance (3).S;SS. 
Implications of research in reading interests of children and young 
people. Methods and materials for guidance in their use. Open to 
non-majors. Busbin, Cox. 

504. Advanced Reference and Bibliography (3).W;SS. 
Special reference problems, methods and materials for the large school 
library and the college library. Includes cooperative aspects of librarian- 
ship, the development of national and international bibliography, and 
the implications of automation in libraries. Staff. 



182 



DEPARTMENT OF LIBRARY SCIENCE 



505. Advanced Cataloging and Classification (3).S;SS. 
Specialized cataloging and classification problems and processes. Staff. 

506. History of Libraries (3).F;SS. 
The development of the library as a cultural institution in ancient, 
medieval and modern times. Justice. 

507. History of Books and Printing (3).S;SS. 
The development of books and other records from ancient times to the 
present. Includes the history of writing materials, the alphabet, manu- 
scripts, printing, illustrating, and modern book production. Justice. 

508. The Library and the Community (3).F;SS. 
The place of the library, school, college and public, in the community 
and its relation to the agencies and resources of the community. 
Query, Staff. 

510. Organization and Administration of the (3).S;SS. 
College Library 

511. Government Publications ( 3 ) .SS. 
The nature and scope of United States government publications, with 
some attention given also to state, municipal, foreign, and international 
publications. Problems in their acquisition, organization, and use. Justice. 

512. Use of Materials with Students and Teachers (3).F;SS. 
Materials and methods for more effective use of library resources in 
various curriculum areas in the school. Cox. 

513. Problems and Trends in School Libraries (3).S;SS. 
An advanced course to consider recent developments in curriculum, 
teaching techniques, physical facilities, and innovations in library service, 
that affect the school library. Cox. 

540. Seminar. Staff. (Variable Credit ).F;W;S. 

545. Practicum (Variable Credit ).F;W;S. 

546. Library Science Institute (3).SS. 

547. Library Science Institute (9).SS. 

548. Independent Study. Staff. (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 
550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).SS. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS XoO 

DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 

G. Bolick, Chairman, R. Culyer, E. Dedmond, M. Farris, E. Harrill, 
M. Hubbard, I. Jones, P. LaBach, R. McFarland, H. Padgett, U. Price, 
J. Pritchett, D. Robinson, D. Smith, E. Stoddard, J. Winford. 

The Department of Special Programs is responsible for organizing 
and providing instructional programs leading to certification of per- 
sonnel in specialized school services in counseling and guidance, 
reading, audio-visual media, and special education. The department 
is responsible also for advisory and administrative functions essential 
to the effectiveness of the programs. 

There are two programs in counselor education: one designed 
to meet certification requirements and to prepare students pri- 
marily for work in public schools, elementary and secondary; the 
other program admits persons without an A certificate who prefer 
counseling in a non-public school setting such as junior colleges, 
employment and rehabilitation counseling, mental health centers 
and pastoral counseling. 

Reading courses are designed to meet the requirements of a second 
academic concentration and certification for elementary education 
majors and graduate certification on the master's level. 

A student preparing to teach special education with emphasis on 
mental retardation must complete Art 201; Education 202, 301, 302, 
303, 320, 401 or 402, 403, 404, 451, 452, 454, 455, 456; General 
Science 401; Health 401; History 206; Industrial Arts 458; Library 
Science 304; Music 301-302-303; Physical Education 353; Psychol- 
ogy 301, 302, 303, 460; Sociology 201; Speech 304, 305. The 
student is required to take the Common Examination and the area 
examination in Mental Retardation of the National Teacher Exami- 
nations. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN SPECIAL PROGRAMS 

010. Remedial Reading (0).F;W;S. 

For students who are not proficient in reading. 

100. Developmental Reading (1).F;W;S. 

This course is designed to afford immediate improvement of reading 
skills and study habits to enable freshmen to carry out the academic 
requirements of college. 



184 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 



310. Foundations of Reading (3).F;W;S. 

This course deals with the nature of the reading process, knowledge 
and application of basic skills. Required of majors in elementary 
education. 

320. Introduction to Exceptional Children (3).F;W;S;SS. 

An overview of the various types of exceptional children; impaired 
and gifted. Emphasis on characteristics, identification, educational pro- 
gramming, and cooperating agencies. 

401. Reading on the Primary Levels (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Deals with the teaching of reading on the primary level. Prerequisites: 
Education 302 or 303, 310; Psychology 301 or 302. 

402. Reading on the Intermediate Levels (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Deals with the teaching of reading on the intermediate grade level. 
Prerequisites: Education 302 or 303, 310; Psychology 301 or 302. 

451. Educable Mentally Retarded (3).F;W. 
Characteristics and problems of childen in the upper levels of retarda- 
tion. Survey of studies in regard to causative factors, community and 
educational problems, and diagnosis. Prerequisite: Education 320 or 
equivalent. 

452. Trainable Mentally Retarded (3).F;S. 
Classification, diagnosis, characteristics, education and care of children 
in the trainable range of intelligence. Includes a study of institutional 
care. Prerequisite: Education 451. 

454. Curriculum for the Mentally Retarded (3).W;S. 
Curriculum development at different levels of maturation; organization, 
planning, adaptation of activities, materials, and methods. Prerequisite: 
Education 451 or equivalent. 

455. Experimental Approaches to the Education of (3).W;S. 
the Mentally Retarded 

460. Educational Statistics (3).F;S;SS. 

A study of the statistical procedures in education. 

462. Reading on High School and Advanced Levels (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Reading problems encountered on the high school level; reading in 
the content areas of the curriculum; the total school responsibility in 
reading improvement. Opportunities for practical application provided. 

463. Reading in the Content Areas (3).W;SS. 
For elementary and high school. 

464. Workshop in Teaching Reading (3).SS;Ex. 

465. Linguistics and Reading (3).S;SS. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 



185 



466. Instructional Materials (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Considers the process of using a wide variety of teaching and learning 
resources in improving instruction. Emphasizes the location, selection 
and evaluation of materials; the role of instructional materials in 
teaching and learning; preparation and administration of instructional 
materials. 

472. Diagnostic and Remedial Reading I (5).F;W;S. 

For the classroom teacher. How to locate causes of reading difficulties 
and prescribe corrective procedures. Prerequisites: 401 or 402 or 462. 

473. Diagnostic and Remedial Reading II (5).F;W;S. 
Students are assigned to individual or small groups for diagnostic and 
remedial teaching. Prerequisite: Education 472. 

474. Photography (3).W;SS. 
Basic theory, principles and techniques of black and white, and color 
picture photography. 

475. Audiovisual Instruction (3).F;W;S;SS. 

An introductory study of a variety of major audiovisual media which 
encompasses the selection and practical classroom application of ma- 
terials; laboratory experience in the operation of equipment; and the 
production of basic visual materials. 

476. Cinematography (3).S;SS. 
Basic theory, principles and techniques of motion picture photography. 

477. Psychological Bases of Reading (3).F;SS. 
This course is designed to pursue in depth the psychological basis of 
reading and the reading act, motivation and learning. 

478. Theory and Practice of Guidance (5).F;W;S;SS. 
An introductory study of public school guidance and counseling pro- 

! grams and practices, including purposes, philosophy, organization and 

other important aspects of a guidance program. 
479. Group Methods and Processes (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A study of group dynamics, experimentation in groups, leadership 
roles, applicability to other settings. 

480. Auditory Training for the Acoustically (3).W. 
Handicapped 

A study of the re-education of the hearing of acoustically handicapped 
children. Principles and methods of training residual hearing; use of 
amplifying devices; demonstration and practice. Given at the North 
Carolina School for the Deaf. (Not offered 1970-72). 

481. Communication for the Deaf Child (3).W. 
A study of the methods of teaching communication skills to the 
acoustically handicapped; training residual hearing; use of amplification; 
symbol systems, oral and non-oral, by which language is acquired by 
the deaf child, including the language of signs, finger spelling, cued 
speech. Observation and participation. Given at the North Carolina 
School for the Deaf. (Not offered 1970-72). 



186 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 



482. Teaching Language to the Deaf (3).W. 
Principles and techniques used in developing language, teaching 
composition and idiomatic expressions. Preparation of sequentially 
graded materials and lesson plans for children of various academic 
levels and abilities. Remedial procedures. Observation and participation. 
Given at the North Carolina School for the Deaf. (Not offered 1970-72). 

483. Teaching Speech to the Deaf (3).W. 
Study of factors influencing intelligibility and of techniques for develop- 
ing voice quality, breath control, stress and accent, inflection and 
rhythm. Emphasis on the elementary and secondary grade levels. 
Observation and participation. Given at the North Carolina School for 
the Deaf. (Not offered 1970-72). 

485. Teaching Elementary School Subjects to the Deaf (3).W. 
Multi-media methods of teaching elementary school subjects to the 
deaf child. Integration of subject matter with speech, speech reading, 
auditory training, and development of language. Program planning. 
Emphasis on primary and lower elementary grades. Observation and 
participation. Given at the North Carolina School for the Deaf. (Not 
offered 1970-72). 

486. Teaching Secondary School Subjects to the Deaf (3).W. 
Multi-media methods of teaching secondary and upper elementary 
school subjects to the deaf. Program planning at the level of concentra- 
tion. Observation and participation. Given at the North Carolina School 
for the Deaf. (Not offered 1970-72). 

489. Reading and Communications (3). On Demand 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Research in Education (3).F;W;S. 

A study of the various types of research and the logical organization of 
research and reporting; required in first quarter for persons working 
for Master of Arts Degree in any area in education, industrial arts, 
library science. Staff. 

507. Education of the Acoustically Handicapped (3).F. 
(Speech 507) 

History of the education of hearing handicapped persons and a survey of 
current problems; guidance for the deaf as related to their role in 
contemporary society, including consideration of problems of social 
and vocational adjustment. Meador. 

508. Clinical Problems in Reading (3-6).W;SS. 
Deals with clinical techniques used in the diagnosing and treatment 
or reading problem. Prerequisite: Education 472, majors. F arris. 

509. Reading and the Mentally Retarded (3).S. 
A study of the techniques in teaching reading to the mentally retarded. 
For special education teachers only. Staff. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 



187 



511. Investigations in Reading (3).F;SS. 

Investigations are made of the literature and research dealing with the 
teaching of reading. Price, Jones. 

514. Psychological and Educational Testing (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A study of the rationale which underlies group testing with emphasis 
upon the Standards for Educational and Psychological Tests and 
Manuals. Prerequisite: Education 460 or permission of the instructor. 
(Also Psychology 514.) Staff. 

519. Education of the Physically Handicapped (3).W. 
A study of muscle, skeletal, neuromuscular and health impairments and 
the educational adaptations required. Prerequisite: Education 320. 
Winford. 

520. Occupational and Educational Information (3).F;S;SS. 
Designed to acquaint teachers and counselors with sources and uses 
of vocational and educational information. D. Robinson. 

521. Vocational Planning for the Handicapped (3).SS. 
Vocational planning and work preparation for the handicapped. Includes 
consideration of basic occupational skills, work training and sheltered 
workshop programs. Hubbard. 

522. Counseling Theory and Techniques (3).W;S;SS. 
Designed primarily for students certifying in guidance and counseling; 
emphasis on theory and practice. Prerequisites: Education 478, Psy- 
chology 450. E. Harrill. 

523. Organization and Administration of (3). On Demand 

Guidance Services 

Primarily designed for those who desire to study the methods of 
introducing and establishing a school guidance program. D. Robinson. 

524. Seminar in Guidance (3).F;W;SS. 
Each individual will select some phase of guidance work, according to 
his special interests, for research and study. Prerequisite: Approval of 
instructor. Staff. 

527. Organization and Administration of Special (3).S. 
Education 

The implementation of special education programs at the national, 
state, and local levels. Effective public school programming. Winford. 

528. Production and Care of Audiovisual Materials (3).F;SS. 
Includes design and use of graphic and photographic production tech- 
niques. Prerequisite: Education 475. Pritchett. 

530. Education of Gifted (3).SS. 

A survey of educational programs for the gifted including curriculum, 
methods, and administrative educational adjustments. Hubbard. 



188 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 



532. Use and Care of Machines and Equipment (3).W;SS. 

A study of operating techniques of projection and audio devices, 
cameras, electronic laboratories, teaching machines; preventive mainte- 
nance and minor repairs. Prerequisite: Education 475. Pritchett. 

536. Programmed Instruction (3).S;SS. 
An introductory course in the design, preparation and validation of 
programs for instruction; provides laboratory experiences in programmed 
learning. McFarland. 

537. Organization and Administration of an (3).S;SS. 
Audiovisual Program 

Selection and evaluation of materials and equipment, including an 
analysis of the adequacy and effectiveness of audiovisual programs 
in school and college systems. Prerequisite: Education 475. Pritchett. 

538. 539. Supervised Practicum in Counseling (3,3).F;W;S;SS. 
Practice in the application of counseling techniques. Available primarily 
for Appalachian State University counseling degree candidates. Credit 
and setting to be decided upon in consultation with practicum super- 
visor. Prerequisite: Approval of adviser. Six quarter hours — two separate 
quarters — are required by Appalachian State University for the certifica- 
tion program. Three quarter hours for non-certificate program. Staff. 

540. Guidance Services in the Elementary School (3).F;SS. 
Designed primarily for those who are preparing to become counselors 
at the elementary school. Emphasis is given to philosophy, organization, 
maintenance and use of records, variety and use of tests, play therapy 
concepts, consultation with teachers and/or parents. D. Robinson. 

541. Student Personnel Services (3).W;SS. 
This course is designed for students interested in preparing themselves 
for college work in a non-instructional capacity. Emphasis is given to 
philosophy, organization, staffing, and services which comprise adequate 
student personnel programs: orientation, records, counseling, testing, 
health, recreation, housing, and placement. Padgett. 

548. Independent Study. Staff. (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;SS. 

551. Field Experience in Teaching Reading (3 to 9).F;W;S;SS. 
Students register only by permission. Price. 

554. Television in Instruction (3).W;SS. 
Techniques of using television as a teaching device. Covers production 
and utilization with emphasis on the use of portable videotape 
recorder. Survey of programming available to schools from all sources. 
Stoddard. 

555. Seminar in Problems in Audiovisual Instruction (3).S;SS. 
For audiovisual majors only. Pritchett. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 



189 



556. Practicum in Audiovisual Programs (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Prerequisite: Completion of all other audiovisual courses and approval 
of instructor. McFarland. 

557. Reading Curriculum: Organization (3). On demand and SS. 

and Supervision for Reading Majors 

Students in this course will study reading curriculum designs and design 
a "curriculum" in reading and study ways and means of implementing 
and supervising reading programs. Prerequisite: Must have 24 hours 
in reading or permission of advisor in reading. Price, Farris. 

558. Teaching of Reading (3),S;SS. 
A study of current practices, materials, and philosophy of teaching 
reading on all levels. Price. 

559. Advanced Course in Methods & (3). On demand and SS. 

Materials in Reading 

Students will learn techniques of designing, making, and utilizing 
instructional materials for specific teaching purposes and methods. Pre- 
requisite: 18 hours in reading and /or permission of graduate advisor 
in reading. Culyer. 

561. Evaluation and Assessment in Reading (3).SS. 

A study and evaluation of select curricula and programs in reading 
and the planning of a total school reading program. Open only to 
students specializing in reading, or by permission. Farris. 

564. Advanced Production of Audiovisual Materials (3).W;SS. 
Continuation of 528 in breadth and depth. Emphasis on project 
productions for mass distribution. Prerequisite: Education 475 and 528. 
Pritchett. 

567. Current Literature in Reading (3). On demand and SS. 
This course will involve both intensive and extensive reading of current 
periodicals and journals dealing with materials, methods, and theory 
of current trends and practices in reading. Prerequisites: 18 hours in 
reading, teaching experience, approval of reading adviser. Price and 
Dedmond. 

568. Research Problems in Reading (3).F;SS. 
In this course students will do research on critical areas of reading. 
Prerequisite: Open only to reading majors who have 18 hours in read- 
ing. Jones, Price, Farris. 

569. Readings and Research in Guidance and (3).SS. 
Student Personnel 

Individual programs of readings and research for students in guidance 
and student personnel work. Primarily for students who want advanced 
credit toward certification. E. Harrill. 



190 



DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL PROGRAMS 



570. Readings and Research in Special Education (3).SS. 
Individual programs of reading or research for students majoring in the 
education of exceptional children. Winford. 

571. Seminar in Reading (3).F. 
The seminar is planned to meet the needs of specific groups in reading. 
Students can register only by permission. Price. 

572. Internship in Special Education (9-15).F;W;S. 
Supervised experience with handicapped children. Winford. 

573. In-Service Internship in Special Education (3-9).SS. 
Designed for the master's degree candidate who has had previous 
successful teaching experience and is working on certification or degree 
requirements. Winford. 

670. Individual Behavior (3).F;SS. 

Staff. 

672. Advanced Group Methods and Processes (3).W;S;SS. 

Staff. 

679. Practicum in Group Methods and Processes (3).S;SS. 

Staff. 



DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION ±\) J_ 
DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 

L. Reynolds, Chairman, B. Bosworth, M. Bradford, B. Campbell, 
J. Cole, W. Cooper, W. Fulmer, H. Gilstrap, G. Graham, P. Holt, 
S. Jackson, T. Jamison, G. Lilly, W. Maynor, J. Melton, D. Meredith, 
J. Murphy, E. Putnam, B. Ramey, J. Roberts, R. Robinson, S. Round, 
K. Smathers, R. Snead, B. Strickland, R. Tuttle, E. Wadsworth, E. 
Widener, R. Wilson, L. Woodrow. 

The primary purpose of the Department of Teacher Education is 
to develop the professional competencies of classroom teachers. 
Through its programs of classroom instruction, direct experiences, 
and advising, the department prepares students for certification in 
the various curriculum areas and grade levels in elementary and 
secondary schools. In addition to meeting the minimal requirements 
for certification, the department maintains programs of instruction, 
research, and field services for the continuous improvement of 
curriculum development, educational materials, and methods of 
teaching. 

A student preparing to teach in the secondary school must 
complete Education 304, 305; Psychology 301, 302, 303; one 
methods course in his field of concentration; and Education 407. 

A student preparing to teach in a special area (art, health and 
physical education, library science, and music) must complete 
Education 301, 302 or 304, 305; Psychology 301, 302, 303; methods 
course or courses in his field of concentration; and Education 404. 

A student preparing to teach in the elementary school must com- 
plete Education 301, 302, 303, Psychology 301, 302, 303, Education 
310, 401 or 402, 403 and 405. In the area of specialization he must 
complete Art 201, 217; Education 202; General Science 401; 
Biology 107; Geography 101, 102; History 201, 202, 203 (any 
two), 206; Health 101, 401; Library Science 300, 304; Mathematics 
104; Music 217, 301-302-303; Physical Education 353; Political 
Science 201; and an academic concentration in one field. An ele- 
mentary education major (in consultation with his adviser) may- 
choose an academic concentration from the following areas: art, 
English, foreign language (French or Spanish), mathematics, music, 
science, social studies. Kindergarten-primary education majors are 
to take Anthropology 315. 

The elementary education major must take Physical Science 101- 
102-103 to satisfy the general education requirements. 



192 



DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 



A student preparing to teach in the elementary school (4-9) is 
required to take the Common Examination and the Elementary 
Education Examination of the National Teacher Examinations. A 
student preparing to teach in the kindergarten-primary (K-3) is 
required to take the Common Examination and the Early Childhood 
Education Examination of the National Teacher Examinations. 

Students who are not proficient in composition and English gram- 
mar are required to complete English 010, 206, or 307. Students who 
are not proficient in handwriting are required to complete Education 
020. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN TEACHER EDUCATION 

020. Remedial Handwriting (0).W;S. 

For students who are not proficient in handwriting. 

202. Art in the Elementary School (3).F;W;S. 

A study of the theories and philosophies of Art Education in the Elemen- 
tary School. Prerequisite: Art 201. Lecture three hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

301. Public Education in the United States (3).F;W;SS. 
A study of the history of education in the United States and recent 
innovations in the schools. 

302. Organization and Curriculum of the (3).W;S;SS. 

Elementary School 

A study of trends and organizations of the curriculum in a modern 
elementary school, lesson planning, unit construction, and communicative 
skills other than reading and writing. 

303. Elementary School Instruction (3).F;S;SS. 
A study of the teaching of social studies, techniques of analyzing 
individual needs, tests, grading, reporting, the education of the dis- 
advantaged, the art of teaching creatively, and the use of multisensory 
aids. 

304. Public Education in the United States (3).F;W;S. 
For secondary education majors. The origin and development of public 
education as a social institution. State and local school organization, 
administration, and financial support. 

305. Principles of Secondary Education (3).F;W;S. 
For secondary education majors. Problems and issues in curriculum 
development. The roles and immediate tasks of the high school teacher. 
Planning instructional activities. 



DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 



193 



307. Music in the Elementary School (3).W. 
Materials and methods in the field of music teaching in the elementary 
school. Music in the integrated program; emphasis on the creative 
phases and the development of musicianship; observation of teaching 
procedures with children. Designated for music majors. 

308. Music in the High School (3).S. 
A study of the organization and direction of the music program in 
the secondary school. Materials for the adolescent voice, elementary 
theory, music appreciation, operettas, and program building are surveyed. 
Designated for music majors. 

309. Piano Pedagogy (3).W. 
The teaching of piano with a study of various approaches in private 
and class methods; problems of setting up and operating a studio. 

311. Social Studies in the Elementary School (3).S. 
The place of social studies in the elementary curriculum; objectives, 
instructional procedures, materials, and evaluation criteria. 

312. Language Arts in the Elementary School (3).W. 
An understanding of the communication skills — listening, speaking, 
reading, writing, spelling; a comparison of current methods and ma- 
terials; an analysis and correlation of basic difficulties and the correlation 
of language arts with other activities. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

403. Mathematics in the Elementary School (3).F;W;S. 
A study of how children develop basic number concepts and learn 
to perform operations with natural numbers and fractions. Consideration 
of sequential learning experiences appropriate to each grade level. 
Prerequisites: Education 302 or 303; Phychology 301 or 302. 

404. Student Teaching Special (10 or 15).F;W;S;SS. 
Subjects 

Full time teaching experience under supervision for one quarter for 

{students who plan to teach special subjects in grades 1-12. For 
students majoring in art, physical education and health, library science, 
music, special education. Summer session application by March 1. 

405. Student Teaching: Elementary (10 or 15).F;W;S;SS. 
School 

Full time teaching experience under supervision for one quarter for 
students who plan to teach in grades 1-8 of the elementary school. The 
student who wishes to take this course during a summer session must 
make application to the Director of Student Teaching by March 1. 

406. Student Teaching (10).SS. 
Course in student teaching during summer session of the Elementary 
Laboratory School, June to August. Open only to those who have 
teaching experience. Application for this course must be made to 
the Director of Student Teaching by March 1. 



194 



DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 



407. Student Teaching: High School (10 or 15).F;W;S;SS. 
Full time teaching experience under supervision for one quarter for 
adults, who plan to teach secondary school subjects in grades 9-12. 
The student who wishes to take this course during a summer session 
must make application to the Director of Student Teaching by March 1. 

408. Teaching High School Mathematics (3).F;W;S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

409. Teaching High School Science (3).F;W;S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

410. Teaching High School Social Studies (3).F;W;S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

411. Teaching High School English (3).F;W;S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

412. Teaching Foreign Languages (3).S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

413. Teaching Home Economics (3).F;W;S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

414. Teaching Physical Education (3).F;W;S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

415. Art in the Secondary School (3).F. 
Exploration into the functional use of a variety of art materials, 
techniques, curriculum construction considering the level of the student's 
creative development in relation to his needs, interests, maturity; the 
philosophy and psychology of art education. Prerequisite: Education 
305 and Psychology 302. 

416. Teaching Industrial Arts (3).S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

417. Teaching Business Education (3).F;W;S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

418. Teaching Speech (3).S. 
Prerequisite: Education 305 and Psychology 302. 

419. Instrumental Methods and Materials (2).W. 
A comprehensive survey of the materials and methods in instrumental 
class teaching. Prerequisite: Education 302 or 305 and Psychology 302. 

420. Choral Methods and Materials (2).S. 
A comprehensive survey of the materials and methods in choral 
teaching. Prerequisites: Education 302 or 305 and Psychology 302. 

450. Science in the Elementary School (3).SS;Ex. 

Same as General Science 450. 



DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 



195 



453. Art Education Workshop (3).SS;Ex. 

Same as Art 453. 

456. Measurement and Assessment (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Basic course for elementary, secondary and junior college teachers 
which stresses the construction and use of teacher-made tests. 

457. 458. Mathematics for the Disadvantaged Child (3).S;SS. 

459. Nursery — Kindergarten Curriculum (3).F. 

Development and organization of the curriculum with emphasis placed 
on such areas as communicative skills, science, and social learnings. 

461. Nursery — Kindergarten Instruction (3).W. 

Selecting, planning, and utilizing the materials, methods, activities, and 
facilities for programs suited to the young child. Laboratory experiences 
required. 

490. Education of the Disadvantaged (3).W;SS. 

A study of the educational needs of the disadvantaged child. Considera- 
tion is given to identification, curriculum, methods of teaching, and 
materials. The course is designed for administrators and instructional 
personnel. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Research in Education (3).F;W;S. 

A study of the various types of research and the logical organization of 
research and reporting; required in first quarter for persons working 
for Master of Arts Degree in any area in education, industrial arts, 
library science. Staff. 

513. Teaching the Language Arts (3).SS. 

The course deals with problems in oral and written communications 
in the elementary school. Lilly. 

515. Organizing and Planning Student Teaching (3).F;SS. 
A study of the origin and development of student teaching, including 
present status and trends, experiences prior to student teaching, 
selection of schools and supervising teachers, selection and placement 
of student teachers. Staff. 

516. Supervision of Student Teaching (3).S;SS. 
A study of general techniques of a supervising teacher, including 
observation, guiding student teachers in planning, orientation of student 
teachers, student teacher participation, and evaluation. Available as a 
workshop by invitation. Staff. 

529. Organization and Supervision of (3).W;SS. 

School Music 

The responsibilities of the music supervisor in relation to the classroom 
teacher, the music teacher, and the school administration. Spencer, 
Mears, Fox. 



196 



DEPARTMENT OF TEACHER EDUCATION 



548. Independent Study Staff. 
550. Master of Arts Thesis Staff. 



(Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 
(6).F;W;S. 



576. Internship for Supervising Teachers (3).F;W;S. 

A program designed for regularly employed public school teachers in 
which experiences will be provided to enable a supervising teacher to 
do a better job of supervising the work of a student teacher. Staff. 




The College of Fine and Applied Arts 

Nicholas Erneston, Dean 

In cooperation with other colleges of the University, the College 
of Fine and Applied Arts strives: 

To provide for varied interests, desires, needs, and abilities 
of students. 

To provide a liberal education for all Appalachian stu- 
dents. 

To expand cultural horizons and develop appreciation 
of ethical and aesthetic values. 

To prepare students for certain professions. 

To prepare students for entrance into certain professional 
schools. 

To provide sound foundations for students capable and 
desirous of advanced study. 

DEPARTMENTS 

The College of Fine and Applied Arts consists of the following 
seven departments: 

Art Industrial Arts 

Health and Physical Education Military Science 

Home Economics Music 

Speech 

DEGREES OFFERED 

The College of Fine and Applied Arts offers the Bachelor of Arts, 
The Bachelor of Science, and the Bachelor of Music degrees. In 
cooperation with the College of Education it offers the Bachelor of 
Science degree with teacher certification in art, health and physical 
education, home economics education, industrial arts, music (Bachelor 
of Music in Music Education), speech, and special education in the 
area of speech and hearing. 



198 



COLLEGE OF FINE AND APPLIED ARTS 



To be admitted to the College of Fine and Applied Arts as a can- 
didate for a baccalaureate degree a student must have: 

1. Completed at least 90 quarter hours. 

2. A quality-point ratio of at least 2.0, which must be main- 
tained. 

3. Completed 

a. English 100, 110, 120 (formerly 101, 102, 103). 

b. Six hours of literature. 

c. History — completed General Education requirement in 
History. 

d. Mathematics 101 or 107. 

e. A year of natural science (Exception: Certain programs 

under the Bachelor of Music 
degree require a special 5-hour 
course in physics in lieu of the 
year of natural science. See sec- 
tion dealing with the Music 
Department). 

f. Three quarter hours of physical education activity courses. 

4. Been accepted by a department in the college as a major in 
that department. 

If a student does not satisfy all of these conditions, he may, with 
the approval of the dean of the college concerned, be admitted pro- 
visionally. A student admitted provisionally must remove any de- 
ficiency by the beginning of his tenth quarter at Appalachian. If he 
does not, he is not eligible for continued enrollment. 

A student who is a candidate for a teaching certificate must be 
admitted to the teacher education program by the Chairman of the 
Department of Teacher Education. 

BACHELOR OF ARTS DEGREE 

In order for a student to earn the Bachelor of Arts degree in the 
College of Fine and Applied Arts, the following requirements must 
be met: 

1. Completion of at least 183 quarter hours with a grade-point 
average of at least 2.0. A transfer student must have at least 
a 2.0 grade-point average on all work at Appalachian. 



COLLEGE OF FINE AND APPLIED ARTS 



199 



2. Completion of general education requirements. 

3. Completion of nine quarter hours of a second year of foreign 
language or more. The Department of Foreign Languages 
places students at the level at which they are prepared to per- 
form regardless of previously earned units. 

4. Completion of a major consisting of 46 to 60 quarter hours 
from one of the fields listed below: 

Art Music Speech 

A student must have at least a 2.0 grade point average on all 
work in the major. A transfer student must complete at least 
12 quarter hours of work in his major at Appalachian and 
must have at least a 2.0 grade point average on all work in 
the major at Appalachian. Specific requirements for each 
departmental major preface the list of courses offered by the 
department. 

5. Completion of a minor consisting of 18 to 27 quarter hours 
from a department other than a department in the College of 
Education. A transfer student must complete at least 6 quarter 
hours in his minor at Appalachian. The choice of a minor 
should be made under the guidance of the student's adviser 
in his major field of study. Specific requirements for each 
departmental minor preface the list of courses offered by the 
department. 

6. Completion of electives to total 183 quarter hours. 

7. Completion of residence requirements. 

8. Compliance with regulations concerning satisfactory citizen- 
ship and the settlement of all expense accounts. 

9. Recommendation of the faculty. 

10. Completion of required Aptitude Test and the appropriate 
Advanced Test, if available, of the Graduate Record Exami- 
nation. 

Meeting graduation requirements is the student's responsibility. 

A candidate for the Bachelor of Arts degree may qualify for a 
teacher's certificate by admission to professional education courses 
through the Chairman of the Department of Teacher Education and 
by completing all academic and professional education requirements 
for certification. 



200 



COLLEGE OF FINE AND APPLIED ARTS 



BACHELOR OF SCIENCE DEGREE 
(without teacher certification) B.S. "a" 

In order for a student to earn the Bachelor of Science degree in the 
College of Fine and Applied Arts, the following requirements must be 
met: 

1. Completion of at least 183 quarter hours with a grade-point 
average of at least 2.0. A transfer student must have at least 
a 2.0 grade-point average on all work at Appalachian. 

2. Completion of the general education requirements. 

3. Completion of a major of 54 to 94 quarter hours selected 
from one of the fields listed below: 

Health and Physical Education Industrial Arts 

Home Economics in Business Music : piano pedagogy 

A student must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on all 
work in the major. A transfer student must complete at least 
12 quarter hours of work in his major at Appalachian and 
must have at least a 2.0 grade-point average on all work in 
the major at Appalachian. Specific requirements for each de- 
partmental major preface the list of courses offered by the 
department. 

4. Completion of a minor consisting of 18 to 27 quarter hours 
from a department other than a department in the College of 
Education. A transfer student must complete at least 6 quarter 
hours in his minor at Appalachian. The choice of a minor 
should be made under the guidance of the student's adviser 
in his major field of study. Specific requirements for each 
departmental minor preface the list of courses offered by the 
department. 

5. Completion of electives to total 183 quarter hours. 

6. Completion of residence requirements. 

7. Compliance with regulations concerning satisfactory citizenship 
and the settlement of all expense accounts. 

8. Recommendation of the faculty. 

9. Completion of required Aptitude Test and the appropriate 
Advanced Test, if available, of the Graduate Record Exami- 
nation. 

Meeting graduation requirements is the student's responsibility. 



COLLEGE OF FINE AND APPLIED ARTS 



201 



BACHELOR OF SCIENCE 

(with teacher certification) B.S. "b" 

For the requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree with 
teacher certification (B.S. "b") see page 163, College of Education. 

BACHELOR OF MUSIC 

For the requirements for the Bachelor of Music degree programs, 
consult the section dealing with Degree Programs, pp. 237, 238, in 
the section of this catalog which discusses the Department of Music. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION 

Courses are listed by departments in alphabetical order. Courses 
numbered 100 to 199 inclusive are normally offered for freshmen; 
200 to 299 for sophomores; 300 to 399 for juniors; 400 to 499 for 
seniors; 300 to 499 for graduate students with the approval of ad- 
viser; and 500 and above for graduate students. Courses open to lower 
classes are also open to upper classes. For courses numbered 500 
and above the name of the professor who ordinarily teaches the 
course is given in italics following the course description. 

The figure in brackets preceding a course title indicates the 
course number used in catalog of 1970-71. 

The figure in parentheses after the course title gives the credit 
in quarter hours; for example the figure (3) means three quarter 
hours. 

Quarters of the year in which the course is offered are repre- 
sented by symbols: "F" for fall quarter, "W" for winter quarter, 
"S" for spring quarter, "SS" for summer session, "Ex" for extension. 

A hyphen in the course number, credit, and quarters of the year 
in which the course is offered indicates that the course extends 
through two or more quarters and that the preceding quarter 
must be completed before the following quarter can be taken. 

The comma in the course number, credit, and quarters indi- 
cates that the course is continuous but that one quarter may be 
taken independently of another. 

The semicolon in the quarter offered indicates that the course 
is a one quarter course and is repeated in a subsequent quarter. 

Special requirements for admission to a course are stated after 
the word prerequisite. 

The administration reserves the right to withdraw courses for 
which there is insufficient enrollment. 



202 



DEPARTMENT OF ART 

DEPARTMENT OF ART 

L. Edwards, Chairman, H. Carrin, W. Dennis, W. Dunlap, L. Force, 
N. Long, F. Petersilie, S. Waterworth. 

The objectives of the Department of Art are twofold. One objective 
is to provide the best preparation and training of teachers of art for 
the public schools. The second objective is to provide the best pro- 
fessional training in order that the art student, whether he plans to 
teach or not, may make a creative contribution to the visual arts of 
our culture. 

In addition, the general community will have the opportunity to 
increase its knowledge and appreciation of art through service 
courses and the major professional exhibitions of art sponsored by 
the Department of Art. 

A major in art leading to the Bachelor of Science degree and 
teacher certification consists of 63 quarter hours, including Art 101, 
104, 200, 203, 208, 211, 213, 255, 301, 302, 305; three quarter 
hours from Art 303 or 304 or 306; Art 413, 414, 425, 450; and a 
minimum of 12 additional quarter hours from one of the following 
areas of specialization: Art 209, 210, 307, 308; or Art 313, 314, 
409, 411; or Art 311, 312, 408, 412; or Art 355, 400, 420 and 
Industrial Arts 205. The art major must also take three quarter hours 
of an art elective. The art major must also take Education 202, 
415, 475. 

A major in art leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree consists of 
60 quarter hours including Art 101, 104, 203, 208, 211, 213, 301, 
302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 413, 414, 451; a minimum of twelve addi- 
tional quarter hours from one of the following areas of specialization: 
Art 209, 210, 307 and 308; or Art 313, 314, 409 and 411; Art 
311, 312, 408 and 412; or Art 200, 255, 355 and 400. The art 
major must also take three quarter hours of an art elective. 

A minor in art consists of 24 quarter hours, including Art 101, 
104, 208, 211, 213; three quarter hours from Art 301 or 302 or 
303 or 304 or 306; and six quarter hours of art electives. 

A concentration in art consists of 18 quarter hours including 
Art i01, 104, 425; three quarter hours from Art 303 or 304 or 306; 
six quarter hours from any of the following areas, Art 208 and 
Art 209, or Art 211 and Art 311, or Art 313 and Art 314, or Art 
203 and 413, or Art 301 and Art 302, or Art 200 and Art 400, or 
Art 255 and Art 355. 



DEPARTMENT OF ART 



203 



An academic concentration in art leading to the Master of Arts 
degree for elementary school teachers consists of 24 quarter hours 
including Art 525, 550, 560; three quarter hours from any 500 level 
Art History; three quarter hours from any 500 level studio course 
and nine additional quarter hours in electives from studio and/or 
art history on the 500 level. 

A 12 hour academic minor in art leading to the Master of Arts 
degree for elementary school teachers consists of 12 quarter hours 
including Art 525, 560; three quarter hours of a graduate level studio 
course selected from the areas of painting or graphics or sculpture 
or constructive design; three quarter hours in graduate level art 
history. 

Additional professional requirements are listed in the graduate 
section for the Master of Arts degree for elementary school teachers. 

Art 201, 453, 456 and 459 are not approved for completing re- 
quirements for an art major, minor, or concentration. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN ART 

101. Beginning Drawing and Composition (3).F;W;S. 

The basic skills and drawing in black and white media are accented. 
Drawings are made from the figure, landscape, and still life. Drawings 
by great artists are studied. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

104. Beginning Design (3).F;W;S. 

Introduction to basic modes of the structuring of visual form in two- 
dimensions. Analysis and applications. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

200. Constructive Design in Fabric (3).F;W;S. 
Constructive design in fabric crafts with emphasis on creative problem- 
solving, craftsmanship, and techniques with various fibers through 
weaving, batik dyeing, printing, and other processes. Prerequisites: Art 
101, 104. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

201. Fundamentals of Art (3).F;W;S. 
Personal experience in working with varied art media, stressing concept- 
learning skills and critical evaluation for the elementary education 
major. Not open to art majors. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

203. Intermediate Drawing and Composition (3).F;W;S. 

Extensive use of all drawing media. Experimental approaches en- 
couraged. Analytical study of masterpieces of drawing. Prerequisite: Art 
101. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

208-209-210. Painting ( 3-3-3 ).F;W;S. 

Foundation courses in technical handling of a variety of media. Pre- 
requisites: Art 101, 104. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 



204 



DEPARTMENT OF ART 



211. Sculpture (3).F;W;S. 

The fundamentals of modeling, constructing, or casting basic three- 
dimensional forms. Prerequisites: Art 101, 305. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

213. Printmaking (3).F;W;S. 

Initial study and practice in the basic graphics processes. Relief, intaglio, 
planographic and serigraphic printing. Prerequisites: Art 101, 104. 
Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

217. Introduction to Art (3).F;W;S. 

Analysis of selected examples of architecture, sculpture, painting, crafts, 
and industrial design in relation to their historical time and need. 
Lecture three hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

255. Constructive Design with Plastic Media (3).F;W;S. 

Constructive design with emphasis on structural and surface qualities. 
One hour lecture, five hours laboratory. Prerequisite: Art 101 or 
permission. 

301. Ancient and Medieval Art (3).F. 
A survey of architecture, painting, and sculpture from prehistoric time 
through medieval Europe. Lecture three hours. 

302. Renaissance Art (3).W. 
A study of architecture, painting, and sculpture from the fourteenth 
through the eighteenth centuries. Lecture three hours. 

303. Modern Art, Nineteenth Century (3).F. 
A study of architecture, painting, and sculpture in the nineteenth 
century. Lecture three hours. 

304. American Art (3).W. 
A survey of art in America. Painting, sculpture, and architecture from 
colonial times to the present. Lecture three hours. 

305. Intermediate Design (3).F;W;S. 
Similar to 104 but with emphasis on three-dimensional visual form. 
Prerequisites: Art 104. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

306. Modern Art, Twentieth Century (3).S. 
A study of architecture, painting, and sculpture in the twentieth cen- 
tury. Lecture three hours. 

307. Life Drawing and Painting (3).F. 

Structure and action of the human figure. Prerequisite: Art 210. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

308-309. Painting (3-3).W;S. 

Advanced problems in painting, individual experimentation and ex- 
pression. Prerequisite: Art 307. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF ART 



205 



311-312. Sculpture (3-3).F;W;S. 

Investigation into the theories, materials, and methods of sculpture 
with an emphasis on selected materials and techniques. Prerequisite: 
Art 211. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

313-314. Printmaking (3-3).F;W;S. 

Continued work in graphics processes with emphasis on selected tech- 
niques. Prerequisite: Art 213. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

326. Secondary School Art (3).F;W. 

Art materials and equipment for the secondary school. Basic use of 
materials and equipment for the secondary school art, including budget- 
ing, purchasing, and facilities planning. Lecture three hours. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

355. Constructive Design in Plastic Media (3).F;W;S. 

Constructive design with plastic media. An extension of Art 255 plus 
an exploration in depth of one aspect of plastic construction. Pre- 
requisite: Art 255. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

400. Constructive Design in Fabric (3).F;W;S. 

Constructive design in fabric. An extension of Art 200 plus an explora- 
tion in depth of one aspect of constructive design in fibers. Prerequisite: 
Art 200. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

407. Advanced Painting (3).W;S. 
Prerequisite: Art 309. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

408. Advanced Sculpture (3).F;W;S. 

Consideration of special problems as related to selected materials and 
techniques with an emphasis on individual student experimentation. 
Prerequisite: Art 312. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

409. Advanced Printmaking (3).F;W;S. 
Advanced work in graphic media with emphasis on individual technical 
investigations. Prerequisite: Art 314. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

410. Advanced Life Drawing and Painting (3).F. 
Prerequisite: Art 307. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

411. Lithography (3).F;W;S. 
Advanced work and individual investigations in lithographic techniques. 
Prerequisites: Art 313, 314. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

412. Advanced Sculpture (3).F;W;S. 
Continuation of Art 408. Prerequisite: Art 408. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

413. Advanced Drawing and Composition (3).W;S. 
Monochromatic drawing as an art form with special emphasis on com- 
positional approaches. Planning of larger works through drawing. In- 
dividual projects. Prerequisite: Art 203. Lecture one hour, laboratory 
five hours. 



206 



DEPARTMENT OF ART 



414. Advanced Design (3).W;S. 

Further investigations into theories of structuring visual form. Pre- 
requisite: Art 305. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

420. Philosophy and Problems of the Craftsman (3).S. 

Exploration of historical and contemporary philosophers and problems 
of craftsmen involved in constructive design. Lecture three hours. Pre- 
requisite: Art 200, Art 255. 

425. Teaching-Learning Processes in Art (3).F;S. 

Education-Elementary 

Art curriculum and course content in the elementary schools. A study 
of trends, organization, content, materials, and equipment for the ele- 
mentary schools. Lecture three hours. Prerequisite: Education 202. 

428. (Humanities) Music, Art and Ideas I F,W. 
A survey course of an interdisciplinary nature dealing with the historical, 
religious, philosophical, sociological, and scientific aspects of the fine 
arts. The purpose of this course is to serve as a capstone — a drawing 
together of the many single threads which tend to constitute liberal 
education — to give meaning and direction to one's search for personal 
freedom. Students would be expected to make use of a wide variety 
of library materials, and to pursue topics of special interest on an 
individual or group basis. From the Culture of Ancient Greece through 
the Middle Ages. 

429. (Humanities) Music, Art, and Ideas II W,S. 
A continuation of Humanities 428. From the Renaissance to the present. 

450. Problems in Art (3-6).F;W;S. 
Individual problems or projects. No more than three hours may be 
taken in a quarter. Admission on approval of chairman. 

451. Seminar (3-6).S. 
A specialized course involving advanced study by small groups in 
selected areas. Students may enroll twice for credit totaling six quarter 
hours, but may not receive credit for a seminar which duplicates the 
content of one for which they have previously received credit. 

453. Art Education Workshop (3).SS;Ex. 

An intensive two-week course devoted to art instruction in grades one 
through twelve, including the correlation of art with teaching at all 
levels. Art materials and supplies for grade levels are examined. Each 
student pays for materials used, and all articles made by him become 
his property. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

456. Workshop in Painting (3).SS. 

An intensive two-week course. Student chooses, with the instructor's 
approval, the painting medium to be used. Field trips offer opportunities 
to paint local scenery. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

459. Workshop in Sculpture (3).SS. 

An intensive study of the various concepts and techniques involved with 
creative sculpture dealing with all the basic forms in modeling as well 



DEPARTMENT OF ART 



207 



as wood and stone carving. Each student pays for materials used, and 
all articles made by him become his property. Lecture one hour, lab- 
oratory five hours. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

501. Ancient and Medieval Art (3).F. 
An intensive investigation of art forms from pre-history through 
Medieval period. A graduate research paper will be required. Lecture 
three hours. Edwards. 

502. Renaissance Art (3).W. 
Advanced study emphasizing the European involvement with art during 
the Renaissance. A graduate research paper will be required. Lecture 
three hours. Dennis. 

503. Modern Art 19th Century (3).F. 
The development of art as it grew towards modernism, mainly in 
France, during the nineteenth century. A graduate research paper will 
be required. Lecture three hours. Long. 

504. American Art ( 3 ) .W. 
Relationships between United States history and the development of 
American art from colonial times to the present. A graduate research 
paper will be required. Lecture three hours. Dennis. 

506. Modern Art 20th Century (3).S. 
A study of the art of the twentieth century as a worldwide phenomenon. 
Special emphasis is given to recent trends. A graduate research paper 
will be required. Lecture three hours. Long. 

507. Painting (3).F. 
Development of the individual painter's aesthetic through advanced 
studio work. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Dennis. 

508. Sculpture (3).W;S. 
Special problems as related to selected materials and techniques. The 
emphasis will be on individual student experimentation on an advanced 
level. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Carrin 

509. Constructive Design in Fabric (3).F;W;S. 
An extension of Art 400 plus related research. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. Force. 

513. Printmaking (3).F;W;S. 

Advanced studio work in printmaking designed to develop an individual 
sense of graphic form. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Long. 

520. Philosophy and Problems of the Craftsman (3).S. 

An extension of Art 420 plus individual research in one constructive 
design area. Lecture three hours. Carrin. 

525. Teaching-Learning Process in Art Education (3).F;S. 

An extension of course material in Art 425 plus related research and 
bibliography. Lecture three hours. Force. 



208 



DEPARTMENT OF ART 



548. Independent Study. Staff. 



(Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 



550. Problems in Art (3-6).F;W;S. 

Individual problems or projects for the graduate student. No more than 
three hours may be taken in a quarter. Admission on approval of chair- 
man. Staff. 

555. Constructive Design with Plastic Media (3).F;W;S. 

An extension of Art 355 plus related research. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. Petersilie. 

560. History and Philosophy of Art Education (3).F;W;S. 

An examination of the current theories and trends in art education in 
relationship to their involvement in history and to future developments. 
Lecture three hours. Petersilie. 




DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 
AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



209 

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



L. Horine, Chairman, E. Ashby, J. Askew, W. Church, B. Daye, J. Daye, 
E. DeGroat, J. Elliott, C. Garrison, A. Gray, J. Groce, M. Gruensfelder, 
C. Hodges, F. Hoover, R. Kanoy, E. Larson, R. Light, R. Lord, J. May- 
hew, C. Meeks, C. Miller, W. Steinbrecher, E. Thomas, R. Thomas, 
R. Tomlinson, E. Turner, J. Watson, J. Williams. 

The objectives of the department are to prepare teachers, coaches, 
and youth leaders in health education, physical education and 
recreation for the schools and related agencies; to provide experi- 
ence in physical education activities which will lead to acquisition 
of skill and fitness with leisure time and recreational value; through 
group and individual guidance to strive for optimum development 
of personality and good mental and emotional health; to uphold 
and promote high ethical standards in the profession; to pursue the 
above objectives within the context of the aims, objectives and 
purposes of the University. 

A major in health and physical education leading to a Bachelor 
of Science degree without certification to teach consists of 54 quarter 
hours including: Health 101, 102, 103; Physical Education 210, 
211, 212, 215, 307, 320, 409, 410, 412; and 18 quarter hours of 
electives from Health 402 and Physical Education 314, 415, 457 
or any of the skills and techniques courses numbered 330 through 
345. Biology 101, 102, and 103 are required. 

A minor in health and physical education consists of 24 quarter 
hours. Courses required for a minor are: Health 101, 102, 103, 
Physical Education 210, 211, 212, 307 and 320. Biology 101, 102, 
and 103 are required. 

A major in health and physical education leading to a Bachelor 
of Science degree and teacher certification consists of 66 quarter 
hours, in addition to the General Education requirements. These 
courses include: Health 101, 102, 103, 401; Physical Education 
210, 211, 212, 215, 307, 320, 353, 409, 410, 412; three physical 
education activity courses from 101 through 209 in addition to 
those required in general education, and at least six skills and tech- 
niques courses from 330 through 345. Biology 101, 102, and 103 
are required. 

After the freshman year and before student teaching a major 
is required to have an apprentice experience under a regular staff 
member for a minimum of one quarter. 



210 



DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 
AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



A major in health and physical education leading to a Master 
of Arts degree consists of a minimum of 36 quarter hours selected 
by the student in consultation with and certified by his major 
adviser. Physical Education 500 must be taken at the beginning of 
graduate work. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN HEALTH AND PHYSICAL 
EDUCATION 

HEALTH 

101. Personal Health (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Basic principles of personal health, hygiene, and total fitness: physical, 
mental and emotional. 

102. Family, School and Community Health (3).W;SS. 
Family health factors: planning a family, sex education, child care, 
diet and nutrition, common diseases, school and community health 
factors, analysis of public and private health organizations. 

103. First Aid (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Principles and techniques of emergency first aid, civilian defense, and 
related safety factors. 

201. Fundamentals of Health (3).F. 

A course for the non-physical education majors with emphasis on 
sex education, sane diet and exercise, drugs, alcohol, tobacco, choosing 
a doctor, etc. (Not open to those required to take HE 101 or HE 102.) 

401. Methods and Materials in Health 

Education (3).F;W;S;SS. 

The theory and practice of planning various types of health education 
programs for elementary and secondary levels; development of teaching 
and A-V materials; resources and organizations available for health 
teaching. (Prerequisite: HE 101 or equivalent.) 

402. Safety Education (3).W;SS. 
Study of safety procedures, techniques and programs; analysis of 
Safety Council statistics and their meaning for school and community; 
driver education programs, industrial safety programs applicable to 
the school, community programs, safety in sport, recreation and home. 

PHYSICAL EDUCATION 

All students may elect three or more activity courses (numbered 
101 to 209). Non-swimmers are urged to take Physical Education 
101. Courses need not be taken in any particular sequence. No 
student may take more than one activity course per quarter without 
the written permission of the department chairman. The aim should 
be toward lifetime physical fitness. 



DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH Q-| "1 

AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION ^H 

Physical Education majors must take one activity course each 
quarter of the freshman and sophomore years (a total of six quarter 
hours) as a minimum, but may take more than six. Thereafter, they 
take a minimum of six skills and techniques courses. 

Gym suits are furnished and laundered by the college for on- 
campus activity classes. Students furnish their own white athletic 
socks, white rubber-soled shoes, jackets, swimming suits, bad- 
minton, tennis, and squash racquets, tennis balls, handball gloves 
and balls. Towel service is provided. 

The following activity courses (numbered 101-209) are open to 
all students to fulfill the General Education requirements of three 
quarter hours of physical education and for those electing to take 
more than the three hours minimum: {Note — The symbol* indi- 
cates co-ed sections, numbered 50 and up. The symbol / indicates 
sections for men only, numbered 10 to 29. The symbol x indicates 
sections for women only, numbered 30 to 49). 

101. Swimming, non-swimmers (1).F;W;S;SS. 

110. Physical Fitness (1).F;W;S. 

111. Beginning Swimming* (1).F;W;S;SS. 

112. Intermediate Swimming* (1).F;S. 

113. Advanced Swimming* (1).W;S. 

114. Tennis and Badminton* (1).F;S;SS. 

115. Folk and Social Dance* (1).F;W;S;SS. 

116. Gymnastics* (1).F;W;S;SS. 

117. Golf* (Fee $14 per quarter) (1).F;S;SS. 
178. Bowling* (Fee $8 per quarter) (1).F;W;S. 

1 19. Weight Training* ( 1 ) .F;W;S. 

120. Basketball /x (1).F;W;S. 

121. Soccer /x (1).F;S. 

122. Volleyball /x (1).F;W;S. 

124. Softball /x (1).F;S. 

125. Winter Sports (1).W. 

126. LaCrosse /x (1).F;S. 

127. Beginning Fencing (1).F;W;S. 

128. Intermediate Fencing (1).F;W. 

129. Senior Life Saving (1).W;S. 

130. Adapted Physical Education (1).F;W;S. 

131. Hiking and Campcraft (1).F;S. 

132. Archery (1).S. 



212 



DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 
AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



200. Beginning Skiing* (fee of $50 per quarter) (1).W. 

202. Intermediate Skiing (fee of $50 per quarter) (1).W. 

203. Advanced Folk & Social Dance (1).W. 

204. Squash Racquets* (1).F;W;S. 

205. Modern Dance (1).W. 

206. Wrestling/ (1).F;W. 

207. Field Hockey x (1).F;S. 

208. Track and Field /x (1).F;S. 

209. Handball (1).F;W;S. 

210. Human Anatomy (3).F;W. 
A study of the structures of the human body as they relate to physical 
education and human motion. Prerequisite: Biology 101-102-103. 

211. Human Physiology (3).W;S. 
A study of the basic functions of the human organism. Prerequisite: 
Physical Education 210 or equivalent. 

212. Physiology of Muscular Activity (3).S;SS. 
The application of physiological principles to muscular and organic 
action of the human in sports and action. Prerequisite: Physical Educa- 
tion 211 or equivalent. 

215. Introduction and History of Sports and 

Physical Education (3).F;W;S. 

An orientation into the field of physical education through the study of 
historical backgounds, systems and oganizations, leaders and move- 
ments, program and sports of the past and present. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

307. Kinesiology (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Mechanical and anatomical fundamentals and the physics of human 
motion. Prerequisite: Physical Education 210. 

312. Organization and Administration of 

Physical Education (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Organization, administration, supervision, planning, budgeting and evalu- 
ation of the physical education program on various levels. Planning 
and use of facilities, maintenance, purchasing, insurance, varsity and 
intramural programs, leagues and tournaments, public relations. 

314. Officiating Men's Sports (2).F;W;S. 

Principles and techniques of officiating. Lecture one hour, laboratory 
two hours. 

320. Principles and Philosophies of Health 

and Physical Education (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A summary of the historical and present concepts, principles, and 
philosophies which relate to, and influence health, leisure, physical 
education and recreation. 



DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH Q1 O 

AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION Zi±(j 

SKILLS AND TECHNIQUES 

A physical education major must take a minimum of six skills 
and techniques courses (numbered 330 to 347). The student should 
have a skills course or show competence, as a prerequisite. Choice 
of courses will be made by the student with the student's major 
adviser. 

Each of the courses deals with how to perform, and how to teach 
the subject. Fundamental skills, conditioning, training, lesson plan- 
ning, drills, officiating, rules, resources and methods of evaluation 
are covered. Each course meets five days a week, including lecture 
and laboratory. 

(Symbols: * Co-ed; / Men only; x Women only) 

330. Gymnastic and Tumbling (3).F;W;S. 

331. Aquatics (3).W;S;SS. 

332. Tennis and Badminton (3).F;S;SS. 

333. Dance (3).W;S. 

334. Volleyball (3).F;W;S. 

335. Track and Field /x (3).S;SS. 
337. Basketball /x (3).W;S. 

339. Field Hockey /x (3).F;S. 

340. Soccer and Related Sports /x (3).F;S. 

342. Football / (3).F;S. 

343. Baseball / (3).F;S. 

344. Wrestling / (3).F;W;S. 

347. Skills and Techniques of Skiing (3).W. 
Objective of the course will be to prepare students for teaching skiing 
by various techniques and for patroling of the area for the safety 
of skiing public. Prerequisite: P.E. 200 and 202, H.E. 103 or 
equivalent. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

353. Fundamental Movements, Rhythms, and (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Group Games 

This course will meet five days a week including lecture and laboratory. 
The student will be prepared to teach physical .education at the 
elementary level. The emphasis will be placed on what, when, and why, 
and how activities should be taught. 

409. Adapted Physical Education and 

Recreation (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A survey of abnormalities and atypical cases; identification, with pre- 
ventive and corrective techniques: Prerequisite: Physical Educatic. 
210-11-12, 307. 



214 



DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 
AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



410. Evaluation in Health and Physical 

Education (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A theory and methods course in the application of measurement, tests, 
statistics, and evaluation in health and physical education programs. 

412. Prevention and Care of Athletic 

Injuries (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Prevention and care of injuries; safety devices, use of wraps and supports, 
massage, taping, therapeutic techniques, and conditioning exercises. 
Prerequisites: Health 103; Physical Education 210-11-12, 307. Lecture 
two hours, laboratory two hours. 

415. Planning a Recreation Program (3).S;SS. 

Lectures and discussions on basic philosophy, principles and practices, 
current trends, financing, methods and procedures, administration, 
facilities and equipment, and leadership training. 

453. Football Coaching (3).S;SS. 
Lectures and discussions on modern methods of training, play patterns, 
game strategy and seasonal planning. Open to experienced coaches only. 

454. Basketball Coaching (3).SS. 
A study of modern team and individual offense and defense. Lectures 
and discussions. Open to experienced coaches only. 

455. Advanced Track and Field Coaching (3).SS. 
Lectures, discussions, study of training for all events. Open to ex- 
perienced coaches only. 

457. Advanced Modern Dance (3).SS. 

Study and analysis of the techniques and basic philosophy of the dance, 
choreography, composition, comparison of various "schools", settings, 
costuming, music, and exhibitions. 

465. Seminar in Individual and Dual Sports (3).W;SS. 
A study of individual and dual sports except aquatics, track and field. 

466. Seminar in Team Sports (3).F;SS. 
A study of team sports except basketball and football. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F;SS. 
A study of bibliographical problems in the field, types of research, 
resources, organization and reporting, documentation of graduate writ- 
ing and application to term projects. Turner, Thomas. 

501. Scientific Bases of Health and 

Physical Education (3).W;SS. 

Current findings and theories in various disciplines and specialties and 
their application to health and physical education. Thomas, Meeks. 



DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 
AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



215 



502. Curriculum Development in Health 

and Physical Education (3).F;SS. 

Study and evaluation of curriculum, program, and construction of 
plans for health and physical education for grades one through twelve. 
Meeks, Larson, Gruensfelder. 

503. Analysis of Neuromuscular Activity (3).S;SS. 
Anatomical, physiological, psychological, and mechanical principles 
applied to the analysis of skills and conditioning of the human in 
motion. Prerequisites: Undergraduate course in anatomy, physiology, 
kinesiology. Thomas, Meeks. 

504. Philosophies Related to Health 

and Physical Education (3).S;SS. 

A study of the outstanding leaders and ideas of the past and present 
as they apply to health, fitness, and recreation. Larson. Gruensfelder. 

505. Interpretation of Data (3).W;SS. 
Analysis and interpretation of test and measurement results and re- 
search findings in health and physical education. Hoover. 

506. Measurement and Evaluation in Health 

and Physical Education (3).S;SS. 

A course on measurement, evaluation, statistics, analysis of methods, 
test selection, construction and administration. Hoover. 

507. Organization, Administration, and 

Supervision of Health and Physical Education (3).W;SS. 

Study and analysis of the organization, administration, and supervision 
of programs, trends, theories, and current practices. Hoover, Larson, 
Turner, Horine. 

508. Administration of Athletics (3).F;SS. 
Analysis and comparison of various methods of operating athletics 
in schools and universities: schedules, contracts, purchasing, storage, 
travel, insurance, training problems, officials, evaluation. Hoover, Horine, 
Larson. 

509. Seminar in Physical Education (3).S;SS. 
Lectures, discussions, case studies and summary of the fields of 
physical education for experienced teachers. A problems course. Horine, 
Meeks, Thomas, Turner, Gruensfelder. 

510. Athletic Facilities (3).S;SS. 
The planning, construction, budgeting, and maintenance of indoor 
and outdoor facilities for athletics, physical education and recreation. 
Turner, Horine. 

511. Conditioning of Athletes ( 3 ) .F;SS. 
Methods of training, conditioning and reconditioning. Larson, Thomas. 

512. Seminar in Dance and Rhythmics (3).W;SS. 
For students with background and experience in dance. E. Thomas. 



216 



DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 
AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION 



519. Public Recreation (3).F;SS. 
A problems course for those in the field of public recreation. DeGroat, 
Horine, Tomlinson, Gruensj elder. 

520. Comparative Health and 

Physical Education (3).F;SS. 

A study of present and past programs of health and physical educa- 
tion, of a comparison of various cities, states, countries, and systems. 
Analysis of current practices and projection of trends. Horine. 

521. Physical Education for the Retarded (3).W;SS. 
Current programs and discoveries on the use and contribution of physical 
activity for increasing the potential of the mentally retarded. Meeks. 

522. Seminar on School Health Programs (3).S;SS. 
A problems course for experienced teachers. Horine, Williams. 

548. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

For those capable of independent study and research in health, physical 
education or recreation. Staff. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;S;SS. 

Staff. 



DEPARTMENT OF HOME ECONOMICS ^jl / 
DEPARTMENT OF HOME ECONOMICS 

M. B. Allgood, Chairman, L. Hamilton, V. Irons, J. Lewis, M. Rhyne, 
C. Roten, J. Stines, V. Welborn, J. Whitener. 

The objectives of the Department of Home Economics are to 
help students become better citizens and members of society, have 
a workable knowledge of principles involved in home and family 
living, prepare for teaching some phases of home and family living 
at the secondary level, or to work in other areas of home economics, 
such as institutional administration, clothing and textiles merchan- 
dising, or foods and equipment. 

The Lucy Brock Nursery School is conducted as a laboratory for 
home economics majors and as a means of observation for students 
in courses in education and psychology. 

The Home Management House is operated each quarter and one 
quarter of residence is required of Home Economics Education 
majors and may be elected by those in Home Economics in Business 
if space is available. 

A minor in home economics consists of 24 quarter hours scheduled 
in conference with the department chairman. 

Courses in home economics where prerequisites are met are open 
to all students when space is available. 

A major in Home Economics Education leading to the Bachelor 
of Science degree and teacher certification requires 60 quarter hours 
in Home Economics: 101, 104, 105, 107, 201, 204, 206, 207, 300, 
301, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 401, 402, 405, 414, and 24 quarter 
hours of the following related courses: Art 104, Biology 207, 
Chemistry 111-112-113, Economics 200; with 33 quarter hours of 
professional courses: Education 304, 305, 407, 413, Psychology 

301, 302, 303. 

The major in Home Economics in Business leading to the 
Bachelor of Science degree has three options from which to choose: 

OPTION I — Institutional Administration requires 60 quarter 
hours in Home Economics: 101, 104, 105, 107, 201, 204, 300, 301, 

302, 303, 305, 307, 308, 309, 310, 311, 405, 409, 411, 412; the 
following science courses: Biology 207, 301, 308, Chemistry Hi- 
ll 2- 11 3, 201-202-203; and the following related courses: Business 
204, Economics 200, Psychology 302 and 470, 471 or 472. 



218 



DEPARTMENT OF HOME ECONOMICS 



This major is approved by the American Dietetic Association and 
upon graduation the student is qualified to do a one-year internship 
in an accredited hospital, thus becoming eligible for A.D.A. Mem- 
bership. 

OPTION II — Foods and Equipment requires 53 quarter hours in 
Home Economics: 101, 104, 105, 107, 201, 204, 300, 301, 302, 
303, 305, 306, 307, 404, 405, 407, 409, 411 and 39 quarter hours 
of the following related courses: Art 104, Biology 207, Chemistry 
111-112-113, Economics 201, 202, 203, Business 320, English 205 
and Speech 201. 

OPTION III — Clothing and Textiles Merchandising requires 59 
quarter hours in Home Economics: 101, 104, 105, 107, 201, 204, 
206, 207, 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 406, 408, 409, 
410 and 39 quarter hours in the following related areas: Art 104, 
200, Biology 207, Chemistry 1 1 1-1 12-113, Economics 201-202-203, 
Business 204, 321. 

A minor consisting of 24 credits in another area must be declared 
for each option after a conference with the chairman involved. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN HOME ECONOMICS 

101. Clothing and Design I (3).F;W;S. 

Fundamental theories and principles of garment design, selection and 
structure in relation to figure types and posture, including their applica- 
tion in construction and fit of apparel. Lecture one hour, laboratory four 
hours. 

102. Introduction to Clothing and Design ( 3 ).Arr by Chairman 
A study of clothing construction and design with emphasis on fabrics, 
patterns and fashions. Not open to Home Economics majors. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory four hours. 

104. Nutrition (3).F. 
A study of food and its relation to body use and needs. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 111-112-113. 

105. Food Selection and Preparation (3).F;W;S. 
The study and application of the scientific principles and techniques 
involved in the selection and preparation of foods. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory four hours. 

106. Meal Preparation (3).Arr by Chairman 
Family meal preparation for non-majors. Lecture one hour, laboratory 
four hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF HOME ECONOMICS 



219 



107. Personal Development Within the Family (3).F;W;S. 
Designed to help the young adult understand herself in relation to 
her own family of orientation, to master the developmental tasks of 
early adulthood with emphasis on mate selection and the early years 
of family development. 

108. Nutrition for Non-Majors (3).Arr by Chairman 
The elementary principles of nutrition and their practical application. 

201. Clothing and Design II (3).F;W;S. 

Theories and principles of garment selection and structure with emphasis 
on the study of new fabrics in relation to construction and design; and 
the introduction of dressmaker tailoring techniques. Prerequisite: Home 
Economics 101. Lecture one hour, laboratory four hours. 

204. Meal Management (3).W;S. 

Menu planning, preparing and serving of foods for family meals at 
different cost levels. Prerequisite: Home Economics 104 and 105. Lec- 
ture one hour, laboratory four hours. 

206. Clothing for the Family (3).F;S. 
A study of the social, economic, psychological, physiological and 
managerial aspects of clothing for the family. 

207. Home Furnishings (3).W;S. 
Planning furnishings for livable homes with emphasis on function, 
economy, beauty, and individuality. Lecture two hours, laboratory two 
hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S. 

300. Child Development (3).F;W;S. 
A study of the preschool child and his relationship to others. Lecture 
two hours, laboratory three hours in the Nursery School. 

301. Family Economics (3).W. 
A study of the management of human and material resources designed 
to develop competence as consumers of goods and services in a modern 
economic society. 

302. Professional Orientation (2).F. 
Individual needs with relation to securing and holding a position in 
the business areas of home economics. 

303. Housing (3).W;S. 
A study of community, economic, and practical problems involved in 
planning shelter for the family. 

304. Flat Pattern Design (3).F.W.S. 
Flat pattern drafting techniques. Developing the basic sloper for use 
in designing garments in relation to figure problems and current fashion 
trends. Prerequisites: Home Economics 101 and 201. Lecture two 
hours, laboratory four hours. 



220 



DEPARTMENT OF HOME ECONOMICS 



305. Later Family Development (3).F;W;S. 
Emphasis on self understanding through the study of family organiza- 
tion, roles, interactions and values as a unit in group living. Prerequisite: 
Home Economics 300. 

306. Textiles (3).F;W;S. 
A study of the manufacture, identification, selection, analysis, and care 
of fabrics. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours. Prerequisite: 
Chemistry 111-112-113. 

307. Household Equipment ( 3 ) .F. W. 
Selection, operation, care, and arrangement of equipment. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

308. Quantity Cookery (5).S. 
A study and practice in planning and preparing foods in institutional 
kitchens. Prerequisites: Home Economics 204 and Chemistry 201-202- 
203. Lecture three hours, laboratory six hours. 

309. Organization and Administration (3).F. 
Problems in personnel management. Prerequisite: Psychology 470, 471 
or 472. 

3 1 0. Food Production and Distribution ( 3 ) .W. 
Grading, storage, and purchasing of foods in large quantities. 

311. Institutional Equipment ( 2 ) . W. 
Selection, use and care of institutional equipment. Laboratory four 
hours. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S. 

400. House Planning and Design (3). On Demand 
Same as Industrial Arts 400. 

401. Home Management Principles (2).F;S. 
A study of the principles involved in the management of family re- 
sources. 

402. Home Management Residence (4).F;W;S. 
Experiences in managing family resources in a home situation. Fee 
equivalent to room and minimum meals in residence hall. Married 
student in own home — Fee $25.00. 

403. Tailoring (3).Arr by Chairman 
Evaluation and use of various tailoring methods as applied to fabric 
and design selection, fitting and completion of tailored garments. Pre- 
requisites: Home Economics 101 and 201 or approval of instructor. 
Lecture one hour, laboratory four hours. 

404. Advanced Foods (3).W. 
Aesthetics of food as related to family meals; economic considerations 
and the application of scientific principles in distinctive cuisine. Pre- 
requisite: Home Economics 204. Lecture one hour, laboratory four 
hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF HOME ECONOMICS 



221 



405. Advanced Nutrition (3).F;S. 
The scientific planning of adequate dietaries for normal individuals 
of different economic levels as related to health and efficiency. Pre- 
requisite: Home Economics 104. Lecture two hours, laboratory two 
hours. 

406. Consumer Textiles (3).W. 
Individual and group investigation and discussion of problems in fabric 
properties relative to serviceability. Prerequisite: Home Economics 306. 
Lecture one hour, laboratory four hours. 

407. Advanced Equipment (3).W. 
Group and individual experience relating to specific problems of house- 
hold equipment. Prerequisite: Home Economics 204 and 307. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

408. Draping (3).W. 
Selection, design and construction of clothing using the dress form. 
Prerequisite: Home Economics 304. Lecture two hours, laboratory four 
hours. Student must supply own form. 

409. Demonstration Techniques (3).F;W;S. 
The application of good demonstration techniques as a teaching device. 
Prerequisites: Home Economics 204, 307. Laboratory six hours. 

410. Appreciation of Clothing and Design (3).F. 
A study of the relationship of art and design principles in the selection 
of clothing. Prerequisite: Art 104 and Art 200. 

411. Experimental Cookery ( 3 ) .S. 
Testing theories of food preparation, judging of products and establish- 
ing standards. Prerequisite: Home Economics 204. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory four hours. 

412. Diet Therapy (3).S. 
Nutrition in the treatment of disease. Changes in metabolism and their 
relationship to dietary requirements and food intake. Prerequisite: 
Home Economics 405. 

414. Occupational Education (3).F;S. 

A survey and analysis of occupations related to home economics with 
emphasis on program planning and techniques of teaching. Prerequisites: 
Education 304 or 305 and Psychology 301 or 302. 

451. Teaching Family Development in the Secondary (3).SS. 

School 

Designed to aid the teacher in guiding students in self-understanding, 
preparation for marriage, and growth in knowledge of the developmental 
stages of family living. 

452. Fashion in the Teaching of Clothing (3).SS. 
Designed to aid the teacher in analyzing and improving the students, 
the subject matter, the class environment and herself by gearing the 
program to fashion. Emphasis on the improvement of taste and creating 
an awareness of good design and the current trends in clothing. 



222 



DEPARTMENT OF HOME ECONOMICS 



453. Innovations in Home Economics (3).SS. 
Exploring and executing current teaching techniques with emphasis on 
creativity and response. 

454. Cultural Foods (3).SS. 
Cultural aspects of food as related to family meals; economic con- 
siderations; application of scientific principles in distinctive cuisine. 
Individual problems. 

455. Special Projects (1-6) 
Designed for individual or group experiences in selected areas of Home 
Economics. On demand and with approval of the chairman. 

459. The Demonstration — A Teaching Tool (3).SS. 
The study and application of good techniques for the development of 
the demonstration as one teaching device. 

460. Nutrition in the Elementary School (3).Arr by Chairman 
A study of nutrition as it applies to the child and ways in which the 
elementary teacher can interest the child in proper diet. May be used 
for certificate renewal. 




DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS Zk£(j 

DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 

F. Steckel, Chairman, R. Banzhaf, W. Hanner, C. Owen, G. Ragan, 
D. Rigsby, J. Short, Jr., J. Sloop. 

The Department of Industrial Arts seeks to provide all students 
with a broad introduction to the seven basic areas of Industrial Arts 
and to develop a high degree of skill in the performance of the 
operations involved in these areas. The Department of Industrial 
Arts provides degrees for the Bachelor of Science and the Master 
of Science in teaching and non-teaching. 

A major in industrial arts leading to the Bachelor of Science 
degree without teacher certification consists of 60 quarter hours, 
the courses to be selected in conference with the student. 

A minor in industrial arts leading to the Bachelor of Science non- 
teaching degree consists of 24 quarter hours, the courses to be se- 
lected in conference with the student. 

A major in industrial arts leading to the Bachelor of Science 
degree and teacher certification consists of 69 quarter hours in- 
cluding 101-102; 201-202; six quarter hours from 204-205- 
206-207; 301-302; 305-306; 231-232; three quarter hours from 
401-402; 403; 471; nine quarter hours in advanced courses from 
each of at least two areas; one year of a physical science; mathe- 
matics 107; and six quarter hours of industrial arts electives. 

A major in industrial arts leading to the Master of Arts degree 
includes 512, 514, 517, 520, and electives in Industrial Arts to total 
36 quarter hours. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN INDUSTRIAL ARTS 

101. Industrial Graphics and Design ( 3 ) . F. 
Basic fundamentals of industrial graphics including geometry of graph- 
ical construction, projection systems, sections and conventions, sketching, 
pictorials, lettering, dimensioning and introductory graphical design. 
Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

102. Descriptive Geometry (3).W. 
Introduction to industrial design with emphasis on product development 
and team dynamics utilizing graphical methods and descriptive geometry. 
Spatial analysis of geometric elements, vectors, data analysis and 
graphical applications to a variety of industrial and engineering areas. 
Prerequisite: Industrial Arts 101. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 



224 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



103. Industrial Sketching and Reproduction (3).S. 

Practice in developing skills of rapid technical sketching as applied to 
industrial needs. Reproduction techniques with an introduction to the 
use of various media of technical illustration. Prerequisites: Industrial 
Arts 101 and 102. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

201. Introduction to Woods (3).F. 
Introduction to working with wood and care and use of basic wood- 
working tools and machines. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

202. Wood Technology (3).W. 
Jointing, shaping, finishing, and advanced machine woodwork and 
related technology. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

203. Advanced Wood Technology (3).S. 
Advanced woodworking with both hand and machine; project design 
and construction. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

204. Leather (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Basic processes and techniques involved in working with leather, with 
emphasis on design and skill. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

205. Ceramics (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Basic processes and techniques involved in working with ceramics 
with emphasis on design and skill. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

206. Art Metal (3).W. 
Basic processes and techniques involved in working with art metal 
with emphasis on design and skill. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

207. Jewelry (3).F;S. 
Basic processes and techniques involved in working with jewelry, 
with emphasis on design and skill. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

208. General Shop: Industrial Plastics (3).F. 
Basic processes and techniques involved in working with plastics. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

209. Technical Graphics (3).F. 
A comprehensive application of graphical techniques for the presentation 
of machine and structural working drawings. An introduction to spherical 
projection and topographical drafting. 

217. Introduction to Crafts (3(.F;S. 

An introduction to our craft heritage and the techniques for creative 
expression in ceramics, art metal, jewelry, leather, and other three 
dimensional media. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

231. Letterpress Printing (3).F. 

The sequential study of letterpress printing which includes hand 
composition, letter press make-ready and presswork; auxiliary areas 
are the study of type styles, paper technology, printing mathematics, 
and bookbinding. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



225 



232. Photo-Offset Lithography (3).W. 
The sequential study of photo-offset lithography which includes hot- 
type and cold-type composition, industrial photography, negative prepara- 
tion, direct and photographic plate manufacture and offset press opera- 
tion; auxiliary areas are electro-static printing, advanced studies in 
paper technology, and office reproduction techniques. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

233. Industrial Photo-Lithography (3).S. 
Advanced studies in cold-type composition (both photographic and 
mechanical) and offset press operation. A major emphasis in the area 
of industrial photography up to four color separation and printing; 
auxiliary areas are use of testing equipment for negatives, plates, 
and paper in the industrial scheme. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

301. Introduction to Metals (3).F. 
Introduction to and orientation in the metals field. Fundamental bench 
metal and hand tool operations. Equal time is spent in bench metal 
and machine metal. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

302. Metal Technology (3).W. 
The cutting, shaping, casting, and machining of ferrous and non- 
ferrous metals and related technology. Special emphasis is placed on 
foundry and wrought iron. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

303. Advanced Metal Technology (3).S. 
Advanced work in one of the areas in 301 or 302. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

304. Power Mechanics (3).F;S. 
The theory and practice of power involving internal combustion, power 
sources, solar fuel rocket concepts, fuel cell energy, solar cell energy, 
and thermoelectric generator energy. 

305. Electricity (3).F. 
Electrical and Electronic fundamentals involving basic concepts and 
D. C. circuits. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

306. Electricity Technology (3).W. 
An approach to the science of electricity. Lectures with classroom con- 
struction and experimentation on resistive, capacitive, inductive, and 
hybrid circuits. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

307. Electronics Technology (3).S. 
Fundamental principles and operation of semiconductor components 
with the vacuum tube used as a comparator. Taught through lecture, 
experimentation, demonstration, and product construction. Lecture one 
hour, laboratory five hours. 



226 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



308. Production Techniques, Wood (3).F. 

Jigs, fixtures, and related production techniques. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

310. Sheet Metal (3).W. 

Layout and fabrication of sheet metals. Lecture one hour, laboratory 
five hours. 

311. Production Techniques, Metals (3).S. 
Jigs, fixtures, and related production technique. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

312. Electronics, Advanced (3).F. 
Electronic control and regulation, including the thyratron, and solid state 
devices. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

313. Architectural Working Graphics (3).F. 
Construction details of various building types with emphasis on archi- 
tectural standards. Prerequisites: Industrial Arts 101 and 102. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

314. Architectural Design and Graphics (3).W. 
A study of the owner-architect relationship utilizing a contractual 
approach to the solution of problems in creative design and the 
preparation of plans for the construction of various building types. 
Prerequisite: Industrial Arts 313. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

316. Industrial Arts for Elementary School Teachers (3).F;W;S. 
An industrial arts and crafts course for elementary school teachers. 
Emphasis on manipulation experience and handwork adapted to the 
elementary school child. Not open to majors in industrial arts. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

324. Leather (3).F;W;S;SS. 
A continuation of 204. 

325. Ceramics (3).F;W;S;SS. 
A continuation of 205. 

326. Art Metal (3).F. 
A continuation of 206. 

327. Jewelry (3).F. 
A continuation of 207. 

331. Bookbinding (3).W. 
Methods of construction of standard types of books, pamphlets, and 
magazines. Emphasis is on common practices and materials. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

332. Silk Screen Printing (3).W. 
The construction of silk screen printing equipment and various methods 
and techniques of printing on different materials through various media. 
Emphasis is on industrial processes. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



227 



333. Production Techniques, Graphic Arts (3).S. 

Theory and application of different production techniques in letterpress 
printing and photo-offset lithography. The course will operate in the 
same manner as a commercial print shop. Lecture one hour, laboratory 
five hours. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

400. House Planning and Design (3). On demand. 
Architectural styles, planning, building materials as related to residential 
structures. Prerequisite: Industrial Arts 313. Lecture one hour, labora- 
tory five hours. 

401. Equipment and Maintenance, Wood (3).W. 
Operation and maintenance of woodworking machines and tools. Lecture 
one hour, laboratory five hours. 

402. Equipment and Maintenance, Metals (3).F. 
Operation and maintenance of metalworking machines and tools. 
Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

403. Organization and Equipment (3).W;S. 
Planning and equipping industrial arts laboratories; budgets, sources 
of equipment and supplies, requisition, storage. Lecture three hours. 

404. Welding (3). On demand. 
Arc and oxy-acetylene welding. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

452. Contemporary Industrial Finishing (3). On demand. 

The course consists of the care and maintenance of finishing equipment; 
the selection and use of spray equipment and the preparation of the 
surface to be finished; staining, filling, undercoating, top coating as well 
as rubbing out the final coat; application of simple and synthetic 
finishes. Each student should bring a small piece of furniture, such as 
an end table, coffee table, or small wood object for finish. Lecture one 
hour, laboratory five hours. 

454. Period Furniture (3). On demand. 
The study of furniture and its importance, design and periods. The 
student designs and constructs a piece of period furniture. Prerequisite: 
nine quarter hours of woodworking or its equivalent. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

455. Contemporary Furniture (3). On demand. 
The design and construction of classic contemporary furniture and the 
work of contemporary furniture designers, with emphasis on Scandin- 
avian design. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

456. Communications (3).SS. 
Elements of television, radio, telemetry, and associated communications 
phenomena. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

458. Crafts for the Handicapped (3).S;SS. 

Basic craft activities and occupational skills for the handicapped. 
Practical experiences in materials and methods. 



228 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



459. Graphical Analysis of Drafting Problems (3). On demand. 
Techniques of presenting data for the solution of scientific and technical 
problems through the use of graphic computations and the direct 
(and indirect) methods of descriptive geometry. Prerequisite: Industrial 
Arts 102. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

460. Industrial Design (3).S. 
Design as applied to the industrial product. Lecture one hour, laboratory 
five hours. 

461. Industrial Illustration (3). On demand. 
Practice with the various media used in technical illustrations for re- 
production and publication to acquaint the student with the steps 
in developing technical manuals, brochures, and similar industrial 
publications. Prerequisites: Industrial Arts 101, 102. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. 

462. Materials (3). On demand. 
The structure and characteristics of common industrial materials; 
laboratory work in the same area of stress-strain hardness testing 
and the heat treatment of metals. 

463. Care and Maintenance of Equipment (3).SS. 
The installation, care, and maintenance of power equipment and 
motors, including complete rebuilding, adjusting, and full utilization 
of the rebuilt machine. 

464. Problems in Leather Techniques (3).F;W;S;SS. 

An analysis of functional design and production methods of leather 
work. Individual projects designed to employ various technical and 
commercial methods of production. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

465. Problems in Ceramics Techniques (3).F;W;S;SS. 
An analysis of functional design and production methods of ceramics. 
Individual projects, designed to employ various technical and com- 
mercial methods of production. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

466. Problems in Art Metal Techniques (3).W. 
An analysis of functional design and production methods of art metal 
techniques. Individual projects designed to employ various technical 
and commercial methods of production. Lecture one hour, laboratory 
five hours. 

467. Problems in Jewelry Techniques (3).F;S. 
An analysis of functional design and production methods of jewelry. 
Individual projects designed to employ various technical and commercial 
methods of production. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

468. Transportation (3). On demand. 
Theory and application of internal combustion engines, turbines, and 
turbo jets to transportation. 

469. Machine Tool Operation (3). On demand. 
The cutting and shaping of metals using the common machine tools 
of the school of industry. 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



229 



470. Advanced Machine Tool Operation (3). On demand. 
Advanced laboratory practice in setting up and operation of standard 
and production type machine tools. Prerequisite: six hours of metal. 
Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

471. General Shop (3).F;W;S. 
The combining of the various unit shops into one physical setting. 
Development of course materials suitable for use in the types of general 
shops found in the public schools. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. 

475. Problems and Processes of Industrial Arts (1-3).F;W;S. 

Individual research on problems determined by the students needs. 

480. General Shop: Graphic Arts (3). On demand. 
An analysis of techniques and laboratory practice in all areas of 
Graphic Arts. Areas include photo-offset lithography, letterpress print- 
ing, silk screen printing, block printing, and bookbinding. Lecture one 
hour, laboratory five hours. 

481. Advanced Offset Lithography (3). On demand. 
Advanced laboratory practice in composition, industrial photography, 
plate manufacturing techniques, and offset press set-up and operation. 
Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

482. Advanced Letterpress Printing (3). On demand. 
Advanced laboratory practice in composition, make-ready, presswork, 
and finishing techniques, including special operations on the platen 
press and related technology. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 

483. Office Reproduction Techniques (3). On demand. 
The study of the various methods modern businesses use to reproduce 
printed or duplicated copy. The course includes secretarial practices 
of cold type composition, offset lithography, electro-static printing and 
auxiliary operations. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

504. Machine Design and Construction (3). On demand. 
The elements of machine design including the construction of a powered 
machine. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Ragan. 

505. Industrial Tools and Processes (3). On demand. 
A survey of the basic materials, elements, and machines of industry 
to develop an understanding of industrial nomenclature, methods, and 
processes. Lecture, demonstration, and field trips. Prerequisite: six 
hours of metal. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Ragan. 

506. Electronics Component and Systems (3). On demand. 
A laboratory course largely devoted to the construction of electronic 
gear. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Sloop. 

507. Industrial Electronics (3). On demand. 
This course covers, through lecture, demonstration and experiments, 
control devices such as thyratrons, relays, timing devices, synchros, and 
motor controls. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Sloop. 



230 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



508. Digital Computer Circuits (3).SS. 
Through experimentation and demonstration, this course offers realistic 
practice with digital logic circuits; the application of digital computers 
in business; the arithmetic unit, memory elements, input-output devices, 
and the control element. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Sloop. 

509. Transistor Workshop (3).SS. 
An intensive course devoted to the application of transistors and in- 
volving techniques of testing in regard to DC parameters and inter- 
pretation of transistor manufacturer's data sheets. Lecture one hour, 
laboratory five hours. Steckel. 

510. Industrial Arts for Elementary School Teachers (3).SS. 
Development of basic skills through elementary work in woods, metals, 
and other materials easy to obtain. Adaptation of work to classroom 
situations. Planning for creative work with limited equipment. Not 
open to majors in industrial arts. Lecture one hour, laboratory five 
hours. Sloop. 

512. Philosophy of Industrial Arts Education (3).F;SS. 
The philosophy of industrial education from its beginning in manual 
training through contemporary programs in industrial arts and voca- 
tional education. Steckel. 

513. Industrial Arts Curriculum Development (3). On demand. 
Planning and development of course content for the major areas of 
industrial areas, incorporating the prevailing philosophy and objectives 
of school systems. Steckel. 

514. Design and Equipping of Industrial Arts Facilities (3).W;SS. 
Factors of school shop planning, equipment selection, layout and 
arrangement, and architectural considerations. Steckel. 

517. Design Method and Techniques 

for Industrial Arts Laboratories (3).S;SS. 

The role of the project as a vehicle for learning. Preparation of 
instructional materials, record keeping, budget construction, and requisi- 
tioning of supplies. Steckel. 

520. Skill Development in Major Areas (3-6). On demand. 
Individual or group work in area competence. Technique and process 
in the craftsmanship of the transformation of materials. Prerequisite: 
Must have been admitted to candidacy. Staff. 

521. Woodworking Jigs and Fixtures (3). On demand. 
The design and construction of jigs and fixtures for machines commonly 
found in industrial education shops. The use of common school shop 
machines for production by adapting them with jigs and fixtures and 
special cutters. Prerequisite: one wood and one metal class for Appa- 
lachian. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Rigsby. 

522. Specialty Woodworking (3). On demand. 
Wood carving on flat, turned, and curved surfaces. Inlaying with 
synthetic and natural woods. Veneering flat and curved surfaces. 



DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARTS 



231 



Laminating with wood and veneer both flat and curved. Design of 
projects using the above. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. 
Rigs by. 

526. Advanced Ceramics (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Individual problems in the advanced phases of ceramics design, produc- 
tion, and finishes. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Owens. 

527. Advanced Jewelry (3).F;S. 
Individual problems in the advanced phases of jewelry design, pro- 
duction, and finishes. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Owens. 

528. Advanced Leather (3).F;W;S;SS. 
Individual problems in the advanced phases of leather design, pro- 
duction, and finishes. Lecture one hour, laboratory five hours. Owens. 

530. Special Problems in Industrial Education (1-3).F;W;S. 
Individual research. Areas to be determined by need, background, 
and interest. Prerequisite: Must have been admitted to candidacy. 
Staff. 

531. Photo-Offset Lithography (3). On demand. 
Individual problems in the advanced phases of industrial photography, 
film and lithographic plate preparation, cold type composition, and 
offset press techniques. Banzhaf. 

533. Letterpress Printing (3). On demand. 

Individual problems in the advanced phases of hot type composition, 
make-ready, die-cutting, finishing and letter-press techniques. Banzhaf. 

536. Problems in Bookbinding (3). On demand. 
Individual problems in the advanced phases of binding loose pages 
pamphlets, magazines, and miscellaneous printed materials, with 
special emphasis on finishing and cover materials. Banzhaf. 

537. Silk Screen Printing (3). On demand. 
Individual problems in the advanced phases of silk screening multi- 
color on various media using the techniques of hand-cut, photo, and 
acid etching processes. Banzhaf. 



232 



DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 
DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 

J. G. Collins LTC, Chairman, J. E. Arnold MAJ, J. W. Beaver CPT, 
R. B. Parrott CPT. 

The Army ROTC program has been developed to give college men 
training and experience in the art of organizing, motivating, and 
leading others. It includes instruction to develop self-discipline, 
physical stamina, and bearing — qualities that are an important part 
of leadership and that contribute to success in any career. 

The first two years of military training in the Reserve Officers 
Training Corps are elective for all United States citizen male students 
who pass Corps entrance requirements. These two years comprise 
the basic course, which is normally completed during the freshman 
and sophomore years. A student may attend a basic summer camp 
of six weeks duration following his sophomore year in lieu of attend- 
ing the Basic Course. 

During the junior and senior years, an advanced course is offered 
on a voluntary basis to those cadets meeting the necessary qualifica- 
tions. Upon successful completion of the advanced course, which 
includes a six-weeks period of ROTC Summer Camp, each cadet 
is commissioned as a Second Lieutenant in a component of the 
United States Army. Outstanding students designated as distinguished 
military students may be selected for direct appointment as regular 
Army officers. 

A minor consists of 24 quarter hours in Military Science including 
301, 302, 303, 350, 401, 402, and student teaching or three quarter 
hours from 300 or 400 level courses in political science, psychology, 
or sociology. 

Two, three, and four-year scholarships are offered by the Depart- 
ment of the Army. Further details are listed in the Financial Aid 
portion of this catalogue. 

BASIC COURSE REQUIREMENTS 

A candidate for ROTC training must: 

a. Be of good moral character. 

b. Be a citizen of the United States. 

c. Be between 17-24 years of age. 

d. Be physically able to participate in the program of instruction. 



DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 



233 



e. Be enrolled as a freshman at this institution. 

f. Meet other entrance requirements as determined by the de- 
partment chairman, current Army regulations, and University 
policies. 

A student who does not meet all of the above requirements should 
consult with the Department of Military Science to determine if 
waivers can be granted. 

A waiver of attendance of MS I, MS II, and/or MS III may be 
granted for previous ROTC training or military service and upon 
application in accordance with the following: 

a. Active Military Service or Attendance at Services Academies 

(One Year Waiver of MS I and MS II) 

(Additional Training As determined 

by the PMS but not to exceed MS III) 

b. Junior Division ROTC Training 

Two Years Waiver of MS I 

Three Years Waiver of MS I & MS II 

c. All Senior Division ROTC (Air Force, Army, and Navy) is 
equated on a year for year basis. 

d. Students with combinations of the above or with National 
Defense Cadet Corps training should consult with the depart- 
ment chairman to determine individual eligibility for waivers. 

TEXTS AND UNIFORMS 

Basic Course students do not receive monetary allowances. Texts 
and uniforms are furnished by the government. Students will be 
required to reimburse the government for loss of items of the uni- 
forms or other equipment. 

ADVANCED COURSE REQUIREMENTS 

A candidate must: 

1. Meet requirements for the Basic Course. 

2. Meet medical requirements for Advanced Course. 

3. Possess qualifications for becoming an effective army officer. 

4. Achieve a passing score on ROTC Qualifying examination. 

5. Have a minimum of two years remaining at the University. 



234 



DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 



6. Have satisfactorily completed the Basic Course, received a 
waiver in lieu thereof, or have satisfactorily completed the 
basic summer camp. 

7. Have satisfactorily completed loyalty requirements, 

8. Agree to enlist in the United States Army Reserve, accept a 
commission if offered, and serve two years on active duty if 
required. 

9. Meet other requirements as determined by the department 
chairman, current Army regulations, and University policies. 

A student who does not meet all of the above requirements should 
consult with the Department of Military Science to determine whether 
waivers can be granted. 



TEXT AND ALLOWANCES 

Each cadet enrolled in the Advanced Course receives subsistence 
pay at the rate of $50.00 per month. In addition, he receives uniforms 
valued at $100.00, which become his property upon successful com- 
pletion of the Advanced Course. He is paid six cents per mile travel 
expense to and from summer camp. While at camp, he is paid at 
the rate of $208.80 per month. The pay and allowances received 
while one is in the Advanced Course totals approximately $1,300.00. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN MILITARY SCIENCE 

101-102. Military Science I, Basic Course (2-0-2 ).F-W-S.* 

Basic military subjects with emphasis on U. S. Army and ROTC 
organization, individual weapons and marksmanship training, U. S. 
defense establishment, evolution of weapons, principles of war, and 
objectives of national security and defense. 

Lecture two hours. Laboratory two hours. *Laboratory for MS 102 is 
conducted during the spring quarter. Credit for MS 102 is given with 
successful completion of spring laboratory requirement. 

201-202-203. Military Science II, Basic Course ( 2-2-2 ).F-W-S. 
Use of maps and aerial photographs, American military history, and an 
introduction to small unit operations and tactics. Prerequisite: MS 101, 
102 and Mathematics 101 (or equivalent) or permission of department 
chairman. Lecture two hours, laboratory two hours except in winter 
quarter. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S. 



DEPARTMENT OF MILITARY SCIENCE 



235 



301-302-303. Military Science III, Advanced ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

Course 

Leadership, military teaching principles, branches of the Army, small 
unit tactics, communications, and pre-camp orientation. Prerequisite: 
Successful completion of MS I, MS II, selection by department. Lecture 
three hours, laboratory two hours except in winter quarter. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S. 

350. ROTC Summer Camp Advanced Course (9).SS. 

Normally taken summer following junior year. Training conducted at 
designated U. S. Army installation. This training provides cadets with 
practical experience in leadership, military teaching, small unit tactics, 
weapon qualifications, and communications. To receive credit, a student 
must register and pay a fee at the University. Prerequisite: Successful 
completion of MS III. 

401-402. Military Science IV, Advanced Course (3-3).F-S. 

Characteristics, attributes, and techniques of commissioned officers. 
Fourth-year cadets normally serve as officers in cadet brigade. A study 
of operations, logistics, army administration, military law, role of U. S. 
in world affairs, service customs, and officer orientations. Prerequisite: 
MS 301, 302, 303. Lecture three hours. Laboratory two hours. 



236 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 

W. Spencer, Chairman, W. Cole, J. Dellinger, M. Disbrow, N. Erneston, 
E. Fox, C. Isley, A. Justice, J. Logan, W. Mears, W. Newton, P. Paul, 
S. Robertson, K. Rogers, W. Safrit, E. Schweiger, A. Smetona, H. Smith, 
J. Tallant, E. White. 

The Department of Music is a member of the National Associa- 
tion of Schools of Music. The requirements set forth in this catalogue 
are in accordance with the published regulations of the National 
Association of Schools of Music. 

The objectives of the Department of Music are to provide: 
the best possible preparation of performers in different areas of 
music; teachers of music for the public schools and institutions 
of higher learning; training for the classroom teacher in the organiz- 
ing and conducting of a well-balanced music program; music 
experiences and activities in which the music major as well as 
the general student can increase his skills, knowledge, and apprecia- 
tion of music to contribute to the cultural tone of the University and 
community through the presentation of a variety of public programs 
and concerts. 

ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS AND PLACEMENT EXAMINATIONS 
FOR FRESHMEN 

1. Applied Music: An audition is required of all entering freshmen 
and transfer students. 

The entrance requirements in the major performance medium 
are as follows: 

VOICE: An acceptable voice and the ability to sing with accu- 
rate pitch and rhythm. 

PIANO: The ability to perform major and minor scales and 
arpeggios, and compositions of the difficulty of Bach, 
Two-Part Inventions; Beethoven, Sonata Op. 49; 
Chopin, Mazurka, Op. 33, No. 3. 

INSTRUMENTS: A fundamental knowledge of the instrument 
including an acceptable method of producing 
tone; awareness of intonation problems; accu- 
rate rythmic feeling; some contact with solo 
literature available for the instrument; the 
ability to play major, minor, and chromatic 
scales with the proper fingering. 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



237 



Those who do not meet freshman standing must enroll in 013- 
014-015 until entrance requirements can be met. 

2. Theory: Freshmen and transfer students who plan to major in 
music take a placement examination to determine their general 
musical knowledge. Those who do not meet freshmen standing 
must enroll in Music 100. For specific information write the 
department chairman. 

ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS AND PLACEMENT EXAMINATIONS 
FOR GRADUATE STUDENTS 

All entering graduate music majors will demonstrate by examina- 
tion their skills and abilities in music theory, music history and 
literature, performance major and music education where it applies. 
Any deficiency noted may require courses or individual study in the 
area of the deficiency prior to admission to candidacy for the 
degree. 

DEGREE PROGRAMS 

The music department offers programs under the Bachelor of 
Arts degree, the Bachelor of Music degree and the Master of Arts 
degree. 

A major in music leading to the Bachelor of Arts degree consists 
of 60 quarter hours above general education requirements (Music 
217, 304-305-306), including 101-102-103, 180, 201-202-203, 402, 
405, 12 quarter hours of applied music, 12 quarter hours of en- 
sembles, and nine quarter hours of music electives. 

A minor in music consists of 24 quarter hours above general 
education requirements, the courses to be selected in conference 
with the student. 

The music department offers a professional Bachelor of Music 
degree which offers a flexible curriculum that can be tailored to fit 
the needs of the individual student. Courses are available so that 
a student may prepare himself to pursue a career in several areas 
of the music profession or to prepare for graduate study. (The 
music education program leads to teacher certification.) 

The student will select courses in consultation with an adviser 
who will seek to guide the student in choosing courses which will 
best serve his professional aspirations. 



238 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



Basic requirements for the degree are: 

General Education 55-64 q.h. 

Professional Education 38 q.h. 

(Music Education Program only) 

Applied Music 40-60 q.h. 

At least 24 quarter hours must be earned in one performing 
concentration. At least 12 quarter hours must be earned in 
ensemble. 

Music Theory, Music History and Literature 50-65 q.h. 

The student must complete 21 quarter hours in lower division 
theory, three quarter hours in music literature, nine quarter 
hours in music history, six quarter hours in upper division 
theory, and at least two quarter hours in basic conducting. 

A student must earn a total of at least 183 quarter hours, 110 
of which must be completed in the music department (83-84 quarter 
hours for music education majors). 

Recommended courses of study for students desiring to pursue 
music education, a performance career in piano, organ, voice, one 
of the band or orchestral instruments, or other areas in the music 
profession will be supplied by the chairman of the music department. 

A major in music leading to the Master of Arts degree consists 
of 33 to 39 quarter hours, including 500, 522, 531. The graduate 
student must demonstrate proficiency or take courses in music 
history and literature, theory, applied music, conducting, and music 
education. 



PROFICIENCY IN MAJOR (PRINCIPAL) PERFORMING MEDIUM 

During the senior year a music major will demonstrate satis- 
factory proficiency in his major (principal) performing medium: 
piano, voice, violin, clarinet, or other band or orchestral instrument. 
This may be done in one of three ways: 1. An individual recital; 
2. A group recital with no more than three participants; 3. A 
comprehensive examination which includes the major instrument, 
theory, and other class work in music which the student has covered 
during the four years. 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



239 



All music majors are required to attend a weekly performance 
seminar and each major is required to perform on the seminar at 
least twice during the academic year. At the discretion of the in- 
structor freshmen may be excused from performing. 

COMPREHENSIVE EVALUATION OF MUSICIANSHIP 

Before a music major may be accepted for upper division work 
in music he shall demonstrate satisfactory attainment in musicianship 
by examinations given by appropriate members of the music faculty. 
Failure to pass the examinations will necessitate a re-evaluation by 
the entire music faculty before the student can be accepted uncon- 
ditionally. 

RECITALS AND CONCERTS 

Student recitals are held each quarter to provide students with 
experience and poise in public performance. Seniors and other 
advanced students present individual or joint recitals to fulfill 
requirements for graduation. Frequent concerts are given by faculty 
members, various musical organization, and visiting artists. 

It is desirable that music majors, undergraduate and graduate, 
attend all concerts and recitals sponsored by the music department. 

APPLIED MUSIC 

Individual music instruction is offered in piano, organ, voice, 
and all orchestral and band instruments. Courses in applied music 
are required of all music majors and may be elected for general 
college credit by students not majoring in music. 

Piano. The piano major or principal should develop the ability to 
sight read, play accompaniments in a musical manner and perform 
representative works from all periods of music, from the pre-Bach 
to the present. 

Voice. The voice major or principal should be able to sing on pitch 
and show musical aptitude. Study will include good posture, relax- 
ation, diaphragmatic breathing, good diction and vocal exercises, 
and appropriate songs adapted to the student's needs. 

Organ. Piano facility which satisfies the instructor is a prerequisite 
for study in organ. The study includes pedal scales, hymn playing, 



240 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



appropriate selections from the works of Bach, Mendelssohn, 
Franck, and Widor, as well as contemporary European and Ameri- 
can compositions. 

Brass and Woodwind Instruments. This study emphasizes proper 
breath control, embouchure, and position, as well as good tone 
production and intonation. Materials and literature will be chosen 
on the basis of the student's ability and progress. 

String Instruments. The purpose of string instruction is to promote 
in the student the basic techniques of good intonation, clarity and 
refinement of fingering and bowing styles, and the development of 
tonal beauty. Emphasis is placed upon the importance of phrasing 
and interpretation. 

Percussion Instruments. The student expecting to major in this 
area should have a background of the basic rudiments in snare 
drum and sufficient experience and preparation of the other per- 
cussion instruments to play a standard band composition. The first 
year of study emphasizes the snare drum and the twenty-six rudi- 
ments along with suitable solo literature. The remainder of the time 
is devoted to the tympani and other traps and equipment, with the 
main emphasis placed upon the marimba. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN MUSIC 

Applied Music (Secondary) 

010-011-012; 110-111-112; 210-211-212; 

310-311-312; 410-411-412. ( 1-1-1 ).F-W-S-SS. 

One 30-minute individual lesson and six practice hours a week. 

010-011-012 is designed for students below the freshman level and 

carries general college credit but no credit toward the music major. 

Each course offered every quarter. 

Applied Music (Major-Principal) 

013-014-015; 113-114-115; 213-214-215; 

313-314-315; 413-414-415. (2-4).F-W-S-SS. 

Two 30-minute individual lessons and six practice hours per week 
for each quarter hour credit. 013-014-015 is designed for students 
below the freshman level and carries general college credit but no 
credit toward the music major. 

100. Elements of Music Theory (3).F. 

100 is designed for students below the freshman level and carries 
general college credit but no credit toward the music major or ele- 
mentary concentration in music. Lecture and demonstration five hours. 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



241 



101-102-103. Basic Musicianship (3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A course in the fundamentals of music integrating the basic materials 
and skills. Chord progression, altered chords, seventh chords, cadences, 
non-harmonic tones, modulation, and secondary chord are approached 
through integrated avenues of writing, performing and creating. Lecture 
and demonstration five hours. 

121-122-123. String Class ( 1-1-1 ).F-W-S. 

A presentation of the fundamental principles involved in playing and 
teaching stringed orchestral instruments. Lecture and demonstration 
two hours. 

125. Woodwind Class I (1).W. 

Group instruction in the fundamental principles of woodwind technique. 
Laboratory two hours. 

126-127. Woodwind Class II (1-1). S-F. 

A presentation of the fundamental principles involved in playing and 
teaching each woodwind instrument. Prerequisite: Music 125 or equiva- 
lent. Lecture and demonstration two hours. 

128-129-130. Voice Class ( 1-1-1 ).F-W-S. 

A presentation of the fundamentals of singing for teaching and per- 
formance. Lecture and demonstration two hours. 

131. Brass Class (1).W. 
Group instruction in the fundamental principles of trumphet technique. 
Laboratory two hours. 

132. Percussion Class (1).F. 
Group instruction in the fundamental principles of performance on the 
standard percussion instruments. Laboratory two hours. 

133. Brass and Percussion (1).S. 
A presentation of the fundamental principles involved in playing and 
teaching each brass and percussion instrument. Prerequisites: 131 and 
132 or equivalent. Lecture and demonstration two hours. 

134-135-136. Piano Class (1-1-1 ).F-W-S. 

Group instruction in the fundamental principles of piano technique. 

201-202-203. Creative Musicianship (4-4-4). F-W-S. 

These courses are designed to involve the student in the analysis, com- 
prehension, creation, and the performance of music in all styles through 
a fusing of all the elements of music. Demonstration and laboratory six 
hours. Prerequisites: Music 101-102-103. 

204. Liturgies (3).S. 

A study of the history of worship in the Jewish, Eastern Orthodox, 
Roman Catholic, and Protestant traditions. Emphasis will be placed 
on the structure and form of worship with some creative opportunities 
in new forms. 



242 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



217. Introduction to Music (3).F;W;S;SS. 

A non-technical course designed for students with little or no musical 
background. Emphasis is placed upon listening to music and finding 
pleasure in it. 

228-229-230. Advanced Voice Class ( 1-1-1 ).F-W-S. 

A continuation of beginning voice class, including appropriate vocal 
literature adapted to the student's individual needs and progress. 
Prerequisite: Music 128-129-130. Lecture and demontration, two hours. 

248. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

301-302-303. Music for Classroom Teachers ( 2-2-2 ).F-W-S;SS. 
These courses are designed to increase the musicianship of the prospective 
elementary teacher and to develop an adequacy in music teaching 
methods. Performance examinations will be given on all phases of 
work where required. Lecture and demonstration three hours. 301 is 
prerequisite for 302 and 303. 

304-305-306. Music History ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

A comprehensive study tracing the evolution of music as an art. 
Emphasis is placed upon the parallel development of the various arts 
in their relation to music against the cultural background of history 
with suggestion for social and political understanding. 

309. Piano Pedagogy (3). On Demand 

The teaching of piano with a study of various approaches in private 
and class methods; problems of setting up and operating a studio. 

316. Conducting (2).F. 

A study of the fundamentals and techniques of conducting. Lecture 
and demonstrating three hours. 

317-318. Conducting Practicum (l-l).W-S. 

Supervised conducting experience of choral and /or instrumental en- 
sembles. 

319. Oratorio Literature (2).W. 
A study of selected oratorio scores from the Baroque era through the 
contemporary literature. Attention will be given to correct style and 
to practical performance problems. 

320. History of Church Music (3).S. 
A study of the musical forms used in the history of worship and the 
historical relationship of music to theology. 

321. Hymnody (2).W. 
A study of the hymn as it is used in the Church's worship. An exami- 
nation of the theology of the hymn texts as well as criteria for good 
hymn tunes will be presented. 

322. Organ Literature and Service Playing (3).F. 
A survey of the main stream of organ literature. Laboratory experience 
in playing for services of worship, including chant accompaniment, 
hymn playing, anthem accompaniment, and simple improvisation. 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC ^4o 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

391-392-393. Honors Independent Study in Music ( 3-3-3 ).F-W-S. 

402. Elementary Counterpoint (3).W. 
A course in elementary counterpoint approached through writing, 
discussion, and analysis of species counterpoint. Lecture and demon- 
stration four hours. 

403. Choral Arranging (2).W. 
The technique of arranging for school choral groups including the 
problems of voice range, quality, flexibility, stamina, and tessitura. 
Lecture and laboratory three hours. 

404. Instrumental Arranging (2).S. 
A study of the instruments of the band and orchestra in regard to 
range, tone quality, and appropriate use in instrumental ensembles, 
including practice in arranging. Lecture and laboratory three hours. 

405. Form and Analysis (3).S. 
A study of various forms of composition including forms, dance forms, 
rondo and sonata forms. Lecture and demonstration four hours. Pre- 
requisites: Music 101-102-103, 201-202-203, 402. 

406. Fundamentals of Composition (3). On Demand 
A course in composition designed to provide writing experience in the 
important musical forms. Prerequisite: 402, 405 or permission of the 
instructor. 

407. Instrumental Solo Literature (3). On Demand 
A comprehensive study of the basic literature, including the aspects of 
style, idioms and technical requirements. 

408. Vocal Solo Literature (3). On Demand 
A survey of solo literature with special attention given to the inter- 
relation of poetic text, vocal line and instrumental part. Emphasis 
will be placed on the stylistic and technical demands of the music as 
well as on musical accuracy. 

416. Senior Recital (0,1 or 2).F;W;S. 
One hour credit for half-recital. Two hours credit for full recital. 
Performance majors may sign up for credit only. 

417. Instrumental Pedagogy (3). On Demand 
Focus on the application of effective pedagogy in the applied area. 
Includes survey of research in teaching, observing, and practicum with 
private students. 

418. Vocal Pedagogy (3). On Demand 
A study of the teaching of the fundamentals of voice production and 
materials and its presentation to individuals and groups. Observation 
and practicum with students. 



244 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



419. Organization and Philosophy of Church Music (3).W. 
Organizational principles of a comprehensive church music program. 
A brief study of the philosophy of the art form of music and how it 
relates to theological concepts will be presented. 

420. Church Music Methods and Materials (2).F. 
A discussion of the methods of conducting the various musical activi- 
ties in the church and a survey of the materials to be used. 

421-422-423. Church Music Field Work ( 1-1-1 ).F-W-S. 

The student will be responsible for all or part of a music program in 
an organized local church. Periodic visits to the church will be made 
by the professor, who will attend rehearsals or services and evaluate 
the student's work. Private or group conferences will be held with the 
professor, who will give guidance to the student. 

424-425-426. Supervised Piano Teaching (2-2-2). On Demand 

Supervised individual instruction under the direction of one of the 
piano faculty for three quarters. One hour seminar and two hours 
practicum. Required for Piano Pedagogy Majors. Prerequisite: Music 
309. 

428. (Humanities) Music, Art, and Ideas I (3).F,W. 
A survey course of an interdisciplinary nature dealing with the his- 
torical religious, philosophical, sociological, and scientific aspects of 
the fine arts. The purpose of this course is to serve as a capstone or a 
drawing together of the many single threads which tend to constitute 
liberal education — to give meaning and direction to one's search for 
personal freedom. Students would be expected to make use of a wide 
variety of library materials, and to pursue topics of special interest on 
an individual or group basis. From the Culture of Ancient Greece 
through the Middle Ages. 

429. (Humanities) Music, Art, and Ideas II (3).W,S. 
A continuation of Humanities 428. From the Renaissance to the present. 

451. Choral Literature (3).S;SS. 
A study of choral literature for mixed chorus, girls' glee club, boys' 
glee club, small ensembles, and church choirs. 

452. Piano Literature (3).W or S;SS. 
The study of the literature for piano from the pre-Bach to the present 
day through performance, analysis, and recordings. 

453. Concert Band Literature (3). On demand ;SS. 
A study of the development of the Wind Band and its literature. 
Significant original compositions and transcriptions with emphasis on 
20th Century works. 

454. Problems in Elementary School Music (3).S;SS. 
Music teaching in the primary and grammar grades; research and 
demonstrations of methods of teaching elementary school children. 

455. Instrument Repair and Adjustment (3).S;SS. 
The repair and care of string, wind, and percussion instruments. 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



245 






456. Opera Literature (3).SS.(On demand) 
Operatic development and literature from the Baroque period to the 
present day. Representative works will be studied visually and aurally. 
Attendance at live performances required. 

457. Chamber Music Literature (3).SS.(On demand) 
Instrumental ensemble music from the early 18th Century to the present, 
with special emphasis on the development of the string quartet as 
a musical form. 

458. Symphonic Literature (3). On demand ;SS. 
A comprehensive study of the development of the symphony from the 
Mannheim school to the present through analysis of a selected works. 

460. Band Pageantry (3).W;SS. 
A study of the fundamentals of marching, precision drilling, formations, 
and maneuvering; the .planning of football shows and parades. 

461. Piano Workshop (3).SS. 

462. Instrumental Workshop (3).SS. 

469. Music Education Workshop (3).SS. 

An intensive course in modern methods of music education for superin- 
tendents, principals, supervisors, music teachers, classroom teachers, 
and physical education teachers. 

491. Honors Project in Music (3).F;W;S. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Bibliography and Research (3).F;SS. 
A study of bibliographical problems, types of research, and organization 
and reporting of research. Required in the first quarter of all beginning 
graduate music students. Logan. 

501. Survey of Music to 1600 (3).F;SS. 
A study of the development of music from that of the ancient Greeks 
through that of the Renaissance. Erneston. 

502. Music of the Baroque Era (3).W;SS. 
A comprehensive study of the music of western civilization during 
the Baroque Era, from the Camerata through Bach and Handel. 
Erneston. 

503. Music of the Classic and Romantic Periods (3).S;SS. 
A comprehensive study of the music of western civilization during 
the Classic and Romantic periods, from the Mannheim school through 
Wagner. Erneston. Alternate years. 

504. Music of the Twentieth Century (3).S;SS. 
A comprehensive study of contemporary music from Impressionism 
and Realism to the present day. Erneston. Alternate years. 



246 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



505. Advanced Conducting (3).W;SS. 
Emphasis upon the critical examination of both choral and instrumental 
scores, with development of conducting skills necessary in securing 
the desired effects. Spencer. 

506. Analytical Technique I (3).F;SS. 
A comprehensive review of theory and the development of techniques 
for analysis of music from the Baroque to Mozart through counter- 
point, melodic structure, harmony and form. Five hours per week. 
Disbrow. 

507. Analytical Technique II (3).SS. (On demand) 
A continuation of Music 506 from Beethoven to early contemporary. 
Five hours per week. Disbrow. 

510-511-512. Applied Music ( 1-1-1 ).F-W-S;SS. 

One 30-minute individual lesson and six practice hours a week. Before 
being admitted to graduate standing in applied music, the student 
must demonstrate a graduate level of performance before a music 
faculty committee. Staff. 

513-514-515. Applied Music (2-2-2). F-W-S;SS. 

Two 30-minute individual lessons and twelve practice hours a week. 
Before being admitted to graduate standing in applied music, the 
student must demonstrate a graduate level of performance before a 
music faculty committee. Staff. 

516. Music Activities in the Elementary School (3).F;SS. 
Designed for the classroom teacher and covering a five-point program 
for children; singing, playing, creating, listening, and rhythmic activities. 
Fox, Mears, Justice. 

517. Music in Secondary Schools (3).SS. 
A study of the function and role of general music in modern secondary 
schools, including music curriculum problems, instructional materials, 
and methods. Mears, Fox. 

518. American Music (3).SS. 
The development of American music from the Puritan psalm singers to 
contemporary jazz with particular attention given to those musical 
concepts and practices which are distinctly American. Logan. 

519. String Pedagogy (3).SS. 
Fundamental principles in playing and teaching orchestral stringed 
instruments. Designed for the graduate student who has had little or 
no training in strings but who wishes to prepare himself for beginning 
string work. Erneston. 

520. Woodwind Pedagogy (3).SS. 
Survey of techniques, practices and materials for teaching the woodwind 
instruments. Spencer. 

521. Brass Pedagogy (3).SS. 
Survey of techniques, practices and materials for teaching the brass 
instruments. Isley. 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



247 



522. Graduate Ensemble (0).F;S;SS. 

Participation in one of the instrumental or choral ensembles. Staff. 

531. Seminar in Music (3).F;SS. 

A review of the philosophy and practice in music education; reading 
of current studies, articles, books. Logan, Spencer. 

548. Independent Study. Staff. (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis. Staff. (6).F;W;S;SS. 

MUSIC PERFORMING GROUPS 

A major in music must participate in instrumental and/or choral 
organization for a minimum of eleven quarters. He may participate 
in more than one ensemble each quarter but may not receive 
more than eleven elective quarter hours toward graduation for 
participating in ensembles. 

170. Marching Band (1).F. 
The marching band functions in cooperation with the Athletic Program 
during the football season. It appears in pep rallies, all home games, 
parades and several out-of-town games. Membership is open to all 
students who play band instruments. The band customarily meets for 
one week prior to the beginning of the fall term. All students interested 
in performing should contact the director for information concerning 
the early fall practice. Majorette try-outs are held in the spring prior 
to the fall term. Instruments and uniforms are furnished free of charge. 
Rehearsal five hours. 

171. Concert Band— Wind Ensemble ( 1 ) . W;S. 
The Concert Band forms an integral part of university life and is a 
campus-wide organization. Membership is open to all students who 
play band instruments. The band is a valuable laboratory for instruction 
in wind instruments. A wind ensemble is formed of select musicians 
by audition and rehearses separately. Concerts are given by both groups 
during the year on campus and the Wind Ensemble tours to various 
cities during the spring. Rehearsals three and one-half hours for each 
group. 

172. University Singers (1).F;W;S. 
The Singers accept students who read music and sing well. Auditions 
are open to all students. Emphasis is placed on fine choral literature of 
all periods, with particular emphasis given to the works of outstanding 
composers. A major oratorio or opera is presented each year, and 
concerts are given locally and throughout the state. 

173. Women's Glee Club (1).F;W;S. 
The women's Glee Club is open by audition to all women students 
who desire to sing. Rehearsals two hours. 



248 



DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC 



1 74. University Symphony Orchestra ( 1 ) .F;W;S. 
The Orchestra is open to all students who have ability and experience 
in playing any orchestral instrument. Emphasis is placed on securing 
good ensemble as well as the technical, dynamic, and interpretive 
demands of the compositions performed. The Orchestra appears in con- 
cert several times during the year. Rehearsals three hours with additional 
sectional rehearsals. 

175. Madrigal Singers (1).F;W;S. 
A select group of eight voices who sing, primarily, the madrigal literature 
of the 16th Century. Selection is based on audition. Rehearsal two hours. 

176. Piano Ensemble (1).F;W;S. 
Supervised study and performance of duo-piano literature. Rehearsals 
two hours. 

177. Men's Glee Club (1).F;W;S. 
The Men's Glee Club is open to all men students who desire to sing 
and may be elected for credit or as extra curricular activity. Rehearsal 
two hours. 

178. Accompanying (1).F;W;S. 
Supervised study of accompanying vocal and instrumental soloists. 
Rehearsal three hours. 

1 79. Small Ensembles ( 1 ) .F;W;S. 
Small Ensembles are open to all qualified students upon audition. 
Typical Ensembles are the brass choir, clarinet choir, stage band, 
string quartet, and baroque ensemble. Rehearsal two hours. 

180. Performance Seminar (0).F;W;S. 
A weekly seminar in solo recitals covering all aspects and problems 
of public appearances. Required of all music majors. 

181. Piano Repertoire (1).F;W;S. 
A studio class in which participants gain poise in performance and 
broaden their knowledge of the literature of the instrument. One hour. 

182. Vocal Repertoire (1).F;W;S. 
The study of the art song and solo materials from operas, cantatas and 
oratorios through observation, performance, analysis and study of the 
historical background of music from the 17th Century to the present. 

183. Italian Diction (1). On Demand 
The principles and practice of Italian pronunciation in singing. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH Zk^O 

DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 

C. Porterfield, Chairman, J. Austin, J. Carpenter, R. Cowan, W. Haley, 
C. Hopkins, C. Martin, M. Meador, C. Palmer, E. Pilkington. 

The objectives of the Department of Speech are: to prepare those 
who are planning careers as teachers of speech or as speech and 
hearing clinicians; to provide a broad background of information and 
develop speech skills needed by those students planning to enter 
other professions; to provide for the university community the cul- 
tural influence and entertainment of good theatre, debates and dis- 
cussions of current issues, the therapeutic services of a speech and 
hearing clinic, and the informative and entertaining programs of 
radio. 

The Department of Speech offers a diversified program of courses 
in the areas of drama, public address, speech pathology, broadcast- 
ing, and oral interpretation. The department supports a competitive 
intercollegiate forensic program, The University Theatre, and the 
ASU Radio Station. Also, the department actively supports student 
organizations which are related to speech, such as Appoliday Play- 
ers, Alpha Psi Omega Dramatics Society, and Pi Kappa Delta 
Forensic Society. Speech majors are expected to participate in 
dramatics, forensics, and broadcasting activities. 

A minor in speech consists of 21 quarter hours above the 100 
level and must include: 201, 206, 255, 308, and nine quarter hours 
in speech electives. 

For the Bachelor of Arts degree with concentration in general 
speech a major consists of 46 quarter hours above the 100 level. 
This must include: 201, 206, 208, 215, 255, 304, 305, 310 or 311 
or 312; 19 additional hours in speech; and English 307 or 401. 

For the Bachelor of Arts degree with concentration in speech 
pathology a major consists of 46 quarter hours above the 100 level. 
This must include: 201, 206, 208, 215, 304, 305, 450, 451, 452, 
453 or 466, 458; five additional hours in speech; Biology 475; 
and English 307 or 401. 

For the Bachelor of Arts degree with concentration in theatre, 
a major consists of 46 hours above the 100 level. This must include 
Speech 202, 206, 208, 209, 303, 310, 311, 312, 402, 463, 464; 
four additional hours in speech; six hours from English 452, 453, 
460; and three hours from Physical Education 127 or 205. 



250 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



For the Bachelor of Science degree and certification as a teacher 
of speech, a major consists of a minimum of 55 quarter hours above 
the 100 level. This must include: 201, 205, 206, 208, 215, 255, 

301, 304, 305, 308, 309, 310 or 311 or 312, 402, 450 or 451 or 
452; 9 additional hours of speech; English 307 and three hours in 
English or sociology or psychology. The department recommends that 
students in this curriculum use electives to acquire a teaching compe- 
tence in a related field, particularly in English. (See requirements for 
certification, page 163). 

For the Bachelor of Science degree and certification in Speech 
Correction (Special Education: Speech and Hearing), a major 
consists of a minimum of 55 quarter hours above the 100 level. This 
must include: 304, 305, 450, 451, 452, 453, 457, 458, 459, 466, 
Biology 475, Education 460 or Psychology 205, Psychology 202, 
455, and a minimum of 11 hours selected from Speech 201, 202, 
308, 456, Education 451, 472, 478, 479, Psychology 320, 321, 322, 
364, 365, 375, 376, 452, 456. 

Students in this program should elect Psychology 201 as part of 
their General College curriculum. Requirements for certification in 
this area consist of Education 301, 302, 303, 320, Psychology 301, 

302, 303, 450, and 460. The department recommends that the stu- 
dents in this curriculum use as electives the courses in related areas 
that are required for certification by the American Speech and 
Heading Association. 

Two graduate programs are offered. The Master of Arts in Speech 
Correction leads to North Carolina Certification in Special Educa- 
tion: Speech and Hearing. To enter this program a student must 
hold or be eligible for a North Carolina A Certificate in ele- 
mentary, secondary, or special education. The program requires 
54 acceptable quarter hours of graduate work. A minimum of 27 
quarter hours must be in courses open to graduates only. Consult 
the department for further details. Refer to graduate school listing. 

The Master of Arts in Speech Pathology is also offered. To enter 
this program a student must have completed a minimum of 18 
quarter hours in courses acceptable toward certification by the 
American Speech and Hearing Association. To receive this degree 
the applicant must meet the academic requirements for certification 
by A. S. H. A. This stipulation may require a student to take more 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



251 



than 45 hours including a thesis of 54 hours without thesis, the 
minimum required of all graduate students. Consult the department 
for further details. 

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION IN SPEECH 

010. Speech Laboratory (0).F;W;S;SS. 

Instruction in pronunciation, articulation, and voice; therapy for students 
with problems of speech; speech-reading lessons for students with hear- 
ing loss. 

101. Fundamentals of Speech (3).F;W;S;SS. 

Introduction to the theory and practice of public address with emphasis 
on standard pronunciation, distinct articulation and the proper use 
of the voice in speaking. When deemed advisable by the instructor 
a grade of incomplete -may be given to be removed by work in the 
clinic or laboratory, or by taking another Speech course. 

201. Public Speaking (3).F;W;S;SS. 

The principles of effective public speaking; preparation and presenta- 
tion of different types of speeches. 

202. Voice and Diction (3).W;S. 
Instruction and practice in voice production and articulation; analysis 
of regional speech differences and standards. 

205. Argumentation and Debate (3).F. 
A study of the principles of argumentation and debate: analysis brief- 
ing, evidence, reasoning, and refutation; class debating on vital ques- 
tions. 

206. Interpretative Reading (3).W. 
Oral interpretation of literature. 

208. Play Production (3).F. 
An introduction to the technical problems of play production; survey 
of scene design and construction, lighting, make-up, and costuming. 
Current college theatre production used as a demonstration workshop. 

209. Scene Design and Construction (3).W. 
Elementary application of design principles to scenic design, basic 
construction techniques; current production used as a workshop. 

210. Stage Lighting (2).S. 
A study of the use of conventional lighting instruments in play pro- 
duction, color in light design, lighting in the round and outdoor 
theatres; current production used as a workshop. 

215. Introduction to Broadcasting (3).W. 

Radio broadcast procedures; program types and standards; laboratory 
practice in radio speaking; production of programs for the Appa- 
lachian Radio Workshop. 



252 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



217. Introduction to Theatre (3).F;S. 

An analysis of the functions of writing, acting, directing, music, dance, 
painting, lighting, make-up, costume, and design in the theatre. 

258. Independent Study (Variable Credit) .F;W;S;SS. 

255. Introduction to Persuasive Speaking (3).W. 

Survey of the theories of persuasive speaking and audience analysis. 
Practice in the preparation and delivery of speeches to persuade. 
Prerequisite: Speech 201, 205 or permission of instructor. 

300. Speech Activities (1).F;W;S. 
A student may earn one hour of credit for every three quarters of 
participation in the following activities; forensics, interpretation, radio, 
and theatre. Although more hours may be earned, only four may be 
counted toward graduation requirements. Make arrangements through 
department chairman prior to registering. 

301. Classical Rhetoric (3).F. 
Study of the foundations and development of Rhetorical Theory during 
the classical period. Special emphasis is given to Plato, Aristotle, Cicero, 
and Quintillian. 

303. Fundamentals of Acting (3).W. 
Study of breath and body control, pantomime, and the psychological 
and interpretative approach of the actor; studio production of scenes 
from plays. 

304. Introduction to Speech Correction (3).F;S. 
A survey of normal speech development and speech problems which are 
encountered by the classroom teacher; some attention to speech therapy. 

305. Phonetics (3).F;W. 
The phonetic basis of English speech sound, using the International 
Phonetic Alphabet; regional dialects and standards of pronunciation. 

308. Discussion and Conference Techniques (3).F. 
Theory and principle of group processes as they are used in democratic 
decision making. Practice in organizing, leading, and participating in 
various forms of discussion and conference. Not offered in 1971-72. 

309. Parliamentary Procedure (1).F. 
History of parliamentary procedure. Function of parliamentary practice 
in a democratic society. Study of how to create a new organization 
with a constitution, bylaws, and standing rules. How to conduct a 
meeting, keep motions in proper order, discuss an issue, vote. 

310. History of Western Theatre I (3).F. 
From the Greek Theatre through 1576 in England and including the 
Roman, Spanish and Medieval Theatres. Not offered in 1971-72. 

311. History of Western Theatre II (3).W. 
From 1576 in England to 1800 in America including Commedia 
del Arte and continental theatres. Not offered in 1971-72. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



253 



312. History of Western Theatre III (3).S. 

From 1800 to the emergence of the Theatre of the Absurd. Not offered 
in 1971-72. 

315. History and Development of Broadcasting (3).S. 

Study of the history and development of radio-television with emphasis 
on technical, economic, legal, and social aspects. 

348. Independent Study (Variable Credit). F;W;S;SS. 

351. Business and Professional Speaking (3).W. 

Basic principles of oral communications applied to the speech needs 
encountered in the business and professional world. Special emphasis 
on interviewing, conference speaking and manuscript speaking. Not open 
to speech majors. Not offered in 1971-72. 

400. Special Topics (1-3).F;W;S;SS. 

A program involving advanced study, a research or creative project, 
and writing. Adapted to serve students who have exceptional interests. 
The proposal for this work must be approved by the instructor and 
the chairman of the department prior to registration. May be repeated 
for a maximum of nine hours. 

402. Play Directing (3).S. 

Analysis of scripts, actor coaching; types of control available to the 
director; application of theory to the direction of several scenes. Lecture 
and laboratory. 

406. Advanced Oral Interpretation (3).S. 

A study of programming, story telling, reading of drama with emphasis 
on characterization, and Readers Theatre. Prerequisite: Speech 206 or 
consent of instructor. 

415. Radio and Television Program Production (3).S. 

Types of programs; practice in casting and producing radio and tele- 
vision programs; use of music, sound effects. Prerequisite: Speech 
315 or permission of instructor. 

450. Rehabilitation of Articulatory Defects (3).W. 
Study of etiologies, diagnosis, and treatment. Prerequisite: Speech 304 
or permission of instructor. 

451. Rehabilitation of Voice Disorders and Cleft Palate (3).S. 
Study of etiologies, diagnosis, and treatment of these and related 
disorders. Prerequisite: Speech 304 or permission of instructor. 

452. Rehabilitation of Stuttering and Allied Disorders (5).F. 
Review of modern theories and therapies; nature, causes, development 
diagnosis, and treatment of stuttering. Prerequisite: Speech 304 or 
permission of instructor. 

453. Audiometric Testing (3).F. 
A study of the fundamentals of audiometric testing; the nature, 
causes, and diagnosis of hearing difficulties; programs and methods 
employed in the conservation of hearing. Supervised practice in basic 
audiometric procedures. 



254 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



456. Creative Dramatics (3).S. 
A course designed to aid the elementary teacher in using drama as a 
creative teaching technique. Practice in selecting and acting out stories 
and poems. Not offered in 1971-72. 

457. Professional Standards and Procedures (1).F;W;S. 
The ethical responsibility of the professional in speech with special con- 
sideration given to non-academic requirements and practices. May be 
repeated for a total of two (2) hours. Prerequisite: Permission of in- 
structor. 

458. Clinical Practice in Speech Correction (1-3).F;W;S;SS. 
Supervised observation, planning, and practice in therapy. A minimum 
of thirty hours in the clinic is required for each academic hour of 
credit. May be repeated for a total of six quarter hours. Prerequisite: 
Permission of instructor. 

459. Student Practice in Speech (6).F;W;S. 
Experience in the practice of speech correction in a school setting 
under supervision approved by the Director of the Speech Clinic. 
Required of students seeking certification as a special education teacher 
of speech and hearing. Thursday afternoons, 3:30 to 5:00, must be 
kept free for critiques with the supervising clinician. Prerequisite: 
Speech 458 or consent of instructor. 

460. Speech Problems of Exceptional Children (3).W. 
Speech problems associated with mental retardation; neuromuscular 
disorders, hearing loss. Prerequisite: Speech 304 or consent of instructor. 

461. Speech Correction for the Classroom Teacher (3).F;SS;Ex. 
A survey of the speech and hearing problems of school children. 
Required in majors in special education who have not had Speech 304. 

462. Workshop in Educational Theatre 

Techniques (3-9). On demand. 

Three intensive studio courses designed to teach production techniques 
to those who produce plays in high schools and junior high schools; one 
studio course in acting, another in directing, and a third in technical 
theatre production. Lectures daily plus afternoon and evening laboratories 
and rehearsals. 

463. Advanced Acting (3).W. 
Intense concentration on analysis and creation of the role. Prerequisite: 
Speech 303, creation of two roles in University Theatre productions 
and /or permission of instructor. 

464. Advanced Play Directing (3).S. 
Correlation of the director's analysis of the script with the playwright's 
intention, the stage space and the actor. Direction of an act of a 
play and /or extended scenes. Prerequisite: Speech 402, participation 
in at least two University Theatre productions, and /or permission of 
instructor. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



255 



466. Introduction to Hearing Rehabilitation (3).W. 

Survey of auditory training procedures, methods of amplification and 
the teaching of speech reading to children. Prerequisite: Speech 453 or 
consent of instructor. 

471. Development of Language for the Deaf (3).F. 
Development of language in deaf children compared to that of normal 
children. Study of the leading systems of teaching language to the 
deaf. Observation and participation at the North Carolina School for 
the Deaf. 

472. Development of Speech for the Deaf (3).F. 
Development of speech in deaf children compared to that of normal 
hearing children. Study of the leading systems of teaching language 
to the deaf. Observation and participation at the North Carolina 
School for the Deaf. 

475. Modern Forensic Program (3) 

Designed to prepare students to conduct a forensic program including 
planning, coaching, and judging at the secondary level. On demand. 

479. Speech Composition (3) 
Intensive practice in composition and delivery of various types of 
speeches for different occasions. Emphasis on speech structure and 
oral style. On demand. 

480. Communication Theory (3).F. 
Treats listening theory, discussion theory, general semantics, the 
philosophy of measurement and new dimensions in speech as reported 
in the literature of the field. Not offered in 1971-72. 

481. History and Criticism of American Public Address — I (3).S. 
A critical study of American speakers from the Revolutionary period 
to 1865. Emphasis is given to the rhetorical craftsmanship exhibited in 
the speeches and the effect of the speeches upon American history. Not 
offered in 1971-72. 

482. History and Criticism of American Public Address — II (3).S. 
A critical study of American speakers from 1865 to 1920. Emphasis 
is given to the rhetorical craftsmanship exhibited in the speeches and 
the effect of the speeches upon American history. Not offered in 1971-72. 

GRADUATE COURSES 

500. Research and Bibliography (3). 
A study of the procedures, designs and methods of reporting in speech 
research. Required in the first quarter of graduate study. On demand. 
Staff. 

501. Development of Language and Speech (3).F. 
Language growth from the first vocalization to the expression of abstract 
thought, including a consideration of factors that interrupt or hinder 
language acquisition, methods of encouraging development, and guidance 
for parents. Prerequisites: Speech 305, and 451 or 452 or consent of 
instructor. Auston, Palmer. 



256 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



502. Psychology of Communication (5).W. 
A study of the origin of speech and language, the psychological aspects 
of speech, the inter-relationships between speech and personality. Auston, 
Palmer. 

503. Rhetorical Theory (3). 
Study of classical, medieval and modern rhetorical theoreticians from 
Corax to Whately. On demand. Porterfield. 

507. Education of the Acoustically Handicapped (3).F;SS. 
History of the education of hearing handicapped persons. Study of the 
social development of the hearing impaired from birth through adult- 
hood. (Same as Education 507) Palmer. 

508. Advanced Clinical Practicum (1-3).F;W;S;SS. 

Supervised clinical practice requiring a minimum of thirty-five hours 
in the clinic for each hour of credit. Emphasis is on evaluating and 
improving both the student's techniques and his interpersonal relation- 
ships. May be repeated for a maximum of nine quarter hours. Pre- 
requisite: Speech 458 or consent of instructor. Staff. 

509. The Bases of Speech and Hearing (5).F. 
Survey of the sciences as they relate to speech and hearing; physiology, 
neurology, physics, linguistics, genetics, psychology, phonetics, and 
semantics. Auston, Palmer. 

510. Rehabilitation of Language Disorders in Children (5).S. 
A survey of causes, principles of differential diagnosis, and treatment. 
Prerequisite: Permission of instructor. Palmer. 

515. Rehabilitation of Hearing I (3).W. 
Study of the physics of sound, hearing disorders, auditory training, 
and methods of amplification. Prerequisite: Speech 453 or permission 
of instructor. Meador, Palmer. 

516. Rehabilitation of Hearing II (3).S. 
Study of the problems involved in speech reading, methods of instruc- 
tion, preparation of lession plans for children and for adults. Pre- 
requisite: Speech 515 or permission of instructor. Meador, Palmer. 

520. British Public Address (3). 

Historical-Critical Study of leading British speakers from Pitt to 

Churchill with emphasis upon how their speaking affected English 
History. On demand. Auston. 

522. Contemporary Public Address (3). 

Critical analysis of outstanding speakers of the 20th century with 

special reference to the influence of their rhetoric on the issues of 
the period. On demand. Porterfield. 

530. Linguistic Foundations of Speech (3). 

Study of structural linguistics, the evaluation of language, and the 
theories of the development of spoken language in the race. On demand. 
Auston. 



DEPARTMENT OF SPEECH 



257 



531. Semantics (3). 

Study of the psychology of meaning in language with special reference 
to emerging disciplines and theories. On demand. Auston. 

535. Voice Science (3). 

The psycho-physics of speech, experimental phonetics, methods and 
levels of measurement in speech. On demand. Meador, Palmer. 

540. Seminar in Speech Pathology (3). 

Reports of research projects, recent developments, current literature and 
trends. Prerequisite: Consent of instructor. May be repeated for a 
maximum of nine hours. On demand. Staff. 

545. Methods of Diagnosis (3-6).F;W;S. 

A combination of study and practice in the procedures and techniques 
involved in the diagnosis of speech disorders, preparation of case 
history and speech evaluation reports. Problems of sharing information 
with other disciplines. Observations in other disciplines. Two hours of 
lecture and discussion, and for each additional hour of credit a two 
hour laboratory period consisting of observing and participating in both 
diagnostic procedures and staffing. Prerequisite: Speech 450, 451, 452, 
or consent of instructor. Meador. 

548. Independent Study (Variable Credit ).F;W;S;SS. 

Graduate students with an approved subject of investigation may register 
for this course. May be repeated for a maximum of six quarter hours. 

Staff. 

550. Master of Arts Thesis (6).F;W;S;SS. 

Staff. 



The Graduate School 

Cratis D. Williams, Dean 

Graduate courses and workshops taught by nationally known 
educators were made available to teachers attending summer school 
at Appalachian as early as 1937. Graduate study leading to the 
Master's degree was first offered during the summer of 1942 with 
fifty-one students enrolled in the graduate division. Work offered 
during the summers of 1942-47 was on a cooperative basis with 
the University of North Carolina with that institution giving full 
credit toward the Master's degree. 

Beginning with the summer of 1948, Appalachian accepted 
qualified students as candidates for the Master of Arts degree in 
Education. At first, a candidate for the degree majored in education 
and completed a minor in a teaching field. By 1957 majors were 
available in eight academic fields. At present, majors are avail- 
able in fifteen academic fields for persons preparing to teach 
and six fields for those who do not plan to teach. Sixth-year 
programs leading to Advanced Certificates for School Administra- 
tors were approved in 1966. 

At the beginning of the summer of 1970 a total of 4338 Master's 
degrees had been awarded. There were 2662 persons enrolled in 
Graduate School in the summer of 1969 and 1022 in the fall quarter 
of 1969-70. The national reputation of the Graduate School is re- 
flected in the facts that graduates of 102 colleges and universities 
were among the 388 awarded the Master's degree in 1969 and that 
only 109 of those receiving the degree had graduated from Appala- 
chian State University. 

On February 26, 1949, graduate study at Appalachian was ap- 
proved by the American Association of Colleges for Teacher Educa- 
tion. Programs leading to certificates based on the Master's degree 
are approved by the National Council for Accreditation of Teacher 
Education. The Graduate School has been a member of the Council 
of Graduate Schools in the United States since 1961. 

The Graduate School, organized to provide facilities for advanced 
study leading to Master's degrees, Certificates of Advanced 
Study, and Specialist degrees offers programs of graduate work dur- 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



259 



ing the summer session and the three quarters of the regular session. 
A maximum of nine quarter hours may be earned in a five-week 
summer term and fifteen quarter hours in a quarter in the regular 
session. 

The primary purpose of graduate study is to offer capable 
students opportunities and facilities for advanced study and re- 
search in their fields of specialization. The graduate programs 
are designed to develop or extend significantly specialization in 
academic, professional, or interdisciplinary areas. One of func- 
tions of the Graduate School is to prepare master teachers, super- 
visors, and administrators. Accordingly, work leading to the Master 
of Arts degree is designed to prepare teachers for the following 
types of positions: Superintendent, Principal, General Supervisor, 
Supervisor of Student Teaching, School Librarian, Secondary School 
Teacher, Elementary School Teacher, School Counselor, School 
Musician, Reading Specialist, Audiovisual Specialist, Junior College 
Teacher, Special Education Teacher, Speech Correction Specialist. 
A second function is to give an opportunity for academic training 
beyond the bachelor's degree to persons not interested in professional 
education. For these, programs leading to the Master of Arts degree 
in English, geography, history, mathematics, political science, psy- 
chology, or clinical psychology and the Master of Science degree in 
biology or chemistry have been approved and others are being 
developed. 

Specialist in Education programs are offered in Educational Leader- 
ship, Elementary Education, and Higher Education. The Specialist in 
Science degree may be earned in biology. 

Courses which have been approved for graduate credit by the 
curriculum committee of the college, the Academic Policies Com- 
mittee, and the Graduate Council constitute the graduate offerings. 
Majors are provided in Audiovisual Education, Biology, Chemis- 
try, Counseling, Economics and Business, English, Elementary 
Education, French, Geography, Higher Education, History, Industrial 
Arts, Library Science, Mathematics, Music, Physical Education, 
Political Science, Psychology, Clinical Psychology, School Administra- 
tion, School Supervision, Special Education, Speech Correction, Read- 
ing Specialization, Supervision of Student Teaching, Social Science, 
and Spanish. Minors are available in Art, Junior College Education, 
Philosophy and Religion, Physics, Secondary Education, Sociology, 
Speech and Drama. 



260 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 
GRADUATE FACULTY 
Administration, Supervision, and Higher Education 

Dr. N. H. Shope, Dr. W. G. Anderson, Dr. Roy R. Blanton, Dr. 
Gerald Bolick, Dr. Leland Cooper, Dr. Paul Federoff, Dr. Alvin R. 
Hooks, Dr. Ben H. Horton, Jr., Dr. N. A. Miller, Dr. Robert Randall, 
Mr. Nollie Shelton. 

Art 

Mr. Lawrence F. Edwards, Dr. Harold Carrin, Mr. Warren Dennis, 
Dr. Lorraine Force, Mr. Noyes Long, Mr. Frank Petersilie. 

Biology 

Dr. F. Ray Derrick, Dr. I. W. Carpenter, Jr., Mr. James Cornell, 
Dr. Sandra J. Glover, Dr. Richard N. Henson, Dr. Frank Helseth, 
Dr. William R. Hubbard, Dr. Homer H. Hurley, Mr. Jack Martin, 
Dr. Francis Montaldi, Dr. J. Frank Randall, Dr. Kent Robinson, 
Dr. Teunis Vergeer. 

Chemistry 

Dr. George B. Miles, Dr. Herbert L. Bowkley, Dr. James E. John- 
son, Dr. Donald P. Olander, Dr. Donald W. Sink, Dr. Robert W. 
Soeder. 

Economics and Business 

Dr. William V. Muse, Dr. Orus R. Sutton, Mr. Robert J. Angell, 
Mr. John H. Brashear, Dr. Woodbridge C. Brown, Mr. Jean-Pierre 
Courbois, Dr. Barry Elledge, Mr. Stanley A. Harris, Jr., Mrs. 
Martha G. Hawkinson, Mr. James F. Jones, Dr. T. K. Mukherjee, 
Miss Jane M. Riner, Mr. Charles C. Speer, Mr. Robert Stretcher, Dr. 
Edwin D. Taylor, Mrs. Kathryn Tully, Dr. Reginald T. Weber, 
Dr. Robert H. West, Mr. Gilroy Zuckerman. 

English 

Dr. Loyd Hilton, Dr. Lucy M. Brashear, Dr. A. Ronald Coulthard, 
Dr. Mary M. Dunlap, Dr. Graydon P. Eggers, Dr. Donald H. Frantz, 
Mr. Mac Sherman Harris, Dr. Hans G. Heymann, Dr. M. John Higby, 
Dr. O. D. Holton, Dr. Henry T. Lilly, Dr. Susan H. Logan, Dr. 
Mary R. Moore, Mr. L. Tully Reed, Dr. John E. Trimpey, Dr. Cratis 
Williams, Dr. Hubertien Williams, Dr. Jerry W. Williamson. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL ^Ol 

Foreign Languages 

Dr. J. Roy Prince, Dr. Jose A. Amaro, Miss Patricia L. Bonin, 
Dr. Ramon Diaz, Mr. William M. Evans, Mr. Elton G. Powell, Mr. 
Tollie C. Ross. 

Geography and Geology 

Dr. Julian C. Yoder, Dr. Terry E. Epperson, Dr. Ole Gade, Dr. 
William Imperatore, Dr. F. Kenneth McKinney, Dr. Robert E. 
Reiman, Dr. Fred Webb, Jr. 

Health and Physical Education 

Dr. Lawrence E. Horine, Mr. Eric DeGroat, Dr. John C. Elliott, 
Mr. Melvin H. Gruensfelder, Dr. Francis L. Hoover, Dr. Edgar O. 
Larson, Dr. Carl G. Meeks, Mr. Roger Thomas, Miss Rebecca M. 
Tomlinson, Dr. Edward T. Turner. 

History 

Dr. Roy Carroll, Dr. George P. Antone, Dr. Charles B. Black- 
burn, Dr. Hugh L. Bond, Dr. J. Max Dixon, Dr. Eugene C. Droz- 
dowski, Dr. John O. Fish, Dr. Edward H. Gibson III, Dr. Lowell C. 
Green, Dr. David C. R. Heisser, Dr. Winston L. Kinsey, Dr. Peter 
Petschauer, Dr. Robert W. Ramsey, Dr. Alan Reinerman, Dr. Carl 
Ross, Mr. Stephen J. Simon, Dr. Ina Van Noppan, Dr. Ellsworth 
T. Wu. 

Industrial Arts 

Mr. Frank R. Steckel, Mr. Robert A. Banzhaf, Mr. Clyde C. 
Owen, Mr. George C. Ragan, Jr., Mr. David A. Rigsby, Mr. 
James H. Short, Jr., Mr. Joseph Sloop. 

Library Science 

Dr. Doris W. Cox, Mr. O. Mell Busbin, Jr., Mrs. Lois B. McGirt, 
Mrs. Mayrelee Newman, Miss Eunice Query, Mrs. Ila T. Justice, 
Mrs. Myrtle B. Wilson. 

Mathematics 

Dr. Harvey R. Durham, Dr. James M. Boyte, Dr. Golden T. Buck- 
land, Dr. Michael C. Carter, Dr. Rudy L. Curd, Dr. G. Marvin 
Eargle, Dr. Ronald J. Ensey, Dr. Ray L. Graham, Mr. Walter A. 



262 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



Hawkinson, Dr. Ernest P. Lane, Dr. Howard W. Paul, Dr. Lynn M. 
Perry, Jr., Dr. Robert L. Richardson, Dr. Paul Sanders, Mr. Richard 
J. Schalk, Dr. James R. Smith, Dr. John F. Williams. 

Music 

Dr. William G. Spencer, Mr. Walton S. Cole, Dr. Nicholas Ernes- 
ton, Miss Elizabeth Fox, Mr. Charles L. Isley, Dr. Joseph C. Logan, 
Dr. Wilfred G. Mears, Dr. Samuel K. Rogers, Dr. Max Smith. 

Philosophy and Religion 

Dr. Charles T. Davis III, Dr. Richard A. Humphrey, Mr. Ray- 
mond S. Ruble, Dr. James W. Stines, Dr. William C. Strickland, 
Dr. O. Kenneth Webb, Dr. Gordon G. Wingard. 

Physics 

Dr. Walter C. Connolly, Dr. Robert K. Franks, Dr. J. Gordon 
Lindsay, Dr. Robert C. Nicklin. 

Political Science 

Dr. Richter H. Moore, Dr. Jawad Barghothi, Mr. Marvin Hoffman, 
Mr. Peyton A. Hughes, Dr. Roland F. Moy, Dr. As'ad A. Rahhal, 
Mr. Carl D. Sutton, Dr. Matt W. Williamson, Dr. Farouk F. Umar. 

Psychology 

Dr. Basil G. Johnson, Dr. Willard L. Brigner, Dr. Donald L. 
Clark, Dr. Joyce G. Crouch, Dr. Boyd M. Dowell, Dr. J. Daniel 
Duke, Dr. Paul A. Fox, Dr. H. Melvin Gilley, Mr. Guy F. Hubbard, 
Dr. Irvin M. Kauffman, Dr. Richard Levin, Dr. Henry McDade, Dr. 
William T. Moss, Mrs. Mary L. Powell, Dr. Walter T. Snipes, Dr. 
Roger Steenland, Dr. George R. Wesley 

Sociology 

Dr. Alfred M. Denton, Dr. Louie A. Brown, Mr. C. Robert Jack- 
all, Dr. Lester D. Keasey, Dr. Frank M. Lovrich, Dr. Burton L. 
Purrington, Mrs. Susan C. Westfall. 

Special Programs 

Dr. Gerald Bolick, Mr. Richard Culyer, Mrs. Eris A. Dedmond, 
Dr. Marjorie F. Farris, Dr. Ed Harrill, Mrs. Mamie Hubbard, Dr. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



263 



Isabel F. Jones, Dr. Patricia A. La Bach, Mr. Robert McFarland, 
Dr. Harry Padgett, Mr. Uberto Price, Mr. John Pritchett, Dr. David 
Robinson, Mr. David Smith, Mr. Edward Stoddard, Dr. Jean 
Winford. 

Speech 

Dr. Charles E. Porterfield, Dr. John T. Auston, Mrs. J. Lou 
Carpenter, Mr. Charles E. Martin, Dr. Millard Meador, Dr. Charles 
E. Palmer, Mr. Edward L. Pilkington. 

Teacher Education 

Dr. Lee Reynolds, Dr. Ben Bosworth, Miss Beulah Campbell, 
Dr. William Cooper, Dr. William Fulmer, Dr. George Graham, Mrs. 
Sheila Jackson, Mrs. Grace Lilly, Dr. Waltz Maynor, Dr. Jack Mel- 
ton, Miss Elizabeth Putman, Dr. Richard Robinson, Mr. Samuel L. 
Round, Dr. Keener M. Smathers, Dr. Ben Strickland, Dr. Erwing 
Wadsworth, Dr. Larry Woodrow. 



264 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 
ADMISSION: MASTER'S DEGREE PROGRAMS 

Requirements 

1. A baccalaureate degree from a college or university of recog- 
nized standing. 

2. An undergraduate background appropriate for graduate study 
in the proposed field. If the student intends to become a 
candidate for the Master of Arts degree with a major or 
minor in education, he must present a minimum of twenty-seven 
quarter hours of undergraduate credit in education and related 
courses. For prerequisites in his academic field he should 
consult the chairman of the graduate advisory committee in 
that field. 

3. A satisfactory undergraduate academic record. For uncondi- 
tional admission, one must have either an overall average of 
at least C-f- or at least an average of B for his last two years of 
undergraduate work and at least an average of B in his un- 
dergraduate major. However, a student with lower averages 
whose record reflects progressive improvement as he moved 
through undergraduate school and whose average for the senior 
year was at least B might be approved if his application is sup- 
ported by excellent letters of reference and scores from both 
of the required tests that place him at or above the 50th percen- 
tile on a nationwide basis. A student with a lower academic 
average may be admitted for one quarter on probation if his 
references recommend him and his score from one of the re- 
quired tests is satisfactory. Upon the satisfactory completion 
of one quarter of work, a student admitted on probation may 
make application for admission to candidacy. 

4. A report of scores from the National Teacher Examinations 
Weighted Common and appropriate Area, if available. If it is 
not possible for the applicant to take the NTE between the time 
he applies and the time he proposes to begin his graduate 
program, he may offer a score from the Miller Analogies Test 
instead and take the NTE during his first quarter on campus. 
The MAT is administered by appointment at the testing centers 
on the campuses of most universities and many senior colleges. 
Applicants for admission to the programs for preparing junior 
college teachers may offer scores from the Graduate Record 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



265 



Examination Aptitude and the appropriate Advanced Sections 
instead of the NTE. Applicants for admission to the Master 
of Arts program in English, geography, history, mathematics, 
political science, psychology, or clinical psychology or the 
Master of Science program in biology or chemistry will offer 
scores from the GRE Aptitude and the appropriate Advanced 
Sections. 

5. An application for admission made on a special form, obtain- 
able on request, and submitted with a complete transcript of 
all previous college work, unless done at Appalachian, at 
least one month before the candidate plans to begin graduate 
study. 

6. Two reference ratings, one of which must be from a college 
administrator or the head of the department in the candidate's 
undergraduate major field of study. 

7. Freedom from serious physical, personality, or speech defects. 

8. Approval of the chairman of the department or division in 
which he intends to major. 

9. A record of successful teaching experience or satisfactory 
completion of student teaching is required for one applying 
for admission to a program leading to a certificate to work 
in public schools. Such an applicant must hold, or be eligible 
to hold, a North Carolina A teaching certificate in his chosen 
field or the comparable certificate in another state. 

ELECTION OF GRADUATE COURSES BY SENIORS 

Provided he is otherwise qualified for admission to graduate 
study, a senior at Appalachian State University who is within 
twelve quarter hours of graduation besides student teaching may 
apply to the Dean of the Graduate School for permission to carry 
up to twelve quarter hours of graduate course work while com- 
pleting the baccalaureate degree. Such a student may not register 
for more than fifteen quarter hours for a regular quarter nor nine 
quarter hours for a summer term. Credit earned in this manner 
may not be used to meet requirements for the baccalaureate degree 
and, at the same time, be applied toward a master's degree. 



266 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



A senior who wishes to enroll in a graduate course as an elective 
for undergraduate credit requirements for a major for the bacca- 
laureate degree may apply to the chairman of his department and 
the Dean of the Graduate School to do so. However, any graduate 
course approved for this purpose may not later be applied toward 
a master's degree. 

ADMISSION STATUS 

Regular. Regular admission to the Graduate School is granted 
to students who meet the established requirements for entrance. 

Provisional. A student who does not have all the prerequisites 
for admission, or who has deficiencies, but is otherwise admissible 
may enter on a provisional basis. 

Probationary. A student who does not meet established require- 
ments for admission but who supplies sufficient evidence to 
show that he is capable of doing satisfactory graduate work 
may be admitted on a probationary basis for one quarter. If his 
work is satisfactory, he may then be permitted to apply for 
admission to candidacy for the master's degree. 

High Risk. A student with a good-to-excellent undergraduate record 
and who is highly recommended by the references but whose scores 
on required tests are below the normal cutoffs for admission to 
candidacy may be admitted as a "high risk" graduate student. If 
his GPA is at least 3.20 for the first quarter of graduate work, 
he may apply for candidacy. 

Unclassified. A student who does not plan to work for the master's 
degree may be permitted to register for graduate courses for 
self-improvement or to be used for renewing his certificate or 
changing his certification pattern. Such work, however, may not 
later be applied toward the degree. Unless the student already 
holds the master's degree, he is normally encouraged to apply 
for admission in order to assure a dual use of his graduate credits. 

Transient. A student enrolled in another recognized graduate school 
may be permitted to register for a limited number of graduate 
credits at Appalachian provided the dean of the graduate school 
in which he is enrolled submits a statement that he is in good 
standing. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL JJO i 
ADVISERS 

Each student admitted to a program of graduate study at Appa- 
lachian State University is assigned an academic adviser or advis- 
ory committee from the department in which the student plans 
to complete the major portion of his work. The student is expected 
to meet with his adviser during the first term on campus for the 
purpose of developing a graduate degree program. Changes in this 
program can be made only with the approval of the adviser and the 
Dean of the Graduate School. Course work taken without the 
approval of the adviser will not automatically be applicable towards 
the degree. A list of advisers for each graduate major offered 
follows : 

Audiovisual Education John A. Pritchett, Jr. 

Biology F. Ray Derrick 

Chemistry George B. Miles 

Counseling J. Edward Harrill 

Economics and Business Orus Sutton 

English Loyd Hilton 

Elementary Education Richard E. Robinson 

Foreign Languages J. Roy Prince 

Geography Julian C. Yoder 

History Roy Carroll 

Industrial Arts Frank R. Steckel 

Junior College Leland Cooper 

Library Science Doris W. Cox 

Mathematics Harvey R. Durham 

Music William G. Spencer 

Physical Education Lawrence E. Horine 

Political Science Richter H. Moore 

Psychology Basil G. Johnson, Jr. 

Reading Specialist Uberto Price 

School Administration N. W. Shelton 

Nathaniel H. Shope 

Social Science Julian C. Yoder 

A. M. Denton 

Special Education Betty Jean Winf ord 

Speech Correction 

Speech Pathology Charles E. Porterfield 



268 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 
ADMISSION TO CANDIDACY 

Admission to graduate study does not carry with it admission 
to candidacy for the master's degree. Admission to candidacy 
for the degree is acted upon after one quarter of graduate study 
in the University. 

1. Admission to candidacy is contingent upon the recommenda- 
tion of the applicant's adviser and the approval of the Graduate 
Council. 

2. Before being accepted as a candidate for the degree, an appli- 
cant will be expected to have demonstrated ability to do 
satisfactory and creditable work at the graduate level. A stu- 
dent must have at least a B average at the time his application 
for candidacy is presented. 

3. Before filing application for admission to candidacy, the appli- 
cant shall have taken the Miller Analogies Test and the 
Common and the Area of the National Teacher Examinations. 
Admission is contingent upon acceptable scores. The cutoff 
scores are 30, 550, and 550 respectively. An applicant for 
admission to the junior college program may offer scores on 
the Graduate Record Examination Aptitude and the Advanced 
Test in his Area in lieu of the National Teacher Examinations. 
An applicant for admission to the Master of Arts programs in 
English, geography, history, mathematics, political science, or 
psychology, or the Master of Science program in biology or 
chemistry must offer scores on GRE Aptitude and the appro- 
priate Advanced Test and the Miller Analogies Test. 

4. Each student shall file with his adviser a program of study and 
an application for admission to candidacy before the end of the 
quarter in which he will complete twelve quarter hours of resident 
graduate credit at Appalachian. Forms for this purpose may be 
obtained either from the adviser or from the Office of the Dean 
of the Graduate School. At the time the application is presented 
to the Graduate Council by the adviser, the student shall have 
completed the research course required in his major field and at 
least one other course in his major field. In all cases the student 
must complete at least fifteen quarter hours of credit after he is 
admitted to candidacy. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



269 



5. The application for admission to candidacy shall be accom- 
panied by a proposed program of study approved by the appli- 
cant's advisory committee and the Dean of the Graduate 
School. Normally, the program of study will include a major of 
not less than thirty-six quarter hours in biology, chemistry, 
counseling, economics and business, education, English, French, 
geography, history, industrial arts, library science, mathematics, 
music, physical education, political science, psychology, social 
sciences, or Spanish and a minor of not less than nine quarter 
hours in education if the proposed major is in a field other 
than education. 

6. Except for those preparing to teach in junior college or moving 
toward the Master of Arts in English, geography, history, mathe- 
matics, political science, or psychology, or the Master of Science 
in biology or chemistry, students are required to present a mini- 
mum of twenty-seven quarter hours of undergraduate credit in 
education and related courses. The applicant's academic field 
shall be based upon a prerequisite of an undergraduate major in 
that field. Persons preparing in elementary education for the 
N. C. Intermediate Certificate and majoring in an academic 
area must present a minimum of twenty-one hours of under- 
graduate work in the academic field. Those preparing for the 
N. C. Graduate Early Childhood Education Certificate may 
spread the academic graduate work over as many of four fields 
with at least nine hours of academic work in a single field. 

REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADUATION 

The degree of Master of Arts, Master of Science, Specialist in 
Education, or Specialist in Science may be conferred upon a student 
who has completed creditably the program of work submitted to 
the Graduate Council at the time his application for admission to 
candidacy was approved. Except in M.S. programs in biology and 
chemistry, and non-teaching M.A. programs in English, geography, 
history, political science, and psychology the candidate may, with 
the approval of his adviser and the Graduate Council, elect not to 
write a thesis. Hence, either of two programs for a master's degree 
may be followed. 

With Thesis: 

1. Thirty-nine acceptable quarter hours of graduate course work, 
exclusive of the thesis, completed in residence at Appalachian. 



270 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



2. A minimum residence of one academic year (36 weeks) or 
its equivalent in the summer. 

3. A thesis in the major field of interest, for which the candidate 
shall register for credit not exceeding six quarter hours. 

4. All graduate credit offered for the degree must have been 
earned within a limit of six calendar years. By special per- 
mission of the Graduate Council, however, a student may 
validate by examination credit earned within a limit of ten 
calendar years. All work to be credited toward the degree, 
except that being taken currently, must be completed and 
grades recorded at least four weeks before the degree is 
awarded. 

5. Not more than fifteen quarter hours offered toward the degree 
may be credit earned in courses with catalog numbers below 500. 

6. Grades on course work may not average lower than B. No 
graduate course with a grade below C will be credited toward 
the degree. 

7. An acceptable performance on a comprehensive examination, 
either oral, or written, or both, on the major field is required 
of every candidate for the degree. The comprehensive must 
be scheduled during the last one-third of the residence period 
and at least ten calendar days prior to the date on which the 
candidate receives the degree. 

At least four weeks (two weeks in the summer session) before he 
is scheduled to defend his thesis before his examining committee, 
the candidate must submit a preliminary copy to each member of 
his committee. Within ten days (five days in the summer session), 
other members of the committee shall return the thesis to the 
chairman of the thesis committee with written criticism and state- 
ments of conditional or tentative approval. 

Prior to seven calendar days (five in the summer session) before 
he expects to receive his degree, the candidate will defend his 
thesis in an oral examination by his committee. 

Immediately after the approval by the thesis examining committee, 
four typewritten copies of the thesis, the original and the first 
three carbons, must be filed in the University Library, together 
with the costs of having them bound. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



271 



Four copies of the approval sheet must be prepared by the 
student. One copy is bound with each copy of the thesis. 

Four copies of an abstract of the thesis must be filed with the 
thesis after the abstract has been approved by the chairman of 
the thesis committee. The abstract, not to exceed two typewritten 
pages, shall give the problem, the procedure, and the conclusions 
reached in the thesis. 

Thesis: 

The subject of the thesis must be within the major field. The thesis 
should show: 

1. Ability of the candidate to work independently on an approved 
problem. 

2. A reasonably wide familiarity with the literature of the field 
of specialization. 

3. A practical working knowledge of research methods. 

4. Conclusions supported by data. 

The student must have presented a prospectus to his adviser 
and received approval of his proposed topic before he is permitted 
to register for the thesis. The candidate's thesis adviser and two 
graduate faculty members of the department will constitute his 
thesis committee. The department chairman may appoint any mem- 
ber of the graduate faculty of his staff to act as chairman of the 
thesis committee and to supervise the writing of the thesis. 

The latest edition of Campbell's FORM BOOK FOR THESIS 
WRITING is the approved guide for form. With the approval of 
the Dean of the Graduate School and the thesis committee, the 
form may be varied to meet the requirements of the discipline in 
which the thesis is being written or of publishers if the manuscript 
is to be printed. One planning to write a thesis should request from 
the chairman of his department a copy of "Procedures for Writing 
a Thesis." 

Without Thesis: 

1. Fifty-four acceptable quarter hours of graduate course work, 
forty-five of which must be completed in residence at Appa- 
lachian. A candidate may, with the permission of his adviser 



272 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



and the approval of the Graduate Council, offer up to nine 
quarter hours of graduate credit from another graduate school 
or nine quarter hours of graduate extension credit from Appa- 
lachian or a combination of up to nine quarter hours, but in no 
case may the residence at Appalachian be less than one academic 
year (36 weeks). 

2. A minimum residence of forty-two weeks or its equivalent 
in summer sessions, except that up to six weeks of residence 
may be waived if as much as nine hours of extension and /or 
transfer credit is accepted toward the degree. 

3. All graduate credit offered toward the degree must have been 
earned within a limit of six calendar years, or, if earned within 
a limit of ten years, validated by examination. Graduate credit 
transferred from another institution may not be validated by 
examination. All work to be credited toward the degree, except 
that being taken currently, must be completed and grades 
recorded at least four weeks before the degree is awarded. 

4. For candidates majoring in education, not more than eighteen 
quarter hours offered toward the degree may be credit earned 
in courses with catalog numbers below 500. For candidates 
completing an academic major of thirty-six hours, up to twenty- 
four hours of upper division undergraduate work may be ap- 
proved, provided that not more than eighteen quarter hours of 
it is offered in the major. 

5. Grades on course work may not average lower than B. No 
graduate course with a grade below C will be credited toward 
the master's degree. 

6. An acceptable performance on a comprehensive examination, 
either oral or written or both, on the major field is required 
of every candidate for the degree. The comprehensive must 
be scheduled during the last one-third of the residence period 
and at least ten calendar days prior to the date on which the 
candidate receives the degree. 

MASTER OF ARTS DEGREE 
FOR TEACHERS AND OTHER SCHOOL PERSONNEL 

The following programs, which lead to the Master of Arts degree 
in education curricula, are designed for school personnel. Many 
of the programs do not provide an opportunity for writing a thesis. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



273 



In those programs which provide for a thesis, a student may 
elect not to write the thesis. If he does not write a thesis, he will 
with the assistance of his adviser select five courses (15 quarter 
hours) in lieu of the thesis, which may be in education, an academic 
field, or both, depending on the student's needs. 

An academic major is required of the candidate preparing to 
teach in secondary schools. Eighteen hours or more of the work 
of candidates preparing to teach in elementary school will be in 
academic areas. 

Audiovisual Specialist 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

547. Social Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 491. Philosophical Foundations 

Education 
or Education 535. Philosophy of Education 

466. Instructional Materials 3 

475. Audiovisual Instruction 3 

502. Organization and Administration of the Secondary 

School 3 

or Education 504. Organization and Administration 
of the Elementary School 

505. Supervision of Instruction 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

528. Production and Care of Audiovisual Materials 3 

532. Use and Care of Machines and Equipment 3 

537. Organization and Administration of an 

Audiovisual Program 3 

549. School Building Planning 3 

554. Radio and Television in Instruction 3 

Approved courses related to audiovisual education or an academic 

minor 18 

School Administrators 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

547. Social Foundation of Education 3 

591. Philosophical Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 535. Philosophy of Education 

501. Public School Administration 3 

502. Organization and Administration of the 

Secondary School 3 

504. Organization and Administration of the 

Elementary School 3 

505. Supervision of Instruction 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

575. Internship in School Administration 6 

or Education 525. Problems in Public School 
Administration 

Cognate discipline (Social Sciences) 9 

Electives 15 



274 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



Cognate courses to be selected in conference with the student's 
adviser for the purpose of gaining competence in academic areas 
related to educational administration. 

Elective courses to be selected in conference with the student's 
adviser for the purpose of gaining competence in academic or 
professional areas related to educational administration. 

General Supervisor 

Prerequisites: North Carolina A Certificate or its equivalent 
from another state; a minimum of three years of successful teaching 
experience. 

For departmental requirements in the secondary academic major, 
see the appropriate department. 

One preparing for General Elementary Supervision must com- 
plete all courses required in the program leading to a Graduate 
Intermediate or Early Childhood Education Certificate. 

Education 500. Research in Education (Elementary Major) 3 

502. Organization and Administration of Secondary 

Schools 3 

or Education 504. Organization and Administration 
of the Elementary School 

505. Supervision of Instruction 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

517. School Supervision 3 

Psychology 501. Psychology of Late Childhood 3 

or Psychology 502. Psychology of Adolescence 

455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

Library Science 467. Correlating Teaching with the Library 3 

Academic major including academic research (Secondary Major) 33 

Academic concentration (Elementary Major) 21-24 

Electives 0-9 

Supervisor of Student Teaching 

A supervisor of student teaching must qualify for graduate certifi- 
cation as either an elementary or secondary teacher. The program 
must include Education 505, 515, and 516. 

Education 500. Research in Education (Elementary Major) 3 

505. Supervision of Instruction 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

456. Measurement and Assessment 3 

515. Organizing and Planning Student Teaching 3 

516. Supervision of Student Teaching 3 

or Education 576. Internship for Supervising Teachers 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

Academic major including academic research (Secondary Major) 36 

Academic concentration (Elementary Major) 21-24 

Electives 0-12 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL Zl i O 

School Librarian 

Prerequisite: 27 hours in Library Science, including 301, 302, 
305, 306, 307, 401, 402, and 475 (403) and an undergraduate 
grade-point average of 2.75. 

Education 466. Instructional Materials 3 

or Education 475. Audiovisual Instruction 

535. Philosophy of Education 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

Psychology 50 1 . Psychology of Late Childhood 3 

or Psychology 502. Psychology of Adolescence 
Library Science 450. Organization and Administration of 

Non-Book Materials 3 

45 1 . Literature of the Humanities 3 

or Library Science 452. Literature of the Social 

Sciences and the Fine Arts 
or Library Science 453. Literature of Science 
and Technology 

454. Literature for Young Adults 3 

or Library Science 456. Critical History of 
Children's Literature 

500. Research Methods in Librarianship 3 

503. Reading Interests and Guidance 3 

512. Use of Materials with Students and Teachers 3 

513. Problems and Trends in School Libraries 3 

Electives — with thesis (6) 6 

without thesis 15 

Electives 0-15 

Junior College Librarian 

Prerequisites: Library Science 301, 302, 305, or equivalent, and 
an undergraduate grade-point average of 2.75. 

Education 542. Instruction Program of the Two-Year College 3 

544. Seminar on the Two-Year College 3 

Library Science 451. Literature of the Humanities 3 

452. Literature of the Social Sciences and the 

Fine Arts 3 

453. Literature of Science and Technology 3 

475. Cataloging and Classification 3 

500. Research Methods in Librarianship 3 

501. American Library Resources 3 

505. Advanced Cataloging and Classification 3 

510. Organization and Administration of the College 

Library 3 

Electives — with thesis (6) 9 

without thesis 18 

Electives 0-6 

Elementary School Teachers 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

546. Elementary School Curriculum 3 

or Education 506. Curriculum Construction 



276 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



547. Social Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 491. Philosophical Foundations of 
Education 

456. Measurement and Assessment 3 

511. Investigations in Reading 3 

513. Teaching the Language Arts 3 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

or Psychology 501, Psychology of Late Childhood 

Library Science 467. Correlating Teaching with the Library 3 

Mathematics 459. Foundations of Arithmetic 3 

Electives in academic fields (K-3), or academic concentration (4-9) 18 

Electives 3-9 

At least 9 hours of academic work must be in a single field for the Early 
Childhood Education Certificate. For the Graduate Intermediate Certificate, 
the candidate may complete 18 hours in a single field or 12 hours in each 
of two related fields. 

Secondary School Teacher 

Prerequisites: An undergraduate major in the teaching field; a 
North Carolina A Certificate or its equivalent in another state. 

For required courses in the academic field, see the appropriate 
department. 

Education 456. Measurements and Assessment 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

547. Social Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 491. Philosophical Foundations of 

Education 
or Education 535. Philosophy of Education 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

or Psychology 502. Psychology of Adolescence 

Academic major including academic research — With thesis (6) 33 

— Without thesis 36 

Electives 0-6 

Junior College Teacher 

Prerequisites: An undergraduate major in the teaching field. 

For required courses in the academic field, see the appropriate 
department. 

Education 542. Instruction Program of the Two-Year College 3 

544. Seminar on the Two-Year College 3 

or Education 545. Practicum in College Teaching 
or Education 574. Teaching Internship in the Two- 
Year College 

Academic 500. Bibliography and Research 3 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



277 



Two-Year College Administration 



Education 500. Research in Education 3 

501. Public School Administration 3 

552. Supervision of Instruction in the Two-Year College 3 

518. Public School Finance 3 

553. Planning the Community College 3 

560. School Law 3 

Business 516. Personnel Administration 3 

Education 542. Instruction Program of the Two-Year College 3 

543. Organization and Administration of the Two-Year College. .3 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

Education 479. Group Methods and Processes 3 

541. Student Personnel Services 3 

584. Administrative Internship in the Two-Year College 3-9 

Cognate Areas plus electives 9-15 

Total 54 

Music Teacher and Music Supervisor 

Prerequisites: An undergraduate major in music; a North Caro- 
lina A Certificate or its equivalent; music proficiency admission 
requirements. 

All entering graduate music majors will demonstrate by examina- 
tion their skills and abilities in music theory, music history and 
literature, performance music, and music education where it applies. 
Any deficiency noted may require courses or individual study in the 
area of the deficiency prior to admission to candidacy for the master's 
degree. 

Education 457. Social Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 491. Philosophical Foundations of 

Education 
or Education 535. Philosophy of Education 

456. Measurement and Assessment 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

529. Organization and Administration of School Music 3 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

or Psychology 501. Psychology of Late Childhood 
or Psychology 502. Psychology of Adolescence 

Music 500. Bibliography and Research 3 

53 1. Seminar in Music v : 3 

Music History and Literature 0-12 

Music Theory 0-6 

Applied Music 0-6 

Advanced Conducting 0-3 

Music 552. Graduate Ensemble 

Music electives — With thesis (6) Courses to complete 33 

— Without thesis Courses to complete 39 



278 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 

Certified School Counselor 

Prerequisites: An A certificate; screening requirements. 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

478. Principles of Guidance 3 

491. Philosophical Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 535. Philosophy of Education 

460. Educational Statistics 3 

514. Psychological and Educational Testing 3 

520. Occupational and Educational Information 3 

522. Counseling Theory and Techniques 3 

523. Organization and Administration of Guidance 

Services (H.S. ) 3 

or Education 540. Guidance Services in the 
Elementary School (E.S.) 

538. Supervised Practicum in Counseling 3, 3 or 6 

Psychology 450. Psychology of Personality 3 

455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

519. Analysis of the Individual 3 

Electives in Psychology, Sociology, Economics, Education 12 

Junior College Counselor 
(Student Personnel Worker) 

Prerequisite: Screening requirements. 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

478. Principles of Guidance 3 

520. Occupational and Educational Information 3 

Psychology or Sociology 456. Intermediate Statistical Methods 3 

Education 514. Psychological and Educational Testing 3 

522. Counseling Theory and Techniques 3 

Psychology 450. Psychology of Personality 3 

519. Analysis of the Individual 3 

Education 538. Supervised Practicum in Counseling 3-9 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

502. Psychology of Adolescence 3 

Education 541. Student Personnel Services 3 

542. Instruction Program of the Two-Year College 3 

or Education 544. Seminar on the Two-Year College 

Elected Academic Minor 9-15 

Reading Specialization 

A graduate student who plans to pursue the curriculum for the 
Reading Specialist in Elementary or Secondary Schools must have 
had basic preparation in the foundation of reading instruction and 
reading in the elementary or secondary school. 



279 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 

Reading Specialists in the Elementary School 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

547. Social Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 491. Philosophical Foundations of 
Education 

456. Measurement and Assessment 3 

or Psychology 514. Psychological and Educational 

Testing 
or Psychology 526 or 527. Individual Intelligence Testing 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

or Education 546. Elementary School Curriculum 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

or Psychology 501. Psychology of Late Childhood 

Education 561. Curriculum and Evaluation in Reading 3 

472-473. Diagnosis and Remedial Reading 6 

508. Clinical Problems in Reading 3 

Nine hours from among: 

Education 558. [477] Teaching of Reading 3 

511. Investigations in Reading 3 

548. Independent Study 3 

551. Field Experience in Teaching Reading 3-9 

Academic concentration, including Mathematics 459. Foundations 

of Arithmetic 18 

Reading Specialist in Secondary School 

Education 547. Social Foundations of Education 3 

or Education 491. Philosophical Foundations of 

Education 
or Education 535. Philosophy of Education 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

Psychology 455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

or Psychology 502. Psychology of Adolescence 

Education 561. Curriculum and Evaluation in Reading 3 

462. Reading in High School 3 

472. Diagnostic and Remedial Reading 3 

Nine hours from among: 

Education 473. Diagnostic and Remedial Reading 3 

558. [477] Teaching of Reading 3 

508. Clinical Problems in Reading 3 

511. Investigations in Reading 3 

548. Independent Study 3 

551. Field Experience in Teaching Reading 3-9 

Academic major, including academic research 27 

Special Education 

MENTAL RETARDATION 

Prerequisite: Education 320. 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

506. Curriculum Construction 3 

451. Educable Mentally Retarded 3 

452. Trainable Mentally Retarded 3 



280 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



509. Reading and the Mentally Retarded 3 

454. Curriculum for the Mentally Retarded 3 

519. Education of the Physically Handicapped 3 

572. Internship in Special Education 9-15 

Psychology 460. Psychology of the Handicapped 3 

Industrial Arts 458. Crafts for the Handicapped 3 

Speech 460. Speech Problems for the Classroom Teacher 3 

Electives 3-9 

Education 521. Vocational Planning for the Handicapped 3 

527. Organization and Administration of Special 

Education 3 

530. Education of the Gifted 3 

570. Readings and Research in Special Education 3 

Psychology 450. Psychology of Personality 3 

501. Psychology of Late Childhood 3 

or Psychology 502. Psychology of Adolescence 

510. Psychology of the Gifted 3 

512. Psychology of hte Socially and Emotionally 

Maladjusted 3 

526 or 527. Individual Intelligence Testing 3 

455. Advanced Educational Psychology 3 

530. Theories of Personality 3 

532. Evaluation of Exceptional Children 3 

SPEECH CORRECTION AND SPEECH PATHOLOGY 
Prerequisite: North Carolina A Certificate or equivalent 

Education 500. Research in Education 3 

Speech 550. Research and Thesis 6 

Courses prescribed by adviser — With thesis 34 

Without thesis 45-54 

Master of Arts Degree 

The academic Master of Arts degree is offered with majors in 
English, geography, history, mathematics, political science, and 
psychology. The requirements for this degree are essentially the 
same as those for the Master of Arts degree for teachers, with the 
following exceptions: 

(1) A thesis is required. 

(2) A reading knowledge of a foreign language, normally 
French or German, is required. 

(3) The oral defense of the thesis may not be substituted 
for the required comprehensive examination. 

(4) No courses in professional education may be included in 
the degree program. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



281 



ENGLISH 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major in English. 

English 500. Bibliography and Research 3 

466. History of the English Language 3 

512. Literary Criticism (Prior to 1900) 3 

or English 521. Twentieth-Century Literary Criticism 

550. Thesis 6 

Electives in English 21-30 

Electives in Allied Disciplines 0-9 

Total 45 

GEOGRAPHY 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major in geography 

Geography 500. Bibliography and Research 3 

502. Urban Geography 3 

506. Geographic Aspects of World Affairs 3 

550. Thesis 6 

Approved electives in geography and geology 18 

Related minor 12 

HISTORY 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major in history. 

History 524. European Historiography 3 

or History 512. American Historiography 

500. Bibliography and Research 3 

540. Seminar 3 

550. Thesis 6 

Approved electives in history 18 

Related minor 9 

Elective in humanities 3 

MATHEMATICS 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major in mathematics. 

Mathematics 511-512-513. Real Variables 9 

521-522-523. Abstract Algebra 9 

531-532-533. Topology 9 

550. Thesis 6 

Approved electives in mathematics 12 

POLITICAL SCIENCE 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major in Political Science. 

Political Science 500. Bibliography and Research 3 

501. Readings and Research in Political Behavior 3 

540. Seminar 3 

550. Thesis 6 

Electives in Political Science 21-30 

Electives in Allied Disciplines 0-9 

Total 45 



282 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



PSYCHOLOGY 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major or minor in psychology. 

Psychology 500. Research Problems 3 

534. Advanced Statistics 3 

457. Physiological Psychology 3 

550. Thesis 6 

Approved electives in psychology 18 

Minor (Sociology, Physical or Biological Sciences) 9 

CLINICAL PSYCHOLOGY 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major or minor in psychology. 
Two years are required to complete the program. 

CORE COURSES 

Psychology 500. Research Problems (3 quarters) 1-1-1 

457. Physiological Psychology 3 

528. Theories of Learning 3 

534. Advanced Statistics 3 

550. Thesis 6 

Elective in Psychology 3 

CLINICAL COURSES 

Psychology 512. Psychology of the Emotionally and Socially 

Maladjusted 3 

526. Individual Intelligence Testing: Wechsler 3 

527. Individual Intelligence Testing: Binet 3 

530. Theories of Personality 3 

535. Advanced Abnormal Psychology 3 

536. Theories of Phychotherapy 3 

551, 552, 553. Clinical Practicum I 1-1-1 

554. Clinical Practicum II 3 

555. Advanced Developmental Psychology 3 

556. Experimental Analysis of Mental Defects 3 

557. Clinical Psychology 1 

558. Projective Techniques 3 

559. Advanced Psychology Assessment 3 

560. Internship (6,6) 12 

Total 70 

Master of Science Degree 

The Master of Science degree is offered with majors in chemistry 
and biology. Requirements for this degree, essentially the same as 
for the academic Master of Arts degree, include: 

(1) A thesis. 

(2) A reading knowledge of German, French, or Russian. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



283 



(3) An orientation examination during the first two weeks of 
the program. 

(4) A comprehensive examination. 

(5) An oral defense of the thesis. 

CHEMISTRY 
Prerequisite: Undergraduate major in chemistry. 

Chemistry 450. Qualitative Organic Analysis 4 

452. Advanced Analytical Chemistry 4 

504. Chemical Bond Theories 3 

506. Organic Reaction Mechanisms 3 

510. Chemical Thermodynamics 3 

513. Optical Methods of Chemical Analysis 4 

or Chemistry 514. Electrical Methods 

530. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry 3 

550. Research and Thesis 6 

Approved Electives in Chemistry 15 

(Candidates who completed Chem. 450 and 452 as undergraduates select an 
additional eight quarter hours of electives in chemistry.) 

BIOLOGY 

Prerequisite: Undergraduate major in biology. 

Biology 454. Genetics 3 

455. Plant Physiology 4 

500. Bibliography and Research 3 

501. Advanced Animal Ecology 3 

503. Bacteriology of Food, Water, Milk, Sewage 3 

505. Animal Physiology I 3 

506. Animal Physiology II 3 

514. Plant Anatomy and Morphology 3 

550. Research and Thesis 6 

Approved Electives in Biology, Chemistry, and Geology 14 

SECOND MASTER'S DEGREE 

A student holding a master's degree may earn a second master's 
degree in another discipline. For admission to a second master's 
degree, the student files an application and submits transcripts and 
score reports on the appropriate examinations. He files an applica- 
tion for candidacy during the first quarter and takes a comprehensive 
examination near the close of the last quarter of the program. He 
plans his program of forty-five quarter hours with his adviser and 
may or may not include a thesis for six hours of credit. If he includes 
a thesis, all of the work must be completed at Appalachian. If he 
does not write a thesis, he may include up to nine quarter hours of 



284 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



graduate work not more than six years old from another approved 
graduate school or nine quarter hours of extension work completed 
through Appalachian. One who writes a thesis may meet residence 
requirements in thirty weeks. One who does not write a thesis and 
offers up to nine hours of transfer or extension credit may meet 
residence requirements in twenty-four weeks. 

SIXTH YEAR PROGRAMS FOR SCHOOL ADMINISTRATORS 

The College of Education offers sixth-year programs for the 
preparation of school administrators. Patterns of study are available 
which prepare students successfully completing the programs to 
qualify for Advanced Certificates as superintendents, assistant 
superintendents, or principals. Details concerning these programs 
may be secured from the Dean of the College of Education, Duncan 
Hall, or the Dean of the Graduate School. 

CERTIFICATE OF ADVANCED STUDY 

One who holds a master's degree and wishes to extend his 
knowledge in the area of his degree or achieve breadth in related 
disciplines may apply for admission to advanced study and plan 
a program to include forty-five quarter hours, up to nine hours 
of which may be completed at another approved graduate school 
or in Appalachian's extension program. A minimum of twenty-four 
weeks of residence is required. He files an application for admission 
to candidacy during the first quarter and takes a comprehensive 
examination near the close of the last quarter of his program. One 
completing the program may apply for a University Certificate of 
Advanced Study to be awarded at commencement. Whether the 
University Certificate of Advanced Study will qualify teachers for 
salary increments in their respective states will depend on the pro- 
grams completed and the salary policies followed by the school 
systems. 

THE SPECIALIST'S DEGREE 

The specialist's degree is intermediate between the master's and 
the doctor's degrees. Three Specialist in Education and one Specialist 
in Science degree programs have been approved for 1971-1972. 

To get into one of these programs, a student must have a master's 
degree from an approved institution and satisfy admission require- 
ments of the Graduate School. Regulations and procedures governing 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



285 



the master's degree also apply to the specialist's degree. Nine quarter 
hours taken beyond the master's degree at an approved institution 
may be transferred. Course requirements range from 45 to 54 quarter 
hours of graduate work beyond the master's degree and 36 weeks of 
residence are required. 

Educational Specialist (Ed.S.) programs are offered in three fields: 
( 1 ^Educational Leadership, (2) Elementary Education, and (3) 
Higher Education. The Specialist in Science (Spec. Sc.) is offered 
in biological sciences. 

The program in Educational Leadership prepares one in school 
administration, supervision, or curriculum. The program in Ele- 
mentary Education prepares one to teach in the primary school (K-3) 
or the intermediate school (4-9). The program in science provides 
for preparation for teaching in a public school or in a college. The 
program in Higher Education is flexible. One may include in it a 
minimum of 18 additional hours in the teaching field, or reading, or 
guidance and counseling, or educational media provided the program 
is based on and related to the major at the master's level. 

Interested students are requested to write to the Dean of the 
Graduate School for further information and application forms. 

Course Numbering 

Graduate students may be admitted to courses designated 450 to 
499 if they did not take them as undergraduate students. No more 
than five such courses may be included in a thesis program and, 
normally, no more than six in a program that does not include a 
thesis. Courses designated 500 and above are limited to graduate 
students only. 

Language Requirements 

Candidates for the Master of Arts degree in English, geography, 
history, mathematics, political science, or psychology and for the 
Master of Science degree in biology or chemistry will be expected 
to demonstrate by examination a reading knowledge of a modern 
foreign language, usually French or German. (A language other than 
one normally required may be substituted with the approval of the 
student's adviser and the Dean of the Graduate school.) Two years 
of successful college study in a language will meet the requirement. 
One who has not completed two years of college credit in a language 
must take a language examination. 



286 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



The student should apply for the language examination directly 
to the Chairman of the Department of Foreign Languages not 
later than three weeks before the date the examination is 
scheduled. The Chairman of the Department of Foreign Languages, 
after reviewing the student's examination paper, will submit to the 
Dean of the Graduate School a report of the student's performance. 
The Dean of the Graduate School will inform the student and his 
adviser by mail whether the student has passed the examination. 
The student must have passed the examination in a foreign language 
before he is permitted to file an application for a master's degree. 

Application for the Degree 

The graduate student must file with the Dean of the Graduate 
School an application for the master's degree, the specialist's degree, 
or the Certificate of Advanced Study the first week of his final 
registration period. The application form may be secured from the 
Graduate Office. If he has qualified to apply for a certificate to teach 
in North Carolina, the candidate may also file an application for 
a certificate. This form, too, may be secured from the Graduate 
Office. 

Commencement 

Candidates for graduate degrees and Certificates of Advanced 
Study are expected to be present at any commencement to receive 
the degree in person unless excused in writing by the Dean of the 
Graduate School. 

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS 

Registration 

Graduate students register at the time specified on the university 
calendar. Initial registration is continguent upon the receipt and 
approval of transcripts of all work completed in other institutions 
and a report of acceptable scores on either the National Teacher 
Examinations Common and Area or the Graduate Record Examina- 
tion Aptitude and Advanced. Registration material is provided by the 
office of the Registrar. A fee will be charged for late registration. 
See Special Fees. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 2aKJ I 

Full-Time Resident Student 

For full-time resident credit a student must be registered for 
a minimum of twelve quarter hours (six in a summer term) unless 
he is a graduate teaching fellow or assistant. Graduate students may 
not register for more than fifteen hours a quarter or nine for a 
summer term. 

Auditors 

Regular fees are charged for auditing. A student may register as 
an auditor for a course with the consent of the instructor and the 
Dean of the Graduate School. Classes audited shall count as part 
of the student's load, but he will receive no credit and no grade 
will be assigned. An auditor is expected to be regular in class at- 
tendance but may not participate in class discussions unless he 
is invited to do so. He is not required to take tests and examinations. 
An auditor who finds it necessary to discontinue his class attendance 
should formally drop the course. 

Auditors may not register for research courses, seminars, practi- 
cums, and workshops. 

Unclassified Graduate Students 

A student doing graduate work but who has not applied for 
admission to Graduate School and who is not working on a definite 
program of graduate study leading to a graduate degree or a Certifi- 
cate of Advanced Study has no assurance he may be able later to 
count such work as fulfilling course requirements for the degree. 

Employed Students 

Public school personnel employed on a full-time basis may not 
take more than three quarter hours during any one quarter or 
a total of nine quarter hours from September 1 to June 1 . A full-time 
university instructor may not take more than three quarter hours 
during one registration period. 

Foreign Students 

Foreign students are encouraged to apply for admission to 
master's degree programs starting in September rather than at 
the beginning of the winter or spring quarter. Applications should 



288 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



be received in the Office of the Dean of the Graduate School by 
April 1 and all supporting documents and credentials by May 15. 
Applicants whose native language is not English should arrange 
to take Test of English as a Foreign Language in October in 
order for the University to receive the score by April 1. A foreign 
student whose native language is not English should request that 
a report of his score be sent before he asks for application forms, for 
application forms are sent only to foreign students with a score of 
500 or higher on Test of English as a Foreign Language. 

Appalachian State University has no scholarship program for 
the support of foreign students. Even out-of-state fees may not be 
waived. After a foreign student has studied at Appalachian State 
University for one quarter, he may apply for a graduate assistant- 
ship. If he is awarded an assistantship, out-of-state fees will be 
waived while he is an assistant. 

The foreign student must submit a Confidential Statement on 
Finances before his application for admission to Graduate School 
will be considered. 

Foreign students enrolled in other colleges and universities in 
the United States will not be admitted to Appalachian until they 
have completed, or are about to complete, study leading to a 
degree in the college or university they are attending. 

Unmarried foreign students live in university residence halls 
and may take their meals at the University Cafeteria. Expenses 
for one academic year (9 months) for the foreign student are ap- 
proximately $2100. 

Class Attendance 

Attendance by all graduate students must be regular. Responsi- 
bility for class attendance rests with the student. In all cases work 
missed through absence must be made up, but permission to 
make up work is not automatic and is given at the discretion of 
the instructor. Excuses for absence from class meetings are granted 
by the instructor and at his discretion. A student whose attendance 
in classes is unsatisfactory to his instructor, his adviser, or the 
Dean of the Graduate School may be excluded from a course, a 
final examination, or a graduate program. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL ^Ot7 

Student Responsibility 

The graduate student is entrusted with the responsibility for 
his own progress. He keeps an up-to-date record of the courses 
he has taken in his proposed program and checks periodically 
with his adviser. Responsibility for errors in his program or in 
interpretation of regulations rests entirely with the student. 

Adding and Dropping Courses 

A course may be added or dropped without penalty, with the 
approval of the student's adviser, prior to the last day of the 
registration period. A course may be changed from Audit to 
Credit prior to the last day of the registration period but not after- 
wards. A course may be dropped with a grade of W (withdrawn) 
prior to the fifth week of classes in a quarter or the middle of the 
third week in a summer term with the approval of the instructor 
and the student's adviser. After that date a grade of F is assigned, 
unless an exception is granted by the Dean of the Graduate School, 
in which case a grade of W is assigned. 

Withdrawal 

Requests for complete withdrawal from graduate school must 
be made by letter to the Dean of the Graduate School. A student 
who has completely withdrawn from a graduate program may not 
resume his studies unless he has been formally readmitted. Stu- 
dents who withdraw without approval receive grades of F. 

Suspension and Dismissal 

Appalachian reserves the right to exclude at any time a graduate 
student whose conduct is deemed improper or prejudicial to the 
best interest of the University. 

A graduate student who fails to maintain grades of at least 
B in the courses for which he is registered in any term may not 
be permitted to re-register as a candidate for the master's degree. 
However, a student may petition the Dean of the Graduate School 
for consideration in extenuating circumstances which may consti- 
tute a justifiable exception to this regulation. If the Dean of the 
Graduate School approves, the student may be permitted to register 
at his own risk for an additional quarter. 



290 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 

Grades 

In the Graduate School, the grades A, B, C, F, and / are used 
to report the quality of credit. A is superior graduate accomplish- 
ment, B is average graduate accomplishment, C is below average 
but passing, and F is a failing grade. A grade of / is reported for 
a student who has not completed the quantitative requirements of 
a course. Graduate credit accepted in fulfillment of the requirements 
for a graduate degree or a Certificate of Advanced Study shall aver- 
age not lower than B, and no credit toward the degree shall be 
granted for a grade below C. Course work reported "Incomplete" 
must be completed within a year of the official ending of the course. 
A graduate student is permitted to repeat not more than one course 
to improve his grade. A grade of F is assigned to a student who 
arbitrarily discontinues meeting a class or who withdraws without 
making proper arrangements with the Dean of the Graduate School. 

Changing Grades 

Once an instructor has reported a grade to the Registrar, it 
cannot be changed except in case of error in reporting or recording. 
Any change made must also be reported to the Dean of the Graduate 
School. 

Changing Majors 

A student who has been approved by one department but who 
wishes to change to another must have the approval of the Dean of 
the Graduate School and of the department into which he proposes 
to transfer before the change may be made. In addition, the 
chairman of the department from which the student wishes to 
transfer must certify that the student is eligible to continue as a 
degree candidate in that department. 

Examinations 

In addition to the Miller Analogies Test and the National 
Teacher Examinations Common and Area or the Graduate Record 
Examination Aptitude and Advanced, which are required by all 
departments, qualifying examinations are administered by several 
departments to determine the student's qualifications for graduate 
study. In addition, all departments require comprehensive examina- 
tions in the major near the termination of the graduate program. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



291 



These examinations may be written, oral, or a combination of the 
two. Composition of committees for comprehensive examinations 
is determined by the chairman of the major department. Each 
examining committee must have at least three graduate faculty 
members from the major department. It is the responsibility of 
the degree candidate to arrange with his department chairman a 
date for the comprehensive examination, which may not be taken 
before the student has been admitted to candidacy or completed at 
least two-thirds of his course work. 

Oral examinations are required of all students presenting thesis 
or research projects. Thesis committees are composed of at least 
three graduate faculty members from the major department. At 
the discretion of the department, the oral examination on the 
thesis may be substituted for the comprehensive examination. 

Library Carrels 

Library carrels are available to graduate students who are working 
on thesis and special research projects. Applications for carrels 
are made on a quarterly basis to the Librarian. 

Independent Study 

With the approval of the instructor, the department chairman, the 
dean of the college, and the Dean of the Graduate School, a graduate 
student who has been admitted to candidacy may register for 
independent study in his major field. Students registered for in- 
dependent study must be scheduled for regular conference periods 
at least weekly. As much as six quarter hours of independent study 
may be applied toward a graduate degree. 

Extension Classes 

Based upon requests from the administrators of school systems 
in northwestern North Carolina, business and industry, and hospitals, 
Appalachian offers in-service courses for teachers and other personnel. 
The course is given at a central place in the school unit or industry 
which has requested the in-service training. For graduate students 
who register for extension work, up to nine quarter hours of gradu- 
ate credit may be counted toward a graduate degree. Extension work 
applied toward the degree will not reduce the minimum residence 
requirements, but it can be used to replace the six weeks of additional 



292 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



residence required of students who do not write a thesis. The cost of 
extension work including tuition and fees, is $33 for three hours. 
A student registering at Appalachian for the first time must pay a 
registration fee of $10. 

A student enrolled in a degree program in which a thesis is 
not required may be permitted to include up to nine quarter 
hours of extension credit provided the work is approved by the 
adviser and the Dean of the Graduate School and is taught by 
Appalachian State University faculty. One may transfer some 
credit from another graduate school and complete some extension 
credit, but the combined total may not exceed nine quarter hours. 
Correspondence courses are not accepted for graduate credit. 

Saturday, Late Afternoon, and Evening Classes 

Appalachian also schedules Saturday, late afternoon, and evening 
graduate courses on campus during the fall, winter, and spring 
quarters. By attending a Saturday or evening class during any one 
quarter, the graduate student may earn three hours of graduate 
credit. Six weeks of residence is recognized for six hours of graduate 
credit for Saturday classes. As much as eighteen quarter hours of 
credit earned in Saturday classes may be applied toward a graduate 
degree. The cost of Saturday work, including tuition and fees, is 
$30 for three quarter hours. Books and supplies cost approxi- 
mately $10. A student registering for the first time must pay a 
registration fee of $10. 

Internship 

In addition to internships in junior college teaching, qualified 
applicants may serve internships in school administration and in 
supervision of student teaching. To be eligible for an internship 
an applicant must: 

1. Hold a valid North Carolina A certificate or better. 

2. Have successfully completed three or more years of teaching 
with at least one year in the school system in which he plans 
to do his internship. 

3. Have the recommendation of his principal and/or superinten- 
dent. 

4. Have been admitted to candidacy for or hold the master's degree. 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



293 



The following administrative policy governs internships. 



1. An applicant for an internship must be working within a 
reasonable distance of the university. 

2. The number of registrants for Education 575 and 576 is limited. 

3. The intern must work under a fully certified supervisor. 

4. The supervisor must express a willingness to supervise the 
work and provide the experiences necessary for the intern. 

An internship in the supervision of student teachers is available 
to supervising teachers who have successfully supervised at least 
one student teacher during the past two years. The program, de- 
signed to permit teachers to participate while regularly employed 
in a school system, carries three hours of credit during the quarter. 
Further details of this program may be secured from the Office of 
Student Teaching. 

Transfer Credit 

A student enrolled in a degree program in which a thesis is not 
required may be permitted to transfer from another graduate school 
up to nine quarter hours (six semester hours) of appropriate gradu- 
ate credit provided grades earned are at least B and provided 
the credit will not be more than six years old at the time the 
degree or the Advanced Certificate is awarded. 

EXPENSES AND FINANCIAL AID 

Fees are charged by the quarter and are due and payable in 
advance at the beginning of each quarter. Any special arrange- 
ment for the payment of expenses must be made at the time of 
registration with the Controller's Office. 

It is the desire of the University to hold expenses to the minimum. 
The charges for one quarter in Graduate School are as follows: 

Resident of Non-Resident of 
North Carolina North Carolina 

Tuition and Fees $ 145.91 $ 395.91 

Room, Board and Laundry 

Men $ 244.00 $ 244.00 

Women $ 239.00 $ 239.00 



294 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



The University reserves the right to make changes in these charges 
when circumstances require. 

The application for admission must be accompanied by an appli- 
cation fee of ten dollars, which is not refundable. 

Graduate students purchase their textbooks and supplies. 

Graduate students may not secure dormitory rooms on campus 
until all undergraduates have been placed. 

Fellowships and Assistantships 

Approximately one hundred teaching fellowships and assistant- 
ships are available for the regular session. Five research fellowships 
carrying stipends of $1200 each are available to qualified applicants. 
Half-time fellows and assistants will devote twenty-four hours a week 
to laboratory instruction or other service to the University. Third- 
time and quarter-time assistants give proportionately less time to 
their assistantships. Assistants receive annual stipends of $1800 to 
$3600 and are permitted to carry a quarterly academic load of nine, 
twelve, and fifteen quarter hours depending upon the classification 
of the assistantships. Appalachian offers only a limited number of 
graduate assistantships for the summer quarter, the stipends ranging 
from $200 to $250 for each term. 

Teaching fellowships are available in the laboratory schools 
and in the University. Departments in which fellows and assistants 
may work are biology, chemistry, economics and business, educa- 
tion, English, French, geography, history, industrial arts, library 
science, mathematics, music, physical education, political science, 
psychology, social science, sociology, Spanish, and speech. In 
addition, twelve dormitory counselorships are available. 

Up to forty work-study assistantships paying up to $900 for 
the academic year and $300 for the summer are made available 
to qualified applicants through the Economic Opportunity Act. 
Students interested in a work-study assistantship are advised to 
write to the Director of Student Financial Aid, Appalachian State 
University, before April 15 for both the summer school and the 
succeeding academic year. 

For the preparation of junior college teachers, Appalachian 
offers a two-year program which combines graduate study with 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 



295 



supervised college teaching experience in any one of the following 
fields: audiovisual education, biology, chemistry, economics and 
business, English, French, geography, history, industrial arts, library 
science, mathematics, music, physical education, political science, 
psychology, social science, sociology, Spanish, and student personnel 
services. Twelve appointments in this program are maintained each 
year. An applicant is required to have at least an average of B on 
his undergraduate work. Teaching experience is desirable. The junior 
college teaching fellow receives a total stipend of $4800 to $5400 
paid on the basis of $1200 to $1800 during the first year and $3600 
to $4000 during the second. 

Anyone wishing to apply for an assistantship or a teaching 
fellowship should write the Dean of the Graduate School for 
application forms and return them properly filled out, and he 
should submit a complete transcript of his college work not later 
than July 1. Applications for assistantships, teaching fellowships, 
and work-study assistantships are considered only after applicants 
have been approved for admission to the Graduate School. 

Loans 

Graduate students who have been admitted to candidacy for 
the degree are eligible to apply for loans not exceeding $500 a 
quarter. Preference for these loans, most of which are made avail- 
able through the National Defense Education Act, is given to 
graduate students who do not hold fellowships or assistantships, 
Applications for loans should be submitted to the Director of 
Student Financial Aid by April 15 for both the summer school and 
the succeeding academic year. 

Housing 

Campus living accommodations for graduate students are limited. 
Spaces are provided in North Hall for a few graduate women. Spaces 
for a few graduate men are provided in Justice Hall. No facilities 
for married students are available on campus. For further informa- 
tion about residence halls and procedures for applying for a room, 
write the Dean of Men or the Dean of Women. Lists of off-campus 
living facilities are provided by the offices of the Dean of Men or 
the Dean of Women. There is no supervision or approval of these 
listings, most of which are within walking distance of the campus. 



296 



THE GRADUATE SCHOOL 

Refunds 

If a graduate student withdraws from the University before the 
close of the registration period, one-half of his tuition fees and 
room rent and a proportionate part of the amount paid for meals 
will be refunded. If a student withdraws after the close of the 
registration period, none of his fees and room rent will be refunded, 
but a proportionate part of the amount paid for meals will be re- 
funded. Students who do not formally withdraw are not eligible 
for a refund. The date of withdrawal is the day on which the student 
makes his intention known to the Dean of the Graduate School, 
not the last day he attends classes. 

Transcripts 

The student will be allowed to receive a transcript of graduate 
credits earned at Appalachian only when his financial accounts 
are completely paid. No fee is charged for a transcript, but no 
more than three transcripts will be issued at any one time. Tran- 
scripts should be requested from the Office of Academic Records 
and Transcripts. The Graduate office does not issue transcripts. 



Personnel 



BOARD OF TRUSTEES 

Mr. William B. Rankin, Chairman Lincolnton, North Carolina 

Mr. George Corn Shelby, North Carolina 

Mr. D. Dwight Crater Wilkesboro, North Carolina 

Mr. Hugh Daniel Waynesville, North Carolina 

Mr. John P. Frank Mount Airy, North Carolina 

Mr. E. G. Lackey Winston-Salem, North Carolina 

Mr. Lester P. Martin, Jr Mocksville, North Carolina 

Mr. Dwight W. Quinn, Vice Chairman Kannapolis, North Carolina 

Mr. Wayne H. Shoaf Lexington, North Carolina 

Mrs. Jean L. Rivers Boone, North Carolina 

Mr. John H. Vickers Charlotte, North Carolina 

Mr. W. R. Winkler Boone, North Carolina 

Mr. William J. Conrad, Chairman Emeritus Winston-Salem, North Carolina 

The President of the University serves as Secretary to the Board of Trustees 
and its committees, and the Vice President for Business Affairs as Treasurer. 

THE BOARD OF VISITORS 

Mr. Claude C. Armfield, Jr Asheville, North Carolina 

Mr. C. Alden Baker Raleigh, North Carolina 

Mr. Irwin Belk Charlotte, North Carolina 

Mrs. Paul Broyhill Lenoir, North Carolina 

Mrs. Harry B. Caldwell Greensboro, North Carolina 

Mr. Charles A. Cannon Concord, North Carolina 

Mr. J. E. Collette Winston-Salem, North Carolina 

Mr. William J. Conrad Winston-Salem, North Carolina 

Mr. Edwin Duncan, Jr Sparta, North Carolina 

Mr. John M. Ehile, Jr Winston-Salem, North Carolina 

Mr. Gordon L. Goodson Lincolnton, North Carolina 

Mr. Grover C. Greene Milton, Delaware 

Dr. L. H. Hollingsworth Winston-Salem, North Carolina 

Mr. Lewis Jenkins North Wilkesboro, North Carolina 

Mr. Harry Robbins Blowing Rock, North Carolina 

Mr. Terry Sanford Durham, North Carolina 

Dr. T. Edgar Sikes Greensboro, North Carolina 

Mr. Walter E. Wiles Chicago, Illinois 



298 



PERSONNEL 



ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS 

Herbert W. Wey, B.S., M.A., Ph.D. (1969) President 

Paul Sanders, B.A., M.S., Ph.D. (1962) . Vice President for Academic Affairs 

Ned Reeves Trivette, B.S., M.A. (1956) Vice President for Business Affairs 

J. Braxton Harris, A.B., M.A., Ed.D. (1958) Dean of Student Affairs 

Robert Trawick Allen, Jr., A.B. (1960) Director of Public Affairs 

Cratis Dearl Williams, A.B., M.A., Ph.D. 

(1942) Dean of the Graduate School 

Omri Kenneth Webb, Jr., B.A., B.D., Ph.D. 

(1962) Dean of the General College 

William C. Strickland, A.B., B.D., Th.D. 

(1966) Dean of the College of Arts and Sciences 

William V. Muse, B.S., M.B.A., Ph.D. 

(1970) Dean of the College of Business 

Ben H. Horton, B.S., M.A., Ed.D. 

(1948) Dean of the College of Education 

Nicholas Erneston, B.Mus.Ed., M.Mus., Ph.D. 

(1948) Dean of the College of Fine and Applied Arts 

Alvis L. Corum, B.S., M.Ed.,Ed.D. (1970) Dean of Learning Resources 

Robert Ellis Reiman, B.S., M.S., Ph.D. 

(1963) Director of Institutional Research and Development 

James W. Jackson, B.A., M.A., Ph.D. 

(1970) Dean of Educational Innovation and Change and 

Assistant to the President 

Joseph C. Logan, B.F.A., M.F.A., Ph.D. (1966) . Assistant to the President 

Roy Clogston, B.A., M.A. (1969) Director of Athletics 

Barry Rogers, B.A., M.A. (1970) . Director of Continuing Education Center 

James M. Cole, B.S., M.Ed. 

(1963) Assistant to the Vice President for Academic Affairs 

Benjamin F. Strickland, B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D. 

(1962) Assistant Dean of the Graduate School 

C. David Smith, B.A., M.A. (1968) . . . Assistant Dean of the General College 

Roy R. Blanton, Jr., B.S., M.A., Ed.D. (1948) Director of Extension 

W. Dean Meredith, A.B., M.Ed. (1962) Registrar 

Clarence Hazel Gilstrap, B.A., M.A., (1964) Director of Admissions 

Maxie Greene Edmisten, B.S., M.A., (1956) Dean of Women 

Ronnie Leonard Brooks, B.S., (1957) Dean of Men 



THE FACULTY 



299 



THE FACULTY 



The members of the faculty are listed alphabetically with the year of appointment 
given after each name. 

RUBY LAVELLE AKERS (1960), Associate Professor of English 
A.B., Mary Hardin-Baylor College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

MARY BROWN ALLGOOD (1961), Professor and Chairman of Home 
Economics 
B.S., Madison College; M.S., Iowa State University. 

JOSE ANTONIO AMARO (1967), Professor of Foreign Languages 

B.S., Institute of Secondary Education; M.S., Kansas State Teachers College; 
LL.D., Doctor of Pedagogy, Havana University. 

WARREN G. ANDERSON (1967), Associate Professor of Education and 
Principal of Appalachian Elementary School 

A.B., University of Richmond; M.Ed., D.Ed., University of North Carolina at 
Chapel Hill. 

ROBERT J. ANGELL (1968), Instructor in Economics and Business 

B.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; M.B.A., University of Virginia. 

GEORGE PETER ANTONE (1967), Associate Professor of History 

A.B., Brown University; Ed.M., Rutgers University; Ph.D., Vanderbilt University. 

JOSEPH E. ARNOLD (1969), Associate Professor of Military Science 
B.A., State University of Iowa. 

JOAN ASKEW (1965), Assistant Professor of Health and Physical Education 
B.S., Auburn University; M.S., University of Tennessee. 

GELENE ANDREWS ATWOOD (1956), Instructor in Chemistry 

A.B., University of North Carolina at Greensboro; M.A., Appalachian State Uni- 
versity. 

JOHN TRUMBULL AUSTON (1968), Professor of Speech 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of Denver. 

HARVARD G. AYERS (1970), Instructor in Anthropology 
B.A., University of Texas; M.A., Catholic University. 

ROBERT ARTHUR BANZHAF (1966), Assistant Professor of Industrial Arts 
B.S., M.Ed., University of Miami. 

JAWAD BARGHOTHI (1969), Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., Southern Illinois University. 

RICHARD THOMAS BARKER (1956), Associate Professor and Assistant 
Librarian 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

JOHN W. BEAVER (1969), Assistant Professor of Military Science 
B.A., Marshall University. 

DEBORAH ELLEN BELL (1965), Instructor and Assistant Catalog Librarian 
B.A., Louisiana State University; M.L.S., George Peabody College. 

ANNIE MAE BLACKBURN (1956), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

CHARLES B. BLACKBURN (1969), Associate Professor of History 
B.S., M.A., Ph.D., Ball State University. 

RICHARD BLACKBURN (1969), Instructor in Biology and Assistant Regis- 
trar 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 



300 



THE FACULTY 



ROY RUSSELL BLANTON, JR. (1948), Professor of Education and Director 
of Extension 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; Ed.D., Indiana University. 

GERALD M. BOLICK (1969), Associate Professor of Education and Chair- 
man of Special Programs 
B.S., M.S., North Carolina State University; Ed.D., Duke University. 

HUGH LAWRENCE BOND (1970), Associate Professor of History 

B.A., Lambuth College; B.D., Duke University Divinity School; Ph.D., Duke Uni- 
versity. 

PATRICIA LEE BONTN (1969), Assistant Professor of Foreign Languages 
B.A., University of Chattanooga; M.A., University of Georgia. 

BEN GESS BOSWORTH, JR. (1960), Professor of Education 
B.S., M.S., Ed.D., University of Virginia. 

HERBERT LOUIS BOWKLEY (1965), Professor of Chemistry 

B.S.C., University of Michigan; M.S., Missouri School of Mines; Ph.D., Pennsyl- 
vania State University. 

BRUCE MICHAEL BOYLE (1968), Instructor in English 
B.Ed., M.A., University of Miami. 

JAMES MONROE BOYTE (1970), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; Ph.D., Virginia Polytechnic Institute. 

MADELINE BRADFORD (1964), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

JOHN HIBBS BRASHEAR (1967), Associate Professor of Economics and 
Business 
B.S., M.A., University of Florida. 

LUCY MOORE BRASHEAR (1967), Associate Professor of English 

A.B., M.A., University of Florida; Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

CARL HERBERT BREDOW (1964), Assistant Professor of Foreign 
Languages 
B.S., M.A., Columbia University. 

WILLARD LEON BRIGNER (1968), Associate Professor of Psychology 
B.A., DePauw University; M.S., Purdue University; Ph.D., Duke University. 

LOUIE ANDERSON BROWN (1970), Associate Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Piedmont College; M.A.. University of Georgia; Ph.D., University of Ken- 
tucky. 

WOODBRIDGE C. BROWN (1970), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business 

B.S., Iowa State University; M.S., Florida State University; Ph.D., Clemson Uni- 
versity. 

GOLDEN THADDEUS BUCKLAND (1948), Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; D.Ed., Pennsylvania State University. 

HENRY B. BURTON (1969), Associate Professor of Psychology and Direc- 
tor of University Health Services 
B.C.E., Clemson University; M.D., Medical College of South Carolina. 

O. MELL BUSBIN, JR. (1967), Assistant Professor of Library Science 
A.B., High Point College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

JOHN EDWARD CALLAHAN (1970), Assistant Professor of Geology 

B.A., M.Ed., State University of New York; M.S., University of North Carolina at 
Chapel Hill. 



THE FACULTY 



301 



BEULAH CATHERINE CAMPBELL (1957), Associate Professor of Edu- 
cation 
A.B., M.A., Western Kentucky State University. 

DONNA H. CAMPBELL (1965), Instructor in English 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

HELEN EARLENE CAMPBELL (1970), Instructor and Assistant Circula- 
tions Librarian 
B.S., East Tennessee State College. 

IRVIN WATSON CARPENTER, JR. (1953), Professor of Biology 

B.S., M.S., Ph.D., Purdue University. 

JESSIE LUELLA CARPENTER (1954), Assistant Professor of Speech 
A.B., DePauw University; M.S., Purdue University. 

MARTHA CATHERINE CARRIKER (1969), Instructor in English 
B.A., University of South Carolina; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

HAROLD WILMER CARRIN (1970), Associate Professor of Art 

B.M.Ed., M.S., Florida State University; Ed.D., Arizona State University. 

ROY CARROLL (1969), Professor and Chairman of History 

B.A., Ouachita Baptist University; M.A., Ph.D., Vanderbilt University. 

MICHAEL CLEVELAND CARTER (1970), Assistant Professor of Mathe- 
matics 
B.S., M.S., University of Arkansas; Ph.D., University of Georgia. 

WILLIAM CHARLES CHURCH (1965), Instructor in Health and Physical 
Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

FRANK M. CLAMON, JR. (1970), Instructor in Economics and Business 

B.S., Georgia Institute of Technology; M.S., University of Tennessee. 

DONALD L. CLARK (1969), Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.A., George Washington University; B.D., Southeastern Baptist Theological 
Seminary; M.A., Appalachian State University; Ed.D., University of Florida. 

JAMES MONROE COLE (1963), Assistant Professor of Education and 
Assistant to the Vice President for Academic Affairs 
B.S., M.Ed., University of Cincinnati. 

WALTON SMITH COLE (1951), Associate Professor of Music 
A.B., Southwestern at Memphis; M.Mus., University of Arizona. 

JOHN G. COLLINS (1969), Professor and Chairman of Military Science 
B.A., University of Omaha. 

WALTER CURTIS CONNOLLY (1963), Professor and Chairman of Physics 
A.B., Miami University; M.S., University of Illinois; Ph.D., The Catholic Univer- 
sity of America. 

NANCY FAVER COOK (1965), Instructor and Librarian for Juvenile Library 
A.B., Texas Technical Institute; M.S. in L.S., George Peabody College. 

LELAND ROSS COOPER (1967), Professor of Education 

B.S., Clemson University; M.Ed., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; 
Ed.D., University of Florida. 

WILLIAM M. COOPER (1967), Professor of Education 
B.S., Berry College; M.Ed., Ed.D., Auburn University. 

JAMES F. CORNELL, JR. (1968), Assistant Professor of Biology 

B.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; M.S., North Carolina State Uni- 
versity. 



302 



THE FACULTY 



ALVIS L. CORUM (1970), Dean of Learning Resources 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.Ed., Ed.D., The University of Miami. 

A. RONALD COULTHARD (1968), Assistant Professor of English 
B.S., Concord College; M.A., Ph.D., Florida State University. 

HAROLD J. COUNIHAN (1970), Assistant Professor of History 

B.A., Florida Atlantic University; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

JEAN-PIERRE COURBOIS (1968), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business 
B.S., Georgetown University; M.A., American University. 

ROBERT ALAN COWAN (1970), Instructor in Speech 
B.A., M.A., Colorado State University. 

DORIS WALKER COX (1968), Professor and Chairman of Library Science 
A.B., Florida State College for Women; M.A., Ph.D., Florida State University. 

JOYCE G. CROUCH (1967), Associate Professor of Psychology 

B.S., M.A., Tennessee Technological University; Ed.D., University of Tennessee. 

RICHARD COWTAN CULYER, III (1966), Instructor in Education 

B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

RUDY L. CURD (1969), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., Lincoln Memorial University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Kentucky. 

CHARLES T. DAVIS, III (1967), Assistant Professor and Chairman of 
Philosophy and Religion 

B.S., University of Alabama; B.D., Candler School of Theology; Ph.D., Emory 
University. 

BARBARA WATKINS DA YE (1969), Instructor in Health and Physical 
Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

JAMES D. DAYE (1969), Instructor in Health and Physical Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

ERIS A. DEDMOND (1968), Instructor in Education 

B.S., Western Carolina University; M.S., Florida State University. 

ERIC BROOKS DeGROAT (1959), Assistant Professor of Health and 
Physical Education 
B.S., Springfield College; M.A., New York University. 

JAMES E. DELLINGER (1970), Assistant Professor of Music 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

WARREN CAMERON DENNIS (1965), Associate Professor of Art 
B.A., University of Southern Mississippi; M.F.A., University of Mississippi. 

ALFRED MAXEY DENTON, JR. (1962), Professor of Sociology and 
Chairman of Sociology and Anthropology 

B.S., Oklahoma State University; M.A., Ph.D., University of North Carolina at 
Chapel Hill. 

MAY EVANS DENTON (1961), Associate Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., Georgia State College for Women; M.S., Vanderbilt University. 

FINNIS RAY DERRICK (1946), Professor and Chairman of Biology 
B.S., M.S., Ph.D., University of South Carolina. 

RAMON DIAZ (1970), Associate Professor of Foreign Languages 
BAC, Oviedo; LIC, DR. FIL. y LET., University of Barcelona. 

MacWILLIAM DISBROW (1966), Assistant Professor of Music 

B.Mus., M.Mus., Cincinnati Conservatory of Music. 



THE FACULTY 



303 



JEFFERSON MAX DIXON (1956), Professor of History 

A.B., M.A., Emory University; Ph.D., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

EDWIN SHULL DOUGHERTY (1938), Professor of History 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

BOYD MAX DOWELL (1967), Professor of Psychology 

B.S., Bob Jones University; M.S., Ed.D., University of Tennessee. 

EUGENE CHRISTOPHER DROZDOWSKI (1961), Professor of History 
B.A., Alfred University; M.A., Ph.D., Duke University. 

JOHN DANIEL DUKE (1968), Professor of Psychology 
A.B., M.A., Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

MARY MONTGOMERY DUNLAP (1970), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., Converse College; M.A., Appalachian State University; Ph.D., University of 
South Carolina. 

WILLIAM RALPH DUNLAP (1970), Instructor in Art 
B.S., Mississippi College; M.F.A., University of Mississippi. 

HARVEY RALPH DURHAM (1965), Associate Professor and Chairman of 
Mathematics 
B.S., Wake Forest University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Georgia. 

G. MARVIN EARGLE (1969), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; M.S., Ph.D., North Carolina 
State University. 

ANNIE GWENDOLEN EASTRIDGE (1966), Assistant Professor and Assis- 
tant Reference Librarian 

A.B., Flora MacDonald College; B.R.E., Presbyterian School of Christian Educa- 
tion; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

GRACE TONEY EDWARDS (1967), Instructor in English 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

LAWRENCE FIELDING EDWARDS (1966), Associate Professor and Chair- 
man of Art 
B.A., University of Southern Mississippi; M.F.A., University of Mississippi. 

DAISY WILLIAMS EGGERS (1954), Associate Professor of English 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

BARRY W. ELLEDGE (1969), Assistant Professor of Economics and Business 
B.S., Berea College; M.S., University of Massachusetts; Ph.D., North Carolina 
State University. 

JOHN CLEVELAND ELLIOTT (1970), Associate Professor of Health and 
Physical Education 

B.S., University of Alabama; M.D., Medical College of Alabama; M.S., Ohio State 
University. 

RONALD J. ENSEY (1969), Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Hardin-Simmons University; M.S., Ph.D., New Mexico State University. 

TERRY ELMER EPPERSON, JR. (1962), Professor of Geography 

B.S., East Tennessee State College; M.S., University of Kentucky; Ph.D., Univer- 
sity of Tennessee. 

NICHOLAS ERNESTON (1948), Professor of Music and Dean of the College 
of Fine and Applied Arts 

B.Mus.Ed., Shenandoah Conservatory; M.Mus., Cincinnati Conservatory of Music; 
Ph.D., Florida State University. 

WILLIAM MORRIS EVANS (1968), Assistant Professor of Foreign Languages 
B.A., M.Ed., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 



304 



THE FACULTY 



MARJORIE F. FARRIS (1970), Associate Professor of Education 

B.S., University of Miami; M.S., Kansas State College; Ed.D., University of Georgia. 

PAUL FEDEROFF (1970), Associate Professor of Education 
B.S., M.Ed., Ed.S., Wayne State University. 

JOHN O. FISH (1968), Assistant Professor of History 

A.B., Lambreth College; M.A., Memphis State University; Ph.D., University of 
Georgia. 

LORRAINE FORCE (1968), Associate Professor of Art 

B.S., Southwest Missouri State; M.Ed., University of Miami; Ph.D., Florida State 
University. 

ELIZABETH FOX (1957), Assistant Professor of Music 
B.Mus., M.Mus.Ed., North Texas State University. 

PAUL A. FOX (1970), Assistant Professor of Psychology 

B.A.,Hofstra University; M.A., Ph.D., Southern Illinois University. 

ROBERT KENNETH FRANKS (1969), Associate Professor of Physics 
B.S., Carson-Newman College; Ph.D., Virginia Polytechnic Institute. 

DONALD HOWE FRANTZ, JR. (1970), Professor of English 

B.A., M.A., Redlands University; Ph.D., University of Southern California. 

WILLIAM EDMUND FULMER (1955), Professor of Education and Director 
of Student Teaching 

A.B., Catawba College; Ed.M., University of South Carolina; Ed.D., University of 
Missouri. 

OLE GADE (1970), Assistant Professor of Geology 

B.A., M.S., Florida State University; ABD, Michigan State University. 

COLETTE SUE GARRISON (1970), Assistant Professor of Health and 
Physical Education 
B.S., Slippery Rock State College; M.S., The University of Akron. 

EDWARD HIRAM GIBSON, III (1959), Professor of History 
A.B., M.A., Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

HOYT MELVYN GILLEY (1969), Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.A., Duke University; M.S., Ph.D., Florida State University. 

CLARENCE HAZEL GILSTRAP (1964), Assistant Professor of Education 
and Director of Admissions 
B.A., Furman University; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

SANDRA JEAN GLOVER (1969), Assistant Professor of Biology 

B.S., Northwestern State University of Louisiana; M.Ed., Ph.D., University of 
Georgia. 

GAYE WAGONER GOLDS (1964), Assistant Professor and Assistant Cir- 
culation Librarian 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

GEORGE LOGAN GRAHAM (1967), Associate Professor of Education 
B.S., West Texas State University; M.Ed., LL.D., Hardin-Simmons University. 

RAY LOGAN GRAHAM (1963), Associate Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., West Texas State University; M.A.T., Ph.D., New Mexico State University. 

ANTONY GRAY (1969), Instructor in Health and Physical Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

LOWELL C. GREEN (1968), Assistant Professor of History 

B.A., Wartburg College; B.D., Wartburg Seminary; Dr. Theol., University of Er- 
langen. 



THE FACULTY 



305 



JACK WILLIAM GROCE (1965), Instructor in Health and Physical Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

MELVIN H. GRUENSFELDER (1969), Assistant Professor of Health and 
Physical Education 
B.S., M.S., University of Illinois. 

WILLIAM RUSSELL HALEY (1970), Assistant Professor of Speech 
B.A., Samford University; M.S., Florida State University. 

LOIS G. HAMILTON (1970), Lecturer in Home Economics 
B.S., Drexel Institute; M.A., Teachers College, Columbia University. 

SHELDON HANFT (1969), Assistant Professor of History 
B.A., City College of New York; M.A., Ph.D., New York University. 

WILLIAM C. HANNER (1970), Instructor in Industrial Arts 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

JAMES EDWARD HARRILL (1961), Professor of Education 

A.B., Berea College; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers; Ph.D., Univer- 
sity of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

JAMES BRAXTON HARRIS (1958), Professor of Education and Dean of 
Student Affairs 

A.B., Lenoir Rhyne College; M.A., Appalachian State University; Ed.D., Indiana 
University. 

MAC SHERMAN HARRIS (1970), Instructor in English 

B.A., North Texas State University; M.A., Texas Technological College. 

STANLEY AUSTIN HARRIS, JR. (1965), Assistant Professor of Economics 
and Business 
B.S., Appalachian State University; M.B.A., New York University. 

ROBERT JOHN HARTIG (1968), Instructor in Geography 
B.S., M.A., Eastern Illinois University. 

MARTHA GREY HAWKINSON (1955), Assistant Professor of Economics 
and Business 
B.A., B.S.S.A., Queens College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

WALTER AXEL HAWKINSON (1945), Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., Washington and Jefferson College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

JOHN W. HEATON (1969), Instructor and Assistant Circulation Librarian 
B.A., Milligan College; M.S. in L.S., East Tennessee State University. 

DAVID HEISSER (1969), Instructor in History 

B.S., College of Charleston; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

DONNA W. HELSETH (1969), Instructor in Education and Counselor 
B.S., Appalachian State University; M.S., University of Georgia. 

FRANK A. HELSETH (1968), Assistant Professor of Biology 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.S., Ph.D., University of Georgia. 

RICHARD NELSON HENSON (1970), Assistant Professor of Biology 
B.S., Lamar State College of Technology; M.S., Ph.D., Texas A & M University. 

HANS G. HEYMANN (1969), Professor of English 

B.A., Friedrick Willheim College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Frankfurt. 

MAYNARD JOHN HIGBY (1967), Associate Professor of English 
B.S., Clemson University; M.A., Ph.D., University of South Carolina. 

LOYD H. HILTON (1969), Professor and Chairman of English 

B.A., Wayland Baptist College; M.A., Texas Technological College; Ph.D., University 
of Texas. 



306 



THE FACULTY 



CLEONE HAYNES HODGES (1938), Associate Professor of Health and 
Physical Education 
A.B., Louisiana State Normal College; M.S., Louisiana State University. 

ALLIE AUSTIN HODGIN (1934), Associate Professor and Reference 
Librarian 

B.S., Appalachian State University; B.S. in L.S., M.L.S., George Peabody College 
for Teachers. 

CATHERINE SMALL HOFFMAN (1970), Instructor and Assistant Periodi- 
cals Librarian 
A.B., Douglass College; M.L.S., Rutgers University. 

MARVIN K. HOFFMAN (1970), Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.A., Rutgers University; M.A., University of Georgia. 

OSCAR DILE HOLTON, JR. (1968), Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., Wayland College; M.A., Ph.D., Texas Technological University. 

ALVIN R. HOOKS (1970), Associate Professor of Education 

B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; Ph.D., University of Michigan. 

FRANCIS LENTZ HOOVER (1945), Professor of Health and Physical 
Education 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill; Dir. P.E., D.P.E., Indiana University. 

RENA CALDWELL HOOVER (1955), Assistant Professor of History 
A.B., Coker College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

CAROLYN GREGORY HOPKINS (1967), Instructor in Speech 

B.A., M.A., University of Missouri. 

ROBERT M. HOPKINS (1967), Instructor in Economics and Business 

B.B.A., Oklahoma University; M.A., Northeast Missouri State Teachers College. 

LAWRENCE EDWARD HORINE (1968), Associate Professor and Chairman 
of Health and Physical Education 
B.S., M.A., Ed.D., University of Colorado. 

BEN HASKELL HORTON, JR. (1948), Professor and Dean of the College 
of Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; Ed.D., Florida State University. 

SANDRA ANN HORVATH (1970), Assistant Professor of History 
A.B., State University of New York; M.A., Catholic University. 

GUY FORREST HUBBARD (1967), Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.B.A., M.Ed., North Texas State University. 

MAMIE LOU HUBBARD (1967), Instructor in Education 
B.S., M.Ed., Texas Woman's University. 

WILLIAM RALPH HUBBARD (1969), Assistant Professor of Biology 

B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; Ph.D., University of North Carolina at 
Chapel Hill. 

MARY ALICE HUFF (1942), Assistant Professor and Catalog Librarian 
A.B., Limestone College; B.S. in L.S., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

PEYTON ALBERT HUGHES (1968), Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.A., M.A., Mississippi State University. 

RICHARD ALAN HUMPHERY (1970), Associate Professor of Philosophy 
and Religion 
B.A., Cornell College; B.D., Ph.D., Drew University. 

DANIEL F. HURLEY (1969), Instructor in English 

B.A., The Sulpician Seminary of the Northwest; M.A., Louisiana State University. 



THE FACULTY 



307 



HOMER H. HURLEY (1965), Associate Professor of Biology 

B.S., North Carolina State University; M.Ed., University of North Carolina at 
Chapel Hill; Ph.D., George Washington University. 

WILLIAM IMPERATORE (1969), Assistant Professor of Geography 
B.S., Slippery Rock State College; M.A., Ed.D., University of Georgia. 

CORDELIA RUGELEY INKS (1970), Instructor and Assistant Catalog 
Librarian 
B.S., M.L.S., Texas University. 

FRANCES VIRGINIA IRONS (1968), Assistant Professor of Home Eco- 
nomics 

B.S., University of North Carolina at Greensboro; M.S., Virginia Polytechnic In- 
stitute. 

CHARLES LEE ISLEY, JR. (1958), Associate Professor of Music 
B.S., Davidson College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

G. ROBERT JACKALL (1970), Assistant Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Fordham University; M.A., St. John's University. 

JAMES W. JACKSON (1970), Associate Professor of History and Education, 
Assistant to the President, and Dean of Educational Innovation and 
Change 
B.A., M.A., University of Florida; Ph.D., University of Miami. 

SHEILA JACKSON (1969), Instructor in Education 
B.E., University of Miami; M.Ed., University of Kansas. 

THOMAS WILLIAM JAMISON (1970), Assistant Professor of Education 

A.B., M.A.T., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

BASIL GARRELL JOHNSON, JR. (1967), Associate Professor and Chairman 
of Psychology 

B.A., University of Oklahoma; M.A., University of Tulsa; Ed.D., Oklahoma State 
University. 

JAMES EDWIN JOHNSON (1962), Professor of Chemistry 

B.S., Emory and Henry College; M.S., Ph.D., Virginia Polytechnic Institute. 

ISABEL FLEMING JONES (1953), Professor of Education 
B.S., M.Ed., Ed.D., University of Virginia. 

JAMES FREDERICK JONES (1956), Associate Professor of Economics and 
Business 
A.B., Elon College; M.A., East Carolina University. 

BARBARA ADELE JUSTICE (1965), Assistant Professor of Music 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

ILA TAYLOR JUSTICE (1949), Associate Professor of Library Science 

A.B., Berea College; B.S. in L.S., M.S. in L.S., George Peabody College for 
Teachers. 

ARNOLD KANNWISCHER (1969), Assistant Professor o£ Economics and 
Business and Director of the Computer Center 
B.A., Florida State University. 

RONALD WEST KANOY (1966), Instructor in Health and Physical Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

IRVIN MORRIS KAUFFMAN (1969), Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.A., University of Florida; Ph.D., University of Alabama. 

JANE FULLER KAUFFMAN (1970), Assistant Professor of Foreign Lan- 
gauges 
B.A., M.A., University of Alabama. 



308 



THE FACULTY 



LESTER D. KEASEY (1967), Professor of Sociology 

A.B., Gettysburg College; B.D., Lutheran Theological Seminary; A.M., New York 
University; Ph.D., University of Pittsburgh. 

WINSTON L. KINSEY (1969), Assistant Professor of History 
B.A., M.A., Baylor University; Ph.D., Texas Technological University. 

PETER A. KNECHT (1969), Instructor in English 
B.A., M.A., Brigham Young University. 

PATRICIA A. LaBACH (1970), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.Mus., M.Mus., Syracuse University; Ph.D., Kent State University. 

ERNEST PAUL LANE (1970), Associate Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Berea College; M.A., University of Tennessee; Ph.D., Purdue University. 

EDGAR OLE LARSON (1968), Professor of Health and Physical Education 
B.A., St. Olaf College; M.S., Washington State University; Ed.D., University of 
Oregon. 

WALLACE L. LEMONS (1970), Instructor in Mathematics 
B.S., Appalachian State University. 

RICHARD HERBERT LEVIN (1970), Professor of Psychology 
B.A., Rutgers University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Florida. 

ALICE JANE LEWIS (1970), Instructor in Home Economics 

A.B., Meredith College; M.S., University of North Carolina at Greensboro. 

ROBERT G. LIGHT (1957), Assistant Professor of Health and Physical Edu- 
cation 
B.S., M.S., Washington University. 

GRACE GREENE LILLY (1967), Assistant Professor of Education 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

HENRY TRACY LILLY (1967), Professor of English 

B.A., Davidson College; M.A., Princeton University; Litt.D., Presbyterian College. 

J. GORDON LINDSAY (1969), Assistant Professor of Physics 
B.S., M.S., Virginia Polytechnic Institute. 

JOSEPH C. LOGAN (1966), Professor of Music and Assistant to the President 
B.F.A., M.F.A., University of Georgia; Ph.D., Florida State University. 

SUSAN H. LOGAN (1966), Associate Professor of English 
A.B., M.A., University of Georgia; Ph.D., Florida State University. 

NOYES CAPEHART LONG (1969), Assistant Professor of Art 

B.A., Auburn University; M.A., University of Missouri. 

ROBERT G. LORD (1970), Assistant Professor of Health and Physical Edu- 
cation 
B.S., Colorado State University; M.S., Springfield College. 

FRANK M. LOVRICH (1965), Professor of Sociology 

B.A., Southeastern Louisiana State College; M.A., University of South Dakota; 
Ph.D., South Dakota State University. 

JOHN PENDER MacBRYDE (1962), Associate Professor of English 

A.B., Davidson College; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

HENRY McDADE (1970), Assistant Professor of Psychology 
B.A., Seton Hall University; M.S., Ph.D., Florida State University. 

ARNOLD D. McENTIRE (1963), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

BETTY H. McFARLAND (1962), Instructor in English 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 



THE FACULTY 



309 



ROBERT B. McFARLAND (1961), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

LOIS BLAKE McGIRT (1970), Assistant Professor of Library Science 

B.A., University of Richmond; B.S., M.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

F. KENNETH McKINNEY (1968), Assistant Professor of Geology 

B.S., Old Dominion College; M.S., Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

MAURICE MARCUM (1969), Assistant Professor of Sociology 
B.A., Florida Southern College; M.S., Tulane University. 

CHARLES ALLEN MARTIN (1970), Assistant Professor of Speech 

B.S., Millersville State College; M.F.A., University of North Carolina at Greensboro. 

JACK CORBIN MARTIN (1967), Assistant Professor of Biology 
B.S., M.S., East Tennessee State University. 

JERRY MAYHEW (1968), Instructor in Health and Physical Education 
B.S., Appalachian State University; M.S., University of Illinois. 

WALTZ MAYNOR (1970), Assistant Professor of Education 

B.S., Pembroke State College; M.A., Appalachian State University; Ed.D., Duke 
University. 

MILLARD M. MEADOR (1969), Associate Professor of Speech 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., Wayne State University. 

WILFRED G. MEARS (1968), Professor of Music 

B.S., Indiana University of Pennsylvania; M.Ed., Pennsylvania State University; 
Ed.D., Florida State University. 

CARL GARNETT MEEKS (1958), Professor of Health and Physical Education 
B.S., East Tennessee State University; M.A., University of Mississippi; Ed.D., 
Columbia University. 

ELOISE CAMP MELTON (1955), Assistant Professor of History 

A.B., East Carolina University; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers 

JACK ROBERT MELTON (1950), Professor of Education 

A.B., M.A., Duke University; Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

WILLIAM DEAN MEREDITH (1962), Assistant Professor of Education and 
Registrar 
A.B., Lynchburg College; M.Ed., University of Virginia. 

CARL JOHN MESSERE (1962), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

GEORGE BENJAMIN MILES (1961), Professor and Chairman of Chemistry 
B.S., Ph.D., University of Tennessee. 

CLARA ELIZABETH MILLER (1969), Instructor in Health and Physical 
Education 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

NAPOLEON ANDREW MILLER (1965), Associate Professor of Education 
and Principal of Watauga High School 

B.S., Western Carolina University; M.Ed., Springfield College; Ed.D., University of 
Tennessee. 

FA YE JULIETTE MITCHELL (1963), Assistant Professor and Circulation 
Librarian 
A.B., Winthrop College; M.A. in L.S., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

FRANCIS MONTALDI (1970), Assistant Professor of Biology 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; Ed.D., University of Georgia. 



310 



THE FACULTY 



MARY R. MOORE (1967), Associate Professor of English 
B.S., Western Michigan College; M.S., Ed.D., Indiana University. 

RICHTER H. MOORE, JR. (1970), Professor and Chairman of Political 
Science 
B.S., LL.B., University of South Carolina; M.A., Ph.D., University of Kentucky. 

WILLIAM TRUETT MOSS (1970), Associate Professor of Psychology 
A.B., Mercer University; M.S., Ph.D., University of Georgia. 

ROLAND F. MOY (1970), Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.S., Wisconsin State University; M.A., Ph.D., Ohio State University. 

TRIDIB K. MUKHERJEE (1970), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business 
B.A., University of Calcutta; M.S., Ph.D., University of Maryland. 

JOSEPH LONG MURPHY (1964), Assistant Professor of Education 
A.B., Stetson University; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

WILLIAM V. MUSE (1970), Professor of Economics and Business and 
Dean of the College of Business 
B.S., Northwestern State College; M.B.A., Ph.D., University of Arkansas. 

MAYRELEE NEWMAN (1969), Associate Professor of Library Science 
B.A., Washington State University; M.L.S., University of Washington. 

WILLIAM JACKSON NEWTON (1967), Assistant Professor of Music 

B.Mus.Ed., Southern State College; M.Mus.Ed., North Texas State University. 

ROBERT CLAIR NICKLIN (1967), Associate Professor of Physics 
B.S., South Dakota School of Mines; Ph.D., Iowa State University. 

DONALD P. OLANDER (1969), Assistant Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., Washburn University; M.S., Ph.D., The University of Nebraska. 

MINNIE LAURA OSWALT (1965), Assistant Professor and Curriculum 
Librarian 
B.A., Mississippi Woman's College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

ALFRED BENJAMIN OVERBY (1967), Instructor in Chemistry 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

CLYDE CHARLES OWEN (1962), Associate Professor of Industrial Arts 
B.S., M.S., Texas College of Arts and Industries. 

HARRY GILMORE PADGETT (1967), Associate Professor of Education 
B.A., Furman University; B.D., Th.M., Southeastern Seminary; M.Ed., Ed.D., Uni- 
versity of Georgia. 

CHARLES E. PALMER (1967), Professor of Speech 

B.A., Depauw University; B.D., Garrett Theological Seminary; M.A., Ph.D., Uni- 
versity of Wisconsin. 

RICHARD B. PARROTT (1969), Assistant Professor of Military Science 
B.S., Sam Houston State Teachers College. 

HOWARD WILLIAM PAUL (1970), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 

B.A., Capital University; M.A., Bowling Green State University; Ph.D., Ohio State 
University. 

PHILIP PAUL (1966), Assistant Professor of Music 

B.Mus., M.Mus., University of Miami. 

LYNN McIVER PERRY (1968), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., M.A.M., Ph.D., North Carolina State University. 

FRANK PETERSILIE (1969), Assistant Professor of Art 
B.S., M.S., Fort Hays State College. 



THE FACULTY 



311 



PETER PETSCHAUER (1968), Assistant Professor of History 

B.A., Washington Square College of New York University; M.A., Ph.D., New York 
University. 

EDWARD LEE PILKINGTON (1970), Assistant Professor of Speech 
B.F.A., Ithaca College; M.F.A., University of North Carolina at Greensboro. 

CHARLES ELLINGTON PORTERFIELD (1968), Professor and Chairman 
of Speech 

B.A., Birmingham-Southern University; M.A., State University of Iowa; Ph.D., 
Louisiana State University. 

ELTON GEORGE POWELL (1968), Assistant Professor of Foreign Lan- 
guages 

A.B., Florida Southern College; B.D., Emory University; M.A., University of North 
Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

MARY LOU POWELL (1967), Assistant Professor of Psychology 
A.B., M.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

UBERTO PRICE (1955), Professor of Education 

B.S., Eastern Kentucky University; M.A., Western Kentucky University. 

JAMES ROY PRINCE (1960), Professor and Chairman of Foreign Lan- 
guages 

B.A., University of South Carolina; M.A., Ph.D., University of North Carolina at 
Chapel Hill. 

JOHN ALFRED PRITCHETT, JR. (1956), Associate Professor of Education 

A.B., M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

LEO KLUTTZ PRITCHETT (1947), Professor of History 

A.B., Davidson College; M.Ed., Duke University. 

BURTON LEWIN PURRINGTON (1970), Assistant Professor of Anthropol- 
ogy 

B.A., Carleton College; M.A., University of Kentucky; Ph.D., University of Wis- 
consin. 

C. ELIZABETH PUTNAM (1967), Assistant Professor of Education 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

MARY EUNICE QUERY (1947), Associate Professor of Library Science 

A.B., Duke University; A.B. in L.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; 
M.A., Appalachian State University. 

GEORGE C. RAGAN, JR. (1969), Assistant Professor of Industrial Arts 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

AS'AD ADIB RAHHAL (1970), Associate Professor of Political Science 
B.A., M.A., American University of Beirut; Ph.D., Syracuse University. 

BEATRIX BLANTON RAMEY (1958), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

ROBERT WAYNE RAMSEY (1966), Professor of History 

A.B., M.A., Duke University; Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

JOHN FRANK RANDALL (1960), Professor of Biology 

A.B., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; M.S., University of Michigan; 
Ph.D., University of South Carolina. 

ROBERT LEE RANDALL (1960), Professor of Education and Director of 

Placement 

B.S., East Tennessee State University; M.A., University of North Carolina at 

Chapel Hill; C.A.S., Ed.D., Harvard University. 

LAURIE TULLY REED (1966), Assistant Professor of English 
A.B., M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 



312 



THE FACULTY 



ROBERT ELLIS REIMAN (1963), Professor of Geography and Director of 
Institutional Research and Development 
B.S., M.A., Ph.D., Florida State University. 

ALAN JEROME REINERMAN (1970), Professor of History 
B.S., M.A., Xavier University; Ph.D., Loyola University. 

LEE FRANCIS REYNOLDS (1946), Professor of Education and Chairman 
of Teacher Education 
B.S., M.A., Ball State University; Ed.D., Indiana University. 

MADGE MOZELLE RHYNE (1947), Associate Professor of Home Economics 
B.S., M.S., University of North Carolina at Greensboro. 

ROBERT LEE RICHARDSON (1966), Associate Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., Castleton State College; M.S., University of Notre Dame; Ph.D., University 
of Florida. 

DAVID A. RIGSBY (1961), Professor of Industrial Arts 

B.S., Western Kentucky State College; M.S., University of Kentucky. 

JANE MARGARET RINER (1956), Associate Professor of Economics and 
Business 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

JAMES R. ROBERTS (1967), Assistant Professor of Education 
A.B., East Carolina University; M.Mus.Ed., University of Illinois. 

SANDRA ROBERTSON (1969), Instructor in Music 
B.Mus., Oberlin Conservatory; M.Mus., Indiana University. 

DAVID THOMAS ROBINSON (1966), Professor of Education 
B.S., M.S., Ed.D., University of Tennessee. 

KENT ROBINSON (1956), Professor of Biology 

B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University; Ph.D., Ohio State University. 

RICHARD ELLIOTT ROBINSON (1969), Associate Professor of Education 
B.A., Catawba College; M.A., Appalachian State University; Ed.D., University of 
Tennessee. 

SAMUEL KIRBY ROGERS (1970), Associate Professor of Music 

B.Mus., Stetson University; M.Mus., New Orleans Baptist Seminary; Ph.D., Florida 
State University. 

CARL AUGUSTUS ROSS, JR. (1968), Associate Professor of History 
A.B., Berry College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Georgia. 

CHARLOTTE T. ROSS (1969), Instructor and Appalachian Room Librarian 
B.S., University of Dubuque; M.S., Georgia Southern College. 

TOLLIE C. ROSS (1969), Assistant Professor of Foreign Languages 
A.B., Wofford College; M.A., University of Georgia. 

CELIA GRAHAM ROTEN (1966), Instructor in Home Economics 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

SAMUEL L. ROUND (1970), Associate Professor of Education 
B.S., Florida State University; M.Ed., Ed.S., University of Florida. 

RAYMOND S. RUBLE (1970), Assistant Professor of Philosophy and Religion 
B.A., M.A., Northern Illinois University; Ph.D., University of Wisconsin. 

WILLIAM HOYT SAFRIT (1950), Assistant Professor of Music 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

PAUL SANDERS (1962), Professor of Mathematics and Vice President for 
Academic Affairs 
B.A., Southeastern State College; M.S., Ph.D., Oklahoma State University. 



THE FACULTY 



313 



RICHARD JOSEPH SCHALK (1965), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., University of Maryland; M.A., University of Arkansas. 

EUGENE PAUL SCHWEIGER (1970), Assistant Professor of Music 

B.Mus., Boston University; M.Mus., University of Hartford. 

NOLLIE WILBOURNE SHELTON (1959), Professor of Education 

B.S., College of William and Mary; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

KENNETH W. SHIPPS (1969), Instructor in History 
B.A., Wheaton College; M.A., M.Ph., Yale University. 

ZEB VANCE SHOOK (1953), Assistant Professor and Acquisition Librarian 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

NATHANIEL HAWTHORNE SHOPE (1966), Professor of Education and 
Chairman of Administration, Supervision, and Higher Education 
A.B., Otterbein College; M.A., Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

JAMES HERRINGTON SHORT, JR. (1968), Assistant Professor of Industrial 

Arts 

B.S., East Texas State University; M.Ed., Texas A & M University. 

STEPHEN JOSEPH SIMON (1970), Assistant Professor of History 

B.A., M.A., Xavier University. 

DONALD WOODFIN SINK (1968), Associate Professor of Chemistry 
A.B., Catawba College; Ph.D., University of South Carolina. 

JOSEPH GRAYSON SLOOP (1968), Assistant Professor of Industrial Arts 
B.S., Western Carolina University; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

KEENER McNEAL SMATHERS (1969), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.A., Wofford College; M.A., Ed.D., Duke University. 

ANTHONY SMETONA (1970), Assistant Professor of Music 
B.S., The Mannes College of Music; M.S., Juilliard School of Music. 

CHARLES DAVID SMITH (1968), Instructor in Education and Assistant 
Dean of the General College 
B.A., William and Mary College; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

H. MAX SMITH (1969), Associate Professor of Music 

B.Mus., University of Missouri; M.Mus., University of Oklahoma; Doctor of Sacred 
Music, Union Theological Seminary. 

JAMES REAVES SMITH (1968), Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
B.S., Ph.D., University of South Carolina. 

ROBERT EARL SNEAD (1966), Assistant Professor of Education and Direc- 
tor of Alumni Affairs 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

WALTER THOMAS SNIPES (1964), Professor of Psychology 

B.S., Oglethorpe University; M.Ed., Mercer University; Ed.D., University of Georgia. 

GWENDOLYN JANE SNYDER (1969), Instructor and Assistant Periodicals 
Librarian 
B.S., M.A., Appalachian State University. 

ROBERT WALTER SOEDER (1967), Associate Professor of Chemistry 
B.S., Ursinus College; M.S., Ph.D., University of Delaware. 

CHARLES CAUDILL SPEER (1970), Instructor in Economics and Business 

B.S., M.B.A., East Tennessee State University. 

WILLIAM GILBERT SPENCER (1951), Professor and Chairman of Music 
B.Mus. Ed., Northwestern University; M.A., Ed.D., Columbia University. 



314 



THE FACULTY 



STARR N. STACY, JR. (1935), Professor of Mathematics 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers. 

FRANK RICHARD STECKEL (1962), Professor and Chairman of Indus- 
trial Arts 
B.S., M.S., University of North Dakota. 

ROGER L. STEENLAND (1969), Associate Professor of Psychology and 
Director of Psychological Services 
A.B., Calvin College; Ph.D., Purdue University. 

WILLIAM LEROY STEINBRECHER (1970), Associate Professor of Health 
and Physical Education 
A.B., B.S., M.S., Valparaiso University; Ed.D., Florida State University. 

JAMES WILLIAM STINES (1968), Associate Professor of Philosophy and 
Religion 

B.A., Wake Forest University; B.D., Southern Baptist Theological Seminary; Ph.D., 
Duke University. 

JOYCE PETERSON STINES (1968), Assistant Professor of Home Economics 

B.S., University of Arkansas; M.Ed., University of North Carolina at ChapeJ Hill. 

EDWARD HORDER STODDARD (1966), Assistant Professor of Education 
B.S., Troy State College; M.Mus.Ed., North Texas State University. 

ROBERT H. STRETCHER (1970), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business 
B.S., Western Carolina University; M.S., The University of Tennessee. 

BENJAMIN FRANKLIN STRICKLAND (1962), Professor of Education and 
Assistant Dean of the Graduate School 

B.S., Wake Forest University; M.Ed., Ed.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel 
Hill. 

WILLIAM CLAUDIUS STRICKLAND (1966), Professor of Philosophy and 
Religion and Dean of the College of Arts and Sciences 
A.B., Stetson University; B.D., Th.D., Southern Baptist Theological Seminary. 

ALBERT BENJAMIN SUTTLE, JR. (1968), Instructor in Chemistry 

B.S., United States Military Academy; M.S., Massachusetts Institute of Tech- 
nology. 

CARL DAVID SUTTON (1970), Assistant Professor of Political Science 
B.A., Manchester College; C.P., Indiana University. 

ORUS RICHARD SUTTON (1956), Professor and Chairman of Economics 
and Business 

B.S., Tennessee Polytechnic Institute; M.A., Northwestern University; Ed.D., 
University of Tennessee. 

JOYCE SMITH TALLANT (1968), Instructor in Music 

B.Mus., Louisiana State University; M.A., Appalachian State University. 

EDWIN D. TAYLOR (1969), Assistant Professor of Economics and Business 

A.B., LL.B., J.D., University of Miami. 

ELLEN BALL THOMAS (1964), Instructor in Health and Physical Education 
B.S., Carson-Newman College; M.S., University of Tennessee. 

ROGER EVAN THOMAS (1950), Professor of Health and Physical Education 
B.S., M.Ed., Springfield College. 

REBECCA McCOTTER TOMLINSON (1960), Assistant Professor of Health 
and Physical Education 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers; 
Dir. P.E., Indiana University. 



THE FACULTY 



315 



JOHN ECCLES TRIMPEY (1968), Assistant Professor of English 

B.A., Ball State University; M.A., University of Arkansas; Ph.D., Ohio University. 

NED REEVES TRIVETTE (1957), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business and Vice President for Business Affairs 
B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., Florida State University. 

KATHRYN CROFT TULLY (1955), Associate Professor of Economics and 
Business 
A.B., Concord College; M.A., Teachers College, Columbia University. 

EDWARD THOMAS TURNER (1968), Assistant Professor of Health and 
Physical Education 
B.S., Pennsylvania State University; M.A., Ph.D., University of Maryland. 

ROLAND LUTHER TUTTLE, JR. (1970), Assistant Professor of Education 
A.B., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; M.A., Columbia University. 

JOHN C. UPCHURCH (1969), Assistant Professor of Geography 
B.A., M.S., Florida State University. 

IN A FA YE WOESTEMEYER VAN NOPPEN (1947), Professor of History 
B.A., University of Kansas; M.A., Ed.D., Teachers College, Columbia University. 

JOHN JAMES VAN NOPPEN III (1947), Professor of English 

A.B., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill; M.A., Ed.D., Teachers College, 
Columbia University. 

TEUNIS VERGEER (1960), Professor of Biology 

A.B., Calvin College; M.S., Ph.D., University of Michigan. 

ERWING WINNINGHAM WADSWORTH (1960), Professor of Education 

B.S., Troy State University; M.S., Ed.D., Auburn University. 

CHARLES F. WATERWORTH (1969), Instructor in English 

B.S., Towson State College; M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

SHERRY EDWARDS WATERWORTH (1970), Instructor in Art 
B.S., Towson State College; M.F.A., Ohio University. 

JAMES WATSON, JR. (1967), Instructor in Physics 
A.B., Elon College; M.S., University of South Carolina. 

JAN CAROLE WATSON (1967), Instructor in Health and Physical Education 
B.S., Winthrop College; M.S., Appalachian State University. 

FRED WEBB, JR. (1968), Assistant Professor of Geology 
A.B., Duke University; M.S., Ph.D., Virginia Polytechnic Institute. 

OMRI KENNETH WEBB, JR. (1962), Professor of Philosophy and Religion 
and Dean of the General College 

B.A., The Citadel; B.D., Southern Baptist Theological Seminary; Ph.D., Duke Uni- 
versity. 

REGINALD THEODORE WEBER (1968), Professor of Economics and 
Business 

B.S., Louisiana State University; M.B.A., University of Maryland; Ph.D., New 
York University. 

VIVIAN WOOD WELBORN (1944), Associate Professor of Home Economics 
B.S., Georgia State College for Women; M.S., University of Tennessee. 

GEORGE R. WESLEY (1963), Associate Professor of Psychology 
B.A., University of Houston; M.A., Ph.D., University of Denver. 

JOHN FOSTER WEST (1968), Associate Professor of English 
A.B., M.A., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 



316 



THE FACULTY 



ROBERT HOLT WEST (1967), Associate Professor of Economics and Busi- 
ness 
A.B., Duke University; M.Ed., Temple University; J.D., University of Miami. 

SUSAN CLARK WESTFALL (1970), Instructor in Sociology 
B.A., M.A., Western Kentucky University. 

HERBERT W. WEY (1969), Professor of Education and President of the 
University 
B.S., M.A., Indiana State University; Ed.D., Indiana University. 

ELMER RUSSELL WHITE, JR. (1963), Assistant Professor of Music 

A.B., Marshall University; M.F.A., Ohio University. 

JANICE R. WHITENER (1967), Assistant Professor of Home Economics 

B.S.H.E., M.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

ROGERS VANCE WHITENER (1959), Associate Professor of English 
B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., University of Florida. 

EVERETT MURPHY WIDENER, JR. (1967), Assistant Professor of Edu- 
cation 

B.S., Milligan College; M.Ed., Virginia Polytechnic Institute; Ed.S., George Pea- 
body College for Teachers. 

CRATIS DEARL WILLIAMS (1941), Professor of English and Dean of the 
Graduate School 
A.B., M.A., University of Kentucky; Ph.D., New York University. 

HUBERTIEN HELEN WILLIAMS (1970), Associate Professor of English 
B.A., University of New Mexico; M.A., Ph.D., Bowling Green State University. 

JOHN F. WILLIAMS (1966), Associate Professor of Mathematics 
A.B., M.A., University of Tennessee; Ed.D., Columbia University. 

JOHN H. WILLIAMS (1969), Assistant Professor of Health and Physical 
Education 

B.A., University of Denver; M.S., University of Washington; Ed.S., Bowling Green 
State University; M.S. in Public Health, University of California at Berkeley. 

JERRY WAYNE WILLIAMSON (1970), Assistant Professor of English 
B.A., Wayland College; M.A., Ph.D., University of Utah. 

MATT WINN WILLIAMSON (1970), Associate Professor of Political Science 
B.A., M.A., Ph.D., University of Virginia. 

JOHN BERNHARDT WILSON (1970), Assistant Professor of Economics and 
Business 

B.A., Princeton University; B.D., Union Theological Seminary; M.B.A., Harvard 
University. 

RICHARD BURTON WILSON (1967), Assistant Professor of Education 
A.B., M.E., M.S., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

BETTY JEAN WINFORD (1967), Associate Professor of Education 

B.S., Roanoke College; M.A., Columbia University; Ed.D., University of Virginia. 

GORDON G. WINGARD II (1970), Assistant Professor of Philosophy and 
Religion 
A.B., Sulpician Seminary of the Northwest; M.A., Ph.D., Syracuse University. 

LARRY W. WOODROW (1966), Associate Professor of Education 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A.T., Ed.D., University of North Carolina 
at Chapel Hill. 

ELLSWORTH TIEN -WEI WU (1968), Associate Professor of History 

B.A., University of Nanking; B.D., Westminster Theological Seminary; Th.M., 
Eastern Baptist Theological Seminary; Ph.D., University of Maryland. 

JULIAN CLIFTON YODER (1933), Professor and Chairman of Geography 
and Geology 

B.S., Appalachian State University; M.A., George Peabody College for Teachers; 
Ph.D., University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. 

GILROY JOEL ZUCKERMAN (1970), Instructor in Economics and Business 
B.A., Harpur College; M.S., North Carolina State University. 



THE FACULTY 



317 



FACULTY EMERITI 

JOHN GLENN BARDEN, Ph.D., Professor Emeritus of Education 

HELEN BURCH, M.A., Professor Emerita of Geology 

GRACE McNINCH COUNCIL, M.A., Professor Emerita of Education 

GRAYDON POE EGGERS, Ph.D., Professor Emeritus of English 

HERMAN ROLAND EGGERS, M.A., Professor Emeritus of Social Science 
and Registrar Emeritus 

W.L. EURY, M.S. in L.S., Professor Emeritus 

DAVID REID HODGIN, M.A., Professor Emeritus of English 

VANCE HOWELL, A.M., Professor Emeritus of Social Science 

VIRGINIA WARY LINNEY, M.Mus., Professor Emerita of Music 

WILLIAM HOWARD PLEMMONS, Ph.D., President Emeritus 

ARLIE R. SMITH, A.M., Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

CATHERINE JEANETTE SMITH, M.A.Ed., Professor Emerita of Art 

WILEY FRANCIS SMITH, Ph.D., Professor Emeritus of Psychology 

ROBERT WILLIAM WATKINS, M.A., Professor Emeritus of Health and 
Physical Education 



318 



INDEX 



INDEX 



Accrediting Associations member, of, inside 

front cover 
Activities 

Musical, 34, 35 

Social and cultural, 31 
Administration 

Junior College, 277 

Officers of, 298 
Administration, Supervision, and Higher 

Education 

Courses of instruction in, 173-178 

Department of, 173-178 
Admission 

Auditors, 10 

Freshmen, 7 

Foreign students, 11, 12 

Graduate, 264, 265 

Special, 9 

Transfer, 8 
Advanced Placement Program, 10-11 
Aliens, admission of, 11, 12 
Alumni Association, 42, 43 
Anthropology 

Courses of instruction in, 147-148 

Department of, see Sociology and An- 
thropology, 143-148 
Application 

For certificate, see graduation, 53 

For degree, see graduation, 53 

For graduate degree, 286 
Art 

Courses of instruction in, 203-208 

Department of, 202-208 
Assistantships, 294 
Athletics, 33 
Attendance, 48 
Audiovisual 

Courses of instruction in, 183-190 
Audiovisual Center, 56 
Auditors, 10, 17 
Bachelor of Arts Degree 

Requirements for, 68-69 
Bachelor of Music Degree 

Requirements for, 237-238 
Bachelor of Science Degree 

Requirements for, 163-165, 200 
Bachelor of Science in Business Adminis- 
tration Degree 

Requirements for, 149-150 
Bachelor of Technology Degree 

Requirements for, 165-166 
Biology 

Courses of instruction in, 72-78 

Department of, 71-78 
Board and room, 13 
Board 

Of Trustees, 297 

Of Visitors, 297 



Business 

Courses of instruction in, 157-162 

See College of Business 
Calendar for University 1971-1972, ii 
Campus, description of, 3 
Cars, registration of, 40, 41 
Catalog choice, 44 

Ceramics, see Industrial Arts, 223-231 
Certificate of Advanced Study, 284 
Chemistry 

Courses of instruction in, 80-83 

Department of, 79-83 
Churches, 33 
Class Attendance, 48 
Classification, 50 

Clothing and Textiles Merchandising, 218 
Clubs, 32 

College Entrance Examination Board, 8 
College of Arts and Sciences, 67 

Admission to, 68 

Degrees offered, 68 

Departments in, 67 
College of Business, 149 

Admission to, 151, 152 

Degrees offered, 149 

Departments in, 153-162 
College of Education, 163 

Admission to, 167 

Degrees offered, 163, 166 

Departments in, 173-196 
College of Fine and Applied Arts, 197 

Admission to, 198 

Degrees offered, 197 

Departments in, 202-257 
College, General, 58 

Admission to, 58 

Requirements of, 59-61 
Colleges of the University, 3-5 
Computer Center, 56 

Computer Science, see Department of Mathe- 
matics, 118-119 
Concerts, 31, 32 
Conduct, Standard of, 30 
Contents, Table of, v 
Correspondence Directory, iv 
Counselor 

Junior college, 278 

School, 278 
Courses 

Change of, 49 

Of Instruction, see various departments 

Repeated, 46 
Credit limitations, 47-48 
Credits, 45 

Cultural Activities, 31 
Day Students, 14 
Deaf, Training for, see Special Programs, 183 



INDEX (continued) 



319 



Degree requirements, see individual depart- 
ments 
Degrees 

Conferred, 6 

Offered, 67, 149, 150, 163, 198, 200, 201, 
272, 280, 282, 283, 284 
Departments in 

College of Arts and Sciences, 67 

College of Business, 149 

College of Education, 163 

College of Fine and Applied Arts, 197 
Directory, iv 

Dormitories, see Residence Halls, 37 
Dramatics, 34 
Dry Cleaning, 17 
Economics 

Courses of instruction in, 155-156 
Electronics, see Industrial Arts, 223-231 
Elementary 

Education, 183, 191 

School teachers, graduate, 275-276 
Employment, student programs, 21 
English 

Courses of instruction in, 85-90 

Department of, 84-90 

Enrollment figures, 6 
Evening classes, graduate, 292 
Examinations 

Course, 50 

Graduate, 290 

Special, 19, 50 
Exhibits, 31, 32 

Expenses, 13, 14, 18, 19, 293, 294 
Extension, 54 

Graduate, 291-292 
Faculty, 299-317 

Emeriti, 317 

Graduate, 260-263 
Fees, 18, 19, 293, 294 

Refund, 20, 21, 296 

Student Welfare and Activity, 17 
Fellowships, 294 
Financial Aid, 20-29 

Student employment, 21 

Student loan programs, 22-25 

Grants-in-aid and special talent awards, 25 

Scholarships, 26 
Foreign Languages 

Courses of instruction in, 92-99 

Department of, 91-99 

Laboratory, 92 
Foreign Students, 11, 12, 14, 16, 287 
Forensics, 34 

French, see Foreign Languages, 91 
Freshman Admission, 7 
General College, 58 
General Education requirements, 59-61 
General Science 

Courses of instruction in, 78 
Geography and Geology 

Department of, 100-106 



Geography 

Courses of instruction in, 101-104 
Geology 

Courses of instruction in, 104-106 
German, see Foreign Languages, 95 
Grades 

And grade points, 46, 47 

Graduate, 290 
Graduate 

Advisers, 267 

Class attendance, 288 

Courses by seniors, 265, 266 

Employed students, 287 

Foreign students, 287-288 

Language requirements, 285-286 
Graduate School, 258 

Admission to, 268 

Requirements, 264 
Graduation, 53 

Catalog choice, 44 

With honors, 53 
Grants 

Educational opportunity, 25, 26 

In-aid, 25 
Guidance, see Special Programs, 183-190 
Health and Physical Education 

Department of, 209-216 
Health 

Courses of instruction in, 210-216 

Services, 35, 36 
History 

Courses of instruction in, 108-112 

Department of, 107-112 

Of University, 2 
Home Economics 

Courses of instruction in, 218-222 

Department of, 217-222 
Home Management House, see Home Eco- 
nomics, 218 
Honors Program, 65-66 
Honor teaching, 53 

Hospitaliation and accident insurance, 17 
Housing, 37 

Graduate, 295 

Off campus, 40 

Policies, 37-39 

Requirements, freshmen, 38 
Independent study, graduate, 291 
Industrial Arts 

Courses of instruction in, 223-231 

Department of, 223-231 
Institutional Administration, 217 
Instructional Program, 44 
Insurance, hospital and accident, 36 
Interdepartmental majors, 170-171 
Internships, 292-293 
Intramural sports, 33-34 
Job opuortunities on graduation, 41, 42 
Junior college teacher, 276 
Latin, see Foreign Languages, 95-96 
Laundry, 17 



320 



INDEX (continued) 



Leather, see Industrial Arts, 223-231 

Lectures, 31 

Librarian 

Junior college, 275 

School, 275 
Library carrels, graduate, 291 
Library Science 

Courses of instruction in, 179-182 

Department of, 179-182 
Load, academic, 47 
Loans 

Graduate, 295 

Student, 22-25 
Location of University, 1 
Mail, student, 41 
Master of Arts Degree, 272, 280 
Master of Science Degree, 282 
Mathematics 
Courses of instruction in, 114-119 

Department of, 113-119 
Mechanics, see Industrial Arts, 223, 230 
Medical Center, 35, 36, 37 
Member of accrediting associations, inside 

front cover 
Mental retardation, graduate, 279 
Mentally retarded, see Special Programs, 

183-190 
Military Science 

Courses of instruction in, 234 

Department of, 232-235 
Motor vehicles, 40, 41 
Music 

Courses of instruction in, 240-248 

Department of, 236-248 

Fees, 19 

Requirements for music majors, 236-240 

Teacher, graduate, 277 
Musical activities, 34, 35 
News Bureau, 42 
Non-resident, tuition, 14 
Nursery School, see Home Economics, 217 
Organization of University, 3 
Out-of-state, tuition, 14 
Parking privileges, 40, 41 
Part-time students, expenses of, 14 
Personnel 

Board of Trustees, Board of Visitors, Ad- 
ministration, and Faculty, 297-317 
Philosophy and Religion 

Department of, 120-125 
Philosophy 

Courses of instruction in, 121-125 
Photography, see Special Programs, 183-190 
Physical Education 

Courses of instruction in, 210-216 
Physical Science, see Chemistry, 79 
Physics 

Courses of instruction in, 127-129 

Department of, 126-129 



Placement 

Advanced, 10 

Services, 41, 42 
Political Science 

Courses of instruction in, 130-135 

Department of, 130-135 
Post Office 

Campus, 41 

Permit, i 
Pre-professional programs 

Dental, 62 

Engineering, 63 

Forestry, 63 

Law, 62 

Medical, 62 

Nursing, 62 

Pharmacy, 63 
Printing, see Industrial Arts, 223-231 
Proficiency requirements, 61 
Programs, Popular, 31 
Phychological Services, 36 
Psychology 

Courses of instruction in, 137-142 

Department of, 136-142 
Publications, student, 32 
Purpose of University, 1 
Radio, 34 
Reading 

Courses, 183-190 

Specialization, graduate, 278, 279 
Reading Center, 55 
Readmission, 11 
Refunds, housing, 40 
Registration, 44, 45 
Regulations, University, 44 
Religion 

Courses of instruction in, 123-125 
Religious life, 33 
Reports, grade, 50 
Requirements 

General Education, 59-61 

Graduate School, 264, 265 

Graduation, graduate, 269-272 
Residence 

Change of status, 16 
R.O.T.C, see Military Science, 232-235 
Saturday classes, graduate, 292 
Scholarships, 26-29 
Scholarship standards, 45 
Scholastic Aptitude Test, 10 
School administrators, 298 
Science major, 170, 171 
Secondary school teachers, graduate, 276 
Second Masters Degree, 283 
Seniors taking graduate courses, 265 
Sixth-year program, 284 
Social activities, 31 
Social Science major, 171 
Societies, professional, 32 



INDEX (continued) 



321 



Sociology and Anthropology 

Department of, 143-148 
Sociology 

Courses of instruction in, 144-148 
Spanish, see Foreign Languages, 96-99 
Special Education 

Graduate, 279, 280 

See Special Programs, 183-190 
Special Programs 

Courses of instruction in, 183-190 

Department of, 183-190 
Special students, 9 
Special talent awards, 25 
Specialist's Degrees, 284, 285 
Speech, 

Correction, 280 

Courses of instruction in, 251-257 

Department of, 249-257 

Pathology, 280 
Student 

Employment, 21 

Government, 30 

Housing, requirements and regulations, 
37-40 



Life, 30-44 

Responsibility, graduate, 289 

Teaching, 167-168 

Teaching supervisor, 274 
Summer Sessions, 54 
Supervision 

General, 274 

Music, 277 

Student teaching, 274 
Suspension, 44 

Academic, 51 

And dismissal, graduate, 289 
Teacher Certification, 163, 169 
Teacher Education 

Courses of instruction in, 192-196 

Department of, 191-196 
Textbooks, rental, 17 
Transcripts, 53, 54 
Transfer students, 8 
University 

Location of, 1 

Purpose, 1 

History, 2 

Organization of, 3 
Veterans information, 11, 21 



s\ 




\ ■ 1 



APPALACHIAN 

BOONE, N< 

Up 



it 




UtkM^"' 



':^^ ii 



!: sy . ■ ■" 



1. President's Home 

2. Bowie Hall 

3. Stadium Fieldhouse 

4. Governor and Mrs. 0. Max Gardner Residence Hall 

5. D. J. Whitener Residence Hall 

6. Justice Hall 

7. Newland Hall 

8. Duncan Hall 

9. Rankin Science Building 
10. Smith-Wright Hall 



11. D. D. Dougherty Library 

12. Carol Grotnes Belk Library 

13. Watauga Hall 

14. Cafeteria 

15. Gymnasiums-Broome-Kirk/Varsity Gym 

16. Power Plant 

17. Physical Plant & Laundry 

18. I. G. Greer Hall 

19. B. B. Dougherty Administration Building 

20. Infirmary 



' I, Adi 

ilEa: 
! i h 

! )• Lo\ 

! I Ok 

Re; 
* i Hoc 

! I DOL 

! !■ % 

1 I h 

i I Hob 






TE UNIVERSITY 




B • m _.**"■«. 



'A*., 



Sr 



^m. 



;*** 






1. Administration Building Annex 

2. East Hall 

3. New Classroom Building 
X. Lovill Hall 

5. Charles A. and Ruth Coltrane Cannon 

Residence Hall 
S. Hoey Hall 

Doughton Hall 
3. White Hall 

?. Moses H. and Bertha Cone Residence Hall 
0. Home Management House 



31. Faculty Apartments 

32. Workman Hall 

33. Lucy Brock Nursey School 

34. Lillie S. Dougherty Home Economics Building 

35. W. H. Plemmons Student Center 

36. Bookstore 

37. Appalachian Elementary School 

38. Chapell Wilson Hall 

39. W. Kerr Scott Industrial Arts Building 

40. Campus Reservoir